Today’s News 29th September 2022

  • Lithuania Urges Russian Anti-War Protesters To Overthrow Putin
    Lithuania Urges Russian Anti-War Protesters To Overthrow Putin

    It was perhaps only a matter of time before European leaders attempted to leverage ongoing anti-war protests in Ukraine to call for regime change. Emboldened Baltic NATO countries have been at the forefront of increasing rhetoric and measures punishing Russians.

    And now Lithuania’s foreign minister is openly calling for Russians to tap into collective anger over last week’s partial mobilization order and overthrow President Vladimir Putin. “Lithuanians overthrew the Soviet regime, Ukrainians overthrew (former Ukrainian President Viktor) Yanukovych, Iranian women have risen up against the brutality of the Iranian regime and Russians can overthrow Putin,” FM Gabrielius Landsbergis tweeted.

    Left: Lithuanian FM Gabrielius Landsbergis. Image: NATO

    “Let’s not underestimate the power of freedom,” he followed with, but at the same time emphasized his country would not be letting fleeing Russians in, nor will they receive asylum.

    Days prior Landsbergis had said, “Lithuania will not be granting asylum to those who are simply running from responsibility. Russians should stay and fight. Against Putin.”

    The past week has witnessed large protests in various Russian cities, but especially in outlying ethnic minority districts, in response to the call-up of some 300,000 reservists. There have been conflicting reports of Russian men getting conscripted to go join the fight in Ukraine as well, but Kremlin officials have denied that draft notices are going out.

    Meanwhile The Associated Press has estimated that over the past days some 194,000 Russians have fled on fears of being called up for military service in the Ukraine conflict. Border crossings, including into Mongolian and central Asian nations, have been reportedly jammed by long traffic lines. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Georgian border has been especially busy, with satellite images showing lines of cars that surpass 10 miles through winding mountain roads.

    This week, for the first time the White House issued a statement which seemed to encourage Russians to apply for asylum with the US. Press Secretary Karine Jean-Pierre said on Tuesday, “We believe that regardless of their nationality, they may apply for asylum in the United States and have their claim educated on a case by case basis.”

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/29/2022 – 02:45

  • Conservative AfD Now Strongest Party In Eastern Germany, Rises To 15% Nationally
    Conservative AfD Now Strongest Party In Eastern Germany, Rises To 15% Nationally

    Authored by John Cody via Remix News,

    Could conservatives also one day score a breakthrough in German politics? The Alternative for Germany party — which has faced extreme political pressure, including threats to ban the party entirely — is seeing a surge in support, particularly in what was once formerly East Germany. According to polling firm Insa, it is now the strongest political party in that entire region of the country, which is home to over 16 million people.

    If there were federal elections next Sunday, AfD would reach 27 percent in the eastern federal states, while CDU would follow with one point less. SPD and the Greens would only get 15 and 14 percent, respectively.

    Since FDP only achieved 7 percent, only 36 percent would vote for the traffic-light parties there. The Left party would come in at 8 percent.

    However, AfD is also trending higher in western Germany where AfD now averages 12 percent. CDU holds the lead at 28 percent, while the Greens (21), and SPD (19) are also in front of AfD. FDP (8) and Left (5) trail behind. In Lower Saxony, where elections will be held on Oct. 8, AfD reaches 9 percent, according to Infratest dimap, one of its lowest results for AfD of any German state.

    A total of 15 percent of Germans would vote for AfD, with the party’s support rising a point compared to just a week ago. The conservative party is now just three points behind the Social Democrats (SPD), led by Chancellor Olaf Scholz, which now stands at 18 percent.

    AfD has experienced a steady positive trend in polling over the last months, with the party serving as a vocal critic of the left-wing government’s sanctions policy against Russia. The party has also called for an opening of the Nord Stream 2 gas pipeline between Russia and Germany; however, such a policy is likely no longer possible for the foreseeable future following a suspected sabotage attack on the pipeline that will keep it offline for some time.

    Specific cultural and economic factors have led AfD to be far more popular in the east of Germany than in the west. East Germans remain more skeptical of mass immigration and cultural trends from the West, but also tend to sympathize more with Russia. However, one of the greatest concerns in this region of Germany, which is driving popular support of AfD, is the current economic crisis, with inflation hitting east Germans far harder than those in the west of Germany due to the already lower incomes and poverty rates seen in the east.

    The major parties in Germany have long said they would never form a coalition with AfD. However, the same cordon sanitaire applied to the Sweden Democrats (SD) in Sweden. And yet, after scoring over 20 percent of the vote earlier this month, SD has entered a power-sharing agreement that many in Swedish politics never thought would be possible.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/29/2022 – 02:00

  • Unpacking The Ukraine 'Game Change'; Is A Major Conflict Inevitable?
    Unpacking The Ukraine ‘Game Change’; Is A Major Conflict Inevitable?

    Authored by Alastair Crooke,

    Any political solution – however theoretical, at this point – would involve Moscow sitting with the collective West. Kiev had become a bystander.

    Russia is preparing for an escalation in this war. She is augmenting her forces to the minimum level that could deal with a major NATO offensive. This decision was not precipitated by a significant attrition in the existing force. The facts are clear: The militias of Donetsk and Luhansk represent the majority of the Russian allied forces fighting in the Donbas. The militias have been reinforced by contract soldiers from the Wagner Group and Chechen fighters however, rather than by regular Russian forces.

    But this is about to change. The number of Russian regulars fighting in Ukraine will rise dramatically. However, the referenda in the Ukrainian oblasts come first; and those will be followed by the Government of Russia and the Duma accepting the results and approving the annexation of these territories. After that is concluded and the territories assimilated into Russia, any attack on the new Russian territories would be treated as an act of war against Russia. As former Indian diplomat, MK Bhadrakumar, notes, “The accession of Donbass, Kherson and Zaporozhye creates a new political reality and Russia’s partial mobilisation on parallel track is intended to provide the military underpinning for it”.

    Clearly, we – the world – are at a pivotal moment.

    ‘Collective Russia’ has concluded that the former low-intensity war is no longer viable:

    Unimaginable flows of western $ billions; too many NATO fingers in the Ukraine pie; too wide a ‘Ho Chi Minh Trail’ of ever more long-range and advanced weaponry; and too many ‘delusions’ that Kiev can still somehow win – effectively have undercut any ‘off-ramp solution’ and portend inexorable escalation.

    Well, ‘Collective Russia’ has decided to ‘get ahead of the curve’, and to bring the affairs of Ukraine to the crunch. It is a risk; that is why we have reached an inflection point. The $64 thousand dollar question is, what will be the studied reaction of western political leaders to Putin’s speech? The next weeks will be crucial.

    The point here is that western leaders ‘claim’ that Putin is just bluffing – as he is losing. Western hype is ‘shooting the moon’: “Putin is panicked; Russian markets are falling; young men are fleeing conscription”. Yes, well the Moex Russia index closed higher on Thursday; the rouble has remained steady; and the big queues are at the recruitment offices, rather than airline offices.

    Just to be clear: The limited mobilization Putin announced only applies to those who serve in Russia’s reserves and who have seen prior military service. It is unlikely to hobble the economy.

    The Russian pre-planned, tactical withdrawal from Kharkov – though militarily sound in logic, given the troop numbers required to defend a 1,000 km border – has generated throughout the West a fantasy of panic in Moscow and of Russian forces fleeing Kharkov before an advancing Ukrainian offensive.

    The danger to such fantasies is that leaders begin to believe their own propaganda. How could western Intelligence reporting become so divorced from reality? One reason undoubtedly is the explicit decision to craft ‘cherry-picked’ intelligence to serve as deliberately ‘leaked’ anti-Russian propaganda. And where would be the best quarry for such propaganda material? Kiev. It seems that largely, intelligence services come to accept and circulate what Kiev says, without cross-checking for accuracy.

    Yes, it is hard to believe (but not without precedent). Politicians naturally love what seems to bolster their narratives. Contrarian assessments are met with scowls.

    Therefore, western leaders are doubling down on promises to continue sending money and advanced weaponry to Ukraine that will be used to attack – among others – Russian civilians. A new co-ordinated narrative from the West is that whereas on the Russian side, one man can end the war; on the other, for Ukraine to stop the war would mean ‘no Ukraine’.

    Neocons, such as Robert Kagan, naturally have put their own spin on the official psyops, by pushing the line that Putin is bluffing. Kagan wrote in Foreign Affairs:

    “Russia may possess a fearful nuclear arsenal, but the risk of Moscow using it is not higher now than it would have been in 2008 or 2014, if the West had intervened then. And it [the nuclear risk] has always been extraordinarily small: Putin was never going to obtain his objectives by destroying himself and his country, along with much of the rest of the world.”

    In short, don’t worry about going to war with Russia, Putin won’t use ‘the bomb’. Really?

    Again, to be plain, Putin said in his speech on 21 September:

    “They [Western leaders] have even resorted to the nuclear blackmail … [I refer] to the statements made by some high-ranking representatives of the leading NATO countries on the possibility and admissibility of using weapons of mass destruction – nuclear weapons – against Russia”.

    “I would like to remind … in the event of a threat to the territorial integrity of our country, and to defend Russia and our people, we will certainly make use of all weapon systems available to us. This is not a bluff”.

    These Neocons advocating ‘hard deterrence’ rotate in and out of power, parked in places like the Council on Foreign Relations or Brookings or the AEI, before being called back into government. They have been as welcome in the Obama or Biden White House, as the Bush White House. The Cold War, for them, never ended, and the world remains binary – ‘us and them, good and evil’.

    Of course, the Pentagon does not buy the Kagan meme. They well know what nuclear war implies. Yet, the EU and U.S. political élites have chosen to place all their chips on the roulette wheel landing on ‘Ukraine’:

    Ukraine’s symbolic expression now serves multiple ends: Principally, as distraction from domestic failures – ‘Saving Ukraine’ offers an (albeit false) narrative to explain the energy crisis, the spiking inflation and businesses shutting down. It is icon too, to the framework of the ‘enemy within’ (the Putin whisperers). And it serves to justify the control regime currently being cooked-up in Brussels. It is, in short, politically highly useful. Even perhaps, existentially essential.

    Russia thus has taken the first step towards a real war footing. The west will be well advised to acknowledge and understand how this situation came about, rather than to pretend to its public that Russia is on the verge of collapse – which it is not.

    How did ‘collective Russia’ arrive at this point? How do the pieces fit together?

    The first piece to this jigsaw is Syria: Moscow intervened there with a tiny commitment – some 25 Sukhoi fighters and no more than 5,000 men. There, as with Ukraine, the operation was one of giving support to frontline forces. In Ukraine, through aiding the Donbas militia to defend themselves – and in Syria, through offering the Syrian army air-support, intelligence and mediation outreach to those with whom Damascus was not talking.

    The other key piece to understanding Russia’s Syria ‘posture’ was that Moscow could rely for the cutting-edge ground-fighting on two highly skilled, and motivated fighting auxiliaries, in addition to the mainstream Syrian army: i.e. Hizbullah and the IRGC.

    Taken together, this Russian intervention – limited to a supporting role only – nevertheless yielded political results. Turkey mediated; and the Astana Accord resulted. Notwithstanding that Astana has not been a great success – but its framework lives on.

    The point here is that Moscow’s deployment in Syria ultimately was politically oriented towards a political solution.

    Fast-forward to Ukraine: The militias of Donetsk and Luhansk represent the majority of the Russian-allied forces doing the fighting in the Donbas. The militias are reinforced by contract soldiers from the Wagner Group and Chechens fighters. This explains why Russian losses of 5,800 KIA, during the SMO are ‘small’. Russian forces were rarely on the frontlines of this war. (In Syria they were not on the frontlines at all.)

    So, the Syria blueprint effectively was lifted aloft, and fitted down over Ukraine. What does this tell us? It suggests that originally Team Putin was angulated towards a negotiated settlement in Ukraine, just as in Syria. And it almost happened. Turkey again mediated, with peace talks occurring in Istanbul in late March, with promising results showing.

    In one respect however, events here did not follow the Syria pattern. Boris Johnson immediately scuttled the settlement initiative, warning Zelensky that he must not ‘normalise’ with Putin; and if he did reach some accord, it would not be recognised by the West.

    After this episode, the SMO nonetheless continued in its highly restricted format (with no signs of any political solution on the horizon). It persisted, too, despite growing evidence that taking down the defences that NATO had spent eight years erecting in Donbas likely were beyond the militia capabilities. In short, the SMO was demonstrating its limitations: what worked in Syria, was not working in Ukraine.

    More forces plainly were required. Could this be done by tweaking the SMO (which imposed legal constraints on Russian regular forces serving in Ukraine), or was a complete re-set required? What resulted was the limited mobilisation and referenda outcome.

    Plainly, however the decision to assimilate Ukrainian territory would foreclose on a likely political settlement, but this latter possibility was falling away anyway as the West fell for its fantasies of a Ukrainian complete victory, and as NATO escalated.

    The ‘war’ was becoming less and less about Ukraine, and more and more NATO’s war on Russia.

    Any political solution – however theoretical, at this point – would involve Moscow sitting with the collective West. Kiev had become a bystander.

    Well, this was the point at which other geo-politics thrust itself into the equation: Russia, under sanctions, must pursue a strategy of building-out a protected ‘strategic depth’ that trades in own currencies (outside the dollar hegemony). MacKinder called this sphere the ‘World Island’ – a land-based mass, well distanced from the naval Great Powers.

    Russia needs the support of BRICS and the SCO as partners both in creating this ‘trading strategic depth’, and for the multi-polar world order project. Some of its leaders though – particularly China and India – mindful of the SCO’s 2001 founding charter – naturally could have difficulty in lending public support to Russia’s Ukraine plans.

    Yes, China and India are sensitive to interventions in other states, and Team Putin has worked hard, continually briefing its allies on Ukraine, so that they could understand the full background to the conflict. The summit at Samarkand was the final ‘piece’ – the personal briefing of what was to come in respect to Ukraine that needed to fall into place.

    How will the West react? With a public display of ‘fury’ for sure; yet despite the hype, some fundamental realities will have to be addressed: Does Ukraine, with its severely abraded forces, have the wherewithal to continue this war after the loss of so many men? Is Europe even able to mobilise towards a larger NATO war against Russia? Do the U.S. and Europe retain a sufficient inventory of munitions, after so much has already been passed into the hands of Kiev?

    The next crucial weeks will provide answers.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 23:40

  • Record Number Of New York Residents Changing Driver's Licenses To Florida
    Record Number Of New York Residents Changing Driver’s Licenses To Florida

    An analysis of official data reveals that a record number of New York residents changed their driver’s licenses to Florida last month.

    According to the New York Post, a total of 5,838 New Yorkers made the switch in August – the second-highest number for a single month in recorded history – and which makes for a year-to-date figure of 41,885 New Yorkers who have abandoned their northern licenses after moving south – a pace which points to a new annual record.

    First it was the billionaires. Then it was the rich following behind them. Now you have the middle class,” said Renowned fashion designer Alvin Valley, who moved his primary residence to Palm Beach during the pandemic, adding that the influx of residents has been ‘staggering.’

    Photo by Johnny Nunez/WireImage

    “A lot of families just began to feel like New York was becoming unlivable,” Valley continued. “Especially for younger couples with kids in their 30s and 40s. They don’t want to get on the subway. It’s a safety issue, it’s a schools issue.”

    A retired NYPD lieutenant who moved with his family to Jacksonville last year told The Post that New Yorkers still have a buffet of reasons to bid farewell.

    John Macari blamed COVID-19 mandates, rising crime and unappealing schools for the continued departures.

    He argued that vaccine mandates for public-sector employees left thousands of working-class New Yorkers disillusioned with city government and eyeing the exits.

    “Couple that with the rise in crime and zero competence from our elected officials and a lot of people just don’t see a future in New York City for themselves,” Macari said.

    The Brooklyn native, who runs a Jacksonville livery service staffed by retired NYPD cops and hosts a podcast featuring ex-officers, said he talks to friends every day who want out. -NY Post

    Last month, New York Mayor Eric Adams tried to stem the flow – deploying digital billboards throughout Florida to try and convince ex-New Yorkers to return to the Big Apple.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 23:20

  • Is China Using COVID Policy To Prep For War?
    Is China Using COVID Policy To Prep For War?

    Submitted by QTR’s Fringe Finance

    Last week I had the immense pleasure of interviewing my good buddy George Gammon from Rebel Capitalist.

    George is one of my favorite economic commentators and has been a friend of mine, and my podcast, for years. He is focused on Austrian economics, skepticism about the global elite and Central Banking, and trying to help preserve wealth in the out-of-control world of Central Banks we exist in. 

    In our recent interview, we discussed:

    • What inflation numbers will look like at the end of the year, and why George thinks CPI numbers will hit a lull

    • George’s favorite indicator for measuring whether we’re in a recession and whether or not the Fed is going to reverse course “within weeks”

    • Black swan events George is watching that could hurt the markets, other than rising rates

    • China’s Covid policy and what alternate reasoning there may be for it, other than Covid

    • China and Russia posturing up together

    • Energy shortages and food shortages

    • Whether we are truly on the fringe of a massive earthquake geopolitically and economically

    • The dollar going up and what it means

    • Covid policy in the U.S. and getting ahead of the “narrative” when new uncomfortable situations take hold domestically

    First we talked about where George thought inflation was heading. Surprisingly, he said lower – before moving higher.

    “I rarely make predictions, but I did make one prediction: inflation would go down slightly as measured by CPI in Q3 or Q4,” George told me. “Most likely it probably goes back up [after falling to 6% or 7%].”

    “I saw the things that created the inflation in the first place, now the question is how they do that. I don’t know if the supply chains will get better anytime soon,” he continued. “But they did stop the stimmy checks.”

    From there we moved on to talk about his favorite indicator for recessions and how Austrian economists are often ignored – and sometimes even ridiculed – in the mainstream media. 

    “That’s usually the indicator that you’re currently in a recession. Though I think we’re already in one as a result of two negative quarters of GDP growth,” he says, talking about his favorite metric.

    We talked about how the current state of the global economy and geopolitics may have us on the precipice of things changing meaningfully, relatively permanently:

    We also talked about the tensions between China, Taiwan and the United States.

    “As far as black swans, I’m looking at the issue of China and Taiwan. What Nancy Pelosi did was one of the stupidest things I’ve ever seen a politician do,” George says.

    “If you look at it through the lens of the Chinese, you can see historically why they are doing it,” George says. “I can’t imagine that Pelosi or Biden would do something for the long-term benefit of the Untied States, they’re just doing whatever is politically expedient.”

    George also thinks China is using Covid policy to prepare the country for war, something I started a discussion on earlier this month: “China’s policy on Covid is another head scratcher. The only conclusion I can come to is they’re trying to prepare their society for using far fewer resources in the future because they know there’s a good probability they will go to war with the United States.”

    “Looking at China’s history, it would make sense that that’s an edge they think they have: they have benevolent dictator so they can make long-term decisions, central thinking and a plan for the whole country, their ability to just have patience.”

    “They look at the U.S. and say ‘its just collapsing internally’,” George argues.

    “Another black swan is the dollar going up,” George says. “This creates a massive amount of economic pressure on countries outside the U.S. In a global economy, there’s a lot of systemic risk. I don’t know what the number is – 120, 130, 140 – but at some point, its going the be the United States’ problem. It’s going up because of all of this uncertainty and interest rates. The bond market is saying the Fed will raise for another 6 months or a year. So we’ve got another year of the dollar going up?”

    “You have this combined with all these powder keg situations geopolitically,” George says.

    “I think we’ll wind up in a Plaza Accord 2.0. I think the black swan could be that they miscalculate,” he says.

    Finally we discuss some of my recent findings on Covid, including a new preprint study talking about how boosters aren’t ethically justifiable in younger adults and a recent thread by Dr. Richard Ebright, PhD, from Rutgers, explaining why he thinks the Covid “lab leak” theory holds water:

    George was one of the first people to speak out about Covid measures, even before we knew about the virus. 

    “It was actually on your podcast, you asked me point blank what we should do [about Covid breaking out]. It was a difficult question to answer – we didn’t have any information at the time other than we knew it was spreading quickly. I said that ‘I don’t know how bad it’s going to get, but we have to let people make their own decisions. If people want to go outside, let them go outside. We have to give people as much information as possible but then let them make their own decisions’,” George recalled. 


    If you are not yet a subscriber & want to support my work, I’d love to offer you 50% off for life to subscribe today: Get 50% off forever


    You can listen to the full interview here:

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 23:00

  • Nationwide Rents Drop For First Time In Two Years
    Nationwide Rents Drop For First Time In Two Years

    The latest real-time rent data from the property research firm CoStar Group shows apartment rents in the US are fading from record highs for the first time in almost two years, according to WSJ

    CoStar said national US rents in August fell .1% from July. It was the first monthly drop since December 2020 — a sign rents may have finally peaked. 

    Two other property research firms, Rent.com and Realtor.com, recorded slight monthly rent declines last month. 

    Monthly rent declines are still minuscule compared with the 23% increase since August 2020, according to Realtor.com. 

    Orphe Divounguy, an economist at Zillow Group, said there’s no guarantee that rents peaked because soaring mortgage rates have unleashed an affordability crisis where households are being priced out of owning and forced to rent. 

    Meanwhile, CoStar forecasts more rental market cooling this fall and winter. They say September rents are expected to decline for the second consecutive month. Some analysts expect rents to continuing decreasing on a monthly basis through the end of this year — that would be a drastic change from the same period in 2021 when rents soared. 

    We outlined first in Some Good News: Rents Have Finally Peaked As Rental Market Enters “Widespread Cooldown” and then Some More Good Inflation News: Owner-Equivalent Rents Are About To Peak that rental hyperinflation peaked earlier this year and would continue to slow through the end of the year. 

    WSJ noted seasonality, new apartment construction, and unaffordable rents are some factors cooling rental markets. 

    Further hints about the rental market were heard from one of the largest owners of multifamily units in the US, Starwood Capital Group, whose CEO, Barry Sternlicht, told CNBC:

    “The pace of rent increases, we’re seeing it go down month-to-month.”

    Last week, we noted that Manhattan’s red hot rental market finally plateaued after six months of “record number of records” as median rent in the borough peaked in July at $4,150 and slid in August to $4,100. 

    Perhaps what’s happening in NYC is a sign US rental market slowdown could gain momentum in the months ahead. 

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 22:40

  • Are We Falling As Rome Did?
    Are We Falling As Rome Did?

    Authored by Julie Ponese via The Epoch Times,

    3, 2, 1… Timber! A Philosopher’s Take on the Collapse of Our Civilization

    The clock seems to be ticking.

    Growing disparities in wealth, a housing and gas crisis, transhumanism galloping over the horizon, heroized incivility, and the constant threat of viruses, the “cures” for which may be worse than the diseases. Global politics feels eerily apocalyptic these days and, in our own little worlds, many of us are so lost, so unmoored from the comforts of our pre-pandemic lives, that we don’t know which end is up or what the future will hold. Investigative journalist Trish Wood recently wrote that we are living the fall of Rome (though it’s being pushed on us as a virtue).

    I wonder, are we falling as Rome did? Is it possible that our civilization is on the verge of collapse? Not imminent collapse, perhaps, but are we taking the initial steps that civilizations before ours took before their eventual downfalls? Will we suffer the fates of the Indus, the Vikings, the Mayans, and the failed dynasties of China?

    As a philosopher, I need first to understand what we mean by “civilization” and what it would mean for that thing to collapse.

    This is a significant conceptual hurdle. “Civilization” (from the Latin civitas, meaning a body of people) was first used by anthropologists to refer to a “society made up of cities” (Mycenae’s Pylos, Thebes, and Sparta, for example). Ancient civilizations were typically non-nomadic settlements with concentrated complexes of persons who divided labor. They had monumental architecture, hierarchical class structures, and significant technological and cultural developments.

    But just what is our civilization? There isn’t a tidy line between it and the next in the way the Mayans’ and the Greeks’ coexistence was defined by the ocean between them. Is the concept of Western civilization—rooted in the culture that emerged from the Mediterranean basin over 2,000 years ago—still meaningful, or has globalization made any distinction between contemporary civilizations meaningless? “I am a citizen of the world,” wrote Diogenes in the fourth century B.C. But of course, his world wasn’t quite as vast as our own.

    Now for the second issue: civilization collapse. Anthropologists typically define it as a rapid and enduring loss of population, socio-economic complexity, and identity.

    Will we suffer a mass loss of population or socio-economic complexity? Perhaps. But that isn’t what concerns me. What I really worry about is our loss of identity. I worry that we’ve lost the plot, as they say, and that with all our focus on the ability of science to save us, we’ve lost our ideals, our spirit, our reasons for being. I worry we are suffering what Betty Friedan called “a slow death of the mind and spirit.” I worry that our nihilism, our façadism, our progressivism are incurring a debt that we may not be able to pay.

    As the eminent anthropologist Sir John Glubb wrote (pdf), “The life-expectation of a great nation, it appears, commences with a violent, and usually unforeseen, outburst of energy, and ends in a lowering of moral standards, cynicism, pessimism and frivolity.”

    Think of a civilization as the top step on a staircase, with each stair below having fallen away. Western civilization today is built largely on the foundational ideals of ancient Greece and Rome that endure long after their physical structures and governments disappeared. But they endure because we find them meaningful. They endure through literature and art and conversation and ritual. They endure in how we marry, how we write about one another, and how we care for our sick and aging.

    One lesson history tries to teach us is that civilizations are complex systems—of technology, economics, foreign relations, immunology, and civility—and complex systems regularly give way to failure. The collapse of our civilization is almost certainly inevitable; the only questions are when, why, and what will replace us.

    But this brings me to another point. Early in its usage, anthropologists started using “civilization” as a normative term, distinguishing “civilized society” from those who are tribal or barbaric. Civilizations are sophisticated, noble, and morally good; other societies are uncivilized, backward, and unvirtuous.

    But the old distinction between civilization and barbarism has taken on a new form in the 21st century. It is from within our own “civilized” culture that emerges an inversion of the concepts of civility and brutishness. It is our leaders, our journalists, and our professionals who ignore the standards of rational discourse, who institutionalize hatred and incite division. Today, it is the elites who are the true barbarians among us.

    Taking a cue from Walt Whitman, who thought his own 19th century America was waning, “We had best look our times and lands searchingly in the face, like a physician diagnosing some deep disease.”

    If our civilization collapses, it won’t be because of an outside attack, like Bedouin charging in from the desert. It will be because of those among us who, like parasites, destroy us from within. Our civilization may collapse and it could be due to any number of factors—war, the economy, natural disasters—but the silent killer, the one that may get us in the end, is our own moral catastrophe.

    The ultimate problem, therefore, is not interpersonal; it’s inner-personal. If our civilization is collapsing, it’s because something in each of us is collapsing. And we need to rebuild ourselves first, brick by brick, if we are to have a chance of rebuilding ourselves together.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 22:20

  • NFT Trading Volumes Have Collapsed 97% Since January Peak
    NFT Trading Volumes Have Collapsed 97% Since January Peak

    Trading volumes for nonfungible tokens (NFTs) has tumbled 97% since January, when the blockchain-bound digital art and collectibles market went from $17 billion to just $466 million in September, according to Bloomberg, citing data from Dune Analytics.

    The dropoff in NFT interest is part of a wider, $2 trillion wipeout in crypto – which has come a long way from $69 million art auctions and Lamborghinis with crypto-themed license plates.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As ArtNet‘s Dorian Batycka wondered on Tuesday, will digital art collectors stay away?

    Human One by Michael Winkelmann (Beeple) at Rivoli Castle Modern Art Museum, Turin, Italy. (Photo by Roberto Serra – Iguana Press/Getty Images)

    From SNL to Snoop Dogg, NFTs quickly took popular culture by storm. Athletes and celebrities aped-in; some shilled and rug-pulled their fans. Others made genuine contributions to the space, like when Grammy award-winning producer Timbaland made NFTs of stems to his beats—buyers were given the rights to remix and profit from them.

    Now, most of that initial hype has collapsed, thanks in part to the cantankerous crypto market. Pieces once bought for millions now barely muster a couple hundred thousand at auction. The auction platforms are not doing much better: OpenSea, the largest of them all, laid off 20 percent of its staff in July 2022. Sales volume is significantly down. An extremely muted sale earlier this year of generative art (digital art made with autonomous software) at Phillips showed that collectors are no longer as keen.

    As the NFT art market faces a recalibration, what will become of the market for digital and physical art—the so-called “phygital”? -ArtNet

    That said, NFT projects continue making headway – such as Yuga Labs, which last month announced a partnership with Tiffany’s & Co. for 250 custom-made cryptopunk jeweled pendants which sold quickly for $50,000 each.

    So, while things in crypto land certainly appear tumultuous at the moment, one has to wonder if the NFT space is due for a massive reflation once the fed restarts QE and digital currencies hit astronomical prices again.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 22:00

  • The Golden Road To Samarkand
    The Golden Road To Samarkand

    Authored by Tamir Tehari via The Gatestone Institute,

    But what is it for? This is the question that the media in Russia, China, Iran and half a dozen countries were posing all last week in the wake of a summit in Samarkand that brought their leaders together as members or aspiring members of the Shanghai Cooperation Organisation (SCO).

    The Russian media, echoing President Vladimir Putin’s speech at the summit, say the SCO is designed to end “the unipolar world “by creating a “multipolar system”.

    The Chinese media offer a different version.

    The SCO is meant to offer a new political system for the whole world as an alternative to the Western democratic model.

    To the Islamic media in Tehran, celebrating the Islamic Republic’s admission to the club after 11 years of supplication, the SCO is an extension of the “Resistance Front” created to contain and defeat the American “Great Satan.”

    A closer look, however, might show that the SCO is form without a clear content, an empty frame which different artists could project different fantasies.

    The SCO was created in 1996 as the Shanghai Five bringing together China, Russia, Kyrgyzstan, Kazakhstan and Tajikistan together for two purposes:

    1. Delineating China’s borders with Russia and the three ex-Soviet republics.

    2. Fighting “Islamic terrorism” which affected China in East Turkestan (Xinjiang), Russia in Chechnya, and Tajikistan in Kulyab and Kyrgyzstan in the Fergana Valley.

    A quarter of a century later, neither of those goals has been achieved.

    Russia’s long border with China, which includes vast stretches of Chinese territory annexed by the Soviet Union in two border wars in the 1960s, remains undesignated. China has also failed to persuade Tajikistan to cede a chunk of land needed to widen the corridor Beijing has with Pakistan. (Beijing is now trying to ‘buy’ the Wakhan Corridor from Afghanistan for the same purpose.) Tajikistan and Kyrgyzstan also have failed to demarcate their borders. (The two neighbors fought a border war on the eve of the Samarkand summit.) At the same time, China has long maintained a claim on large chunks of Kazakhstan, which Russia annexed under the tsars.

    Uzbekistan, another former Soviet republic, joined the group in 1997 to get help against terrorism led by the Islamic Liberation Party. But it, too, has complex irredentist problems with Tajikistan. In fact in ethnic and cultural terms, Samarkand, where the summit was held, is the largest Tajik city in the world. In exchange, the Kulyab area in Tajikistan has an Uzbek majority.

    The SCO’s identity as a club of queer fellows has been further emphasized by the admission of a host of new members all of whom have territorial disputes with each other. India has fought two border wars with China, losing large chunks of territory in Ladakh and Kashmir. It has also had four wars with its Pakistani neighbor, losing a chunk of land in Ran-e-Kuch but succeeding in splitting Pakistan by creating Bangladesh.

    To make the club even more queer, other nations with troubles of their own are lined up for membership. These include Azerbaijan and Armenia, currently at war against one another; Nepal, torn between India and China; Sri Lanka, where the very word Chinese provokes intense hatred; Turkey, which is fighting Russian surrogates in Libya and Syria; Belarus, which has become an extension of Putinistan; and Mongolia. which cannot swallow the Chinese occupation of Inner Mongolia. Perhaps the only would-be member of the club without such impediments is Cambodia.

    Casting himself as the leader of a new “pole”, Putin has also spoken about inviting four Arab countries plus the Maldives to join the club.

    Some Western commentators have dubbed the SCO “a new power bloc”. That may be jumping the gun a bit. SCO members are more dependent on trade with the European Union, the US, Canada, Japan, South Korea and Australia than with each other.

    In 2020, exchanges within the SCO orbit accounted for less than 15 percent of their total foreign trade.

    To be sure, that could change because offering huge discounts, Russia, currently the largest producer of oil and gas in the world, is making a big entry into the two largest markets for energy, China and India. But that is happening at the expense of Iran and Iraq, which are also losing their Turkish market to Russia.

    In any case, this new trend could create a neo-colonial relationship in which Russia exports raw material to China and imports manufactured goods and business services.

    But even then the alliance of which Putin dreams won’t be easy to shape because of deep cultural divides. Moscow has not forgotten the 1967 attack on its embassy in Beijing and over a decade of anti-Russian propaganda that followed. The fact that China’s President Xi Jinping refused to endorse Russia’s invasion of Ukraine punctured the balloon that Putin had hoped to float.

    Putin had been careful not to mention Ukraine in Samarkand, in the hope that he could later claim to have received “full support” in private meetings with the leaders present.

    That ploy failed when the Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi shook a finger at Putin, saying “This war must end! This is no time for war!” Putin was forced to say he understood Modi’s “concerns”, and deceitfully promising to work for ending the war.

    (An hour later, however, he told Russian TV that he didn’t care how long the war might last!)

    It would be good news if the SCO succeeds in persuading its members to resolve their territorial disputes and bury their hatchets. Sadly, however, the various members of this strange club seem to be motivated by different, often contradictory and seldom the best, motives.

    The Samarkand club represents some 40 percent of the world’s population and over 20 percent of the global GDP, not to mention four of the 9 nations with nuclear arsenals. Yet, it seems unlikely to become an anchor of stability in Eurasia; its members are more interested in petty schemes than grand ideas of peace and cooperation.

    Their rhetoric reminds one of a character in James Elroy Flecker’s 19th century play “The Golden Road to Samarkand”, Ishak, a notorious black-marketeer, who tries to soft-soap the city’s gate-keepers into admitting his caravan with these lines:

    “We travel not for trafficking alone;
    By hotter winds our fiery hearts are fanned:
    For lust of knowing what should not be known,
    We take the Golden Road to Samarkand.”

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 21:40

  • Politico Co-Founder Says Constitution Must Be Rewritten To Stop Donald Trump
    Politico Co-Founder Says Constitution Must Be Rewritten To Stop Donald Trump

    Politico’s new owner may lean right, but the rag’s founding editor, John F. Harris, said in a Thursday column that the Constitution must be rewritten to stop former President Donald Trump – who he calls a “constitutional menace” who exploited the Constitution’s “defects” in order to win the 2016 US election.

    “Correcting or circumventing what progressives reasonably perceive as the infirmities of the Constitution, in fact, seems likely to be the preeminent liberal objective of the next generation. Progress on issues ranging from climate change to ensuring that technology giants act in the public interest will hinge on creating a new constitutional consensus. Trying to place more sympathetic justices on the Supreme Court is not likely to be a fully adequate remedy,” Harris wrote, adding “There are more fundamental challenges embedded in the document itself — in particular the outsized power it gives to states, at a time when the most urgent problems and most credible remedies are national in character.”

    Harris mocked conservatives’ ‘solemn reverence’ for the Constitution, suggesting that it’s ” become a way of signaling right-mindedness across the political spectrum, even among Trump supporters whose actions plainly undermine constitutional order. In much of this rhetoric, the Constitution is elevated from a secular document to a sacred one, infused with mystical dimensions,” he wrote.

    Then he shreds the founding document.

    “Another answer, however, is: Who cares what [the Founders] thought then? The Constitution was written at a time when states were indeed foundational — a central part of people’s identity and way of life. This has not been true for nearly a century, as both national government and national identity have become stronger,” Harris continued, before listing several amendments that he says could already gain “majority support” for the nation – including “altering or abolishing the Electoral College, term limits for the Court, creating some check on abuse of the pardon authority,” and rewriting “the infuriatingly murky language of the Second Amendment.”

    Harris worked for the Washington Post for two decades, covering the Clinton White House between 1995 and 2001. In 2007 he co-founded Politico with former partner Jim VandHei, who went on to co-found Axios.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 21:20

  • US Home Heating Costs Set To Surge 17%, Says Energy Group
    US Home Heating Costs Set To Surge 17%, Says Energy Group

    Authored by Bryan Jung via The Epoch Times,

    Winter is coming, and experts are predicting that it will be an expensive one for American households nationwide.

    The average U.S. household heating bill is expected to increase by 17.2 percent this winter compared to last year, according to a forecast by the National Energy Assistance Directors Association (NEADA).

    Families had already faced higher than average electric bills last winter due to inflation and this year provides no improvement.

    NEADA assists state agencies under the Low Income Home Energy Assistance Program, (LIHEAP) in distributing federal assistance to help low-income families pay their utility bills.

    The energy association expects that the average winter heating bill will increase from $1,025 to $1,202.

    Heating prices have risen over the past two years to more than 35 percent, the highest rate increase in more than 10 years, according to NEADA data.

    Lower-Income Households Will Struggle

    The total cost of heating would increase from $127.9 billion to an estimated $149.9 billion, with lower-income households facing the brunt of the burden.

    “The rise in home energy costs this winter will put millions of lower-income families [at] risk of falling behind on their energy bills and having no choice but to make difficult decisions between paying for food, medicine and rent,” said Mark Wolfe, executive director of NEADA.

    “As a result, NEADA sent a letter last week to the Congressional Leadership asking for a supplemental increase in LIHEAP of $5 billion to cover the higher cost of home heating and cooling as a result of [an] increased number of summer heat waves,” Wolfe added.

    A man walks by power lines in Mountain View, Calif., on Aug. 17, 2022. (Carlos Barria/Reuters)

    Meanwhile, according to the U.S. Energy Information Administration’s (EIA) latest short-term energy outlook, American household electric bills are expected to increase 7.5 percent from last year.

    Energy Prices Surge Worldwide

    Global energy prices have been rising since the second half of 2021, as economies around the world recovered from the shock of the pandemic, leading to higher demand.

    However, European and American green energy policies, combined with Russia’s invasion of Ukraine in February, have caused oil and natural gas prices to spike worldwide.

    The war in Ukraine had disrupted supplies of natural gas from Russia to Europe, which relies on natural gas to power industry and heat and cool civilian homes.

    Meanwhile, hot summers in the United States and the European Union had driven up electricity demand, causing energy prices to surge.

    Increases in Cost of Natural Gas

    While the United States is less dependent on natural gas for its energy needs, it still fuels about 37 percent of domestic electricity production, according to the EIA’s 2022 figures.

    Natural gas costs are projected to increase 24 percent to $709, according to the NEADA.

    Heating oil costs will jump an estimated 54 percent to $1,876.

    Propane bills are forecast to rise by 15.2 to $1,828 this winter.

    Winter heating costs for households using electricity will face a 6.9 percent jump to $1,328.

    Those who use natural gas for heating will face a 34.3 percent increase to $952.

    Flared natural gas is burned off at Apache Corporation’s operations at the Deadwood natural gas plant in the Permian Basin, Garden City, Texas on Feb. 5, 2015. (Spencer Platt/Getty Images)

    About 20 percent of American households reported missing or making a late payment on their utility bills in August, according to Bank of America (BofA).

    Families with an income of $50,000 or less are the ones struggling the most with the higher energy costs.

    BofA reported that Dallas and Houston had some of the highest utility bill hikes this summer, rising 23 percent from the same period last year.

    The NEADA released similar findings last month that found that more than 20 million families were behind on their utility bills and owed a total of about $16 billion.

    Regional utility companies like National Grid and Con Edison, have already signalled their intent to raise prices.

    US Regional Utilities Plan to Raise Power Bills

    Con Edison, one of the largest utility companies in the nation, provides energy for over 10 million people living in the New York City metropolitan area.

    The power company said that utility bill increases are being driven mainly by “increases in the market cost of natural gas, which is volatile and also influences electric market costs,”  and that other local electric and gas companies across the North East “are facing similar circumstances.”

    “Con Edison is urging customers to take actions now that can help them manage costs this winter as market prices for electricity and natural gas are expected to be substantially higher,” said the utility in a recent statement.

    A Con Edison power plant stands in a Brooklyn neighborhood across from Manhattan in New York City in a file photo. (Spencer Platt/Getty Images)

    The company explained that it “buys natural gas and electricity on the wholesale markets and uses a variety of strategies to stabilize pricing for customers.”

    The average monthly natural gas bill in the NYC area will grow 32 percent, from $348 a year ago to $460.

    Electricity costs will jump between 22 and 27 percent for residents from November 2022 through March 2023.

    Con Ed explained that supply costs account for the majority of the price increases, which rose about $90, while delivery charges hit $22.

    “Natural gas prices are up 33% from just one year ago. As Americans prepare to reach home heating season, this could be disastrous for working families and seniors on fixed incomes,” said Rep. Claudia Tenney, (R-NY) in a statement.

    “The U.S. needs an all-of-the-above energy strategy that will drive down costs for consumers,” said Tenney.

    National Grid of Massachusetts, announced last week that it would increase electricity rates by 64 percent from November through May 2023.

    The average monthly bill for residents in that state will increase from $179 to $293, while hiking home heating and natural gas rates by at least 22 percent during that period.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 21:00

  • South Korean Spy Agency Says Nuclear Test By North Is Weeks Away
    South Korean Spy Agency Says Nuclear Test By North Is Weeks Away

    South Korean intelligence has produced a new assessment saying it believes the north is preparing to conduct a nuclear weapons test within weeks. Lawmakers were briefed this week over the imminent threat that such a rare test is likely.

    “North Korea has completed preparations for a nuclear test and a possible window for carrying it out could be between Oct. 16 and Nov. 7, South Korean lawmakers briefed by its spy agency said on Wednesday,” Reuters writes, based on the public comments of legislators privy to the briefing.

    File image: Korean Central News Agency

    If so, it would mark the seventh ever known nuclear test by North Korea, which hasn’t held one in five years, since 2017. All tests spanning back to 2006 were conduced in underground tunnels.

    According to more from the South Korean intelligence assessment, per Reuters, “The timing of the test could be determined by events like the party congress in China, North Korea’s main ally, and the midterm elections in the United States, its chief rival, they said.”

    “Also it would depend on whether Pyongyang can bring an outbreak of COVID-19 under control, they said,” the report continues. One South Korean lawmaker, Youn Kun-young, said further of the probable nuke test just around the corner

    “The NIS said they cannot calculate the probability but assumed that North Korea would make a comprehensive decision based on international relations and its COVID situation.”

    Meanwhile US Vice President Kamala Harris is scheduled to soon arrive in Seoul for an official visit, after attending the state funeral for assassinated former prime minister Shinzo Abe in Japan. Just on the eve of Harris’ trip, the north fired off two short-range ballistic missiles toward eastern waters.

    The Wednesday launch is the latest in an uptick of missile tests which have come with semi-regular frequency coupled with increased threats from Pyongyang this year, also as a US aircraft carrier is off South Korea’ coast, participating in joint war games.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Our military has strengthened surveillance and vigilance and is maintaining airtight readiness posture while closely cooperating with the United States,” Seoul’s Joint Chiefs of Staff said in a statement on Wednesday.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 20:40

  • The SEC's Reckless Crusade To Crush The Cryptocurrency Market
    The SEC’s Reckless Crusade To Crush The Cryptocurrency Market

    Authored by Gerard Scimeca via RealClearMarkets.com,

    The laws of physics dictate that nature abhors a vacuum, an interesting phenomena considering how many federal regulatory agencies simply love one. Harkening back to the New Deal, it has become accepted that wherever a gap may exist in the regulation of human activity, a federal agency will soon appear, mobilizing its vast and frequently questionable powers to fill the space.

    Whether it is the Department of Energy deciding to pull the plug on a popular type of light bulb, or the Environmental Protection Agency dictating the allowable volume of water in toilets, our vast administrative state lurks behind every corner, poised to assert itself within every nook, crevice, and cranny that presents an opportunity for regulatory interference. Last year federal agencies created over 74,000 pages of new rules and regulations to fill the perceived vacuums in our lives, and we are currently on track this year to surpass that tree-crushing total.

    As frustrating — and costly – as never-ending meddling from Washington bureaucrats can be, light bulbs and plumbing are small potatoes compared to the mayhem that erupts when an agency jumps the median to rewrite the entire rulebook for an industry to which it is, at best, a casual acquaintance. Just over a year ago our organization sounded the sirens on a lawsuit by the “stone-age” bureaucracy of the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) against an American crypto company, Ripple Labs. In that time an overwhelming consensus has emerged among crypto industry leaders, analysts, and legal scholars that the SEC’s lawsuit is not only absurd, but extremely dangerous.

    Imagine the reaction to a referee throwing a penalty flag on the field for a play that happened 30 minutes ago. There would certainly be a healthy mix of incredulity and outrage, and the strong view the official is irrationally and arbitrarily ruining the game. The SEC lawsuit against Ripple is just as irrational and arbitrary, but the stakes involve billions of dollars held by innocent users of the digital currency XRP as well as the larger issue of federal agency overreach, and their power to capriciously extend their tentacles into places where they do not belong. The outcome of the case will further have a substantial impact on America’s position within the exponentially growing digital currency markets.

    In December 2020, the SEC retroactively declared XRP to be an unregistered security and all its trades for the previous seven years to have been illegal, even on the secondary markets. The regulator accused Ripple, which built its business on the use case of XRP as a bridge currency, of selling securities despite the fact that billions of XRP tokens have circulated among hundreds of thousands of other users since 2013 with no connection to the company. Gensler has now upped the ante, saying the SEC, not the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC), should call the shots on all digital assets. With even greater hubris, Gensler insists to the court that the SEC is under no obligation to set clear, defining, and transparent rules to provide guidance for traders and holders of digital assets, essentially claiming decisions can be made by the agency at their whim on a case-by-case basis, an absolutely ludicrous position.

    The recklessness of the SEC’s case against Ripple is simply astounding, not to mention unjust and void of due process. Prior to its lawsuit the SEC gave nearly a decade of confusing and contradictory public signals on XRP to consumers and investors while billions of tokens traded on secondary markets. The SEC gave even more unclear guidance to Ripple in private, according to the evidence filed in the case.

    The Ripple case has exposed our nation’s complete lack of legal and statutory clarity in the regulation of not just XRP, but all crypto. This is precisely where Congress must step in and assert its authority to create a clear regulatory framework for digital assets. This month Gensler was grilled by the Senate Banking Committee for his lax and inconsistent treatment of crypto, with Sen. Pat Toomey (R-PA) accusing Gensler of “not sharing with us” the criteria the SEC is using to regulate crypto. Gensler gives vague answers on why Bitcoin is a commodity while the SEC considers XRP a security, even though both are overwhelmingly used in commercial transactions, not held as investments. In a new lawsuit against a market influencer, Gensler hints at total jurisdiction over all Ethereum network transactions anywhere in the world.

    In October of last year, the judge in the case granted amici status to what is now more than 73,000 XRP token holders who were immediately harmed by the SEC’s allegation that all XRP tokens are investment contracts in Ripple. Their lawyer, John Deaton, says the vast majority of them had no knowledge or connection to Ripple when the SEC’s action wiped out the value of their holdings. Deaton calls the SEC’s legal theory in the case “dangerous” and a threat to every digital asset holder and consumer. The SEC is so out of control, and going so far past its authority, that consumers have turned on the regulator who is supposed to be protecting them.

    The outcome of the SEC case against Ripple is critical in not just establishing a fair and just baseline for the protection of crypto investors, but as a test case in setting boundaries to stop overreach by federal agencies seeking to advance their power at the expense of efficiency. Crypto is popular and growing precisely because of its efficiency, flexibility, and vast utility in financial markets, benefits that can easily be quashed through intrusive and heavy-handed regulation. The ultimate arbiter of these issues is Congress, who must act, and soon, to help establish a clear framework to regulate crypto, and to limit the SEC’s power to occupy spaces where it simply does not belong.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 20:20

  • Hurricane Ian To Unleash Up To $70 Billion In Losses, Insurance Market Devastation And Even Bigger Spike In Inflation
    Hurricane Ian To Unleash Up To $70 Billion In Losses, Insurance Market Devastation And Even Bigger Spike In Inflation

    Just three weeks ago we observed how the 2022 Hurricane season had neared its halfway point without any hurricanes making landfall on the coast of the United States.

    All that is about to change and with a bang: As the powerful Hurricane Ian bears down on Florida which is rapidly evacuating ahead of landfall, it threatens to further destabilize a homeowners-insurance market already teetering on the edge of disaster.

    The storm is expected to make landfall along the southwest Florida coast late Wednesday or early Thursday, and could send seawater coursing through the streets of Tampa.

    While Ian’s strength and trajectory are subject to change in the coming days, one early estimate pegs potential damage and economic losses in the Tampa Bay region at $50 billion to $70 billion, according Chuck Watson, a disaster modeler with Enki Research.

    That price tag, according to Bloomberg citing data from the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, would make Ian among the costliest storms in US history, as the top end of that range would rank Ian as the sixth-costliest US hurricane. Difficulties in getting needed material and supplies to victims due to snagged supply chains are likely to raise costs even further.

    Some insurers will likely not survive: Ian is arriving in the wake of six insolvencies among insurers that write homeowner policies in the state. According to Bloomberg, the largest insurers largely pulled back from the market after taking a beating from natural disasters, and the smaller firms still active there have struggled to endure losses.

    “It’s kind of the worst timing for the storm, especially if it hits Tampa Bay,” Logan McFaddin, vice president of state government relations for the American Property Casualty Insurance Association, said in an interview.

    Flood damages aren’t typically covered in home policies. Instead, they fall under policies managed by the Federal Emergency Management Agency.

    “If this is a major flood event, that could leave many homeowners vulnerable,” said Mark Friedlander, a spokesman for the Insurance Information Institute. “If there were major windstorm losses, other companies could be pushed in the direction of potential insolvency as well.”

    State-backed Citizens Property Insurance Corp. accounts for slightly more than 10% of the Florida homeowners insurance market by premiums written. The market share is somewhat higher in some of the counties surrounding Tampa, according to Michael Peltier, a spokesman for Citizens. The insurer has been forced to take on more market share as other firms fold or cease writing policies due to rampant litigation and scams lawmakers have struggled to subdue.

    Progressive has said it doesn’t want renew about 60,000 policies in the state, citing efforts to “limit growth in the coastal and hail-prone” areas while focusing on regions less prone to catastrophe losses. Florida has passed legislation that would make those exits harder; meanwhile, the company is charging more for insurance, particularly for homes with older roofs.

    As part of its preparations for the storm, Citizens is setting up catastrophe-response teams and getting ready to deploy vehicles equipped to assess damage and assist customers who lose internet access.

    “It’s no secret that the private market has been facing some challenging times here in Florida,” Peltier said. “Having a hurricane come ashore certainly doesn’t help.”

    And then there are those insurers who will survive, only to make the US inflation problem even worse: the massive losses will likely lead insurance companies to join sovereigns such as Japan in selling some of their Treasury holdings to raise money to pay claims, which in turn will help spur inflation. This takes place amid an already strapped supply chain and high inflation. The storm appears likely to intensify food inflation as Ian takes direct aim on crucial orange-growing and fertilizer-manufacturing zones.

    In short: a perfect storm in the worst possible time.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 20:00

  • Janet Yellen Is Disturbingly Serious About Tax Hikes
    Janet Yellen Is Disturbingly Serious About Tax Hikes

    Authored by Bruce Thompson via RealClearMarkets.com,

    Treasury Secretary Yellen has been out on the campaign trail, calling for higher taxes on individuals and US companies. The Secretary thinks the government needs to collect more taxes, even though her own Department just reported that federal tax collections are at record high levels.

    According to the Treasury Department’s monthly budget report, total federal tax receipts in the first eleven months of fiscal 2022  totaled $4.4 trillion, an increase of $823 billion, or 23%, over the same period last year. Total federal taxes are on track to reach nearly $5 trillion, an incredible 45% increase in the last two years. Taxes as a percent of GDP will reach 19.6%, the second-highest level since World War II.

    Treasury also reported that corporate tax receipts are projected to reach $404 billion, the highest level ever, and nearly twice as much as the amount collected in 2020.  Corporate taxes as a percent of GDP are now 1.7%, equal to the modern average (2000-2016) and higher than the 40-year average (1980-2020).

    Even with taxes soaring, the Treasury Secretary wants to increase the US corporate tax rate to the highest rate in the developed world. Under her plan, the combined average federal-state tax rate would be 32.8%, 40% higher than the average OECD rate of 23.4%, putting US companies at a significant competitive disadvantage against their leading competitors.

    The new U.S. tax rate would also be much higher than China’s top rate of 25%.

    Numerous studies have shown that raising the corporate tax rate would be harmful to economic growth, resulting in higher prices, lower wages, and fewer jobs.

    Washington does not need more tax revenue to spend. Higher taxes are the last thing we need with inflation soaring and the economy slowing.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 19:40

  • Meta Disrupts Chinese Social Media Campaign To Stoke Division Ahead Of U.S. Mid-Term Elections
    Meta Disrupts Chinese Social Media Campaign To Stoke Division Ahead Of U.S. Mid-Term Elections

    Meta has said it disrupted a Chinese operation to try and influence the coming U.S. midterm elections.

    The company said it dismantled the campaign, which “targeted users in the United States with political content in an apparent effort to polarize voters”, according to reporting by The Epoch Times

    The report says that China maintained fake accounts across both Facebook and Instagram – and also Twitter. The influence campaign began in November 2021 but didn’t gain any engagement, the report says. 

    The discovery “suggests a shift toward more direct interference in U.S. domestic politics from China”, the report reads. 

    Meta global threat intelligence lead Ben Nimmo commented: “The Chinese operations we’ve taken down before talked primarily about America to the world, primarily in South Asia, not to Americans about themselves. Essentially the message was ‘America bad, China good.” 

    The operation targeted both the left and the right in the U.S., and ultimately sought to sow division on hotbutton issues like abortion and the war in Ukraine. 

    One cluster of accounts posted memes that accused President Biden of corruption, while others posted critiques of the Republican Party for its stance on similar issues. 

    Politicians like Marco Rubio, Rick Scott and Ted Cruz were targeted personally, as was Florida governor Ron DeSantis. 

    All told, the operation wasn’t extremely sophisticated, the report says. In addition to failing to garner much engagement, some accounts posted in Chinese, while others used photographs of men on accounts with womens’ names. 

    Meta has said it doesn’t have enough evidence to say who, exactly in China, was behind the campaign. 

    You can read Meta’s full report, called “Taking down coordinated inauthentic behavior from Russia and China”, here

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 19:20

  • Charting A Course To Self-Reliance
    Charting A Course To Self-Reliance

    Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    Self-reliance in the 21st century is uniquely challenging because we’ve become overly dependent on globalization and financialization.

    As things unravel, the one surefire strategy is to chart a course for greater self-reliance. Improving self-reliance has no downside, only upside, and everyone can increase their self-reliance incrementally in small ways.

    Self-reliance isn’t the same as self-sufficiency. Even Thoreau on Walden Pond used manufactured tools and supplies sourced from afar. The basic idea of self-reliance is to reduce our dependency on long, fragile supply chains and the hamster-wheel landfill Economy of planned obsolescence and waste is growth consumption, and increase what we can do for ourselves and those we care about.

    Self-reliance isn’t going it alone, it’s assembling trusted personal networks as a producer as well as a consumer, as a means of reducing the number of links in your personal supply chain and increasing local sources of life’s essentials.

    Self-reliance increases as we acquire skills and capital in all its forms. Self-reliance isn’t the same as money; what’s truly valuable can’t be bought: trust, reciprocity, integrity. Those are the foundations of self-reliance.

    Self-reliance in the 21st century is uniquely challenging because we’ve become overly dependent on globalization and financialization–not just on traditional supply chains and finance, but a near-total dependence on hyper-globalized supply chains and hyper-financialized credit-asset bubbles that are inherently unstable and unsustainable.

    There’s no downside to becoming more self-reliant and enormous upside. If the Landfill Economy continues chewing through the planet’s dwindling resources, it doesn’t diminish the value of being able to do more for ourselves and those we care about.

    But if long, fragile supply chains break and hyper-financialization blows a gasket and sinks, the self-reliant will have a much easier time than those with minimal self-reliance. We’re only powerless if we cede all power over our lives to others. Self-reliance is all about taking control of our own lives rather than relying on unsustainable global supply chains and centralized authorities to provide us with essentials.

    I address all this in my new book Self-Reliance in the 21st Century (96 pages). I’m offering it to my readers at a 20% discount for the Kindle edition ($7.95) and 15% discount for the print edition ($17).

    You can read the first chapter for free (PDF). In later chapters, I cover the mindset of self-reliance and the nuts and bolts of self-reliance.

    I wrote this book not as someone on the peak looking down but as someone on the trail looking up. Self-reliance is a work in progress, not a destination. I’m constantly improving my self-reliance, too, and have a long way to go. I wrote this book to offer a few pointers on charting your own course to greater self-reliance.

    *  *  *

    My new book is now available at a 20% discount ($7.95 ebook) 15% discount ($17 print) this week: Self-Reliance in the 21st Century.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 19:00

  • Philadelphia PD Seeks To Identify 100 Juveniles In "Riot" At Wawa Convenience Store Last Weekend
    Philadelphia PD Seeks To Identify 100 Juveniles In “Riot” At Wawa Convenience Store Last Weekend

    It’s just another day in Democrat-run Philadelphia. Police are attempting to identify 100 juveniles who stormed and ransacked a Wawa in Philadelphia over the weekend. 

    On Sunday, at around 8:15pm, a Wawa convenience store on Philadelphia’s Roosevelt Boulevard was overrun by juveniles who caused more than $10,000 in damages and vandalized the property. 

    Surveillance video shows the juveniles “screaming, throwing merchandise and breaking things in the store”, Philly Voice reported. Police believe that some of the juveniles were coming from the roller skating rink located next door.

    Video of the incident shows teenagers “rushing into the store, looting items, throwing things and knocking displays over before rushing outside.” Some teens jumped on parked cars before leaving the scene. 

    Now police are looking to try and identify all of the individuals involved in the looting. 

    Capt. Jason Ryan said on Monday: “It does fit in with the past 10 years with the various kinds of flash mobs, car meets, and other spontaneous disorder. The charges can include riot, criminal mischief, vandalism, theft, riot being a felony. If everyone’s seen the video, it certainly falls into the parameters of what we can call a riot.” 

    A spokesperson for Wawa commented: “We are working closely with law enforcement to support their efforts to bring all of these perpetrators to justice as soon as possible. We remain committed to protecting our associates and customers and ensuring a safe, welcoming environment for each customer, in every Wawa store. Nothing is more important to us.” 

    Here is video of the juveniles at the scene, with Philadelphia Police showing the faces of many of the participants:

    Of course, we’re sure that once Philadelphia PD does finally identify some of the participants, Philadelphia’s far left DA will figure out a way to help them dodge as many consequences as possible.

    Because we all know that it’s the perpetrators that were really the victims here, being unfairly accused of rioting when they were simply looking to stop in and grab bread for their families…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 18:40

  • Iran Oil Workers Threaten To Strike If Government Doesn't End Crackdown
    Iran Oil Workers Threaten To Strike If Government Doesn’t End Crackdown

    Submitted by OilPrice.com

    Iranian oil industry contract workers have warned the government to end its crackdown on protesters or they will strike, a move that could cripple a key sector of the economy.

    “We support the people’s struggles against organized and everyday violence against women and against the poverty and hell that dominates the society,” the Organizing Council of Oil Contract Workers said on September 26.

    Iran has been roiled by unrest that has spread to more than 80 cities and towns, including in the northwest, where 22-year-old Mahsa Amini lived before eyewitnesses and family said she was beaten — and later died — after being seized by the morality police in Tehran on September 13.

    Labor protests in Iran also have been on the rise in recent months in response to declining living standards and state support as crippling Western sanctions wrack the economy.

    The outrage over Amini’s death also has reignited decades-old resentment at the treatment of women by Iran’s religious leadership, including laws forcing women to wear Islamic scarves to cover their heads in public.

    The Iran Human Rights Organization said on September 27 that at least 76 people have been killed in anti-government protests across Iran.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 18:20

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 28th September 2022

  • New Zealand Calls It Quits On Aiding Ukraine's Military
    New Zealand Calls It Quits On Aiding Ukraine’s Military

    At a moment Washington continues what’s essentially an endless arms and financial aid pipeline to Ukraine, and as some defense officials express concerns over the Pentagon’s own dwindling stockpiles, one country says it’s giving up on arming Kyiv.

    New Zealand, which is one of the “Five Eyes” intelligence-sharing partners which includes the US, now says it can no longer keep up with supplying what Ukraine is asking for without depleting its stockpiles.

    “The New Zealand government has expanded sanctions on key Russians, but cannot provide further military assistance as it has nothing Ukraine wants,” The Canberra Times reports Tuesday.

    Royal New Zealand Air Force C-130H(NZ) Hercules arrives into the Australian Defence Force’s main operating base in the UAE. Source: Australian military

    Defense Minister Peeni Henare said his country stands “ready to provide further lethal aid if Ukraine’s needs matched its stockpiles.”

    The top defense official then confirmed it is currently the case that the military cannot keep up:

    Asked on Tuesday whether New Zealand had considered further military support, Mr Henare said the requests didn’t match “on our current assessment and according to the requests in the donor meetings I’ve been on”.

    “On those donor calls, they’ve come asking and it’s for HIMARS, land-to-air defence systems and also land-to-sea defence systems,” he said.

    So far, New Zealand’s contribution has been meager – given also it’s a tiny Pacific island nation – compared to European countries, and has been focused on defensive equipment such as body armor.

    “If they were things we were to procure, they would take years but that hasn’t stopped us providing military aid,” PM Jacinda Ardern commented this week on the logistical challenges in procuring and then shipping weapons abroad.

    A look at historic New Zealand military expenditures over the last half-century…

    But as a major non-NATO ally of the United States and major intelligence-sharing partner, New Zealand is without doubt assisting the US mission in support of Ukrainian forces in this arena. It is also vowing more sanctions, and has typically signed off on whatever fresh US and EU anti-Russia sanctions are rolled out.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/28/2022 – 02:00

  • Watch: French PM Declares EU Will Be 'Vigilant' Against 'Threat' Of Democratically Elected Italian Leader
    Watch: French PM Declares EU Will Be ‘Vigilant’ Against ‘Threat’ Of Democratically Elected Italian Leader

    Authored by Steve Watson via Summit News,

    Screenshot

    Following the stunning election of conservative candidate Georgia Meloni to the office of Prime Minister in Italy, Meloni’s French counterpart has declared that the EU will be ‘vigilant’ against any ‘threat to human rights’ posed by the democratically elected leader.

    France’s Prime Minister, Elisabeth Borne, stated during an interview that the EU intends to scrutinise the actions of the Italy’s first woman PM.

    “In Europe, we have a set of values ​​and, of course, we will be mindful that these values ​​are respected by everyone when it comes to human rights and the right to abortion,” Borne proclaimed.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meloni, a Catholic, has previously promised that there will be no crack down on abortion in Italy, but has expressed a desire to see more alternatives offered to women.

    The comments of the French PM come after European Commission head Ursula von der Leyen threatened to punish Italy for electing a right-wing coalition government.

    Von der Leyen stated that “we have tools” if Italy is not “willing to work with us”:

    The thinly veiled threat was blasted by Matteo Salvini, head of Lega (The League), the party expected to form a coalition with Meloni’s government.

    “These are disgusting words, the threatening tone is unacceptable,” Salvini urged, adding “Our parliamentary group will present a motion of censure,” and emphasising that the Italian people control what happens in their country, not “the Brussels bureaucrats”.

    Following the victory of Meloni’s Brothers of Italy party, hysterical media coverage ensued, with numerous publications warning of the “return of fascism in Italy.”

    Those concerns were rubbished by, of all people, former leftist Prime Minister Matteo Renzi, who called them “fake news.”

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 23:30

  • Syria Demands Compensation For Oil Losses In UN Speech
    Syria Demands Compensation For Oil Losses In UN Speech

    In a rare plea before the U.N. General Assembly in New York, Syria’s top diplomat demanded compensation for oil and gas stolen by the United States, as well as its monumental energy losses over the course of the 11-year long war.

    “The war against Syria, ultimately, was an attempt by the West to maintain control over the world,” Syrian Foreign Minister Faisal Mekdad told the assembly on Monday, demanding further that the continuing US military occupation in the oil and gas rich northeast “should end immediately, without conditions.”

    Syria’s foreign minister Faisal Mekdad addresses the 76th Session of the United Nations General Assembly this week.

    He informed UN leaders that “direct and indirect” oil and gas sector losses over the course of the conflict have reached $107 billion, stressing further that Damascus is demanding compensation.

    “Fighting terrorism does not happen through an illegitimate international coalition that violates Syria’s sovereignty and destroys towns and villages,” Mekdad asserted. He said that any ‘counterterror’ campaign or foreign presence on sovereign Syrian soil must be done in direct coordination with President Bashar al-Assad. 

    While during the Trump administration years the hundreds of American troops stationed in eastern parts of Syria were there to “secure the oil” – as Trump had often repeated, the Biden administration has chosen to stress a continued counter-terrorism mission. And yet, US forces and their Kurdish SDF proxies continue to occupy the largest and most important oil and gas fields in the region

    Russia too has long called for the immediate exit of American forces, and has of late appeared to step up its air campaign against anti-government jihadist elements in Idlib, which has put Turkey on edge. Pro-Iranian militias have reportedly launched sporadic attacks on US bases, meanwhile.

    Ironically, just last week in President Joe Biden’s address to the UNGA, he declared “you cannot seize another country’s territory by force. The only country doing that is Russia.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Many pundits were then quick to point out the obvious: that Biden denounced Russia’s occupation of eastern Ukraine all the while being completely oblivious to the years-long American occupation of Syria. Or alternately, Washington is certainly fully aware and believes itself to be the only country in the world with the “right” or “mandate” to seize any foreign soil that it wants to.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 23:00

  • Pennsylvania Pro-Life Advocate to Appear In Federal Court Following Dawn SWAT Raid
    Pennsylvania Pro-Life Advocate to Appear In Federal Court Following Dawn SWAT Raid

    Authored by Allan Stein via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    A Pennsylvania State Police SWAT officer stands by as Eric Frein arrives at the Pike County Courthouse for his arraignment in Milford, Penn., on Oct. 31, 2014. Frein, a suspected cop killer, was taken into custody from a Pennsylvania airport hangar after a seven-week manhunt. (Kena Betancur/Getty Images)

    A pro-life advocate and father of seven will appear in federal court in Philadelphia on Sept. 27 to face charges that he violated the Freedom of Access to Clinic Entrances Act (FACE Act) outside a Pennsylvania abortion clinic nearly a year ago.

    Mark Houck, a Catholic pro-life speaker and author from Kintnersville, Pennsylvania, is accused of twice physically assaulting a patient escort at a Planned Parenthood clinic during an altercation in October 2021.

    On Sept. 23, a heavily armed Justice Department SWAT team arrested the 48-year-old Houck at his home at gunpoint, placing him in handcuffs while his terrified wife and children looked on.

    Houck became the latest target of President Joe Biden’s Department of Justice solely to “intimidate people of faith and pro-life Americans,” said Peter Breen, an attorney at the Thomas Moore Society, a national non-profit law firm representing Houck in the case.

    U.S. President Joe Biden delivers a primetime speech at Independence National Historical Park in Philadelphia, Penn., on Sept. 1, 2022. (Alex Wong/Getty Images)

    “Mark Houck is innocent of these lawless charges, and we intend to prove that in court,” Breen said in a Sept. 26 statement.

    About 20 heavily armed FBI agents stormed Houck’s home at daybreak on Sept. 23, pointing guns at his head and then arresting him in front of his wife Ryan-Marie and their young children.

    He faces two counts of physically assaulting the patient escort.

    In June, Thomas Moore Society attorneys notified the DOJ that the FACE Act does not cover one-on-one altercations like the one involving Houck, which they claimed was initiated by an abortion supporter harassing Houck’s son.

    The attorneys also advised that Houck would appear in court voluntarily to face any charges against him.

    Rather than accepting Mark Houck’s offer to appear voluntarily, the Biden Department of Justice chose to make an unnecessary show of potentially deadly force, sending 20 heavily armed federal agents to the Houck residence at dawn this past Friday,” Breen said in the statement.

    “In threatening form, after nearly breaking down the family’s front door, at least five agents pointed guns at Mark’s head and arrested him in front of his wife and seven young children, who were terrified that their husband and father would be shot dead before their eyes.”

    Donations continued to pour in for the Houck family via the Christian crowdfunding platform GiveSendGo, which totaled $137,000 as of Sept. 25.

    Mark Houck faces up to 11 years in prison, three years of supervised release, and fines of up to $350,000 if convicted.

    In June 2019, Thomas Moore Society attorneys won a similar case in the Eastern District of Pennsylvania, establishing that a one-off altercation cannot form the basis for a FACE Act complaint.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 22:30

  • Futures Tumble After Report Apple Backs Off Plans To Increase iPhone Production Due To Lack Of Demand
    Futures Tumble After Report Apple Backs Off Plans To Increase iPhone Production Due To Lack Of Demand

    So much can change in just 8 days: back on Sept 19, citing “Apple analyst” Ming-Chi Kuo, 9to5mac reported that Apple was “cranking up iPhone 14 Pro production to address higher demand.”

    Well, maybe not, because moments ago, citing people familiar with the matter, late on Tuesday Bloomberg reported that contrary to expectations for a production boost, Apple is instead “backing off plans to increase production of its new iPhones this year after an anticipated surge in demand failed to materialize.

    According to the report, the phone maker which hasn’t come up with a refreshingly new model in about 4 years but merely adds more megapixels and a slightly faster chip and presents it as “new”, told suppliers “to pull back from efforts to increase assembly of the iPhone 14 product family by as many as 6 million units in the second half of this year.” Instead, Apple will aim to produce 90 million handsets for the period, around the same level as the prior year and in line with Apple’s original forecast this summer.

    In fairness, it’s not like outside analysts had any idea Tim Cook was about to pull a swticheroo: Apple had upgraded its sales projections in the weeks leading up to the iPhone 14 release and some of its suppliers had started making preparations for a 7% boost in orders. But just two weeks after the unveil of the new phone, Apple realized that this anticipated demand boost wasn’t coming.

    And yes, while demand for higher-priced iPhone 14 Pro models may indeed be stronger than for the entry-level versions – after all the baseline model offers absolutely nothing new – at least until the market plunges another 20% and even those rich on paper have to cancel their orders, even so the overall supply will not change although in hopes of salvaging at least margins if not overall revenue, some suppliers are shifting production capacity from lower-priced iPhones to premium models… which incidentally is hardly as it was reported by MacRumors about a week ago.

    Needless to say, the success – and failure – of the company’s leading device has implications for wide swathes of the tech industry, with suppliers including Taiwan Semiconductor and Hon Hai Precision Industry Co. depending on sales of iPhones and related devices as key revenue drivers.

    All this is happening as China, the world’s biggest smartphone market, is in an economic slump that’s hit its domestic mobile device makers and also affected the iPhone’s sales. Purchases of the iPhone 14 series over its first three days of availability in China were 11% down on its predecessor the previous year, according to a Jefferies note on Monday.

    And then there is the global recession: as Bloomberg notes, global demand for personal electronics has also been suppressed by soaring inflation, recession fears and disruption from the war in Ukraine. As a result, the smartphone market is expected to shrink by 6.5% this year to 1.27 billion units, according to data from market tracker IDC.

    “The supply constraints pulling down on the market since last year have eased and the industry has shifted to a demand-constrained market,” said Nabila Popal, research director at IDC. “High inventory in channels and low demand with no signs of immediate recovery has OEMs panicking and cutting their orders drastically for 2022.”

    The news that there is just not enough demand for the trinkets and beads of the world’s largest company promptly hammered futures, which not only gave up all overnight gains, but promptly tumbled back to session – and fresh 2022 – lows.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 22:11

  • 30-Year US Mortgage Rises Above 7% For The First Time Since 2000; Fastest Surge In History
    30-Year US Mortgage Rises Above 7% For The First Time Since 2000; Fastest Surge In History

    Less than two weeks ago we cited Freddie Mac according to which the average 30 year US mortgage just rose above 6% for the first time since 2008, with real-estate brokerage Redfin commemorating the move by saying that “This Is The Sharpest Turn In The Housing Market Since The 2008 Crash.” Well, just a few days later, Jeff Gundlach was so kind to point out this evening…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    …that  the national average 30 year mortgage rate just soared above 7.0%, hitting 7.08% and the highest since December 11, 2000.

    This was the fastest 1% increase in mortgage rates in history; and the fact that it took place inside of a month is even more remarkable.

    There is nothing we can add here that isn’t self-explanatory, and that we haven’t said already, like for example the fastest ever collapse in YoY Case-Shiller prices, as well as the first sequential drop in 112 years…

    … not to mention that the typical home now sells for less than the asking price…

    … but what is perhaps most remarkable is that according to the Altanta Fed, as of a few weeks ago, the median American household would needed to spend 44.5% of their income to afford payments on a median-priced home in the US, the highest percentage on record with data going back to 2006.

    Well, as of today, that number is just over 50%. That’s right: more than half of the average US household’s income goes to paying housing payments, nearly double what this number was just two years ago.

    That such a move can’t end in anything but tears is obvious to everyone… but the Fed, which still thinks it can somehow avoid the most destructive of hard landings.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 21:41

  • Oil Prices Are About To Reverse Course
    Oil Prices Are About To Reverse Course

    By Irina Slav of OilPrice.com

    “That would be the road to hell for America,” JP Morgan’s CEO Jamie Dimon said last week, referring to a suggestion that all big banks divest from the oil and gas industry. In the same week, Aramco’s chief executive warned that years of underinvestment in new oil production are beginning to bear fruit, which is an undersupplied market.

    Despite these statements that suggested oil prices should move higher, oil fell for much of the week. Yet it wasn’t dragged down by fundamentals. Oil prices are down because many traders and investors are bracing for a recession.

    The bad news is that even in a recession, oil prices can go higher, and this is exactly what some of those banks that kept JP Morgan company at last week’s Congress hearing expected.

    Actually, JP Morgan was one of the bullish forecasters. Last week, the banking major’s analysts wrote in a note that they expected Brent crude to rebound to $101 in the fourth quarter. The analysts cited tighter supply as the reason for their forecast.

    Goldman Sachs is even more bullish. Three weeks ago, the bank’s analysts said Brent could hit $125 next year despite the oil price cap touted by the G7 as a tool both for keeping the market supplied with Russian oil and for lowering prices. They remain bullish to date.

    Morgan Stanley is a little more modest in its price expectations, seeking Brent crude at $95 per barrel in the last quarter of the year. It’s worth noting that this is a downward revision of the bank’s price outlook for the fourth quarter, which happened two weeks ago, prompted by growing recession fears.

    UBS also revised down its price expectations earlier this month, again citing recession concerns as well as the continued flow of Russian oil to Asian importers. That downward revision, however, brought Brent to $110, with analysts noting it could rise to $125 by the end of the third quarter of 2023.

    The reasons that the Swiss bank gave for the expected rebound are as interesting as they are worrying. According to UBS, oil prices wouldn’t rebound because of a recovering global economy. They would rebound because of the greater demand for oil products for electricity generation and because of tighter overall markets as the U.S. ends its SPR oil sale program.

    During the current quarter, oil prices have slumped by 20 percent, Bloomberg noted in a report on bank forecasts about its price. The reason, once again, had nothing to do with supply and demand dynamics. It had a lot to do with central bank policies and specifically the Fed’s aggressive move to rein in inflation by a quick succession of rate hikes that have pushed the dollar a lot higher, making commodities priced in the currency more expensive.

    On the fundamental front, the G7 is pushing ahead with the oil price cap, even though Russia said that it would simply not sell oil to a country enforcing a price cap. The EU, for its part, is currently discussing yet another package of sanctions against Moscow following the news that four eastern Ukrainian regions would be holding referendums to join the Russian Federation.

    Meanwhile, OPEC+ keeps falling well short of its production targets, and this will likely continue. In addition, some analysts expect the cartel to implement more production cuts, further squeezing global supply.

    In the U.S., inventories in the strategic petroleum reserve are at the lowest in decades, and this has worried some. Others, like Robert Rapier, have pointed out that the SPR is not as vital for the country’s supply as it used to be decades ago when the U.S. was heavily dependent on oil imports.

    What the above suggests is what Aramco’s Nasser warned about last week. The oil market is not in balance, and supply is getting tighter because there is little in the way of new supply to make up for natural depletion, which has been accompanied by other factors such as political instability and U.S. sanctions on large producers.

    At the same time, with the EU tightening the sanction screws on Russia, chances are that gas prices will remain elevated, which will result in what UBS noted as one factor for higher oil prices: greater demand for fuels to use in the generation of electricity instead of even costlier natural gas.

    “The consequence of global inventory drawdowns is that once demand picks up, the upshot in prices will happen all over again,” Morgan Stanley global oil strategist Martijn Rats told Bloomberg. “For now, demand has taken a step back, but the supply picture hasn’t changed that much; the supply ceiling is not that far away at all. As soon as demand picks up, we will have the same price pressures in the market again.”

    In a nutshell, this is the ultimate reason why oil prices will likely soon be on their way back up. Supply growth is stalling while demand is about to pick up. And depending on how strongly it picks up, we could see a lot higher oil prices next year.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 21:00

  • US Tells Snowden Return Home To "Face Justice" Or Risk Conscription In Russian Army
    US Tells Snowden Return Home To “Face Justice” Or Risk Conscription In Russian Army

    Upon learning of Monday’s decree signed by Vladimir Putin to grant Russian citizenship to ex-NSA employee Edward Snowden after having been given asylum since he arrived there in 2013, the US administration called on Snowden to return to American soil to “face justice”.

    “Mr. Snowden should return to the United States where he should face justice as any other American citizen would,” State Department spokesman Ned Price said Monday.

    Edward Snowden posted a photo of his family to Twitter on Monday.

    But Price followed with a claim that’s being disputed by Snowden’s legal defense team. “Perhaps the only thing that has changed, is that as a result of his Russian citizenship, apparently now he may well be conscripted to fight in Russia’s war in Ukraine,” he said.

    In response, Snowden’s lawyer was quoted in Russia’s Sputnik as saying since Snowden never served in the Russian army, he will not be impacted by the ‘partial mobilization’ – which applies to reservists, though there have been conflicting reports of instances of draft notices being sent out to Russian young men:

    “He did not serve in the Russian army, therefore, according to our current legislation, he does not fall into this category of citizens, which is now called up. You know that now they are calling up reservists who have served and have the appropriate specialty. And then he will act according to the law, as everything is provided for in Russian legislation,” Anatoly Kucherena, Snowden’s laywer in Russia, said.

    The decree enacted on Monday stated as follows:

    “In accordance with paragraph ‘a’ of Article 89 of the Constitution of the Russian Federation, I decide: to accept the following persons in the citizenship of the Russian Federation: Edward Joseph Snowden, born June 21, 1983, in the United States of America.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In a statement posted to Twitter, Snowden said he had applied for and obtained dual citizenship on fears that he could be separated from his son without Russian citizenship.

    Snowden remains America’s most visible whistleblower, after a career in US intelligence, including as a contractor for the NSA and CIA, he exposed pervasive US government domestic surveillance, which critics say is a severe violation of individual Americans’ rights as guaranteed under the Constitution.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 20:40

  • Air Force Academy Defends Telling Cadets To Replace 'Mom And Dad' With 'Gender-Neutral Language'
    Air Force Academy Defends Telling Cadets To Replace ‘Mom And Dad’ With ‘Gender-Neutral Language’

    Authored by Bill Pan via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Members of the U.S. Air Force Academy Class of 2021 salute during their graduation ceremony at Falcon Stadium in Colorado Springs, Colorado, on May 26, 2021. (Michael Ciaglo/Getty Images)

    The U.S. Air Force Academy has defended its teaching cadets to avoid “gender-specific terms” such as “mom” or “dad,” saying that “inclusive language” is important to its mission of training leaders capable of winning wars.

    The Colorado Springs-based military school recently met with criticism over a slide that instructs cadets to replace gender-specific terms with gender-neutral ones. For example, “partner” is considered a better alternative to “boyfriend” or “girlfriend.” Terms like “parents,” “caregivers,” and “guardians” are preferable to “mom” or “dad.”

    To be “inclusive,” cadets should also avoid saying that they are “colorblind” or that they “don’t see color” or “we’re all just people,” according to the slide.

    A screenshot of the slide, which is part of a training titled “Diversity and Inclusion: What it is, why we care, and what we can do,” was shared with Fox News by Rep. Mike Waltz (R-Fla.), an Afghan War veteran and vocal critic of “wokeness” in the U.S. military.

    “It’s been a tradition in the military to get letters from Mom and Dad or your boyfriend and girlfriend for as long as there’s been a military,” Waltz told Fox News. “Now we’re instructing every cadet entering the Air Force to not say ‘mom’ and ‘dad,’ to not say ‘boyfriend’ or ‘girlfriend’ and this kind of drive towards gender neutrality.”

    “I think the Air Force should be worried about the ‘macroaggressions’ against America that are happening all over the world,” he added in a mocking reference to “microagression,” a term leftists use for behaviors they see as unintentional or indirect discrimination against members of a marginalized group.

    Academy’s Response

    In response to criticism, the Academy said the language of the slide was taken out of context and “misrepresented.”

    “The Air Force Academy does not prohibit the use of ‘Mom and Dad’ or other gender-specific terms,” the Academy said in a statement. “The slide in question was not intended to stand alone.

    The slide, according to the Academy, was intended to “demonstrate how respect for others should be used to build inclusive teams, producing more effective warfighting units.”

    “USAFA develops leaders of character that can lead diverse teams of Airmen and Guardians inclusively, to enhance innovation and win future conflict,” the Academy said. “It is the diversity of Airmen and Guardians coming from all corners of our nation who perform the Department of the Air Force’s hundreds of critical mission sets that make us the best, most innovative Air and Space Forces the world has ever known.”

    In another slide shared by Waltz, cadets are referred to the Academy’s “Diversity & Inclusion Reading Room” for additional “resources” on the topic. That room, according to a February 2021 news release, is a “safe space” intended to “broaden and deepen exploration of the issues involved in diversity, inclusion and justice.”

    “Mark Jensen, president of the Academy’s faculty senate and a philosophy professor, said the reading room is the result of teamwork between faculty members and the Academy’s ongoing Critical Conversation series that formed in the wake of George Floyd’s Death,” the Academy reported at that time.

    Communist Tactics

    Waltz, who is a ranking member of the House Armed Services Subcommittee on Readiness, shared with Fox a particular concern that the program’s structure appears to create a “separate, parallel chain of command.”

    “To those of us who are a little bit older, it reminds us of what the Soviets used to do or what the Chinese do today, where they literally have political commissars inserted at every level end of the chain of command, but they have a separate reporting chain to ensure that the military is abiding by their ideology and their political doctrine,” Waltz said.

    Not only do they have diversity and equity officers in the cadet chain of command, they wear a special insignia, which is exactly what the political commissars—they would wear an armband in both the Soviet army and now in the Chinese Communist military. I just think there are some really alarming parallels.”

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 20:20

  • 29% Of Americans Now Drawing From Their Savings "More Than Usual", New Survey Shows
    29% Of Americans Now Drawing From Their Savings “More Than Usual”, New Survey Shows

    New data out last week in the latest Forbes Advisor-Ipsos Consumer Confidence Weekly Tracker had shed some light on just how much Americans have been dipping into their savings as economic conditions worsen in the country. 

    While the survey showed that economic sentiment amongst Americans is unchanged, it still sits at levels that are “significantly lower than it did to start the year”, the report says. 

    While some indices contained in the survey pertaining to investments, expectations and jobs remain relatively stable (expectations declined slightly), it’s of note that the survey showed “a significant increase in the number of Americans who are withdrawing from their savings more than usual and investing or saving money less than usual.”

    Overall confidence still remains 3.4 points below the pandemic average, the report showed.

    The expectations sub-index, mentioned above, is down 0.7 points from two weeks ago and sitting “below its pandemic and historical averages, as well as its pre-pandemic reading”. 

    The report also notes that “for the third time in four months, the amount that draw from their savings more than usual outnumbers those who do so less than usual.”

    “Americans who do report a change are exercising caution. Those who say they spend money, borrow money/use credit, invest/save money, and pay off their loans/credit more than usual are outnumbered by those who say they do these things less than usual,” the report says. 

    Additionally, there has been an increase in the number of people who said they are saving less than usual (up 8 points to 46%). The report indicates that there has been an “increase in the percentage of those saying they are now drawing from their savings more than usual” (up 8 points to 29%). This number marks its highest point since tracking the data started)

    The results were based on data from an Ipsos survey conducted September 19 – 20, 2022 with a sample of 942 adults aged 18-74 from the continental U.S., Alaska, and Hawaii who were interviewed online in English, the report said. 

    You can view the survey’s full results and examine the questions used to conduct the research at this link

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 20:00

  • Arizona Woman Made $7.2 Million From Human Smuggling In 6 Months: Police
    Arizona Woman Made $7.2 Million From Human Smuggling In 6 Months: Police

    Authored by Charlotte Cuthbertson via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Tania Estudillo Hernandez, 24, was arrested and charged with crimes related to human smuggling and possession of weapons, in El Mirage, Ariz., on Sept. 23, 2022. (Maricopa County Jail)

    A 24-year-old Arizona woman was arrested and charged with crimes related to a human smuggling enterprise on Sept. 23, according to the El Mirage Police Department (EMPD).

    Over a six-month period at least, the woman, Tania Estudillo Hernandez, had allegedly held and/or processed 80 to 100 illegal aliens per month at a residence in El Mirage, the police department stated in a Facebook post.

    The illegal aliens were charged as much as $15,000 each in smuggling fees, police said. At $15,000 a person, for 80 people per month over six months, that’s a total of $7.2 million.

    Police said the department received a report of a person being held for ransom at the El Mirage address on the morning of Sept. 23.

    The complainant stated in the residence there were multiple people kidnapped, including her husband,” the EMPD stated.

    Officers stopped a vehicle leaving the residence and discovered Hernandez transporting a Guatemalan national, the report stated.

    EMPD learned that while conducting the traffic stop, two smugglers left the home with 10 Undocumented Immigrants,” the police department noted.

    During a subsequent search warrant executed on the home police seized a semi-auto rifle, two handguns (one of which was reported stolen out of Phoenix), and ammunition.

    “Ledgers documenting human smuggling, and other evidence of human smuggling was seized, to include evidence that Tania Estudillo Hernandez managed and directed smuggling operations,” the EMPD stated.

    A Google maps view of W Dahlia Drive, El Mirage, Ariz., where an alleged human smuggler was holding illegal immigrants on Sept. 23, 2022. (screenshot)

    Hernandez was booked into Maricopa County Jail on violations of kidnapping, money laundering, illegally conducting or participation in an illegal enterprise, and conspiracy, police said.

    El Mirage is located in the greater Phoenix metropolitan area and is less than 3 hours’ drive to the U.S.–Mexico border.

    The Tucson Border Patrol sector in Arizona leads the nation in known gotaways, which are illegal aliens that Border Patrol detects, but fails to capture. Border Patrol reported about 10,000 illegal alien gotaways in the Tucson sector per month during the last several months, according to provisional Customs and Border Protection numbers obtained by The Epoch Times.

    Border agents in Arizona have apprehended more than 514,000 illegal aliens in fiscal year 2022, which ends on Sept. 30.

    Often, Border Patrol agents are tied up processing large groups of illegal border crossers, which leaves miles of border unpatrolled.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 19:40

  • Coast Guard Spots Chinese, Russian Warship Formation Off Alaska
    Coast Guard Spots Chinese, Russian Warship Formation Off Alaska

    The US military revealed Monday that earlier this month a US Coast Guard had ship embarked on a routine patrol in the Bering Sea and its crew was surprised to come across a Chinese PLA Navy guided missile cruiser.

    But more rare and unexpected was that the Coast Guard soon discovered the Chinese ship wasn’t alone as it sailed off Alaska’s coast, but was accompanied by two additional Chinese military ships and four Russian naval vessels, including a destroyer. The Chinese-Russian patrol group was described as being “in single formation”. 

    Image: U.S. Coast Guard 

    The Coast Guard in releasing a photo of the encounter stated, “The Coast Guard Cutter Kimball crew on a routine patrol in the Bering Sea encountered a People’s Republic of China Guided Missile Cruiser, Renhai CG 101, sailing approximately 75 nautical miles north of Kiska Island, Alaska, September 19, 2022.”

    According to more details by the Coast Guard and reported in the Associated Press

    The Honolulu-based Kimball, a 418-foot vessel, observed as the ships broke formation and dispersed. A C-130 Hercules provided air support for the Kimball from the Coast Guard station in Kodiak.

    “While the formation has operated in accordance with international rules and norms, we will meet presence with presence to ensure there are no disruptions to U.S. interests in the maritime environment around Alaska,” said 17th Coast Guard District commander Rear Adm. Nathan Moore.

    The reference to the “presence with presence” patrol strategy is a method of dissuading such enemy foreign vessels from coming near US waters by maintaining frequent naval and coast guard patrol activity.

    This latest incident follows something similar a year ago, when in September 2021 Chinese ships were spotted by Coast Guard observers 50 miles off the Aleutian Islands. The Chinese and Russian navies have also been ramping up coordinated activity in the Sea of Japan and near Japanese islands, which Tokyo has protested as an unwarranted intrusion.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 19:20

  • EU Chief Calls Nord Stream Attack "Sabotage", Warns Of "Strongest Possible Response"
    EU Chief Calls Nord Stream Attack “Sabotage”, Warns Of “Strongest Possible Response”

    Update (1910ET): 

    European Commission chief Ursula von der Leyen confirmed the Nord Stream pipeline system leaks were caused by “sabotage,” and warned of the “strongest possible response” should active European energy infrastructure be attacked. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Earlier, Danish Prime Minister Mette Frederiksen described the three separate leaks on NS1 and NS2 as “deliberate acts,” adding: “It’s hard to imagine that it’s accidental.”

    On Monday, Swedish seismologists reported the detection of underwater explosions – shortly after which large patches of roiling gas could be seen on the surface in the same area.

    As rumors swirl over who is responsible for the incident, one message it sent was clear – vital systems are vulnerable to attack.

    The most important message that somebody wants to send, is what one is capable of doing with an offline pipeline can also be done with active pipelines, or undersea cables, or other infrastructure,” said Julian Pawlak, a researcher at the German Institute for Defense and Strategic Studies, in a statement to the NY Times.

    In response, Denmark and Norway announced increased security around their energy infrastructure, and Norway, now Europe’s most important producer of gas and oil, called for “increased vigilance by all operators and vessel owners.” In a statement, Norway’s energy minister, Terje Aasland, cited “reports of increased drone activity” around its coast, and said that much of what he had learned of the Nord Stream incidents “indicates acts of sabotage.” -NY Times

    And while Poland’s former Defense Minister appeared to thank the United States for the attack (a perfectly good explanation for which we’re sure is will be offered), Poland’s PM, Mateusz Morawiecki, laid the blame on Russia for targeting the pipelines – suggesting that the attack was an attempt to escalate the Ukraine conflict.

    “We do not know the details of what happened yet, but we can clearly see that it is an act of sabotage,” said Morawiecki, adding “An act that probably marks the next stage in the escalation of this situation in Ukraine.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    * * * 

    Update (1445ET): 

    German magazine Spiegel said the US Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) recently warned Berlin about the increasing signs of a possible planned attack on the Nord Stream pipeline system. 

    Spiegel reported, citing unnamed sources, that the CIA tipped off Berlin in the summer about possible attacks on NS1 and NS2. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    * * * 

    Update (1415 ET): 

    Prime Minister of Denmark Mette Frederiksen told reporters Nord Stream pipeline system damage to NS1 and NS2 “are deliberate actions, not an accident.”  

    “It is now the clear assessment by authorities that these are deliberate actions. It was not an accident.

    “There is no information yet to indicate who may be behind this action, Frederiksen said, adding that authorities don’t see NS1 and NS2 damage as a military threat against Denmark. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    * * * 

    Update (1215ET):

    CNN’s White House and national security reporter Natasha Bertrand said the Biden administration “is not going to speculate on the cause” of the Nord Stream pipeline system damage to NS1 and NS2. 

    “The US stands ready to support European partners’ efforts as they investigate,” Bertrand said. 

    Another CNN national security reporter, Kylie Atwood, tweeted that US Secretary of State Antony Blinken said it would be “in no one’s interest” if NS leaks were confirmed as the result of an attack or sabotage.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Remember what Undersecretary of State for Political Affairs Victoria Nuland said earlier this year… 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    * * * 

    Update (1025ET):

    AFP News reported the US is ‘ready to provide support’ to Europe after the Nord Stream pipeline system leaks. 

    There was no further information on what type of support, but one can only imagine it would involve increased LNG cargo shipments to the EU.  

    There’s only one issue… 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    * * * 

    Update (0932ET): 

    Swedish broadcaster SVT reported that the Swedish National Seismic Network detected two underwater explosions near the Nord Stream pipeline system on Monday. 

    “One of the explosions had a magnitude of 2.3, and was registered at as many as 30 measuring stations in southern Sweden,” SVT said. 

    Bjorn Lund, a professor in seismology and director of the Swedish National Seismic Network, said these two seismic events were explosions.  

    Here’s a map of the three leaks on the Nord Stream pipeline system. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Bloomberg’s Javier Blas said the size of the “gas leak is huge.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    So the question remains what (or who) caused the blasts? 

    Remember what President Biden said weeks before Russia invaded Ukraine:  

     “If Russia invades…then there will be no longer a Nord Stream 2. We will bring an end to it.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    * * * 

    Update (0920ET):

    Swedish daily newspaper Aftonbaldet quoted the Swedish Defense Force’s chief of operations, Michael Claesson, who said it’s not ruled out that there’s a connection to the gas leaks and Russia’s mobilization last week. 

    Claesson then told the paper that the incident was a “military matter.” 

    * * * 

    Update (0910ET): 

    Danish Defense Forces published the first images of the gas leaks from the Nord Stream pipeline system near the exclusive economic zone southeast of Bornholm island, according to the Swedish daily newspaper Aftonbaldet

    The first images show a large surface area of gas bubbles in the Baltic Sea. 

    Here are more images of one of the leaks. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Another leak was reported by the Danish Defense Forces to be 1 kilometer in diameter on the surface water. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This is an absolutely massive leak. 

    A handful of EU officials suspect the pipelines were sabotaged.  

    * * * 

    Update (0842ET):

    Sweden’s government held a crisis management meeting with other public authorities over the damage to the Nord Stream pipeline system, Swedish daily newspaper Aftonbaldet said, citing comments from Foreign Minister Ann Linde. 

    Linde said Sweden may discuss the pipeline damage with Denmark later today.  

    Denmark is tightening security around all energy assets as some European officials speculate the NS pipeline system was sabotaged. 

    * * * 

    The plot thickens about what caused damage to three lines of the Nord Stream gas-pipeline system under the Baltic Sea to Europe as some European officials now suspect sabotage.

    Nord Stream AG, the operator of the NS pipeline system, published a statement Tuesday that read, “the destruction that happened within one day at three lines of the Nord Stream pipeline system is unprecedented … and impossible now to estimate the timeframe for restoring operations of the gas shipment infrastructure.” 

    On Monday, NS2 gas pipeline and two NS1 lines reported rapid pressure drops, with gas leaks reported by Swedish and Danish authorities in the Baltic Sea near the exclusive economic zone southeast of Bornholm island. 

    A more in-depth view of the incident area. 

    Pressure drops in the NS gas-pipeline system could be the biggest signal that flows via NS1 might not resume this winter. Germany and surrounding countries are investigating the incident. NS2 cannot impact flows to the EU because the controversial idled conduit was never operational after German Chancellor Olaf Scholz canceled it after Russia invaded Ukraine earlier this year.

    Klaus Mueller, the president of the German energy network regulator, tweeted that the market situation remains “tense,” but Germany and the EU are no longer dependent on NS supplies. 

    Nord Stream AG issued an outage message that is active until Oct. 26, while the German economy ministry said it’s investigating the incident. 

    Dutch front-month gas, the European benchmark, was up nearly 10% at 190.50 euros per megawatt-hour on Tuesday morning. 

    The simultaneous pressure drop of the NS lines suggests some market participants may watch for any indication of sabotage. 

    Denmark’s Prime Minister Mette Frederiksen said it was hard to imagine NS gas leaks were caused by a “coincidence.” 

    Frederiksen didn’t rule out sabotage, though she said it was too early to draw any conclusions, according to Reuters, quoting public broadcaster DR during a visit to Poland. 

    A German security official told Bloomberg that NS damage appears to be the result of “sabotage.”

    The evidence points to a violent act, rather than a technical issue, according to a German security official, who asked not to be identified because the matter is being probed. -Bloomberg 

    German daily newspaper Tagesspiegel reported that “the Nord Stream pipelines may have been damaged by targeted attacks and leaked as a result.”

    A source close to the government, quoted in the newspaper, said, “everything speaks against a coincidence.”

    We cannot imagine a scenario that is not a targeted attack,” the source said.

    Die Welt, another German newspaper, reported the timing of the NS damage may suggest sabotage and was unlikely to be an accident. 

    Reporters asked Kremlin spokesman Dmitry Peskov if the NS system’s pressure drop could be due to sabotage. He responded: “It is impossible to exclude any options.”

    There appears to be no immediate end to the gas leak from NS pipelines, according to the Danish national daily newspaper Berlingske, which quoted Danish Energy Authority. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The energy authority said, “a lot of gas is coming out, so it is not a small crack, it’s a really big hole. Nord Stream leaks can be a deliberate act, but it can also be something else, it’s just extremely rare that something like this happens.”

    *Developing…  

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 19:10

  • Beto Turns On Biden, Blames Prez For Latino Voters' Rightward Shift
    Beto Turns On Biden, Blames Prez For Latino Voters’ Rightward Shift

    Authored by Dorothy Li via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Texas Democratic gubernatorial candidate Beto O’Rourke speaks during a campaign rally at Republic Square in Austin, Texas on December 04, 2021. (Brandon Bell/Getty Images)

    Beto O’Rourke has blamed Joe Biden’s actions during the 2020 election as playing a part in Latino voters’ rightward political shift in recent years.

    Candidate Biden didn’t spend a dime or a day in the Rio Grande Valley—or really anywhere in Texas, for that matter—once we got down in the homestretch of the general election,” O’Rourke said at the Texas Tribune Festival on Sept. 24.

    “You got to be locking eyeballs with the people that you want to fight for and serve and whose votes that you want to win.”

    The rightward shift of Hispanic and Latino voters made headlines in the 2020 election.

    Trump saw more support from Latino voters in 2020 than in 2016. According to Pew Research, Trump moved from 28 percent to 38 percent approval among Hispanic voters, a gain of 10 percent. Biden, meanwhile, earned 59 percent of the Hispanic voters, down from 62 percent Democratic nominee Hillary Clinton received in her 2016 election.

    In South Texas, a historically Democratic stronghold, Hispanic votes shifted significantly. For example, Zapata County, where Clinton won by 33 percentage points in 2016, flipped to Trump in 2020.

    “Republicans showed up with a very strong, compelling economic message,” O’Rourke said Saturday when asked why the Hispanic voters in Texas shifted to GOP candidates.

    From Trump, it was literally one syllable, one word,” O’Rourke continued. “It was ‘jobs,’ and he kind of offered a false choice: ‘I can either keep you holed up in your house during this pandemic, or I can open up all places of employment and prioritize the economy.’

    What did we have on our side? Nothing,” he added.

    The momentum Republicans gained among Hispanics appears to be sustained in Texas so far. In a June special election, conservative Republican Mayra Flores defeated Democrat Dan Sanchez by roughly eight percentage points. Flores became only the second Republican to ever win in a Rio Grande Valley congressional district and the first Mexican-born Republican ever elected to Congress from Texas.

    Texas Gov. Greg Abbott speaks at a press conference at the Capitol in Austin, Texas, on June 8, 2021. (Montinique Monroe/Getty Images)

    Upcoming Governor Race

    O’Rourke, who is facing off against Republican Gov. Greg Abbott in the upcoming midterm election, said he would not repeat the same errors Democrats made two years ago.

    “I am making sure that we do not commit the same sin as some Democrats before me have committed, which is take voters of color—Black voters and Latino—for granted,” he said, adding that his Spanish language skills gave him a “competitive advantage.”

    Recent polls show the democratic candidate is falling behind Abbott, who is seeking a third term as governor. According to a poll released on Sept. 19 by The Dallas Morning News and the University of Texas at Tyler, Abbott had a lead of 9 percentage points over O’Rourke.

    But the 49-year-old shrugged off the survey results.

    “I take these polls with a grain of salt,” he said.

    John Haughey contributed to the report.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 19:00

  • Apple Sued After 67 Year Old Employee Claims Bonus Was Withheld Because Of His Age
    Apple Sued After 67 Year Old Employee Claims Bonus Was Withheld Because Of His Age

    Color us surprised to see a “woke” workplace like Apple being sued for discrimination, but that’s exactly what’s happening in one case where the popular iPhone manufacturer is being accused of age bias.

    Apple is being sued by an employee who claims he wasn’t awarded restricted stock like others in his position were because of his age.

    And the kicker? The suit claims that Apple admitted the employee didn’t get the stock because it was specifically “designed as an investment in the future” and that the employee’s supervisor made an “age based assumption” that the employee would be retiring soon. 

    The employee, 67 year old Donald Shruhan Jr., said he wasn’t awarded stock in 2019 despite getting an “excellent performance review”. According to Bloomberg, the suit also claims that “two other senior directors in his unit both received stock awards ‘commensurate with their performance,’ but ‘each was significantly younger’.”

    Shruhan, who is a senior manager on Apple’s global security team, says it was the first time in 11 years he didn’t get a bonus commensurate with his performance, Bloomberg reported. He claims he should have received a bonus between $800,000 and $850,000. 

    Shruhan tried to solve his issue by going through the company first, but after reaching an “impasse” with Apple human resources, he obtained a right-to-sue letter from the California Department of Fair Employment and Housing.

    To this, we can only add: Tim Cook is 61 years old. When will he stop being awarded restricted stock units because of his age? 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 18:40

  • Russia Confirms 'Sporadic' Contacts With US On Nuclear Weapons
    Russia Confirms ‘Sporadic’ Contacts With US On Nuclear Weapons

    Authored by Dave DeCamp via AntiWar.com,

    Kremlin spokesman Dmitry Peskov said Monday that the US and Russia have had “sporadic” contact over the issue of nuclear arms as tensions are soaring between the world’s largest nuclear-armed powers.

    “There are channels for dialogue at the proper level, but they are of a very sporadic nature. At least they allow for the exchange of some emergency messages about each other’s positions,” Peskov said.

    When Russian President Vladimir Putin ordered a partial mobilization last week, he warned that Russia could use nuclear weapons to protect its “territorial integrity.” The warning was significant since Russian territory is set to expand into Ukraine once referendums on joining Russia are completed in Russian-controlled areas.

    On Sunday, US National Security Advisor Jake Sullivan said the US warned Russia it would face “catastrophic consequences” if it used a nuclear weapon in Ukraine.

    Sullivan wouldn’t explain what that means but said the US “spelled out in detail” to Russia how it would respond. When asked if Russia had received such a message from the US, Peskov declined to comment.

    Since Russia invaded Ukraine on February 24, there have been virtually no public high-level meetings between US and Russian officials. Secretary of State Antony Blinken spoke with his Russian counterpart, Sergey Lavrov, in July, but the conversation was focused on a potential prisoner swap.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 18:20

  • General: Unvaccinated National Guardsmen Activated For Hurricane Ian
    General: Unvaccinated National Guardsmen Activated For Hurricane Ian

    Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    National Guard members are seen in a file photo. (Charlotte Cuthbertson/The Epoch Times)

    Ahead of Hurricane Ian’s predicted landfall in western Florida, the head of the Florida National Guard confirmed Monday that Guardsmen who are not vaccinated for COVID-19 will be activated in response to the storm.

    Florida National Guard Maj. Gen. James Eifert on Monday told reporters that the Pentagon’s vaccine mandate does not impact the state’s capacity to activate unvaccinated service members to deal with a natural disaster such as a hurricane.

    The vaccine mandate does not impact our ability to bring people in on state active duty … we will be activating all of those people [who are unvaccinated],” he remarked.

    Secretary of Defense Lloyd Austin mandated that all service members receive COVID-19 vaccination and that  National Guardsmen who refuse to get the shots must obtain a religious or medical exemption or face repercussions. Some Guard members could face a loss of wages and cannot train, while those who continue to refuse the vaccine can be potentially discharged, according to the Department of Defense.

    Numerous lawsuits have been filed against the Pentagon due to its mandate, while some lawmakers have questioned whether such orders are putting a damper on the U.S. armed forces’ recruitment efforts. And earlier this month, former Secretary of Defense Mark Esper warned that several branches of the military are severely “struggling” to find recruits.

    Storm Path

    The National Hurricane Center (NHC) on Monday afternoon said Ian is a Category 2 system with 100 mph winds. The storm has strengthened since Monday morning when forecasters said it was a Category 1 storm with wind speeds hovering around 85 mph.

    Meanwhile, hurricane warnings have now been issued for the central western Florida coastline, including Tampa Bay, indicating the storm is going to impact the area in the next 24 to 36 hours. First, Ian is on track to hit western Cuba, according to the NHC. After impacting Cuba, the system is expected to strengthen into at least a Category 3 hurricane with 111 mph or greater wind speeds.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 18:00

  • Tesla Shanghai Plant Running Under Maximum Capacity Despite Recent Production Upgrades
    Tesla Shanghai Plant Running Under Maximum Capacity Despite Recent Production Upgrades

    Despite yet another email leaking about how the company is expecting record deliveries for Q3, headlines are also breaking today suggesting that Tesla’s Shanghai plant – its main driver for sales in China an exports throughout Europe – is running under its maximum capacity.

    The plant will be running “at about 93% of capacity through the end of year,” Reuters reported this morning. The pace is despite the fact that the factory was recently upgraded to handle more production. 

    Production was recently upgraded to be able to handle 22,000 vehicles weekly, an increase of 30% from prior levels. One source told Reuters that the pace the factory was operating at was “lower than he had expected”. 

    The factory is capable of producing 14,000 Model Ys and 8,000 Model 3s per week. The company’s target is 20,500 units a week for the rest of the year, the sources told Reuters. 

    Recall, we reported two weeks ago that Tesla had delivered 76,965 vehicles in China for the month of August. 

    That number was up 172.8% from the month prior. Data from the China Passenger Car Association showed that the automaker sold 34,502 cars in China and exported 42,463 vehicles. 

    The numbers came even as battery maker CATL had to shut down part of its operations due to power restriction constraints during the month, Reuters reported. CATL’s Yibin plant supplies battery cells to Tesla Shanghai. 

    The stark difference in month-over-month numbers comes as China’s Shanghai plant was down for a planned upgrade for most of July. Recall, deliveries in China had crashed -64.2% heading into the month of August.

    Overall passenger car sales were up 28.4% in August, the CPCA noted. EV sales in China have been on the rebound since the government has reembraced subsidies and tax breaks, which it previously had planned on phasing out.  

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 17:40

  • "The Train Crash Scenario": California EV Mandates Will Further Stress An Already Exhausted Electric Grid
    “The Train Crash Scenario”: California EV Mandates Will Further Stress An Already Exhausted Electric Grid

    So apparently the idea of EVs providing a problem-free and pollution-free utopia where everybody lives in total harmony and there are no problems isn’t quite the reality of the situation.

    The reality in California, as the Wall Street Journal wrote about this week, is actually that EV charging is putting stress onto an aging grid and forcing the state to think about ways to generate more power. 

    The state’s plan to end gas powered vehicles by 2035 means that power needs in the state are going to increase. Meanwhile, as California’s grid has already been stressed this year, the state has been asking citizens to be mindful of when they charge their EVs – and even when they use their major appliances.

    Which, of course, begs the question: how the hell is the state going to go all electric within 12 years?

    First, it’ll need buy-in from its citizens over charging habits. Dan Bowermaster, senior program manager for electric transportation at EPRI, a nonprofit research group, told WSJ: “Are people going to top off every night? Are people going to wait every few days and then charge up all at once? There are a lot of questions about customer behavior.”

    Utilities and auto makers are already trying to offer incentives for owners to charge at certain times and using favorable methods, the report says. 

    The state is expected to have 5.4 million passenger EVs and 193,000 medium and heavy duty EVs by 2030, the state’s energy commission estimates. This charging will amount to 5% of the electric load at peak hours, compared to about 1% now. 

    Despite this, Liane Randolph, chair of the California Air Resources Board, is optimistic. She told the WSJ: “The reality is the grid is only stressed in a limited period, a few hours in the early evening on certain types of days. Most of the time it’s fine.” 

    Oh, okay. Problem solved.

    Well not quite. A study out of Stanford released last week showed that the grid could face problems late at night when cars are charged at home. Siobhan Powell, the study’s lead author, commented: “If everyone were doing that, it would cause really big problems.”

    At home charging draws about the same power as using 2.5 air conditioners, the report says. 

    John Moura, director of reliability assessment and performance analysis at the North American Electric Reliability Corp., added: “There’s some energy challenges in how we’re bringing on new resources to meet this new growth of electricity demand.” 

    “The disaster kind of comes from the rally cries from the public that utilities aren’t connecting their EVs fast enough. And now that bumps up against EV mandates. That’s the train-crash scenario.”

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/27/2022 – 17:20

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 27th September 2022

  • Remembering Hate Speech: Victor Davis Hanson
    Remembering Hate Speech: Victor Davis Hanson

    Authored by Victor Davis Hanson via American Greatness,

    It has been a canard of the Left that “words matter.” We are lectured that “hate speech” leads inevitably to street violence.

    So how ironic that the Left defames nearly half of America as dangerous “semi-fascist” extremists, white-raged and privileged, ultra MAGA, and guilty of all sorts of thought crimes from secession to civil insurrection? And what is the result?

    Does this constant demonization matter? And what are the bitter fruits of such labors? After all, what did Barack Obama long ago mean by “clingers” or once Hillary Clinton by “deplorables”  and “irredeemables”?

    What did Joe Biden imply by “dregs” and “chumps” and “semi-fascists”? Or what did the FBI lovebirds really mean by smelly Walmart goers and “hillbillies”? After a point, did not America get this monotonous message?

    And what does Joe Biden really mean when he recycles his academic advisors’ tired tropes of right-wing insurrectionists threatening the republic?

    MAGA Republicans do not respect the Constitution. They do not believe in the rule of law. They do not recognize the will of the people. . . . MAGA forces are determined to take this country backwards—backwards to an America where there is no right to choose, no right to privacy, no right to contraception, no right to marry who you love . . . They promote authoritarian leaders, and they fan the flames of political violence that are a threat to our personal rights, to the pursuit of justice, to the rule of law, to the very soul of this country . . . MAGA Republicans have made their choice. They embrace anger. They thrive on chaos. They live not in the light of truth but in the shadow of lies.

    When the president fuels the now familiar old narrative by claiming that 75 million who voted for Donald Trump do not live in the “light of truth” but in the “shadow of lies,” and they do not follow “the rule of law,” some questions naturally arise.

    First, what evidence does the president adduce to prove that 75 million Morlocks in the shadows are liars and avoid the “light of truth” of the Eloi? By what criteria does he use to judge them “semi-fascists”?

    Is his proof the 120 days of violent looting, arson, violence, and death in the summer of 2020—virtually green-lighted by mayors, the media, and, yes, the current vice president? Who “fanned the flames of political violence” and were a “threat to the rule of law”?

    Does Biden mean half the country is not respecting the Constitution by its systematic attack on our long-standing constitutional precepts, from the Electoral College and the rights of states to set voting laws? Are the “semi-fascists” trying to pack the Supreme Court? End the filibuster? Bring in two states solely to elect four left-wing senators?

    Does the president mean the illegality of the often-rogue Washington-centric FBI, whose past director and legal counsel have lied to federal investigators and the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Court? Does he refer to himself who was enriched by the grifting efforts of his wayward son? Do semi-fascists brag that they got foreign state attorneys fired for looking into the shady dealings of their own family? Perhaps Biden was railing against scores of big-city state attorneys who systematically refuse to enforce the law, and so leave the innocent at the mercy of serially released criminal felons?

    Second, what are Americans in the Old Testament/eye-for-an-eye, tooth-for-a-tooth Prophet Biden’s eyes to do with those miscreants?

    What should America then do when half the country prefers to live in the “shadow of lies,” and rejects the “light of truth”?

    Sic the FBI on them to monitor their speech at school board meetings? Hire 87,000 IRS agents to continue the Obama-era policies of weaponizing the IRS? Bring Lois Lerner out of retirement?

    Put them in solitary confinement for “illegal parading”?

    Keep them out of their capital by stringing barbed wire and militarizing it with 30,000 federal troops?

    Draft the Democratic Party to work with the FBI in destroying a political candidate through false dossiers, paid informants, and concocted conspiracies?

    Leg-irons for former Trump officials?

    Performative FBI SWAT raids on their homes?

    Government workers colluding with private companies to censor free speech and expression?

    A new Ministry of Truth?

    Who then is destroying the rule of law? Joe Biden, who violated his oath of office and nullified the entire corpus of federal immigration law, in 1850s fashion, and allowed 3 million illegally to enter his country?

    Joe Biden, who by fiat illegally canceled an expected half-trillion dollars in student debt?

    Joe Biden, who recalibrated the FBI into a first-family retrieval service of lost computers and diaries of his wayward children?

    Or is the shadow-dweller who “does not respect the Constitution” none other than Hillary Clinton who hired two foreign nationals to compile dirt on her Republican opponents in hopes of warping an election, or the FBI who also hired both her paid fraudsters as FBI informants in efforts to aid the Clinton smear?

    Is urging a candidate never to concede if he lost the popular vote or boasting of joining #TheResistance to an elected president whom she pronounced “illegitimate” anti-Constitutionalism? Or maybe destroying subpoenaed emails or destroying court-ordered evidence?

    And who exactly are the merchants of racial hatred about whom we so often hear?

    Is it the same Joe Biden who claimed Barack Obama was the first black presidential candidate who could speak intelligently? The same Joe Biden who screamed to a group of accomplished black professionals that Mitt Romney would put “y’all back in chains”? The same Biden who bragged that his heroic Southern segregationist senatorial colleagues never called him “boy”?

    Or is it Joe the healer who called black media hosts “junkie” and “You ain’t black”?

    Perhaps it’s the unifier Biden who spun racist Corn-Pop stories about how he had faced down criminal black gang leaders? Or the ecumenical Biden who called a senior African American aide “my senior advisor and boy”? Who boasted that young black children used to love to feel the golden hairs on his tan legs?

    Or would Biden mean by racists none other than the current Democratic candidate for Senate in South Carolina, Krystle Matthews? She recently gushed that one must “treat white people like sh-t”?

    Or was it Kelisa Wing, the Pentagon’s “Chief Diversity, Equity and Inclusion Officer at the Department of Defense Education Activity”? She in the past complained, “I’m exhausted with these white folx in these [professional development] sessions,” and “I am exhausted by 99% of the white men in education and 95% of the white women. Where can I get a break from white nonsense for a while.”

    At one time, stereotyping millions as a toxic collective was the classic definition of racism.

    Is Wing a target of what Lloyd Austin and Mark Milley promised when they boasted of scouring the Pentagon ranks to root out racism and racial rage?

    Or maybe Biden was referring to Chicago Mayor Lori Lightfoot?

    She barred reporters from one-on-one interviews on the basis of race with the putdown, “By now, you may have heard the news that on the occasion of the two-year anniversary of my inauguration as mayor of this great city, I will be exclusively providing one-on-one interviews with journalists of color.”

    When Joe Biden talks about the supposed violent, racist, MAGA dwellers in darkness, does he produce data for his allegations? Are his proverbial white-male insurrectionists committing violent crimes at five times their numbers in the general population?

    Do MAGA Midwesterners threaten Orthodox Jews in New York or Asians in San Francisco? What do statistics suggest about who is disproportionately committing these hate crimes that Biden would otherwise characterize as typical of those living in the shadows or in lies?

    Are the MAGA voters swarming the homes of Supreme Court Justices? Are they running them out of restaurants? Are they mobbing at the doors of the Court to threaten justices by name, and warning that liberal justices won’t “know what hit you” as they justifiably “reap the whirlwind”?

    Is Biden’s putatively dangerous Trump supporter out killing a teenager who, postmortem, is dubbed a political activist opponent; running down dozens at Christmas parades; threatening a U.S. senator and his wife as they exited the White House; or attempting to assassinate key members of Congress?

    At the University of Oregon are white MAGA denizens in the “shadows of lies” screaming “F—k the Mormons” during football games, or plastering the Stanford campus with anti-Semitic posters of “Ben B Gone” bug spray to gin up violence to stop the implied Jewish insect Ben Shapiro from speaking?

    We are reaching a critical juncture now in America.

    Writing off half the population as irredeemable and deplorable or semi-fascists is not a sustainable proposition. And we can see how it is not.

    Is the chief diversity, equity, and inclusion officer at the Department of Defense relieved or worried that the army will not have enough white raging males to die in the next optional war in the Middle East at twice their percentages in the population? The Army has only met 50 percent of its annual recruiting target.

    When Biden demonizes in now stereotypical fashion—and without data—an entire 75 million person demographic, when the popular culture has legitimized smearing these millions as dangerous “racists” fueled by “white rage,” and when the media manufactures a series of fake melodramas—from the Russian collusion hoax to the Russian disinformation use of his son’s laptop to the Jussie Smollett lie, the Covington kids slander, or the Duke lacrosse and volleyball mythologies—at some point is it any wonder that we are beginning to witness an epidemic of violence directed at the supposedly privileged, or the supposedly politically incorrect, whether targeting random solitary women for violent acts or purported conservatives or any demographic who are all apparently deserving such punishment due to their race or political beliefs?

    Joe Biden’s “Phantom of the Opera” rant will be memorialized as the most reckless and venomous presidential speech in recent history. Such vile rhetoric fuels even viler reactions—and eventually filters down to the street where criminals believe that shooting a congressman or mobbing a Supreme Court justice or killing a solitary jogger or a teen-aged “Republican” is some sort of reification of what they feel is now acceptable retribution.

    In sum, what we used to know as “hate speech” is now presidentially acceptable speech, and what has followed from it is no surprise.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 23:40

  • "Murderapolis": Ground Zero For 'Defund The Police' Movement Now Suffering Horrendous Crime Wave
    “Murderapolis”: Ground Zero For ‘Defund The Police’ Movement Now Suffering Horrendous Crime Wave

    In the mid-1990s, the murder rate was so high in Minneapolis that it earned the nickname, “Murderapolis.”

    Now, more than two years after the Democrat stronghold turned into ground zero for the ‘defund the police’ movement after the murder of George Floyd, Murderopolis is back.

    In a kind of Newtonian response, the city became the epicenter of the culturally seismic “Defund the Police” movement. But that progressive local effort fizzled with a decisive referendum last November.

    Now, with its police department under investigation by the Department of Justice, the city of 425,000 is trying to find a way forward amid a period of heightened crime that began shortly after Floyd’s death.CNN

    In 2020, murders jumped from 46 to nearly 80. In 2021, 93 people were killed in the city. This year, homicides are on track to surpass 2020.

    “The criminals were celebrating. They were getting rich” after police withdrew from violent neighborhoods in the wake of Floyd’s killing, said longtime resident, KG Wilson. “They were selling drugs openly.”

    Wilson’s 6-year-old granddaughter was killed in May of 2021 after getting caught in the crossfire of a shootout in north Minneapolis.

    Others are blaming the pandemic.

    “It unsettled settled trajectories,” said former federal prosecutor, Mark Osler, who now teaches at St. Thomas School of Law in Minneapolis. “Kids who were going to school, who would have graduated but drifted off because there is no school — we’re seeing a lot of the violent crime is by juveniles.”

    After the left demonized cops following Floyd’s murder, the Minneapolis PD headcount dropped from 900 in early 2020 to around 560 in August – a loss of more than 1/3 of the force.

    The hate was so strong that a 2021 ballot measure which would have replaced the Minneapolis PD with a new “public health-oriented” Department of Public Safety, barely failed – with 56% of voters rejecting it (61% in north Minneapolis).

    Then, the city council got wise as crime skyrocketed – dealing a final blow to the “defund” movement with a vote to re-fund the police by reversing a cut they’d made the prior year. Mayor Jacob Frey, meanwhile, has proposed beefing up the police budget for the next two fiscal years.

    Feeling of lawlessness

    According to the report, some 60% of police calls for shots fired have come from the north side, despite it making up just 15% of the population. Young men are openly selling drugs in public during the day, such as a gas station on Broadway ave. dubbed the “murder station” due to all the fatal shootings.

    “You pull up to get gas — they try to sell you drugs,” said Paul Johnson, 56. “And not just three or four, but it’s a bulk of people.”

    Johnson’s friend, Brian Bogan, said he moved from north Minneapolis to relatively safer St. Paul, because he didn’t want his kids growing up in an area where you don’t know if “it’s fireworks or gunshots.”

    911 wait times have jumped

    After Floyd’s death average 911 response times from from 10 or 11 minutes in May of 2020, to 14 minutes later in the year – jumping in 2021 to more than 17 minutes in the north side’s fourth precinct, where they remain.

    Some nights are so busy that the dispatchers are directed to hold all non-priority-1 calls citywide; these would include reports of property damage, suspicious persons or theft. That happened during a frenetic five-hour stretch on the night of September 8, when officers responded to multiple shootings and calls for shots fired — many of them in north Minneapolis; one near the “murder station” — that left two dead and seven wounded. -CNN
    Things have gotten so bad that the Minneapolis PD has flatly refused to respond to certain crimes in a timely manner – such as thefts and stolen goods. According to the police, hostility towards officers has compelled them to take a slower approach in certain parts of town.

    Police officials have characterized the slower response times as an “expected byproduct of a depleted force that has witnessed an overwhelming wave of retirements, resignations and disability leaves” due to post-traumatic stress.

    “There’s really been a very fundamental challenge to our sense of purpose in law enforcement,” said interim Minneapolis Police Chief Amelia Huffman. “(Minneapolis) is the eye of the storm. So all of those challenges and the pressure is magnified, you know, a hundred fold — a thousand fold.”

     

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 23:20

  • New Zealand Prime Minister Calls For A Global Censorship System
    New Zealand Prime Minister Calls For A Global Censorship System

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    New Zealand Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern is the latest liberal leader to call for an international alliance to censor speech. Unsatisfied with the unprecedented corporate censorship of social media companies, leaders like Hillary Clinton have turned from private censorship to good old-fashioned state censorship. Speech regulation has become an article of faith on the left. Ardern used her speech this week to the United Nations General Assembly to call for censorship on a global scale.

    Ardern lashed out at “disinformation” and called for a global coalition to control speech. After nodding toward free speech, she proceeded to lay out a plan for its demise through government regulation:

    But what if that lie, told repeatedly, and across many platforms, prompts, inspires, or motivates others to take up arms. To threaten the security of others. To turn a blind eye to atrocities, or worse, to become complicit in them. What then?

    This is no longer a hypothetical. The weapons of war have changed, they are upon us and require the same level of action and activity that we put into the weapons of old.

    We recognized the threats that the old weapons created. We came together as communities to minimize these threats. We created international rules, norms and expectations. We never saw that as a threat to our individual liberties – rather, it was a preservation of them. The same must apply now as we take on these new challenges.

    Ardern noted how extremists use speech to spread lies without noting that non-extremists use the same free speech to counter such views.   To answer her question on “how do you tackle climate change if people do not believe it exists” is that you convince people using the same free speech.  Instead, Ardern appears to want to silence those who have doubts.

    While referring to a global censorship coalition as a “light-touch approach to disinformation,” Ardern revealed how sweeping such a system would likely be. She defended the need for such global censorship on having to combat those who question climate change and the need to stop “hateful and dangerous rhetoric and ideology.”

    “After all, how do you successfully end a war if people are led to believe the reason for its existence is not only legal but noble? How do you tackle climate change if people do not believe it exists? How do you ensure the human rights of others are upheld, when they are subjected to hateful and dangerous rhetoric and ideology?”

    That is the same rationale used by authoritarian countries like China, Iran, and Russia to censor dissidents, minority groups, and political rivals.  What is “hateful” and “dangerous” is a fluid concept that government have historically used to silence critics or dissenters.

    Ardern is the smiling face of the new generation of censors. At least the old generation of censors like the Iranians do not pretend to support free speech and openly admit that they are crushing dissent. The point is that we need to be equally on guard when censorship is pushed from the left with the best of motivations and the worst of means.

    As the great civil libertarian Justice Louis Brandeis once said, “the greatest dangers to liberty lurk in insidious encroachment by men of zeal, well-meaning but without understanding.”

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 23:00

  • Fake Meat Sales Plummet On High Prices, Woke Messaging
    Fake Meat Sales Plummet On High Prices, Woke Messaging

    A few years ago, life was good for the fake meat industry. Beyond Meat had been given vast amounts of real estate in grocery stores, and had scored a deal with Burger King to sell “Impossible” Whoppers. McDonald’s rolled out a McPlant burger (which was quietly shelved last month). Snarky woke advertisements permeated the airwaves and interwebs as plant-based ‘meats’ were on the rise. In fact, Beyond Meat waas valued at over $10bn in 2019, more than Macy’s or Xerox – with the most bullish investors claiming that plant-based meat would make up 15% of all meat sales by 2030.

    McDonald’s trialed a McPlant burger, left, but quickly discovered it was unpopular. Photograph: McDonalds/PA

    Now, as Bloomberg reports, the fake meat industry is getting ground into hamburger – and that doesn’t include cannibalistic nose-biting execs, according to Deloitte Consulting, LLC.

    Sales of refrigerated meat alternatives at retailers are down 10.5% by volume for the 52-weeks ending September 4, 2022, according to data from Information Resources Inc., or IRI. While higher prices are the top reason for the slide, it’s not the only one, according to Jonna Parker, a fresh food specialist at the market research company. -Bloomberg

    “Proteins that were cheaper on a price-per-pound basis did fare better,” said Parker, who noted that semi-vegetarian shoppers who used to opt for the alternative product will now choose the less-expensive real thing. In short, people are less willing to pay a premium for fake meat, especially considering that ‘taste and health concerns’ are playing a role.

    According to Deloitte, the fake meat industry has a perception problem. Based on a July survey of 2,000 consumers, there’s been a decline in the belief that plant-based meat is actually healthier and environmentally sustainable vs. meat from animals.

    Despite the increasing alarm over climate change, the number of Americans who are vegetarian or vegan has remained relatively stable over the last 20 years. About 5% of Americans in 2018 said they are vegetarian, while 3% are vegan, according to a Gallup poll.

    Even when participants in a study conducted at Purdue University in Indiana were given information about the carbon footprint of meat production, participants were more likely to go with regular meat over a plant-based alternative.

    Bhagyashree Katare, an author of the study, said that participants may have been put off by the taste of plant-based meat and the fact that it is not necessarily a healthier alternative to regular meat. Many plant-based meat alternatives are comparable to their real meat counterparts in nutritional content. That it costs about the same as meat also diminishes its attractiveness to consumers. -The Guardian

    If I’m spending money in a restaurant, and I’m a meat eater, why would I spend money on plant-based meat? I would rather eat an actual burger,” said Katare. “It’s a technology, and it takes a long time for people to trust the technology and adopt it. I think that’s where plant-based meat is. Maybe the technology will improve, and it will get better health-wise.”

    Photograph: Mike Blake/Reuters

    What’s more, the actual market may be much smaller than previously thought – which coincides with a ‘growing cultural resistance to its “woke” status’ – even among people who are trying in earnest to reduce their consumption of red meat.

    For example, when Cracker Barrel announced they were adding Impossible Foods’ sausage to its menu over the summer, it faced fierce opposition via social media.

    As The Guardian notes, the McDonald’s McPlant burger was shelved last month, as the push to get US meat eaters to switch to plant-based alternatives has proven a challenge.

    Multiple chains that partnered with the company, including McDonald’s, have quietly ended trial launches. In August, the company laid off 4% of its workforce after a slowdown in sales growth. Last week, its chief operating officer was reportedly arrested for biting another man on the nose during a road rage confrontation.

    It’s a dramatic reversal of fortune. Just two years ago, Beyond Meat, its competitor Impossible Foods and the plant-based meat industry at large seemed poised to start a food revolution. -Guardian

    “The bulls in the industry, I think, had a very wild, very optimistic estimate of how big the market could get,” said Mizuho Securities analyst John Baumgartner. “There was a lot of exuberance in this category. It was new, it was different, it was on trend.”

    Plant-based meat companies have been experimenting with different recipes to capture hungry customers. Photograph: Richard Drew/AP

    “But the consumer environment is tough, and this stuff is not cheap,” he added.

    Year-to-date, Beyond Meat stock is down 77%, and is valued at less than $900 million.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 22:40

  • The Dystopian Vision Of The Health-Information Police
    The Dystopian Vision Of The Health-Information Police

    Authored by Laura Powell via The Brownstone Institute,

    When Assemblymember Evan Low, the principal author of California Assembly Bill 2098, told the California Senate Committee that his bill was “really straightforward, very straightforward,” many of us in the gallery failed to restrain ourselves from expressing our incredulity. 

    He delivered this statement at the conclusion of a hearing that had lasted over an hour, during which it seemed no two Senators on the committee had the same idea of how the law would operate. Assemblymember Low had struggled to respond to questions from the committee and had often resorted to simply reading the text of the bill. That June 26 hearing presented the only time any legislators questioned the bill during its entire passage through the legislative process.

    Assembly Bill 2098 would empower the Medical Board of California to go after the licenses of physicians who disseminate “misinformation” or “disinformation” regarding Covid-19. The bill in its latest iteration defines misinformation as “false information that is contradicted by contemporary scientific consensus contrary to the standard of care.” The inscrutability of this definition lies at the core of the bill’s opponents concerns. 

    No clear scientific consensus exists with respect to this novel virus, and even if it did, it may be proven incorrect later. Without clear guidance regarding what would constitute “misinformation,” physicians can only guess if they risk losing their licenses for expressing their good-faith disagreements with positions of public health officials. Even if in practice, the Medical Board only applied the law to speech that the First Amendment does not protect, the law’s vagueness would render it unconstitutional, because it would tend to cause doctors to censor themselves.

    The million-dollar question remains unanswered: Who would be targeted by Assembly Bill 2098? On one hand, the California Medical Association, the bill’s sponsor, cites the example of doctors who call “into question public health efforts such as masking” as creating the need for this bill. Likewise, the taxpayer-funded lobbying group County Health Executives Association of California decries “a small minority of medical professionals” who have led some Californians to “reject public health measures such as masking and physical distancing.” 

    The analysis of the bill from the Senate committee, in discussing the need for this bill, cited the example of the state of Florida refusing to take action against the license of Florida Surgeon General for, among other things, “question[ing] the value of face masks in preventing the spread of the pandemic.” The idea that the effectiveness of masks in preventing the spread of Covid is part of the “contemporary scientific consensus” confirms physicians’ fears that they would risk discipline for questioning any edict from public health on Covid.

    On the other hand, when critics of Assembly Bill 2098 argue that questioning the effectiveness of masks falls well within the bounds of legitimate difference of opinions, proponents poo-poo their concerns about the law being applied in an overly broad way and insist that the law would only be used against truly “bad doctors.” But imbuing bureaucrats with power while trusting they will not exercise it would be incredibly foolish. 

    Some, such as Assemblymember Low, bill co-author Assemblymember Akilah Weber, and a representative of the California Medical Association, imply that this bill would only apply in cases of intentional harm. There is nothing in the letter of the law that limits the bill’s reach to situations where someone was harmed or where the information was disseminated knowing it was false. (Intentionally misleading would fall under the definition of “disinformation” as opposed to “misinformation.” An earlier draft of the bill mentioned harm to a patient as a factor for the Medical Board to consider.) 

    Members of the Medical Board of California itself have expressed confusion about how the law would be applied and withheld its support initially. MBC President Kristina Lawson, an attorney who has been a driving force behind this bill, claims to have clarity about how it would be applied but apparently is only willing to discuss the matter in private

    While most proponents say as little as possible regarding Assembly Bill 2098’s implications, one group is more vocal and less guarded in its statements. Two self-described “frontline” California doctors, Nick Sawyer and Taylor Nichols, formed No License for Disinformation (NLFD) in September 2021. 

    As its name suggests, the organization’s purpose is to promote policies that use the threat of medical license revocation to discourage doctors from spreading information it believes to be false. Sawyer has twice testified before legislative committees in favor of Assembly Bill 2098. NLFD’s prolific tweets and other public statements paint a dystopian picture that reflects opponents’ worst fears of the type of authoritarian regime proponents wish to impose. 

    NLFD pushes the idea that there is, as Sawyer described it his testimony before the Assembly committee on April 19, a “well-coordinated and well-funded network of doctors” who promote “anti-vaccine conspiracy theories, sow distrust in the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, the federal government, and ultimately the Covid-19 vaccines.” 

    At the outset, note the irony that NLFD frequently criticizes “conspiracy theorists” while promoting its own conspiracy theories. And NLFD not only wants to silence those who undermine faith in public health measures, but anyone who “sows distrust” in the government. Let that sink in.

    NLFD’s tweets elaborate on its conspiracy theories, which are, like most conspiracy theories, built on weak evidence that magnify tenuous connections. A recent tweet shared a long thread posted by one of its founders that purports to uncover a web of right-wing “disinformation” purveyors funded by oil money. It implicates, among others, anyone associated with the Great Barrington Declaration or Brownstone Institute and specifically names UCSF professor and doctor Vinay Prasadjournalist and author David Zweig, and Johns Hopkins epidemiologist Stefan Baral as part of this cabal. 

    An August 13, 2022 tweet promotes a Substack article, written by NLFD “Research Consultant” Allison Neitzel, which calls America’s Frontline PhysiciansFront Line COVID-19 Critical Care Alliance, the authors of the Great Barrington Declaration, and The Unity Project the “Big 4” responsible for a “physician-led attack on public health.” NLFD has often identified these four as its primary targets, sometimes adding the American Association of Physicians and Surgeons and Urgency of Normal to its hit list. NLFD asserts, without any basis, that these groups work together. 

    Some of NLFD’s targets, such as the Urgency of Normal’s leadership, are mainstream physicians. NLFD dismisses them as ranging from “formerly well respected immunologists to outright frauds.” It links to a long thread from one of its founders that accuses Urgency of Normal of being part of a right-wing operation to promote an “anti-mask narrative.” 

    It complains that CNN gave Dr. Jeanne Noble, Associate Professor at UCSF, a platform. It retweeted a tweet calling for Dr. Lucy McBride to be reported to the medical board for opposing mask mandates in schools and responded with a link directing the public on how to do so.

    It dismissed every doctor who participated in a roundtable hosted by Florida Governor DeSantis, which included Dr. Tracy Høeg, as “Covid deniers” and “disinformation doctors” and warned that no one should accept medical advice from any of them.

    These attacks contradict any claim that NLFD claims only wants to silence doctors who peddle dangerously false medical advice rather than those who have good-faith disagreements with official Covid policy.

    The inclusion of the authors of the Great Barrington Declaration—Sunetra GuptaMartin Kulldorff, and Jay Bhattacharya—at the top of NLFD’s hit list is puzzling. Not only does the declaration espouse a conventional viewpoint, none of the Great Barrington Declaration’s authors is a practicing physician and therefore law like Assembly Bill 2098 would not affect them. 

    NLFD has called out the Great Barrington Declaration around a dozen times and frequently targets Stanford professor Bhattacharya in particular (he earned a medical degree but does not practice medicine or hold a medical license). NLFD doesn’t just accuse Bhattacharya of being wrong, it accuses him of intentionally lying, calling him a “disinformation doctor” and a “prominent purveyor of Covid-19 disinformation,” accusing him of telling lies that have killed people (along with Vinay Prasad), and insinuating he should be reported for perjury. In addition to its direct attacks, NLFD has retweeted dozens of criticisms of Bhattacharya and seemed to delight in a journalist getting Twitter to temporarily suspend his account for a minor oversight.

    NLFD’s messaging has an unquestionably partisan slant, despite claiming to be nonpartisan. It has posted dozens of tweets critical of the Republican Party. Some of these criticisms do not clearly relate to the organization’s mission of combating misinformation. 

    For example, this August 8, 2022 thread attacks Republican lawmakers for opposing a drug pricing control provision in a bill. The same day, another tweet alleges that the GOP Doctors Caucus is allied with “Pharma Bro” Martin Shkreli. They attempt to tie this issue in with their mission by asserting that Republicans in general are “affiliated with licensed physicians” spreading Covid misinformation

    In another recent example, NLFD posted a clip from 2017 accusing Rand Paul of being in cahoots with Putin. It had previously suggested that Paul should be reported to the medical board for reasons it doesn’t identify. NLFD has even branched out to opine on political issues totally unrelated to the practice of medicine, encouraging the public to report “harassment, intimidation, and threats of violence” against school board members or staff to the FBI.

    NLFD has numerous posts elaborating on its idea of a right-wing, Republican-led conspiracy to spread disinformation. It uses the phrase “disinformation pipeline” to describe an alleged process by which Republicans in state legislatures deliberately harm public health by “institutionalizing disinformation” through, for example, passing laws that shield doctors from discipline for controversial Covid treatments. It claims that the overall Republican agenda is to “create fear/animosity/victimhood amongst supporters, whipping up anti-science/anti-government sentiment making them more likely to take up arms against the government.” It has asserted that “[a]ll COVID disinformation doctors are inextricably tied to Trump.” 

    Many of NLFD’s conspiracy theories are quite dark and disturbing. It recently retweeted a thread from its own Nick Sawyer, which argues that the United States is currently in the midst of a civil war, which goes unrecognized because it is an information war. Another recent tweet exhorts: “This is an information war, a battle for the truth, and [every] American is a soldier. Get up to speed and start fighting for evidence based reality. No one is going to do this for us.” 

    NLFD’s primary weapon in this imagined information war is censorship, but it also advocates for criminal prosecution for expressing the wrong ideas. It frequently encourages its followers to report physicians to their medical boards, even if they have no relationship with them. It also frequently calls on Twitter to deplatform accounts it feels say things that are untrue. But it goes even further, tagging the FBI and posting a link to the FBI tip line, asking its followers to report people for alleged misinformation. 

    It tags the United States Department of Justice’s Criminal Division in its tweets. It calls its targets a “threat to national security.” NLFD erroneously claims that under current California law, a physician can be criminally prosecuted for any untrue statement. NLFD wants to go far beyond having medical boards discipline licensed physicians—they want to see their enemies in jail.

    Against this backdrop of NLFD’s other public statements, it’s hard to imagine how Sawyer managed to sound sincere when he told the Senate committee:

    This bill is not supposed to cause problems with physicians’ free speech around academic discussion. This bill will allow the medical board to discipline doctors who say things like the vaccines cause AIDS or that the vaccines are killing more patients than Covid, using manipulated data or that the vaccines are implanting microchips so the government can track you. I’m all for academic debate—in fact, we wouldn’t be where we are today without robust academic debate, but that’s not what this is about.”

    Make no mistake—Assembly Bill 2098 is not just about protecting patient safety. That is why one member of the Medical Board of California warned that the bill would be counterproductive to the Board’s mission.

    Assembly Bill 2098 was not the brainchild of Assemblymember Low or any other California lawmakers. It’s part of an effort to enact similar policies around the country, sparked in large part by a declaration from the Federation of State Medical Boards in July 2021. 

    California is often described as a bellwether: “As California goes, so goes the nation.” That saying rings especially true with respect to Assembly Bill 2098, given that this is a test case for a national movement and that Governor Gavin Newsom has obvious presidential aspirations. 

    The bill will become law on January 1 unless the governor vetoes by September 30, and even then, the Democrats who voted for the bill have sufficient numbers to override a veto. Then we will discover whether our high courts still uphold the principle of free speech or whether they will allow themselves to be co-opted by the soldiers fighting to be the arbiters of Truth.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 22:20

  • Ukraine Confirms Receipt Of Longer-Range Missiles It's Long Sought From US
    Ukraine Confirms Receipt Of Longer-Range Missiles It’s Long Sought From US

    Despite this past week which has seen US officials echo growing concerns over Moscow’s ratcheting nuclear rhetoric – which Ukraine too has said it is taking seriously – Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky is now boasting his country has received a new, advanced US missile system. 

    He confirmed in a fresh interview with CBS’s “Face the Nation” that the National Advanced Surface-to-Air Missile Systems (NASAMS) has been long sought after by Kyiv, but previously in the war repeatedly denied:

    Zelensky thanked the U.S. for the system as well as the High Mobility Artillery Rocket Systems it’s received, but added that his troops “absolutely need the United States to show leadership and give Ukraine” additional air defense systems it has requested.

    NASAM system, via Raytheon Missiles & Defense

    Ukraine began urgently asking for transfer of the NASAMS by early summer, but the Biden administration as reluctant to provide missile systems with longer range, concerned they would be used to strike inside Russian territory and thus drag Washington and Moscow into direct cofronation.

     According to a CNN report in June, “Ukrainian officials have asked for the missile defense system, known as a NASAMS system, given the weapons can hit targets more than 100 miles away, though the Ukrainian forces will likely need to be trained on the systems, a source said.”

    But that’s apparently no longer enough of a concern to halt these longer range systems, despite the Kremlin repeatedly warning that attacks on its territory with foreign weapons are a severe red line.

    According to The Hill

    The Biden administration approved the shipment of six of the missile systems late last month as part of a nearly $3 billion lethal aid package to bolster Kyiv as it battles the Kremlin invasion.  

    The NASAMS are considered “medium-range” systems, but are considered an improvement over prior missiles sent to Ukraine, which typically had a max range of 30 to 50 miles. The NASAMS are capable of defending against aircraft, cruise missiles, as well as drones and were designed by the US and Norway.

    But Zelensky in the CBS interview didn’t waist time asking for more, as has been typical, saying that amid his forces achieving success in the ongoing eastern counteroffensive they urgently need more tanks, artillery, and more missiles.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 22:00

  • Nikola Recalls All The Electric Trucks It Has Built So Far
    Nikola Recalls All The Electric Trucks It Has Built So Far

    By Alan Adler of FreightWaves

    Nikola Corp. is recalling all 93 battery-electric Nikola Tre Class 8 trucks it has built to date because improper installation of the shoulder anchorage assembly of the seat belts could reduce protection in a crash.

    Nikola imports cabs from Italy, where they are built by manufacturing partner Iveco, which is responsible for the defect.

    The electric truck maker began regular production at a new plant in Coolidge, Arizona, in March. It reported to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration on Sept. 14 that it has no warranty or customer claims for the issue.

    The assembly as designed and installed could become detached under the weight of a passenger. The seat belt anchor assembly design does not allow full thread engagement for the anchor bolt. It may cause cross threading, a condition in which a fastening screw does not engage correctly with a nut.

    Discovered during predelivery inspection

    During a predelivery inspection at a dealership on July 18, a Nikola employee discovered the shoulder anchorage on the passenger side seat belt was disconnected from the B-pillar adjuster. Nikola told Iveco, which said the final torque on the passenger seat belt shoulder anchorage was not installed to specification.  

    Nikola will replace the components of the seat belt anchor assembly and the adjuster on all vehicles for free. The replacement component is narrower than the original, allowing the assembly to completely thread.

    Customer and dealer letters about the defect will be mailed between Oct. 1 and Nov. 1.

    The NHTSA recall number is 22V689.

    Milton trial resumes Wednesday

    Separately, the federal fraud trial for Nikola founder Trevor Milton resumes Wednesday in the U.S. District Court for the Southern District of New York. Dour market conditions, and possibly attention from the trial, dragged Nikola’s stock price 24.02% lower last week to close at $3.89 a share, just above its 52-week low of $3.82.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 21:40

  • Oil Prices Set To Spike Again Due To Struggling Global Supply Chain
    Oil Prices Set To Spike Again Due To Struggling Global Supply Chain

    A short respite from rising oil and gasoline prices is about to end as 2022 comes to a close.  The reasons are numerous, but almost all of them relate directly to the supply chain.  Mainstream estimates suggest a return to $100 per barrel for the Brent which would inflate gasoline prices back to around $5 per gallon on average in the US.  These projections are likely conservative.

    It should be noted that it’s unusual for the mainstream financial media or mainstream analysts to suggest the idea of a renewed energy price spike.  With mid-term elections closing in, higher gas prices would put a damper on any chances democrats might have in maintaining a political majority.  Stagflationary pressures already top the list of public concerns in the US, far above social issues and geopolitical conflicts.  Higher energy costs would be more than unwelcome going into winter.

    This is the reason why Joe Biden has been so exuberant about releasing oil supplies from the US strategic reserves for the past several months.  Biden’s plan unleashed 1 million barrels per day into the supply chain and  is set to end in October.  The reserves are now depleted to the lowest levels since 1984, with gas prices STILL nearly double what they were when Biden entered the White House. It is essentially market manipulation at the expense of US strategic readiness and for the express purpose of political gain.

    That said, Biden’s ability to continue pouring oil onto the markets to keep gas prices down is dwindling, and even if he is able to continue the strategy past October, a red sweep in November would bring challenges and a freeze on reserves anyway.

    Another factor is the failing attempts at a nuclear deal with Iran and the lifting of sanctions by the west.  The free flow of Iranian oil will not be happening anytime soon, leaving western access to a major oil pool off the table.

    The next issue is the ever changing situation in the Ukraine war.  Russia is already receiving the brunt of the blame for global inflation, but this is clearly nonsense when we take into account the fact that inflation hit 40 year highs months before Russian invaded Ukraine and gas prices were rising well in advance of the conflict.  

    The accusation may become true in certain respects, though, as Russia cuts natural gas supplies to Europe and the EU flails around this winter looking for replacement energy sources.  Europe’s desperate search for oil, coal and gas will siphon supplies away from the global markets leaving all other countries with less.  The obvious result will be much higher prices for everyone.

    There is also the issue of the stronger US dollar.  As the petro-currency, most oil around the world has been purchased in dollars which allows Americans to enjoy lower prices.  However, sanctions and economic tensions between east and west have led to a rising trend of bilateral trade agreements cutting out the dollar as the reserve currency.  Furthermore, the strong dollar has also led to turmoil in FX markets and in foreign currencies like the Japanese Yen, which may lead to increased dumping of US Treasury holdings by international creditors.  We could soon be facing a coordinated effort by central banks to crush the dollar even as the Federal Reserve seeks to strengthen the Greenback through interest rate hikes.

    Barring a sudden crisis event such as an expansion of the war in Ukraine or a Chinese invasion of Taiwan, oil prices are still set to rise as supply chain issues multiply.  

    The Department if Energy plans to replenish strategic reserves by purchasing oil stocks into the future at prices set today.  The argument is that this will increase domestic oil production.  The problem is that this discounts inflation in production costs for shale oil drillers.  Set prices would only work as long as drillers can continue to make a reasonable profit.  If they can’t, they will simply shut down.  By extension, the plan also assumes that drillers will be able to produce excess beyond market demand to sell to the government.  

    If the government gets a first purchase arrangement, then drillers will not be able to supply as much oil to regular consumers and prices will continue to spike.  If the government does not get a first purchase contract, then any excess will probably be snapped up by European buyers.  Either way, general consumers will not enjoy any benefits of increased drilling if it occurs, and Biden’s fraudulent green energy agenda will only restrict oil producers even more.  All in all, every observable factor suggests high oil and gas prices in the near term.   

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 21:20

  • Export Slowdown Could Bring More Bad News For Yuan
    Export Slowdown Could Bring More Bad News For Yuan

    By George Lei, Bloomberg markets live reporter and analyst

    Chinese exports are poised to slow further in the remainder of 2022, with various high-frequency datasets pointing to cooling global demand. Exports, a key growth engine that has lifted the Chinese economy since the pandemic, are sputtering. That could bring more bad news for the yuan.

    South Korean data in September through the 20th suggest exports to China fell 14% year-over-year versus a 1% decline in exports to the US. This may be an ominous sign that global demand for consumer goods made in China — to which Korea provides inputs earlier in the supply chain — is softening, Neil Shearing, group chief economist at Capital Economics, wrote on Monday. Hong Kong’s exports also sank 14.3% in August, the most since the pandemic first began in early 2020.

    Plunging freight rates also point to cooling exports: A 40-foot container from Shanghai to Los Angeles fetched $3,779 last week, below $4,000 for the first time since September 2020 and half what it was three months ago, Bloomberg reported. More declines are expected in the coming weeks, according to Drewry Supply Chain Advisors.

    The news couldn’t come at a worse time, with the offshore Chinese yuan now trading at the weakest since May 2020 — just a stone’s throw away from its record low — and economists rushing to cut China’s 2023 economic-growth forecasts. Dollar-yuan may need to go a lot higher to boost China’s exports meaningfully; the Chinese currency has advanced versus most of Beijing’s trade partners, outside of the US and Hong Kong, for much of 2022.

    Chinese exporters already are holding foreign currencies more tightly. The conversion ratio — which measures the share of export revenues converted into yuan — fell from 57% in the first eight months of 2021 to 36% this year through August, according to Macquarie economists Larry Hu and Yuxiao Zhang. If that ratio holds steady, an extra $118 billion could have been sold by exporters into yuan, Macquarie estimates.

    Falling Chinese export volumes and expectations of a weaker yuan will only make exporters more reluctant to sell their dollars. The yuan’s downtrend isn’t likely to reverse unless that negative feedback loop is broken.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 21:15

  • Liz Cheney Says Will Campaign For Democrats, Leave Republican Party If Trump Is 2024 Nominee
    Liz Cheney Says Will Campaign For Democrats, Leave Republican Party If Trump Is 2024 Nominee

    Authored by Katabella Roberts via The Epoch Times,

    Rep. Liz Cheney (R-Wyo.) said on Saturday that she will not remain a Republican if former President Donald Trump is the GOP presidential nominee in the 2024 elections, and that she would also be willing to campaign for Democrats to stop GOP nominee Kari Lake from being elected in the Arizona gubernatorial race.

    Cheney, who has been called a “Republican in name only” by others in her party and lost the Republican primary to Trump-backed challenger Harriet Hageman in August, made the comments at The Texas Tribune festival in Austin.

    “I’m going to do everything I can to make sure Kari Lake is not elected,” Cheney said.

    Former television anchor Lake, who is endorsed by Trump, won the Republican nomination in the Arizona primary election in August. Lake has been vocal in contending fraud in the 2020 election and has pledged to improve election security if she wins the gubernatorial race.

    When asked by Texas Tribune CEO Evan Smith whether doing everything she can to ensure Lake is not elected included campaigning for Democrats, Cheney simply stated: “Yes.”

    Cheney, who has become one of the most vocal voices in the Republican Party against former President Donald Trump, later added that she would not remain a Republican if he were to gain the party’s nomination in 2024.

    “I’m going to make sure Donald Trump, I’m going to do everything I can to make sure he is not the nominee. And if he is the nominee, I won’t be a Republican,” Cheney said.

    Cheney also mentioned Virginia Gov. Glenn Youngkin, who has said he will campaign for Lake.

    “He’s demonstrated that he’s somebody who has not bought into the toxin of Donald Trump—but he campaigned recently for Kari Lake, who’s an election denier, who is dangerous,” Cheney said.

    Cheney announced in August that she’s considering running for president in 2024 but has not yet made a decision on the potential run.

    “That’s a decision that I’m going to make in the coming months,” she said on Aug. 17 in an interview on NBC’s “Today” show, despite having just lost in the Republican primary for the seat she now holds.

    Cheney was one of 10 House Republicans to vote to impeach Trump. She is also one of two Republican members sitting on the Democrat-led House panel investigating the Jan. 6, 2021, breach of the U.S. Capitol.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 21:00

  • NYC Office Space Glut Made Worse By Remote Work As Older Towers Face High Vacancy
    NYC Office Space Glut Made Worse By Remote Work As Older Towers Face High Vacancy

    Is New York City’s central business district finally recovering after Covid-19? The simple answer is no. Although residential rents in Manhattan were inflated to record highs, the rise of remote work quelled any recovery for the office space market in the borough. 

    Bloomberg reported blocks of decades-old office buildings sitting partially empty are becoming a multibillion-dollar problem for building owners. 

    Even though Goldman, Morgan Stanley, and other Wall Street firms have pushed for a return to the office after the Labor Day holiday, NYC’s office-occupancy trends are still below half, according to card-swipe data provided by Kastle Systems. 

    Office vacancy rates have skyrocketed in NYC and other major cities worldwide, though it appears the US will have a slower office-market recovery — this is likely due to persisting remote working trends. 

    Columbia University and New York University released a report that found remote work trends could force companies to reduce office space. They said lower tenant demand could result in a 28%, or $456 billion loss in the value of offices across the US. About 10% of that comes from NYC. 

    Partially empty office towers are leading to slower economic recovery in NYC. Many buildings with high vacancy rates were constructed between 1950-80 and had no meaningful upgrades. 

    The area is clustered with buildings from the 1950s to 1980s, many of which haven’t been meaningfully upgraded in decades. The few that have been renovated struggle to compete with counterparts in tonier addresses on Park, Fifth and Madison avenues and new mega-developments on Manhattan’s far west side.

    The Third Avenue buildings have become “leave-behind space” rather than the types of offices that attract world-class tenants, said Nick Farmakis, vice chairman at Savills. — Bloomberg

    The picture remains cloudy for NYC because converting office space buildings to residential is challenging and expensive. Manhattan has had some conversions, but owners and developers are met with many challenges of zoning and architectural restrictions. 

    “The problem with Midtown is a lot of buildings need air and lights that the city requires, and you don’t always get that,” said Ran Eliasaf, founder and managing partner of investment firm Northwind Group, which is exploring residential conversions in the city. “Not every Class B building is an ideal target for conversion.”

    Older buildings are also being left behind as businesses desire newer ones or relocate out of the city. This leaves NYC with a rising number of older office buildings with high vacancy rates and has begun to impact how much property taxes the city brings in. 

    New York, like other cities, relies heavily on property taxes to fund schools, police and firefighters, as well as other services. Property taxes are the biggest source of revenue for the city, delivering about $1 out of every $3 taken in. And offices account for about a fifth of that.

    Before the pandemic, the levies had climbed by about 6% a year on average, driven by rising property values. That helped finance new programs and services, as well as keep up with rising labor costs, said Ana Champeny, the vice president for research at the Citizens Budget Commission, a nonpartisan budget watchdog and research firm.

    Manhattan’s major office districts were no exception, generating steadily more revenue. But, in the fiscal year that ended June 30, the first to take into account the impact the pandemic had on real estate, tax levies from those areas declined by 11% to $5.24 billion.

    The biggest drop was in a part of Midtown East north of Grand Central that the city’s Department of Finance calls “Plaza,” which contains some of the Third Avenue properties.

    — Bloomberg 

    The takeaway is that NYC has too many old office buildings that are no longer appealing to companies because of various factors due to remote working and the desire for new shiny new towers with top-of-the-line amenities. 

    Remember, we’ve pointed out There’s An Amazing Glut Of Office Space In Every Major Metro Area and Office Space Market Faces “Economic Downturn” Due To Perfect Storm Of Factors

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 20:40

  • California To Ban Natural Gas Heaters By 2030
    California To Ban Natural Gas Heaters By 2030

    Authored by Irina Slav via OilPrice.com,

    California has made yet another step on its way to complete reliance on renewable energy by banning the use of gas-powered water heaters and furnaces from 2030.

    The proposal to ban these products was approved unilaterally by the California Air Resources Board yesterday, Bloomberg reports.

    “We’re really hopeful that this is the beginning of a domino effect and other states will follow California’s lead,” said Leah Louis-Prescott, an associate at RMI, a clean energy non-profit.

    The ban does not cover gas stoves for now but many cities in California are seeking to discourage the use of gas stoves and a switch to electric-only appliances.

    Now, with the gas furnace ban, Californians will have to familiarize themselves with heat pumps: all-electric heating appliances that are gaining popularity in Europe as an alternative to traditional heating methods.

    Touted as the way forward in heating technology, heat pumps are praised for efficiency and emission footprint but they do have constraints such as temperature and they add to electricity consumption, which could strain a grid designed for a certain—lower—level of consumption.

    Earlier this month California moved to ban the sales of internal-combustion engine cars from 2035. While climate activists have welcomed the news, there are some issues, such as the fact that EVs in California, which is the biggest EV market in the States, only make up 15 percent of new car sales, per figures from the California New Car Dealers’ Association.

    Going from 15 percent to 100 percent in 11 years would be challenging for a car industry that is already struggling to find enough raw materials for the millions of EVs companies have committed to manufacture.

    Meanwhile, California continues to get some 40 percent of its power from fossil fuels. This needs to change if the state is to hit its own target of a zero-emission grid by 2045.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 20:20

  • Just 1.5% Of Eligible People Have Gotten Updated COVID Booster
    Just 1.5% Of Eligible People Have Gotten Updated COVID Booster

    Only 1.5% of those eligible to receive the new Covid booster jab – which was tested on just 8 mice, not humans, before the FDA approved it – have taken the updated shot, according to data released Thursday by the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC).

    Approximately 4.4 million people have taken the tweaked booster shot from Pfizer and Moderna after they were rolled out three weeks ago around Labor Day weekend. The bivalent shots were designed to target both the original Covid-19 strain, and the currently circulating Omicron subvariants BA.4 and BA.5, NBC News reports.

    I would expect a much higher proportion of Americans to have gotten the booster by this point,” said Yale Medicine infectious diseases specialist, Dr. Scott Robers, who said the relatively low uptake was “demoralizing.”

    The fact that this booster came out days before Biden said the pandemic is over is a huge mixed message,” said Roberts, who added that a lack of public awareness surrounding the shots – or the ‘prevailing narrative that the pandemic is ending’ might have hindered the rollout. “Now it’s going to be that much harder to convince those at risk who are on the fence to get a booster.”

    As of Tuesday, the US had shipped over 25 million boosters to tens of thousands of sites.

    Approximately 80% of the US population has received at least one shot of the primary Covid vaccine, and almost 68% are considered ‘fully vaccinated’ by the CDC – meaning they’ve received two doses of Pfizer or Moderna’s offering, or one dose of Johnson & Johnson’s vaccine.

    experts are still gathering real-world data, since the shots were distributed without results from human trials. Laboratory studies found that the boosters generated strong antibody responses against BA.4 and BA.5, and human trial data showed that a similar vaccine yielded a strong antibody response against the initial omicron strain, BA.1.

    Authorization of the bivalent boosters for children ages 5 to 11 may be just weeks away, Dr. Peter Marks, director of the Food and Drug Administration’s Center for Biologics Evaluation and Research, said at an event this week with the Covid-19 Vaccine Education and Equity Project. -NBC News

    Word of the slow uptake comes after Denmark recommended that only those over the age of 50, or who are at risk of developing severe Covid-19, receive the vaccine.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 20:00

  • NYC Council Eyes Buying Back Used Needles From Drug Addicts
    NYC Council Eyes Buying Back Used Needles From Drug Addicts

    Authored by Bill Pan via The Epoch Times,

    The New York City Council is considering a proposal to establish a buy-back program in hopes of stemming the spike in overdose deaths and discarded used drug needles on the streets.

    Introduction 609, sponsored by East Harlem Councilwoman Diana Ayala, would establish a pilot program that offers up to 20 cents for each needle, syringe, or sharp used at the city’s two legal injection sites, with a cap of $10 per individual per day.

    The program would only be open to active drug users who come to an overdose prevention center (OPC), use the clean needle provided there for drug injection, and dispose of it at the site, according to the proposal. New York City currently has two OPCs, one in Washington Heights and the other in East Harlem. Both sites were opened in November 2021 as part of former mayor Bill de Blasio’s initiative to reduce overdoses.

    If implemented, the program would last for a year. The city’s public health department at that point would recommend whether or not to continue the program or whether to expand it to cover needles and syringes that have been used somewhere other than an OPC.

    “The intent of the bill is to get those folks that are using on our streets and open spaces to bring back the dirty needle (possibly to OPC site) as opposed to discarding them improperly,” Ayala, a Democrat, wrote in a Twitter thread. Others called the proposal “misguided” and an invitation to drug addicts to the city.

    Queens Councilwoman Joann Ariola, a Republican, argued that taxpayers money shouldn’t be spent on paying people to use drugs.

    “It’s not going to benefit the person who is the drug addict who is using the needles,” Ariola told New York Post.

    “It could be harmful to the person who is collecting these needles. And who’s paying the [twenty] cents per needle? Where is that money coming from? I think the taxpayers are paying for enough!”

    The creation of New York City’s OPCs came after Gov. Kathy Hochul in October 2021 signed a law to decriminalize the possession and sale of hypodermic needles and syringes across the state. As a result, the city’s police officers were directed to stop arresting people who possess, sell, or even share needles that are commonly used by addicts to inject drugs such as heroin.

    According to the bill that became law, decriminalizing the possession and sale of needles will encourage more people to come to places like the OPCs, which provide clean needles and naloxone to reverse overdoses.

    Rep. Nicole Malliotakis, a Republican who represents parts of South Brooklyn and Staten Island, opposed de Blasio’s plan to open what she described as “heroin injection centers.” In November 2021, she sent a letter to Attorney General Merrick Garland, calling on the Department of Justice to take action to enforce federal anti-drug law.

    “Opening taxpayer-funded heroin shooting galleries is not a proper solution. These centers not only encourage drug use but they will further deteriorate our quality of life,” she said.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 19:40

  • FBI Misled Judge, Then Seized $86 Million In Cash From Beverly Hills Safe-Deposit Boxes
    FBI Misled Judge, Then Seized $86 Million In Cash From Beverly Hills Safe-Deposit Boxes

    The FBI ‘drilled and pried’ their way into 1,400 safe-deposit boxes at a private vault company in Beverly Hills after misleading a judge about their plan to permanently confiscate everything inside every box containing at least $5,000 in cash or goods, a senior FBI agent recently testified.

    They rummaged through personal belongings of a jazz saxophone player, an interior designer, a retired doctor, a flooring contractor, two Century City lawyers and hundreds of others.

    Agents took photos and videos of pay stubs, password lists, credit cards, a prenuptial agreement, immigration and vaccination records, bank statements, heirlooms and a will, court records show. In one box, agents found cremated human remains. –LA Times

    The FBI and US attorney’s office in Los Angeles justified the 5-day dragnet forfeiture at the US Private Vaults store by assuming that hundreds of anonymous box holders were storing assets somehow tied to unknown crimes.

    At the end of the operation, agents had recovered more than $86 million in cash, and a ‘bonanza’ of gold, silver, rare coins, jewelry and other items of value.

    Now, around 700 box holders who aren’t implicated in any crimes liken the raid to police barging into a building’s 700 apartments and taking every tenant’s possessions when the only evidence of wrongdoing is against the landlord.

    The plaintiffs in the class-action suit have asked U.S. District Judge R. Gary Klausner to declare the raid unconstitutional. If he grants the request, it could force the FBI to return millions of dollars to box holders whose assets it has tried to confiscate.

    It could also spoil an unknown number of criminal investigations by blocking prosecutors from using any evidence or information acquired in the raid, including guns and drugs. -LA Times

    The government did not know what was in those boxes, who owned them, or what, if anything, those people had done,” said their lawyer, Robert Frommer. “That’s why the warrant application did not even attempt to argue there was probable cause to seize and forfeit box renters’ property.”

    After the raid, the FBI posted a notice in the store window where customers could claim their property. Those who came forward had their bank records, state tax returns, DMV files and criminal histories investigated, agents testified.

    Since the raid, the US attorney’s office has attempted to block public disclosure of court papers which revealed the government’s deception – however a judge rejected their request to keep them under seal.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jsThe origins of the raid date back to 2015, when local detectives and federal agents spotted drug suspects walking in and out of US Private Vaults, located in an upscale strip mall. Customers, who could rent boxes anonymously, entered the store’s vault using a biometric eye scan according to a LA County sheriff’s deputy.

    The U.S. Private Vaults store in a strip mall on Olympic Boulevard in Beverly Hills. (Irfan Khan / Los Angeles Times)

    By 2019, the feds and local law enforcement were able to search more than a dozen boxes, from which around $5 million was seized from five drug dealers, a bookie and a debit card thief. Then, the FBI began investigating the business itself – charging them with conspiracy to sell drugs and launder money, using a precious-metals store next door to help drug dealers launder cash by converting it to gold and silver, which was then stashed in their anonymous boxes. The company pleaded guilty to a conspiracy to launder drug money in an ongoing investigation.

    Both the FBI and US attorney’s office have denied misleading the judge or ignoring his conditions – claiming that they had no obligation to tell him about their plan for indiscriminate confiscations based on the blanket assumption that every customer was hiding assets tied to potential crimes.

    According to FBI spokeswoman Laura Eimiller, the warrants were lawfully executed “based on allegations of widespread criminal wrongdoing,” adding “At no time was a magistrate misled as to the probable cause used to obtain the warrants.”

    How the FBI worked the system

    FBI agent Lynne Zellhart, a former Sacramento attorney, made sweeping allegations of criminal wrongdoing by box holders – arguing that it would be “irrational” for anyone not breaking the law to store assets at US Private Vaults, when a bank could better safeguard them.

    “Only those who wish to hide their wealth from the DEA, IRS, or creditors would” rent a box anonymously at US Private Vaults, she wrote.

    But the FBI’s evidence against customers was thin.

    Agents had seen some of them pull up to the store in vehicles with Nevada, Ohio and Illinois license plates, Zellhart wrote.

    “Based on my training and experience in money laundering investigations, Chicago, Illinois is a hub of both drug trafficking and money laundering,” she said. “I believe these patrons were using their USPV box to store drug proceeds.” She cited no facts to back up the suspicion. -LA Times

    In fact, Zellhart only mentioned nine box holders who she said were “linked” or “associated” with law enforcement investigations – and again provided no facts specifying criminal conduct.

    To provide cover for the fact that innocent box holders might be swept up, she admitted that US Private Vaults tried “to attract a non-criminal clientele as well, so as not to be too obvious a haven for criminals.”

    At her deposition, Zellhart was asked, “Was it your opinion that most of the people who rented safe-deposit boxes were criminals in some way?” to which she replied “I was expecting a lot of criminals,” adding “I don’t know about most.”

    The FBI assured US Magistrate Judge Steve Kim that the FBI would respect customers’ rights based on the affidavit’s 84th and 85th pages, written by assistant US attorney Andrew Brown, who underlined the government’s lack of evidence to justify any criminal search of the customers’ property.

    “The warrants authorize the seizure of the nests of the boxes themselves, not their contents,” Brown’s section of the affidavit read. “By seizing the nests of safety deposit boxes themselves, the government will necessarily end up with custody of what is inside those boxes initially.”

    The affidavit told Kim that agents would “follow their written inventory policies” and “attempt to notify the lawful owners of the property stored in the boxes how to claim their property.”

    Under FBI policy, it said, inspection of each box would “extend no further than necessary to determine ownership.” But agents’ inspection of the boxes went substantially further — just as the government planned, according to FBI records filed in court.

    By the time Kim got the warrant request, the FBI had been preparing an enormous forfeiture operation for at least six months, according to Jessie Murray, the chief of the FBI’s asset forfeiture unit in Los Angeles. -LA Times

    Under US forfeiture laws, the government must have evidence that it was derived from criminal conduct or used to facilitate it.

    Judge Kim was explicit in limiting the scope of the raid, writing: “This warrant does not authorize a criminal search or seizure of the contents of the safety deposit boxes.” He then gave the FBI permission to take inventory of box contents to protect against accusations of theft, and then ordered agents to notify owners not implicated in crimes so that they could recover their property.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 19:20

  • Psaki Admits Democrats Will Lose If Midterms Are A 'Referendum' On Biden
    Psaki Admits Democrats Will Lose If Midterms Are A ‘Referendum’ On Biden

    Authored by Frank Fang via The Epoch Times,

    Former White House press secretary Jen Psaki on Sunday said the Democrats will lose if the November midterm elections are a “referendum” on President Joe Biden.

    “If it is a referendum on the president, they will lose. And they know that. They also know that crime is a huge vulnerability for Democrats, I would say one of the biggest vulnerabilities,” Psaki said on NBC’s “Meet the Press” on Sept. 25.

    On the contrary, Psaki said that if the focus of the midterm elections is on the “most extreme” party, mentioning House Minority leader Kevin McCarthy (R-Calif.) and Rep. Marjorie Taylor Greene (R-Ga.) by name, the Democrats will secure a victory in November.

    With a little more than 40 days to go before the November elections, Biden’s public approval rating remains low. According to a recent Reuters/Ipsos opinion poll, 39 percent of Americans approved of the president, while 57 percent disapproved.

    Additionally, 67 percent of the respondents said the United States was heading in the wrong direction, while 21 percent said the country was on the right track.

    Another recent Reuters/Ipsos opinion poll found that 50 percent of Americans thought Biden “should do more” on “blocking illegal immigrants” from entering the United States.

    Even Democrats are abandoning Biden as the party’s nominee for president in 2024. According to the latest ABC News/Washington Post poll, just 35 percent of Democrats and Democratic-leaning independents prefer Biden for the 2024 nomination, while 56 percent say the party should pick someone else.

    Referendum

    Some Republicans have long billed the midterm elections as a referendum on Biden, most famously former President Donald Trump.

    “This election is a referendum on skyrocketing inflation, rampant crime, soaring murders, crushing gas prices, millions and millions of illegal aliens pouring across our border, race and gender indoctrination, converting our schools,” Trump said during a campaign rally in Pennsylvania on Sept. 3.

    Trump added, “And above all, this election is a referendum on the corruption and extremism of Joe Biden and the radical Democrat Party.”

    Rep. Darrell Issa (R-Calif.) speaks to The Epoch Times at CPAC 21 in Orlando, Fla., on Feb. 26, 2021. (The Epoch Times)

    Also on Sunday, Rep. Darrell Issa (R-Calif.), a member of the House Judiciary Committee, wrote on Twitter that “It’s not breaking news Democrats don’t want the midterm elections to be a referendum on Biden.”

    Earlier this month, Joe O’Dea, the GOP candidate for senator in Colorado, also said the November race is a referendum on the president.

    “This election is a referendum on the trillions in spending and debt by Joe Biden and Michael Bennet that’s caused this inflation crisis,” O’Dea wrote on Twitter, who is facing incumbent Sen. Michael Bennet (D-Colo.).

    Pennsylvania

    Psaki also said she has been following the senate race in Pennsylvania, where Lt. Gov. John Fetterman is facing Republican candidate Mehmet Oz, noting that Republicans have been spending money on ads portraying the Democrat candidate as soft on crime.

    “What’s been interesting to me is it’s always you follow the money, and where are people spending money,” Psaki said. “And in Pennsylvania, the Republicans have been spending millions of dollars on the air on crime ads against Fetterman because that’s where they see his vulnerability.”

    She added, “So, yes, the economy is hanging over everything. But you do have to look at state-by-state factors, and crime is a huge issue in the Pennsylvania race.”

    Oz and Fetterman are scheduled for a televised debate on Oct. 25. On Sunday, Oz took to Twitter to say he has a different approach to border management compared to his opponent.

    “John Fetterman would be a rubber stamp for Biden’s reckless border policies & make the crisis at our southern border even worse,” Oz wrote on Twitter. “Securing our border may not be Biden or Fetterman’s top priority, but I’ll do everything I can to address this issue.”

    Psaki left the White House in May and took a job at MSNBC as host for a new streaming program starting in 2023.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 19:00

  • Meet The Fiercely Loyal "Guru" Behind Masayoshi Son At SoftBank
    Meet The Fiercely Loyal “Guru” Behind Masayoshi Son At SoftBank

    And so, all of a sudden, SoftBank – which has been suffering from a $23 billion loss at the hands of the global tech selloff – has a scapegoat advisor to Masayoshi Son.

    The fall guy “guru”, profiled in an FT piece out this weekend, is Yoshimitsu Goto, who is described as being “fiercely loyal” to Masayoshi Son. Masa hired Goto all the way back in 2000 after stating: “I like the look of his eyes. Let’s hire him.”

    Perhaps Goto isn’t just getting press now because of SoftBank’s recent troubles – instead, perhaps it is because three of Masa’s top executives have jumped ship over the last 18 months and Goto has been the exception.

    As FT notes, SoftBank has lost its chief operating officer Marcelo Claure and strategy chief Katsunori Sago. Rajeev Misra, head of SoftBank’s Vision Fund, all in short order in less than 2 years. 

    Goto, in the interim, has become “indispensable”, the report says. And that’s not because he continues to defend Masa as the company’s Vision Fund suffers from terrible performance. 

    Masa’s “guru” says that the plan with the Vision Fund is to “stay the course”: “I won’t be surprised [if Son changed his mind] but I don’t think that’s likely. Investment firm is this company’s ultimate style. The basis of Mr Son’s thinking is that change is the best growth strategy to avert risks.”

    The report describes Goto’s job as “to persuade investors to scrap what he describes as the misleading image of the deal-driven, debt-saddled group” as reckless. He has also been in charge of taking Masa’s “big picture” ideas and converting them into “comprehensible pitches” for lenders.

    That is to say, Masa’s ideas must first usually be incomprehensible. Color us not surprised.

    And Goto does supposedly stand up to the boss once in a while, the report says. He told FT: “When an executive in charge of the company’s financing and cash flow says no, that’s the end of the story so I know the weight of my words when I say no.”

    “I tell my team not to search for reasons why they can’t do it, but to think of ways that can be done if they were to try it. When it’s really impossible, there is no answer and that’s when I say we should not do this. Mr Son is rational so he gets it right away.”

    The one cardinal rule Goto has is not to do anything that would compromise the firm’s relationship with Mizuho, where he formerly worked as a banker. “It takes a long time to build a relationship of trust but when it crumbles, it happens with the blink of an eye. I have never broken my promise with the banks in the past 20 years,” he told FT. 

    Koji Fujiwara, senior adviser at Mizuho Financial Group, said: “The current relationship between Mizuho and SoftBank Group would have been unthinkable without Mr Goto. That’s how important he is.”

    Kiyoshi Miyake, the former deputy president of Mizuho Bank, concluded: “The ideas flow like water for Mr Son, and it was Mr Goto who said which of those can be done and which cannot be done.”

    And as such, we’re near certain he’ll receive his fair share of the blame should the picture worsen for SoftBank…

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 18:40

  • $1 Million Yale University Research Project To Combat Racist Video Game Hair
    $1 Million Yale University Research Project To Combat Racist Video Game Hair

    By Madison Rehbehn of Campus Reform

    Yale University’s Computer Science Department recently announced a $1 million donation given to them from the Bungie Foundation for a research project that fights against racist hair graphics in video games. 

    “It is widely assumed that the algorithms used to generate virtual humans are based in biological underpinnings that accurately reflect all races and ethnicities,” the announcement reads. “In reality, however, these algorithms are deeply biased and based on predominantly European features.”

    The project will be led by Theodore Kim, Associate Professor of Computer Science at Yale.

    According to Kim, the project will “serve as an example of how to identify the products of systemic racism in computer graphics and demonstrate how to take concrete steps to ameliorate their harm.” 

    Kim believes that this racial bias in video game hair stems from Computer Graphics Researchers that have “historically favored the simulation and rendering of straight hair, which is racially coded as European or Caucasian hair.”

    As stated on Kim’s admin page, “[h]e researches topics in physics-based animation, which include the simulation of fire, water, muscles, skin, and virtual humans.” 

    In 2015, Pew Research Center conducted a study on how various racial and ethnic groups feel about video games. Their article showed that “[r]oughly half (47%) of American adults say they are unsure of whether video games portray minority groups poorly. Interestingly, this is the most common response regardless of race or ethnicity.” 

    The Pew Research Center’s study continued by adding, “Blacks (13%) are more likely than whites (7%) to say most video games portray minority groups poorly.” However, “close to half of all blacks (47%) say they are uncertain if video games depict minorities in a bad light.” 

    Campus Reform reached out to Yale University, Professor Kim, and the Bungie Foundation for comment but did not receive a response in time for publication. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 18:20

  • Pressure Mysteriously Plunges in Nord Stream 1, 2
    Pressure Mysteriously Plunges in Nord Stream 1, 2

    Update: It’s not just NS2: according to Reuters, Nord Stream AG, the operator of the Nord Stream 1 undersea gas pipeline from Russia to Germany, said Monday it was looking into causes of a drop in pressure in the pipeline.

    “Tonight, dispatchers from the Nord Stream 1 control centre recorded a pressure drop on both branches of the gas pipeline,” it said in a statement. “The reasons are being clarified.”

    * * *

    Reuters reported that the Russian-owned Nord Stream 2 pipeline experienced a sudden loss in pressure, and a leak was detected in Danish waters on Monday. 

    “A leak today occurred on the Nord Stream 2 pipeline in the Danish area,” said Denmark’s energy agency.

    Danish authorities said the leak occurred in the exclusive economic zone southeast of Bornholm island. Danish Maritime Authority announced all vessels must avoid the area:

    Mariners are advised not to navigate within a five nautical miles area of the mentioned position.” 

    Russian energy giant Gazprom, NS2’s operator, released a statement that said “marine authorities of Germany, Denmark, Sweden, Finland, and Russia have been notified immediately” about the pressure drop, adding an “investigation is ongoing.” 

    “Overnight the Nord Stream 2 landfall dispatcher registered a rapid gas pressure drop on Line A of the Nord Stream 2 natural gas pipeline,” NS2’s operator said. 

    NS2 spokesman Ulrich Lissek told AFP a “large bubble field near Bornholm” was spotted. He noted, “pipeline was never in use, just prepared for technical operation, and therefore filled with gas.” 

    Lissek said pressure inside NS2 usually is about 105 bars. It is now only 7 bars on the German side… 

    A spokeswoman for the German economy ministry said there’s “no clarity” on what caused the NS2’s pressure drop

    “We are currently in contact with the authorities concerned in order to clarify the situation. We still have no clarity about the causes and the exact facts.” 

    European NatGas prices weren’t affected by the news because the pipeline, intended to double NatGas volumes to Europe under the Baltic Sea to Germany, was never operational after German Chancellor Olaf Scholz canceled it after Russia invaded Ukraine earlier this year. 

    The Russian-owned pipeline, which was intended to double the volume of gas flowing from St. Petersburg under the Baltic Sea to Germany, had just been completed and was filled with 300 million cubic metres of gas when German Chancellor Olaf Scholz cancelled it shortly before Russia invaded Ukraine. —Reuters 

    Underwater pipeline leaks can be very dangerous. In July 2021, Mexico’s state-owned oil company, Petroleos Mexicanos (Pemex), had an underwater pipeline rupture that sparked massive fireballs.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 18:00

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 26th September 2022

  • Russia Vows 'Full Protection' For Any Annexed Territory As Nuclear Threat Grows
    Russia Vows ‘Full Protection’ For Any Annexed Territory As Nuclear Threat Grows

    Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times,

    Russian Foreign Minister Sergey Lavrov said that regions of Ukraine where referendums are being held will be under the Kremlin’s “full protection” if they are annexed by Russia, raising the prospect of the use of nuclear weapons.

    Residents of four Russian-occupied areas in eastern and southern Ukraine continued voting for four days on whether to join Russia.

    “Following those referendums, Russia of course will respect the expression of the will of those people who for many long years have been suffering from the abuses of the neo-Nazi regime,” Lavrov told reporters this weekend after addressing the United Nations General Assembly. He was referring to the Kyiv government.

    When asked by a reporter if Russia would possibly use nuclear weapons to defend any annexed regions in Ukraine, Lavrov said that any Russian territory will be “under the full protection of the state.”

    “All of the laws, doctrines, concepts, and strategies of the Russian Federation apply to all of its territory,” he said while referring to Russia’s doctrine on using nukes.

    Several days ago, former Russian President Dmitry Medvedev issued a warning on social media that Russia is prepared to use nuclear weapons. That came after Russian President Vladimir Putin’s speech announcing he would mobilize hundreds of thousands of troops, while he also issued a veiled threat about using all weapons in Russia’s arsenal to defend its territorial integrity.

    Russia’s Foreign Minister Sergei Lavrov attends a meeting on Aug. 4, 2022. (Russian Foreign Ministry/Handout via Reuters)

    While Putin’s comment was vague, Medvedev’s post on Telegram was more explicit. Medvedev currently serves as the deputy chairman of Russia’s Security Council.

    “Russia has announced that not only mobilization capabilities but also any Russian weapons, including strategic nuclear weapons and weapons based on new principles, could be used for such protection,” he wrote, according to a translation.

    The referendums in four eastern Ukrainian regions, aimed at annexing territory Russia has taken by force since its invasion in February, were being staged for a third day on Sunday and the Russian parliament could move to formalize the annexation within days.

    By incorporating the four areas of Luhansk, Donetsk, Kherson, and Zaporizhzhia into Russia, Moscow could portray attacks to retake them as an attack on Russia itself, a warning to Kyiv and its Western allies.

    Ukraine and its allies have dismissed the referendums as a sham designed to justify an escalation of the war and a mobilization drive by Moscow after recent battlefield losses.

    Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy said on Sunday his country would regain all the territory Russia had taken. “We will definitely liberate our entire country—from Kherson to the Luhansk region, from Crimea to the Donetsk region,” he said on the Telegram messaging app.

    Nuclear Threat

    It comes as Navy Admiral Charles A. Richard, the head of U.S. Strategic Command, acknowledged Russia’s recent warnings about using nuclear weapons.

    “We have not had to do that in over 30 years. The implications of that are profound,” he said during a panel discussion last week. “They’re profound for homeland defense. They’re profound for strategic deterrence as well as us achieving national objectives. And this is no longer theoretical,” he added.

    Richard added that it’s now possible that for the first time in decades, it’s possible the United States will have a “possible direct armed conflict with a nuclear-capable peer.”

    “Russia and China can escalate to any level of violence that they choose in any domain with any instrument of power worldwide,” Richard added.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/26/2022 – 02:00

  • We Might Be Spared Nuclear War For Now But The Threat Of Home-Grown Tyranny Remains
    We Might Be Spared Nuclear War For Now But The Threat Of Home-Grown Tyranny Remains

    Authored by Paul Craig Roberts,

    As readers know, I am convinced that Putin’s toleration of insults and provocations has had the effect of encouraging more and worse provocations and not, as he intended, to downplay conflict.  As you also know, I am convinced that his “limited military operation” in Donbass designed to protect the Donbass Russians, formerly a part of Russia, from horrible abuse by Ukrainian forces and the neo-Nazi militias, was a mistake.  It is a mistake because the West characterized a limited operation as an “invasion of Ukraine,” and used its slow progress as evidence of Russian failure.  It is a mistake because the go-slow nature of the Russian offensive in order to minimize the impact on civilian lives and infrastructure gave the West plenty of time to convince itself to get more and more involved with diplomatic support, money, armaments and ammunition, training, and now with satellite  information for targeting the Russian forces.

    As I see it, Putin has been behaving as British Prime Minister Chamberlain is alleged to have behaved, thus encouraging more aggressive actions.  Wanting peace at all costs brings war.

    As it is no longer possible for the Kremlin to speak of  “our Western partners” or to deny that the West is at war with Russia, the Kremlin, trying to avoid a war that it knows would be nuclear, has reached my conclusion of eight years ago that if the areas in today’s artificial borders of Ukraine that require Russian protection were reincorporated into Russia, the conflict would have to cease or become direct Western military aggression against Russia.  As Biden says he has no stomach for a war with Russia and will not permit one, and as NATO is incapable of such war, the referendums that begin today in the liberated areas of Ukraine, which without question will succeed, promise to reduce the threat of Armageddon.  Although in my opinion the leadership everywhere in the Western world is Satanic and insane, I do not think the Western governing elites are ready to commit suicide by attacking Russian territory. The West can say it doesn’t recognize the rights of people to self-determination, but if Russia says it is Russian territory, it is.

    So that you understand, the referendums are Putin’s way of ending the conflict before it widens into nuclear war.  Putin’s rescue of the world from nuclear war will not be acknowledged by the Western presstitutes, Washington’s puppet EU and UK governments, or by the puppet who serves as NATO secretary general.  

    But what they think does not matter. Putin, belatedly, is doing his best to save us all from nuclear war.  Pray that he succeeds.

    Putin’s success in forestalling nuclear war does not mean peace for Russia. The breakup of the Soviet Union by Washington that turned Soviet provinces or republics into independent states, together with the freedom the West has had for 30 years in funding NGOs and building subversive networks in the former Soviet provinces, gives Washington the opportunity to foment wars on the Russian Federation’s borders, as is now brewing between two former Central Asian Soviet Republics, Kyrgystan and Tajikistan and  to foment coups such as the one in the recent attempt in Kazakhstan. The empire served a security purpose to which Russia will eventually have to return if the West continues to operate against Russia.

    We do not have Putin’s help with the other threats to Western Civilization that confronts us.  Internally the West is faced with an attack on itself by its own elites.  The West is everywhere discredited–in the universities, the public schools, the museums, the media, movies, the Democrat Party, the 1619 Project, Identity politics, Critical Race Theory taught in public schools to children, gender theory which teaches  that self-declaration, not biological fact, determines gender. Teaching children to be confused about their gender is an evil thing.

    This illustrates that in the Western World lies takes precedence over facts.  Facts are whatever the elites and their  minions say.  They have no basis in reality.  Those who emphasize reality are “domestic terrorists” because they dissent from the official narratives that cannot be supported by factual evidence.  Multiculturalism has turned the American nation into a tower of babel, and Identity Politics has destroyed unity. The Democrat Party has been radicalized and is firmly arraigned against white  Americans who are undergoing a process of deracination and dispossession.

    In my lifetime the US has been transformed from a nation into a tower of babel and from a relatively free society into a police state.  The transformation into a tower of babel was an intentional policy designed to drain power from the white population.  The police state has rapidly developed in the 21st century as a response to 9/11 which was orchestrated partly for that purpose.  With half or more of the white population’s legitimacy challenged by the White House, with Constitutional protections eroded, and with the criminal justice system weaponized against Trump and his supporters, the United States is being primed for civil war.

    In former times the US government acted to protect the people from monopolies with progressive measures, such as the Sherman Anti-Trust Act, today a dead letter law.  Beginning with the Clinton regime, monopolization, already present from the destruction of independent businesses by big box store chains, has grown dramatically.  Clinton signed off on the concentration of the media in a few hands. The large banks were given enormous power by the repeal of the Glass-Steagall Act.  The unregulated digital revolution has produced a monopoly over digital communication which is used to censor and suppress free speech.  Big Pharma and the medical insurance companies are in the process of completing their control over medicine by forcing independent medical practices into large health care organizations where doctors are employees subject to Big Pharma protocols.  They achieved this by having medical insurance and Medicare pay a larger percentage of amounts billed to the large bureaucratic entities than to private practitioners. The financial difference forced doctors to sell or merge their practices into the larger entities and means the end of the Hippocratic Oath as we saw with Covid when doctors who are employees of hospitals and HMOs were prohibited from treating patients with HCQ and Ivermectin.

    Big Pharma’s power over medicine and legislators was demonstrated last month when the California legislature passed Big Pharma’s bill to punish doctors who saved lives by using HCQ and Ivermectin.  The bill defines “scientific consensus” as whatever Big Pharma influenced/controlled NIH, CDC, and FDA say it is.  Under the bill, doctors are guilty of “unprofessional conduct” and can lose their licenses for disseminating “misinformation or disinformation related to COVID-19, including false or misleading information regarding the nature and risks of the virus, its prevention and treatment; and the development, safety, and effectiveness of COVID-19 vaccines.”  https://www.globalresearch.ca/all-eyes-gov-newsom-california-looks-pass-nations-first-law-punish-doctors-covid-misinformation/5793420  In other words, doctors and medical scientists who disagreed with Big Pharma shill Fauci and saved lives are to be kicked out of medical practice.

    Big Pharma, with its grants to medical schools, its funding of medical research that serves its profits, its influence over medical journals and public health agencies and regulators such as NIH, CDC, and FDA, and its lobbying power with legislatures, has gained control over the practice of medicine.  

    Wherever you look in the Western world autonomy is disappearing.  People have less and less control over their lives and their children.  If they express thoughts contrary to official narratives they risk their jobs and financial security.  Today’s intrusions into the family were unthinkable a few decades ago. Digital money, which is in the works, will terminate all human autonomy.  If you annoy the government you will be cut off from your funds.  What you can spend money on will be controlled in the interest of profits for the favored and whatever cause or ideology is prevailing, such as health, a green world.  Digital money is not cash. You can’t keep a supply of purchasing power at home.  Governments can prevent the use of digital money from purchasing disfavored products.

    Once the media becomes a propaganda ministry, as the Western media is, it is easy to steal the people’s freedom.  An excuse can always be found or orchestrated–national security (9/11), medical emergency (Covid pandemic), Insurrection by MAGA Republicans.  By the time a trusting and gullible public catches on to a former deception they are in the middle of a new one.  As the erosion of freedom is gradual nothing is done about it.  As the young only know what they are born into, the growing restraints on freedom are normality to them.  The young don’t miss what they never experienced, and they do not know what has been lost.

    If Putin succeeds in stopping the march into nuclear war, we still face the challenge that we are being transitioned into a police state.  Putin is not going to come liberate us, so what is to be done?  How can we claim the high ground when we have been marginalized as racists and insurrectionists?  How can we organize when the FBI will descend upon us declaring us to be domestic extremists who are a threat to America?

    In Canada liberty is in its death throes.  In Germany and other parts of Europe historians cannot report  facts that expose the falsity of official narratives.  The outcome of the November congressional and 2024 presidential elections could leave us with a one-party state, which is the Democrats’ intent.  Knowing that they will be protected by the presstitutes, the Democrats can again steal the election or Biden can declare that a MAGA election plot has been uncovered and federalize the election.

    Russia, China, India, Iran, and other countries outside the Western world are moving forward with the Shanghai Cooperation Organization that is creating a new center of power, while the West declines politically, economically, morally, and culturally as the confidence of people who formerly comprised nations continues to be destroyed by anti-white propaganda.

    If you want to comprehend the collapse of the West, compare, for example, Liz Truss and her UK government with the British government around the middle of the 19th century. James Grant in his biography of Walter Bagehot reports, for example, that Prime Minister Gladstone translated Horace and Homer, published substantial works on religion and Neapolitan politics, and addressed the Ionian assembly in classical Greek. Parliamentarian Robert Lowe was fluent in Sanskrit. Sir George Lewis was the author of Survey of the Astronomy of the Ancients. The House of Lords had its own learned members. Henry Herbert, 4th Earl of Carnarvon, was a Fellow of the Royal Society, Britain’s National Academy of Sciences.  Today we have presidents and prime ministers who can’t speak English.

    In the US merit has been redefined as racist, and educational standards have been so lowered that the large grocery store chains do not trust their checkout clerks to give change.  

    The Western world has sunk so deeply into depravity that today depravity is celebrated. Young school children are subjected to performances by drag queens paid for by property taxes.  Depravity now has its own flag and proud marchers.  Do we really want to go where we are being led?

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 23:30

  • NASA's DART Spacecraft To Crash Into Asteroid, Testing Earth's Planetary Defenses
    NASA’s DART Spacecraft To Crash Into Asteroid, Testing Earth’s Planetary Defenses

    NASA’s Double Asteroid Redirection Test (DART) spacecraft will intentionally crash into an asteroid about double the height of the Empire State Building and 525 feet wide. It will be the world’s first kinetic impact technique using a spacecraft, testing planetary defenses against an asteroid. 

    On Monday, the 19-meter spacecraft will crash into Dimorphos to observe if a kinetic impact could alter the course of the asteroid. Impact with Dimorphs is expected around 1914 ET. 

    “After the final maneuver on Sept. 25, approximately 24 hours before impact, the navigation team will know the position of the target Dimorphos within 2 kilometers [1.2 miles] … DART will then autonomously guide itself to its collision with the asteroid moonlet,” NASA officials wrote in a statement. 

    Elena Adams, DART’s lead mission systems engineer at Johns Hopkins Applied Physics Laboratory, told Space.Com there’s a high probability DART will hit the asteroid, and the spacecraft’s cameras (called LICIACube), ejected a few weeks ago, will capture the impact.  

    At 1730 ET, NASA will start broadcasting a Live stream of the event. 

    “In the hours before impact, the screen will appear mostly black, with a single point of light. That point is the binary asteroid system Didymos, which is made up of a larger asteroid named Didymos and a smaller asteroid that orbits around it called Dimorphos,” NASA wrote in a video description. 

    Here’s the live stream of the historic test:

    NASA appears to be strengthening planetary defenses. China as well, who recently said they could save the planet from a potential asteroid strike with its Long March 5 rockets. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 23:00

  • Biden Repeats False Claims About AR-15 Velocity In Support Of A Ban
    Biden Repeats False Claims About AR-15 Velocity In Support Of A Ban

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    We have previously discussed dubious constitutional and historical claims by President Joe Biden on gun bans. However, on Friday, he returned to a curious claim that he has made repeatedly: that “the bullet out of an AR-15 travels five times as rapidly as a bullet shot out of any other gun.” Conservative and gun rights publications have repeatedly shot down that claim but it does not seem to have any impact. 

    As with Biden’s false claim that certain weapons were banned from private ownership at the ratification of the Second Amendment, the President continues to make the same false claim on velocity speed.

    A June 30 Field & Stream column on the “Five Fastest Rifle Cartridges”  listed the feet per second (fps) the five fastest rifle cartridges:

    1. .220 Swift — A 40-Grain .220 Swift round moves approximately 4,300 fps.

    2. .257 Weatherby Magnum — An 87-Grain .257 Weatherby Magnum round moves approximately 3,700+ fps.

    3. .30/378 Weatherby — An 165-Grain .30/378 Weatherby round moves approximately 3,400+ fps.

    4. .224 Clark — An 80-Grain .224 Clark round moves approximately 3,500+ fps.

    5. .22 Eargesplitten Loudenboomer — A 50-Grain .22 Eargesplitten Loudenboomer round moves approximately 4,600 fps.

    AR-15 rounds move at approximately 2,700 – 3,100 fps. Even handgun bullets can reportedly reach around 2,000 fps (though that is rare).

    Even the Washington Post has called Biden’s repeated velocity claim “bungled” and factually incorrect. An AR-15 round, at 100 yards, is only slightly faster than most hunting rifles.  However, when measured at the point of the departure from the barrel (as is commonly used on velocity), it is about twice the speed of a common hand gun. It is not the fastest (let alone five times faster) than other guns.

    Those false statements can be dismissed as just another gaffe or “Corn Pop” story, but they refer to the factual foundation for gun control under the Second Amendment. Since President Biden is suggesting that such facts are material to a ban, there is a need for accuracy in such details.

    The White House is ramping up the President’s call to ban “assault weapons” before the midterm elections.  The position remains unclear, including additional references to 9mm handguns are possibly next on the list for prohibitions.

    In support of the ban on AR-15s, Vice President Kamala Harris declared: “Do you know what an assault weapon is? It was designed for a specific purpose, to kill a lot of human beings quickly. An assault weapon is a weapon of war, with no place, no place in a civil society.”

    Courts likely would press the Biden administration on why it is seeking to ban this model when other higher-caliber weapons are sold. AR-15s can handle a variety of calibers. However, they are no more powerful than other semi-automatic rifles of the same caliber and actually have a lower caliber than some commonly sold weapons which use .30-06, .308 and .300 ammunition; many of these guns fire at the same — or near the same rate — as the AR-15. None of these weapons are classified as actual military “assault weapons,” and most civilians cannot own an automatic weapon.

    President Biden showed the same disconnect as Harris between the factual and the rhetorical basis for some gun-control measures. He condemned “high-caliber weapons” like 9mm handguns and said “a .22-caliber bullet will lodge in the lung, and we can probably get it out — may be able to get it and save the life. A 9mm bullet blows the lung out of the body.”

    Moreover, while other politicians like Texas gubernatorial candidate Beto O’Rourke have called for bans, there are obvious practical problems. With an estimated 393 million guns in the United States and an estimated 72 million gun owners; three out of ten Americans say they have guns. Indeed, gun ownership rose during the pandemic, particularly among minority households.

    These weapons are worth hundreds of dollars. Owners would not only challenge such a law but might demand compensation for their seized weapons. There are also over 15 million such weapons in the United States. The ATF is a relatively small agency to carry out such a massive confiscation program. Even in Texas, a state confiscation plan would require an unprecedented law enforcement effort.

    There are good-faith arguments for gun control, including arguments that the Second Amendment does not create an individual right to bear arms. We should continue to have that worthy debate but we should follow the rule of the late Sen. Patrick Moynihan that “everyone is entitled to his own opinion, but not his own facts.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 22:30

  • Most Americans Believe Migrants Should Be Transported To Sanctuary Cities: Poll
    Most Americans Believe Migrants Should Be Transported To Sanctuary Cities: Poll

    A new Rasmussen / RMG Research poll has found that a majority of Americans believe illegal immigrants should be sent to sanctuary cities instead of forcing border states to shoulder the burden. The poll comes as a record 2 million migrants have been arrested in just 11 months.

    Last week, the governors of Texas and Florida sparked national outrage from the left after they transported illegal immigrants to Texas and Washington DC – both virtue-signaling ‘sanctuary cities’ that panicked over the influx of people they couldn’t actually take care of.

    According to the new poll, however, most Americans are supportive of sending migrants to such cities in the future – with 51% of registered voters saying ‘yes’ – while 29% said ‘no’ and 21% were unsure. Another 48% ‘strongly or somewhat approve of border state governors sending some illegal immigrants to places like New York, Chicago and Martha’s Vineyard,’ according to the Daily Caller, which noted that 38% ‘strongly or somewhat’ disapproved of the plan.

    Most respondents thought places like Martha’s Vineyard were being inconsistent: 63% said it was hypocritical for sanctuary cities to complain about migrants being sent there. The majority of likely voters (61%) thought it was fair to say that cartels had more control over the southern border than the U.S. government, and 60% thought the government’s failure to control the southern border was a bigger problem than border states sending migrants to places like Martha’s Vineyard. -Daily Caller

    “This polling confirms what all Americans know to be true: the open-borders policies of the Biden Administration are wildly unpopular,” said America First Legal vice president and general counsel Gene Hamilton in a statement to the Daily Caller News Foundation. ” It also confirms that the American people desire immigration enforcement at our border that is at least as effective as what the elites in Martha’s Vineyard have — where illegal aliens are promptly deported within 24 hours of their arrival.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 22:00

  • Culture War Erupts In Texas Town Over Drag Bingo Event Hosted By Christian Church
    Culture War Erupts In Texas Town Over Drag Bingo Event Hosted By Christian Church

    Authored by Darlene McCormack Sanchez via The Epoch Times,

    Outside a drag bingo event hosted by a pro-LGBT church in Texas, a microcosm of America’s culture war played out with liberals and conservatives screaming at each other across a boulevard on Saturday.

    About 300 Texas conservatives lined an entire block to protest the First Christian Church in Katy, which sponsored a sold-out family drag bingo event to raise money to benefit its “Transparent Closet.”

    The clothing boutique was for “trans and exploring teens, youth and young adults,” according to the church’s website. Its parking lot was full of cars as the family drag bingo event started around 5 p.m. The adults-only portion of the drag show was scheduled for 8:30 p.m.

    The conservative crowd dwarfed some 100 liberals who showed up to champion the church, which openly supports LGBT people. Protesters and counter-protesters alike were armed.

    Extremist groups from both sides of the political spectrum showed up, including far-left Antifa members dressed in black from head to toe carrying umbrellas, few members of neo-Nazi groups, and the Proud Boys, a pro-Western fraternal organization who were wearing Buc-ee’s masks.

    The Antifa and Proud Boys groups taunted each other as sheriff’s deputies donning helmets and riot gear straddled the boulevard to separate them.

    At one point, the factions clashed with an Antifa member hitting a Proud Boy over the head with a flag pole. Other Proud Boys ran to confront the Antifa members, launching a pepper spray attack.

    Proud Boys and Antifa face off at a drag bingo fundraiser at First Christian Church in Katy, Texas, on Sept. 24, 2022. (Bobby Sanchez/The Epoch Times)

    Several Catholics praying the rosary downwind fled the area coughing.

    Christian songs played over loudspeakers as cars and trucks with American flags cruised the boulevard honking their support. People knelt in the grass to pray.

    On the liberal side of the road, the new Little Mermaid song blared in the background.

    Overhead, a helicopter circled the spectacle.

    Loriann Belin, from the Houston area County Citizens Defending Freedom group, showed up to fight the sexualization of children.

    “We need to stand for the protection of the most vulnerable among us—our children,” she said.

    “We don’t hate those people on the other side. God loves them. They’re just lost and need Jesus,” Belin added.

    Fabiana Pimentel, an immigrant mother with children enrolled in the Katy Independent School District, said she left Brazil 14 years ago and can’t believe what is happening in America.

    During the pandemic, she grew concerned about what her children were learning in the classroom and reading in school libraries.

    “I realized things are worse than I thought,” she said. “I’m against the sexualization of kids.”

    Richard Harmier of New Caney protested in hopes the Texas Legislature would take note and pass laws protecting minors from gender transitioning.

    “My granddaughter is 13 years old, and she wants to be a boy now,” Harmier said, adding she cut off all her hair and avoids her father because he isn’t on board with her desire to transition.

    “We’ve got to stop this,” he said. “You shouldn’t be free to indoctrinate children.”

    A Texas Department of Public Safety trooper stands in the middle of a boulevard to keep drag bingo protestors separated A man holding a rifle stood guard over LGBT supporters on Sept. 24, 2022. (Bobby Sanchez/The Epoch Times)

    Across the boulevard, liberals dressed in rainbow T-shirts were just as passionate, chanting, “Fascists, go home!”

    A Katy woman on the liberal side said it was a shame people were protesting drag queens, so she came out to support the church.

    “To make sure the people attending tonight are safe,” said the woman, who declined to give her name.

    Another woman wearing a multicolored shirt watched the crowd from the liberal side. She was with a veteran group that was “for everybody’s rights,” including the LGTB community.

    Further down, a man with graying hair dressed in black said he was an anti-fascist who came to counter Kelly Neidert, pointing a finger toward a group of conservatives across the boulevard.

    Members of Antifa taunt protestors across the street Sept. 24, 2022. (Bobby Sanchez/The Epoch Times)

    Neidert, wearing a red Trump hat, said Antifa follows her around Texas, harassing her because she hosted conservative events at the University of North Texas as a student.

    She is the founder of Protect Texas Kids and wanted to attend the protest also to draw attention to the sexualization of children.

    On Twitter, a post by the Screwston Anti-Fascist Committee labeled all the parent groups attending as “fascists” who intended to disrupt a drag bingo event. “Nazi groups such as the Aryan Freedom Network plan to attend,” the post said.

    The post included a flier targeting Kelly Neidert, urging members to “mask up and bring a buddy.”

    “Join us in the streets to defend the queer community against this threat!” the flier said.

    The drag bingo event at First Christian Church, part of the Disciples of Christ denomination, drew more controversy after the church quietly dropped one drag performer, Jaysen Kettl, who was once involved in a school shooting plot.

    Kettl goes by the stage name of Tisha Flowers and portrays himself as a Goth drag queen.

    In 2004, Kettl, 17 at the time, pleaded guilty to conspiracy to commit capital murder for his role in plotting a school shooting at Vidor High School. The plot was foiled before anything occurred.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 21:30

  • Pound Flash Crashes 500 pips To Record Low Amid Global FX Carnage As Things Start Breaking
    Pound Flash Crashes 500 pips To Record Low Amid Global FX Carnage As Things Start Breaking

    Just as last week ended, with a relentless meltup in the exponentially rising US dollar, coupled with a collapse in cable, the yen, yuan, euro and so on, not to mention stocks and bonds, so the new week begins only this time the moves are even faster, even more brutal and even more acute, as we approach the breaking point.

    Case in point, after starting modestly higher, the meltup in the dollar accelerated, as the Bloomberg dollar index exploded to new all time highs…

    … facilitated by a yen whose plunge made a mockery of Thursday’s multi-billion BOJ intervention…

    … and is forcing Kuroda to sell even more tens of billions of US Treasurys, to cash into USDs which he will then sell for yen, in the process pushing up 10Y yields even higher, creating a toxic feedback loop of higher yields and an even higher dollar, sending yields higher and the dollar even higher.

    But the imminent conclusion of Japan’s MMT experiment notwithstanding, the real highlight of the session so far has been the total collapse in sterling, whose implosion after Friday’s mini budget has accelerated and moments ago cable flash crashed to a new all time low of 1.0350, below the previous record low set in early 1985, and just millimeters away from parity as every single stop was taking out to the downside. .

    And since there is nothing at all to contain the now exponential move in the USD, now that the entire world is facing one massive, $20 trillion short squeeze in USD-denominated debt…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    … expect an emergency central bank meeting this week where panicking officials do everything they can to contain the dollar and to undo the tremendous damage the Powell Fed has unleashed on the world. Because in the end, it’s always the same.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 21:24

  • Woman Has Epic Meltdown At Walmart – Uses 'Rape' As Excuse To Cut In Line
    Woman Has Epic Meltdown At Walmart – Uses ‘Rape’ As Excuse To Cut In Line

    If you needed any more confirmation that the political left is normalizing insanity within our society, just take a look at this recent epic meltdown by a woman who cut in line at a Walmart and was called out by the guy behind her.  Screaming like a mental patient is justified because she claims to have been “raped” (and of course, she is wearing a mask). Note that the Walmart employees try to placate her instead of doing what they should have done, which is kick her out of the building.  The constant hand-holding of mentally unstable and emotionally stunted people is slowly but surely bringing America down.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 21:00

  • FBI Whistleblower Comes Forward, Alleges Many Agents "Don't Agree" With Bureau's Direction
    FBI Whistleblower Comes Forward, Alleges Many Agents “Don’t Agree” With Bureau’s Direction

    Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times

    An FBI whistleblower recently came forward and issued warnings about alleged politicization at the FBI, saying that the bureau is spying on law-abiding Americans and that many of its domestic counterterrorism cases are tantamount to “entrapment.”

    Kyle Seraphin, who has spent six years in the FBI, was suspended without pay and cannot seek another job without quitting or asking for permission. It’s not clear when he was suspended, but he said that he had run-ins with his managers about his refusal to get the COVID-19 vaccine although he was granted a religious exemption.

    “The number of guys who say, ‘I don’t agree with what’s going on here, but I’ve got three years to retire,’ it’s heartbreaking,” he told podcast host Dan Bongino.

    In one instance, Seraphin said he was forced to blow the whistle last year when Attorney General Merrick Garland told lawmakers that the Department of Justice was not targeting parents. He gave to a member of Congress an email that was circulated in the FBI, which said that Garland ordered the usage of the controversial PATRIOT Act to target parents with a tag, “EDUOFFICIALS.”

    At the time, in May 2022, Reps. Jim Jordan (R-Ohio) and Mike Johnson (R-Ind.) alleged that the investigations involved parents who were “upset about mask mandates and state elected officials who publicly voiced opposition to vaccine mandates,” accusing Garland of making false statements to Congress.

    “That’s when you become part of political hatchet jobs, and I didn’t sign up for that, and nobody I know signed up for that either,” Seraphin told Bongino. “That’s not what people want to get involved in.”

    In an interview with the Washington Times last week, he said the bureau’s investigations into domestic violent extremism, white nationalists, and right-wing extremists are mostly entrapment operations with questionable moral and ethical underpinnings.

    “My team was deployed to 20 or 25 different high profile, national terrorism organization or terrorism investigations between 2018 and 2021. And what I saw, as the most obvious statement, is that there are three things about counterterrorism investigations,” he said.

    Seraphin stated: “Number one, the demand for white supremacy vastly outstrips the supply of white supremacy.”

    “Number two,” he added, “the FBI‘s playbook when it comes to counterterrorism investigations is always and unequivocally morally equivalent to entrapment, even if there’s a legal definition that allows them to skirt that.”

    ‘Inaccurate’

    As for No. 3, Seraphin added to the Washington Times that the FBI doesn’t have an objective metric on how they prioritize cases.

    “There’s an entirely ridiculous internal process for determining every single national priority,” the whistleblower said.

    The Epoch Times has contacted the FBI for comment. A bureau spokesperson told the paper that his claims about entrapment lacked merit.

    “This comment is inaccurate and represents a clear misunderstanding of the policy and practice in FBI investigations,” the FBI said in a statement to the outlet.

    Attorney General Merrick Garland (L) and FBI Director Christopher Wray hold a press conference in Washington on Nov. 8, 2021. (Chip Somodevilla/Getty Images)

    In the Bongino interview, Seraphin suggested that more FBI employees will come forward in the future, according to him, due to the bureau’s now-partisan nature.

    At least 14 FBI whistleblowers have come forward in recent months to provide information about recent actions inside the bureau, said Jordan, on the FBI’s investigations into the Jan. 6 Capitol breach, parents at school board meetings, and Hunter Biden’s laptop.

    At one point during the interview, Seraphin also touched on the Aug. 8 raid targeting former President Donald Trump’s Mar-a-Lago. Trump has often said that the search was political in nature and meant to harm his 2024 chances.

    “You ask me to go raid President Obama’s house, you ask me to raid President Bush’s house, it’s not happening,” he continued. “It’s not happening. I’m sorry, it’s not happening. I’m not doing that. I’m going to be, probably pretty vocal. That’s probably going to be my last day.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 20:30

  • Macro Pulse Early Warning: Need A Bigger Boat
    Macro Pulse Early Warning: Need A Bigger Boat

    By Marcel Kasumovich, head of research at One River Asset Management

    Macro Pulse Early Warning – Need a Bigger Boat

    Macro matters. For decades, financial markets were defined by long, passive trends. Brief periods of macro relevance punctuated by active policy intervention and a resumption of long-lived passive trends. In today’s unprecedented economic change, positive innovation cannot simply be managed with a long horizon and a portfolio dotted with tail risk hedges. Cycles are running shorter and hotter, raising the importance of calibrating risk to the macro cycle.  

    Digital asset markets don’t need a reminder. Prices have been joined at the hip with interest rate expectations. The correlation between the price of bitcoin and the peak expectation for US policy rates, captured by the June 2023 future, is a whopping 85% in the past year. It wasn’t “just the Fed.” The more aggressive normalization of policy – rate expectations are up more than 400 basis points in the past year – exposed speculative excesses across the digital ecosystem.  

    The current environment is begging for a macro tool to help with active macro risk management. So, we built the Macro Pulse. The Macro Pulse turns ISM survey of manufacturing business conditions into states of the economic cycle, ranging from growth boom to bust, built initially as proof-of-concept. Survey data is the right avenue for identifying these cycles – they are not revised and not beholden to past cycles, unlike official figures. Here, we illustrate portfolio analytics where asset allocation is conditioned on the state of the macro cycle.  

    We start by defining innocuous asset allocation in different macro states. The average asset allocation over the cycle is roughly 25% equities, 45% bonds, 20% commodities, and 10% foreign exchange, dating back to 1977. This is the weighted average of allocations that vary by macro state for a benchmark active portfolio, slanted towards equity and commodity assets in an economic boom and overallocated to bonds when growth is declining. Digital assets are added over a shorter period since 2011, with a constant 2.5% allocation to bitcoin at the expense of bonds. The portfolio simulations follow.  

    The performance of a 60-40, equity-bond passive portfolio and the portfolio based on active macro states are similar, on average. The average annualized return on a 60-40 portfolio is 9.1% compared to 9.3% on the active macro portfolio. But risk management is materially different. The volatility of the macro portfolio is substantially less at 7.8%, versus 9.7% (Figure 1). That’s where it gets interesting.

    View image here: Source: Bloomberg. One River Digital Calculations. Annualized monthly returns and volatility from Dec 1976 to Aug 2022. The 60%-40% equity-bond portfolio is based on monthly returns for S&P 500 Total Return and the US Aggregate Government Bond Total Return. The Macro Portfolio is based on S&P 500 Total Return, Bond Total Return, Bloomberg Total Return Commodity Index, and the DXY for the US dollar. There are four macro states and different asset allocations across those four states with maximum exposure of 100% across assets.  

    Isolating periods of negative portfolio events illustrates the risk management value of conditioning asset allocation to the states of macro cycles. We turn the portfolios through four well-known high-risk periods: 2020 (Feb-Mar); 2008 (Jun-Nov); 2000-01 (Sep-Mar); and 1987 (Oct). The average drawdown for the 60-40 portfolio in those periods is 14.9%, with all four down by double-digits. The active macro portfolio averaged a 2.4% decline, with only 1987 a material loss of 10.4% (Figure 2). 

    View image here; Source: Bloomberg. One River Digital Calculations.

     But that’s not all! We can calibrate expected future shifts in the state of macro cycles. This improves risk management even further. When in an economic boom, we estimate a 57% chance of staying in that state for three months’ time, a 37% chance of moving to slower growth, and 6% odds of recession. Probabilities are calculated across all states and applied to the asset allocation. It makes a big difference. The most pessimistic asset allocation scores -27 on a +/-100 scale, much less than the -100 scored in recession (Figure 3). The probability approach shifts weight to growth assets in a recession as the odds of transitioning to an expansion increase. On the growth side, there is little distinction between a boom and a softer growth cycle – the odds of a continued expansion are equally high. 

    View image here; Source: Bloomberg. One River Digital Calculations. The strongest growth score is +100 and the weakest growth score is –100. The score for each state is the probability-weighted average based on the odds of transitioning into a state in the next three months.  

    Periods of declining equity markets demonstrate the most striking risk management enhancement using Macro Pulse probability weights. The 60-40 portfolio has an annualized return of -23.9% in months with negative equity performance, an improvement from the 41.9% fall in equity portfolios. The active macro ​​​​​state-based portfolio shows a similar decline to the 60-40 portfolio. However, using transition probabilities to capture rising odds of different economic outcomes, the Macro Pulse portfolio yields a positive return. The message can be an early warning or an early opportunity signal. Either way, forward-looking probabilities matter. 

    Digital assets are additive to the process. To keep things simple, we include bitcoin with a fixed 2.5% monthly weight across all macro states, replacing bonds in the asset allocation. There is a strong belief that bitcoin just replicates equity beta in a portfolio. We evaluate this by examining periods when equity returns are negative. There is no doubt that drawdowns in digital assets are severe. But timing matters – they are also brief and decouple from traditional markets. Digital assets have been additive, leading to stronger returns, but with a higher volatility trade-off that calls for active management (Figure 4). 

    View image here; Source: Bloomberg. 

    Economic activity is weak. Deflation in commodities, financial assets, and housing markets strongly suggests activity will weaken further. And it is when growth is falling from weak levels that the Macro Pulse calls for the most defensive portfolio positions. Once the recession hits, asset markets transition more quickly to growth opportunities. Active strategies are the best umbrella for the current macro climate – a feature shared by digital and traditional asset markets.  

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 20:00

  • As Few As Ten Congressional Districts May Decide The 2022 Midterm Elections
    As Few As Ten Congressional Districts May Decide The 2022 Midterm Elections

    Authored by Mike Shedlock via MishTalk.com,

    If Democrats manage to hold the House and pick up a single Senate seat, they will unleash a wave of very inflationary Progressive legislation.

    538 poll synopsis updated September 23, 2022

    Like Nate Silver or not, the above 538 House Forecast is a reasonable starting point for discussion. 

    Silver has the Republicans a slight favorite (68-32) favorite to win the House. That margin seems more than “slight” but use your own definition.

    Majority Math

    • There are 435 seats so 218 is a majority
    • The current house makeup is 221 to 214
    • A flip of 7 seats, my base forecast right now, would give the Republicans a 221-214 majority.

    Republicans have a bit of a cushion in this. For example, AZ-2 and VA-2 could easily easily flip Red negating CA-27 and PA-7. 

    Election What If?

    • If you give all 11 seats in the blue box to Republicans and all else stayed the same (it wouldn’t) Republicans would pick up 4 more seats for a net pickup of 11.  
    • If you give all 11 seats in the blue box to Democrats and all else stayed the same (it wouldn’t) Republicans would only flip a net of 3 seats giving Democrats a 218 to 217 majority of 1. 

    That latter scenario, or a similar outcome is unlikely, but it’s possible. One in four or five is not a major upset.

    10-12 Seats Are Crucial

    No one trusts these polls, but 10-12 tossup seats could easily determine this crucial midterm election. 

    Very few seats are actually in play in most elections. Only when there is a blowout do major shifts occur. Then midterm results return to the status quo sooner or later, and mostly sooner. 

    This setup is a result of extreme gerrymandering by both parties in the states they control. 

    And as a direct consequence, extreme candidates win nominations. 

    What Will Determine the Outcome?

    The vote will come down to turnout, policies, and mostly on winning over independents.

    Republicans need focus on issues the independents care about if they wish to improve their odds in the midterm elections.

    Here are those issues: Inflation, education, school boards, woke policies, massive tax hikes, and potential blue state pension bailouts. 

    Results in very a very red-state Kansas show abortion is mostly a losing message for Republicans. By a 59-41 percent margin Kansas voters rejected a constitutional amendment Tuesday that would have said there was no right to an abortion in the state.

    Democrats have picked up on this. 

    Republicans let Democrats turn the campaign into a focus on Trump and abortion not on inflation. Trump himself is not displeased with this.

    There is a lot riding on the outcome economically. I expect an inflationary inferno if Democrats hold the House because the most likely outcome is they pick up a Senate seat. 

    Progressives would be in full control, no longer needing Senator Joe Manchin’s vote.

    *  *  *

    Please Subscribe to MishTalk Email Alerts.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 19:30

  • Mob Of People Spontaneously Ransack Wawa Convenience Store In Philadelphia
    Mob Of People Spontaneously Ransack Wawa Convenience Store In Philadelphia

    A mob of people entered a Wawa convenience store on Roosevelt Boulevard in Philadelphia and broke out into a riot, seemingly without warning or reason.  There’s no comment yet from Philadelphia police on the cause of the rampage.  As the economic situation in the US continues to decline and prices continue to rise on most goods, expect to see more scenes like this one on a regular basis.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 18:00

  • Meloni's Right-Wing Alliance Wins Clear Majority In Italian Elections
    Meloni’s Right-Wing Alliance Wins Clear Majority In Italian Elections

    First Sweden, now Italy.

    Europe’s unelected authoritarian ruler, Ursula von der Leyen, is not going to be happy: according to early exit polls out of Italy’s national election, the right-wing bloc of Giorgia Meloni – which the ultra-left wing press just can’t stop comparing to Mussolini – is set for a historic, if largely expected, victory and a clear majority (if, however, not a super-majority) which will propel Meloni to the top of the Italian government as the country’s next prime minister, ushering in a historic right-wing shift for a country that – like Sweden until two weeks ago – has traditionally been very left-wing.

    Meloni’s Brothers of Italy party, which won just 4% of the vote during the last national election in 2018, won the biggest share of the vote in Sunday’s parliamentary elections with around 22.5%-26.5% of the vote according to an exit poll released by Italian national broadcaster Rai. She is now set to become prime minister but would require approval from junior partners in her coalition to assume the role.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to an exit poll from Rai, Meloni’s alliance which includes Salvini’s League and Berlusconi’s Forza Italia will win around 43% of the vote. The Center-Left alliance will have just 25.5%-29.5% of the vote, while the 5 Star movement has 13.5%-17.5% of the final vote.

    Italy’s electoral system, which strongly favors parties that run as part of a coalition, is expected to help the right to an ample majority in both houses of Parliament: with 228 votes in the Lower House and 115 seats in the Senate (according to SkyTG24), Meloni will have a majority as just 104 votes are required.

    As the WSJ notes, the Italian election is “the first big test of the European Union’s political cohesion as it confronts Russia’s attempt to redraw the continent’s post-Cold War order. Russian President Vladimir Putin’s restriction of natural-gas deliveries has sparked an energy-price crunch that, combined with other inflationary pressures, is expected to push much of Europe into a recession this winter.”

    Meloni replaces former Goldman Sachs partner and ECB technocrat and globalist, Mario Draghi, and will be the country’s first female prime minister.

    The likely right-wing government will face difficult decisions over how to protect Italian households and businesses from sky-high prices for natural gas and electricity. While Italy’s parlous public finances allow limited scope for fiscal largess, if the UK is any example – and it is – Italy will engage in a similar strategy of targeted and debt-funded fiscal stimulus which will lead to a blowout in Italian debt, a further plunge in the euro and much chaos everywhere.

    Italy’s massive debt of roughly 150% of GDP, combined with Italy’s weak long-term growth record, makes the country vulnerable to bond-market selloffs if investors lose confidence in the soundness of Rome’s fiscal policies, and dependent on the European Central Bank to keep its bond yields stable. ECB support has typically been conditional on Rome following cautious budget policies and enacting economic overhauls aimed at improving growth. In other words, the Berlusconi example of 2011 is still vivid – if Meloni’s policies displease the ECB, Christine Lagarde will simply refuse (or forget) to buy Italian bonds, sparking Europe’s next sovereign debt crisis at the worst possible moment.

    During the election campaign, Meloni tried to reassure voters and investors that she will keep Italy’s mammoth debt under control and won’t question the country’s foreign alliances or support for Ukraine. Expect all of that to change tomorrow.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Looking ahead, Europe’s crumbling and unelected oligarchy will be terribly vexed by the result…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    … as for markets, the spin will be that the lack of a super-majority is actually bullish for for the EUR and BTPs, while focus will quickly turn to coalition stability and who Italy’s next finmin will be.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 17:20

  • Nancy Pelosi Booed At NYC Festival: 'Doesn't Bode Well For Dems Ahead Of Mid-Terms'
    Nancy Pelosi Booed At NYC Festival: ‘Doesn’t Bode Well For Dems Ahead Of Mid-Terms’

    House Speaker Nancy Pelosi made a surprise appearance at a Saturday night music festival in New York City, called the “Global Citizen music festival”. She was introduced on stage by Priyanka Chopra Jonas, wife of American singer and actor Nick Jonas, to speak about climate change and carbon pollution.

    But instead of the climactic “surprise” celebratory moment that organizers were hoping for, Pelosi’s presence triggered loud boos from the sizeable audience, as multiple videos from the event show…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “As speaker of the house, I am here to thank you for your dazzling advocacy, entrepreneurial thinking, and determination as global citizens,” she told the crowd, as quoted in NY Post.

    While some occasional cheers could be heard, by and large she was booed and heckled so fiercely throughout the remarks that at times she struggled to speak over the noise. The reaction of the likely largely young Democrat crowd doesn’t look good for Dems ahead of the mid-term elections in November: “Crowd’s reaction to Pelosi at music festival doesn’t bode well for Dems,” Fox observed on its homepage. 

    The Daily Mail has speculated the negative reaction likely stems from recognition of of the spectacle of yet another celebrity politician seen backstage with A-listers and who flies around in private jets lecturing young people about saving the planet:

    Nancy Pelosi, 82, is savagely booed during appearance at NYC’s Global Citizen music festival in Central Park – after schmoozing backstage with A-listers and drunk-driver husband Paul.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “It’s thanks to your help that the United States recently enacted historic climate legislation, which will be a game changer,” Pelosi said while being drowned out at time by chants and boos heard from different sectors of the venue. “It will slash carbon pollution by 40% by 2030, it will give a historic, an historic $370 billion to fight the climate crisis.”

    Footage which featured a broader view of the audience showed here struggling to speak for the noise

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    One person filming is heard questioning, “Why is everyone booing?”

    Surprise! Here’s Nancy…

    Getty Images

    The Daily Mail notes further of the timing of her appearance, “Prior to her appearance on stage, many eyes were on the House Speaker as she met with celebrities in one of her first major public outings following Paul’s drunk driving conviction.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 17:00

  • GOP Leader McCarthy Unveils 'Commitment To America' Plan
    GOP Leader McCarthy Unveils ‘Commitment To America’ Plan

    Authored by Joseph Lord via The Epoch Times,

    House Minority Leader Kevin McCarthy (R-Calif.) on Sept. 23 unveiled Republicans’ “Commitment to America” plan, which includes a litany of policy promises on various issues.

    While the race for the Senate is generally considered slightly favorable for Democrats, in the House it’s widely expected that Republicans will be in control next year.

    If they do take the lower chamber, McCarthy is on track to become speaker of the House.

    ‘A Plan for a New Direction’

    McCarthy on Sept. 23 sat down with “Capitol Report” on NTD to discuss the plan, which he called “a plan for a new direction.”

    He said that the plan is about “the American public, not about the politicians in Washington.”

    “For last year and a half, we’ve gone across the nation listening to Americans,” he continued. “And they’re fearful. They wonder whether they can afford it—can they afford to fill up their gas, can they go to the grocery store again which now costs more?”

    Adding to these worries, McCarthy noted, is rapidly-rising inflation, which over the past year has broken record after record.

    “Now [Americans’] take-home pay is less,” he said. “They only get 11 months, they lost one month of their wages, because the Democrats have caused inflation. And so what we think you should do is actually have a plan for a new direction.”

    “That’s what the commitment to America is—a plan for a new direction where we’ll have an economy that’s strong, we take away this runaway spending [by] Democrats, we make America energy independent, so your price of gas goes lower, more money in your pocket, inflation gets slowed down.”

    House Minority Leader Kevin McCarthy (R-Calif.), speaks during the Congressional Gold Medal Ceremony to honor the merchant mariners of World War II in Washington May 18, 2022. (Oliver Contreras/Getty Images)

    Stop ‘Runaway Spending,’ Address Inflation

    The key pillars of the plan re-articulate oft-repeated GOP criticisms of the current regime.

    One such position is a promise to stop Democrats’ “runaway spending.” Since they thinly took the majority of both chambers, Democrats have spent a staggering amount of money, and the cost of consumer essentials has risen by over eight percent on average.

    In March 2021, the party used the partisan reconciliation process to pass a $1.9 trillion COVID relief bill dubbed the American Rescue Plan with no GOP support or input. Later, the majority party was joined by a handful of Republicans in each chamber to pass a $1.2 trillion infrastructure bill.

    At the same time, the party pushed for an even more expensive reconciliation, the Build Back Better Act. In its first draft, the 2,000-page bill would have cost $3.5 trillion. Later, in an effort to win the crucial support of Sens. Joe Manchin (D-W. Va.) and Kyrsten Sinema (D-Ariz.), that figure was dropped to $1.75 trillion, but this bill also failed when Manchin announced that he would not support the package at all.

    Most recently, the party again turned to the reconciliation process to pass the Inflation Reduction Act, a bill that carried over some key elements of Build Back Better and which will cost taxpayers over $700 billion.

    President Joe Biden signs the Inflation Reduction Act as Democrat lawmakers look on at the White House in Washington, on Aug. 16, 2022. (Drew Angerer/Getty Images)

    In total, these three bills alone come out to well over $3.8 trillion spent by the majority party over the course of only a few short years.

    Republicans have been highly critical of this pattern of spending, which they argue is the largest factor behind soaring inflation that has reduced the spending power of the dollar by almost 10 percent. McCarthy made just this point.

    “If you watch, how did inflation start, it wasn’t just Republicans warning the Democrats because remember, only Democrats voted for the American Rescue Plan,” McCarthy said.

    McCarthy also noted that the GOP position was influential among even many Democrat economists.

    “Larry Summers, a Democrat, [and] former Secretary of the Treasury warned them not to do it, you cause inflation,” McCarthy said. “Steve Rattner, an economic adviser to [President Barack Obama] calls it ‘the original sin of inflation.’”

    “We’ve got to stop that runaway spending,” the California Republican added.

    Restore US Energy Independence

    Republicans will also seek to restore American energy independence if they take the House, McCarthy said.

    Under President Donald Trump, the United States became energy independent for the first time in decades. But when he took office, President Joe Biden, citing the so-called “climate crisis,” significantly cut U.S. energy capacity by shuttering the long-debated Keystone XL Pipeline and by declaring a moratorium on new oil and natural gas leases on federal lands.

    At the time, critics warned that these policies would substantially raise gas prices. When the predicted price spikes came about, Biden pulled millions of barrels of oil from the Strategic Petroleum Reserve rather than reversing his energy policies. Republicans joined by Joe Manchin unanimously opposed the move, calling on Biden to reverse his policies rather than pulling from U.S. reserves, which were intended to be used in case of global or financial crises.

    If they take the House, McCarthy said that Republicans will work to restore America’s energy sector.

    A person uses the keypad on a pump at a gas station in Arlington, Va., on July 29, 2022. (Olivier Douliery/AFP via Getty Images)

    Beyond Democrats’ spending, McCarthy noted that the rising costs of energy have had a substantial impact in worsening inflation.

    “Another cause of inflation is the rise of energy costs,” he said. “So we’re going to make America energy independent, create more American jobs, but lower the price. The energy cost goes in every product and good.

    “We’re going to make a sound economy with sound money policies,” he added. “That’s a start to get us under control.”

    ‘A Nation That’s Safe’

    McCarthy also said that Republicans will work to reduce crime rates.

    Over the past two years, cities across the U.S. have begun to see higher and higher rates of violent crime, with many cities breaking past records for homicide rates.

    Republicans have blamed the situation in part on the “soft-on-crime” attitude of Democrats and liberals in the criminal justice system.

    Following the death of George Floyd in 2020, anti-police sentiments spiked among liberals, and in several major cities prosecutors and district attorneys have refused to enforce several laws.

    Speaking on this issue, McCarthy said, “We believe in a nation that’s safe.”

    “We watch the Democrats defund the police and crime rises—from Portland to Philadelphia, it’s the highest it’s been in 20 years,” he continued. “So we … will make sure we don’t defund the police. We’ll actually bring 200,000 more police officers, we put the accountability to these prosecutors and [district attorneys] to uphold the law fairly and equally.”

    House Minority Leader Kevin McCarthy (R-Calif.) speaks with U.S. Capitol Police Officers after arriving on a bicycle to an event at the National Law Enforcement Officers Memorial as part of the “Back The Blue” bike ride in Washington, on May 12, 2022. (Anna Moneymaker/Getty Images)

    After largely evading the issue during most of the 117th Congress, Democrats on Sept. 22 finally tried to address rising crime rates with a series of policing bills that passed through the House along broadly party lines. The move, coming as it does only weeks out from a midterm election, raised eyebrows among observers after two years of largely anti-police sentiments among many Democrats.

    ‘A Future That’s Built on Freedom’

    McCarthy also vowed that Republicans will address ongoing controversies in public schools about parents’ rights.

    Schools in several major cities have faced scrutiny for the content being taught to children, which has included controversial topics like homosexuality, critical race theory, and graphic representations of nudity or sexual intercourse sometimes shown to children as young as primary school age. In turn, many parents in school districts across the United States have turned up to school board meetings to challenge the material being taught to their children.

    If Republicans take the House, McCarthy promised a long-touted “parents bill of rights,” which McCarthy said would ensure that “parents have a say in their children’s education.”

    The issue has increasingly become a rallying cry for Republicans.

    Republican Glenn Youngkin made the issue the central pillar of his 2021 gubernatorial race in Virginia, which he later won by margins far wider than observers had predicted.

    A local mother at a rally outside the Loudoun County Public Schools administration building in Ashburn, Va., on Sept. 13, 2022. (Terri Wu/The Epoch Times)

    Florida Governor Ron DeSantis has also put focus on the issue, lobbying and successfully passing a bill that forbids schools from teaching young children about issues like sex, gender identity, or sexual orientation. Though critics dubbed the legislation the “don’t say gay” bill, polls on it have generally shown that most Americans support the move.

    The role of parents in determining what schools teach their children has largely become a mainstream issue only in the past year or two, and it remains to be seen whether the issue can rally new voters to the GOP’s banner in November.

    Investigations to ‘Hold the Government Accountable’

    McCarthy also vowed that Republicans would look into a series of controversial issues and decisions by the current administration through new probes and investigative panels.

    The current rules of the lower chamber give the speaker of the House substantially broad authority over the creation of new committees and probes, meaning that Republicans have largely been unable to use the full force of Congress to investigate things they find potentially concerning.

    Under Republicans, McCarthy said, the government is “going to be held accountable.”

    “We’re … going to look from the aspects of holding government accountable, as well as the DOJ going after parents,” McCarthy added, referencing a controversial decision from the Department of Justice to pursue parents attending school board meetings to protest their children’s curriculum.

    McCarthy also promised accountability from China through a probe into the origins of the COVID-19 virus, which is now widely recognized to have likely leaked from a biological research facility in Wuhan, China.

    “Why don’t we find out where the origin of COVID started,” he said.

    McCarthy said that he’d also create a select committee on China that would look at ways to have U.S. industries, that were shipped there, return to America.

    Workers inside the P4 laboratory in Wuhan, capital of China’s Hubei Province, on Feb. 23, 2017. (Johannes Eisele/AFP via Getty Images)

    Republicans have also suggested probes into Dr. Anthony Fauci’s ties to the Wuhan facility, the role of Speaker of the House Nancy Pelosi (D-Calif.) in leaving the Capitol building unprepared on Jan. 6, and the recent raid by the FBI of Trump’s Mar-a-Lago home.

    Undoing Democrats’ IRS Expansion

    McCarthy said that if they take the House, Republicans will also work to undo Democrats’ recent expansion of the IRS.

    Specifically, the expansion was included as part of the Inflation Reduction Act, which sextupled the IRS’ current budget overnight.

    The IRS provisions of the Inflation Reduction Act were among its most controversial.

    The $80 billion allocated to the agency by the bill sextuples its budget, and Republican critics have warned that the bulked-up IRS could hire as many as 87,000 new agents. These agents, in turn, critics have said, will be let loose against middle-class Americans and small businesses, despite Democrats’ claims about the expansion that nobody making less than $400,000 per year will see their tax bill increase.

    Proponents of the bill suggest that, in addition to the new tax code changes, a bulkier IRS will bring in an additional $124 billion annually through enforcement efforts.

    The funding for the IRS will go toward “necessary expenses for tax enforcement activities … to determine and collect owed taxes, to provide legal and litigation support, to conduct criminal investigations (including investigative technology), to provide digital asset monitoring and compliance activities, to enforce criminal statutes related to violations of internal revenue laws and other financial crimes … and to provide other services.”

    The Internal Revenue Service headquarters building in Washington is seen in a file photo. (Chip Somodevilla/Getty Images)

    Preston Brashers, a senior tax policy analyst at the Heritage Foundation, told The Epoch Times that contrary to Democrat claims, the IRS expansion will almost certainly mean more audits, and in turn more taxes, for middle-class families and small businesses.

    “On the very first day, [we’re going to] repeal 87,000 IRS agents,” McCarthy said.

    However, this promise may be impossible for McCarthy to keep, particularly if Democrats retain the Senate. Because the Inflation Reduction Act was passed using the filibuster-immune reconciliation process, Republicans theoretically could repeal the expansion of the IRS if they take both chambers of Congress. But even in this case, the measure would need the signature of President Biden, who’s likely to oppose any such move.

    Limitations

    Despite the broad range of promises and proposals discussed by McCarthy, Republicans will likely face many limitations on how much they can do, particularly if they only take the House.

    Currently, Republicans seem to be on track to reenter the House majority after four years in the minority, but the Senate is less certain. Though Senate races in several states remain nail-bitingly tight, observers currently peg the fight for the Senate as leaning heavily in Democrats’ favor.

    Right now, FiveThirtyEight gives Republicans a 71 in 100 chance of retaking the House after four years in the minority. But FiveThirtyEight also gives Republicans only a 29 in 100 chance of reclaiming the upper chamber.

    If these projections pan out, Senate Democrats would find their scope heavily limited by the Republican House, while the Republican House would find its scope severely limited by the Senate. If the race does end in a divided government, it is likely that McCarthy will face substantial hurdles to rolling out the policy proposals in the Commitment to America plan.

    On the other hand, House Republicans would have the benefit of Manchin’s swing vote, which could help them get some budget reconciliation legislation over the finish line in the Senate.

    Nevertheless, even in the best case for Republicans—control of both chambers of Congress—the White House will still be occupied by a Democrat, meaning that a fully Republican Congress’s most ambitious goals would be difficult or impossible to carry out.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 16:30

  • Tehran Summons Western Ambassadors For "Meddling" As Protest Death Toll Climbs To Over 40
    Tehran Summons Western Ambassadors For “Meddling” As Protest Death Toll Climbs To Over 40

    Iran’s foreign ministry has blamed Western “meddling” for the outbreak and growth of raging protests inside the country, which have now reached a full week, and have left at least 35 dead, according to the government’s official death toll. From Friday to Saturday this figure had more than doubled, with Tehran officials initially citing 17 dead, and then revising it upwards. This includes five security officers, according to state media, which has painted the “anti-hijab” demonstrations as violent. By Saturday evening, state media counted 41 among the deceased.

    On Sunday Iran summoned the ambassadors of the UK and Norway to condemn their governments for allegedly fueling the unrest, as reported in The Hill

    The director-general of Western Europe within Iran’s foreign ministry called out Norway’s Parliament speaker for allegedly “prejudicing and unrealistic comments” about recent protests in Iran, according to Iran’s official news agency, IRNA.  

    The U.K. ambassador, meanwhile, was chastised for a London-based, Persian-language “hosting of the media” that Iran believes has produced “put provocation and invitation to turbulence and expansion of riots in Iran on top of their agenda,” according to a second report from IRNA. 

    AP image

    The protests across dozens of cities began following the death in policy custody of 22-year old Mahsa Amini. She had been reportedly detained for improper attire, or failing to properly wear an Islamic head-covering, after which she turned up dead.

    Her supporters say she was beaten to death, while Iranian authorities have said she collapsed from a heart-related incident. The US has since sanctioned Iran’s notorious ‘morality police’ and the heads of multiple security agences.

    The UN has meanwhile condemned the harsh police crackdown, which a statement has said includes sending paramilitary forces and at times live ammunition interspersed with riot control measures. But it’s clear that in many instances the demonstrators are “fighting back”…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    International observers are now calling the protests unprecedented in size and ferocity, which began immediately following Amini’s funeral in her Iranian Kurdistan province hometown of Saqqez on Saturday.

    Since then countless women have publicly removed their headscarves in defiance, with many rallies becoming anti-regime demonstrations where chants calling for the removal of the Ayatollah and the hardline morality police are heard. 

    According to a Time magazine description of the images that sparked the mass protests:

    Hours after her detention, Amini was admitted to hospital “without any vital signs and brain-dead,” officials there reported. She was pronounced dead on Sept. 16. In the days between, the Iranian public saw a photo of a young girl in the prime of life attached to tubes—blood stains visible on her ear, which a doctor viewing the images called a possible sign of severe head trauma.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Iranian authorities have moved to curtail the spread of protests by restricting internet services across much of the country, as well as blocking various social media platforms.

    Washington is meanwhile encouraging the protests while condemning the crackdown, and has even moved to help Iranian demonstrators access the internet and external platforms. The US Treasury Department on Friday announced the easing of restrictions on tech companies’ access to Iran, in the hopes they could provide work-arounds to Tehran cutting communications and internet.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to the latest developments, “SpaceX chief Elon Musk said he was activating his company’s Starlink internet service in Iran, which cut off web access to its more than 80 million citizens this week, after the U.S. Treasury Department eased sanctions to help support the free flow of information in the country.”

    The New York Times over the weekend is reporting that protests have now spread to some 80 cities.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 16:00

  • Washington Post Columnist Calls For The End Of Impartiality And Balance In Journalism
    Washington Post Columnist Calls For The End Of Impartiality And Balance In Journalism

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    In an age of rage, Washington Post columnist and MSNBC contributor Jennifer Rubin has long been a standout in her attacks on Republicans and conservatives: “We have to collectively, in essence, burn down the Republican Party. We have to level them because if there are survivors, if there are people who weather this storm, they will do it again.” However, her recent column shows that she has made a clean break not only from Republicans but from reason. The writer (long cited by the Post as their “Republican columnist” for balance) has called for the media to abandon balance and impartiality. Rubin is demanding that the media just become overt advocates in refusing to report both sides in the myriad of political issues in this election.

    In her column, Rubin rejects the “need for false balance” because the coverage can suggest that Republicans are “rational.”

    “The Kabuki dance in which Trump, his defenders and his supporters are treated as rational (clever even!) is what comes from a media establishment that refuses to discard its need for false balance that it has developed over the course of decades.”

    That balance was once called “journalism” but Rubin now calls it facilitating “disinformation.” Balanced reporting is now dangerous and makes the media “a megaphone for disinformation, upholding the pretense that there are two political parties with equally valid takes on reality.”

    What is striking is how Rubin objects to the current coverage when many already object to a heavy bias in such reporting. Yet, Rubin believes the media must go further.

    Rubin’s attack on disinformation is ironic given her own past controversies in misrepresenting news, cases, and events. For full disclosure, I clashed with Rubin over her personally attacking me for a theory that I did not agree with in a column that I did not write. I also challenged her on an equally bizarre column where she wrote about my impeachment testimony and later column misrepresenting the holding in an appellate case involving Trump. That false account was never corrected by the Washington Post. It appears that misrepresenting the holding of a major case is not being a “a megaphone for disinformation.”

    Rubin, however, is not alone in this call to abandon the foundational principle of impartiality in journalism.

    We have been discussing the rise of advocacy journalism and the rejection of objectivity in journalism schools. Writerseditorscommentators, and academics have embraced rising calls for censorship and speech controls, including President-elect Joe Biden and his key advisers. This movement includes academics rejecting the very concept of objectivity in journalism in favor of open advocacy.

    Columbia Journalism Dean and New Yorker writer Steve Coll decried how the First Amendment right to freedom of speech was being “weaponized” to protect disinformation. In an interview with The Stanford Daily, Stanford journalism professor, Ted Glasser, insisted that journalism needed to “free itself from this notion of objectivity to develop a sense of social justice.” He rejected the notion that the journalism is based on objectivity and said that he views “journalists as activists because journalism at its best — and indeed history at its best — is all about morality.”  Thus, “Journalists need to be overt and candid advocates for social justice, and it’s hard to do that under the constraints of objectivity.”

    Lauren Wolfe, the fired freelance editor for the New York Times, has not only gone public to defend her pro-Biden tweet but published a piece titled I’m a Biased Journalist and I’m Okay With That.” 

    Former New York Times writer (and now Howard University Journalism Professor) Nikole Hannah-Jones is a leading voice for advocacy journalism.

    Indeed, Hannah-Jones has declared “all journalism is activism.” Her 1619 Project has been challenged as deeply flawed and she has a long record as a journalist of intolerance, controversial positions on rioting, and fostering conspiracy theories. Hannah-Jones would later help lead the effort at the Times to get rid of an editor and apologize for publishing a column from Sen. Tom Cotten as inaccurate and inflammatory.

    These figures are killing journalism. Polls show trust in the media at an all-time low with less than 20 percent of citizens trusting television or print media. Yet, reporters and academics continue to destroy the core principles that sustain journalism and ultimately the role of a free press in our society. The result is to turn newspapers like the Post into echo chambers for the values of its reporters and a core of liberal readers.

    For the rest of the country (including roughly half that voted for Trump), figures like Rubin are saying that they should go elsewhere.  They are. Media outlets like CNN have faced sharp declines in viewership and are trying to break away from this advocacy model to restore ratings. (The move has been denounced by some in the media as potentially helping Republicans by fairly reporting their side of these controversies).  The movement toward advocacy journalism is likely to build in the coming years to remake the media in the image of figures like Hannah-Jones and Rubin.

    Viewers clearly tune in to Fox News and MSNBC for their strong editorial opinion and commentators. However, there has long been a line between reporters and commentators in how stories are presented. If journalists want to be advocates, they can shift to the side of commentary. That is clearly not sufficient for some like Rubin who do not want readers to be able to receive both sides of these controversies. Readers are to be shaped in their opinions like impressionable children. That was the message from the conference on disinformation led by media and Democratic figures like the recently fired CNN media host Brian Stelter.

    Even as a columnist, I prefer the approach of Theodore White that “when a reporter sits down at the typewriter, he’s nobody’s friend.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 15:30

  • Pfizer CEO Has COVID For Second Time In Two Months
    Pfizer CEO Has COVID For Second Time In Two Months

    Pfizer CEO Albert Bourla has tested positive for Covid-19 for the second time in two months.

    The 60-year-old contracted the disease in August, for which he took the company’s antiviral treatment, Paxlovid. He’s also received four doses of his company’s vaccine, which was developed with German partner BioNTech – but claims he hasn’t gotten the new Omicron-tweaked bivalent booster due to his August infection.

    “I’ve not had the new bivalent booster yet, as I was following CDC guidelines to wait three months since my previous COVID case which was back in mid-August,” he said, while claiming to be “symptom free.”

    The new, so-called bivalent shot – which wasn’t tested on humans before its release –  is supposed to target the BA.5 and BA.4 Omicron subvariants, which make up roughly 86% of currently circulating variants in the United States.

    The FDA authorized Pfizer and Moderna’s updated booster shots in August, of which more than 25 million doses have been shipped.

    Bourla’s second infection in two months raised more than a few eyebrows.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Others, such as journalist Jordan Schachtel, suggested Bourla is bluffing to sell doses of the new booster.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 15:00

  • West Point Turns Over 40+ Pages Of Mostly Blacked Out CRT Emails
    West Point Turns Over 40+ Pages Of Mostly Blacked Out CRT Emails

    Authored by Matt Lamb via The College Fix,

    A year after request, West Point turns over mostly illegible documents

    The College Fix recently received more than 50 pages of emails from the United States Military Academy at West Point –15 months after a student reporter filed a public records request.

    Many of the pages were blacked out with the exception of several articles included in the communications or the initial greeting or ending. The redactions on the initial request were done by The Fix to protect the mailing address of former student reporter and current Fox News employee Ashley Carnahan, who filed it.

    The June 21, 2021 request asked for six months worth of emails to and from West Point Superintendent Darryl Williams for messages that contained the words “critical race,” “critical race theory,” “systemic racism” or “CRT.”

    Even the redacted emails reveal requests for assistance in June 2021 with processing what apparently was an overwhelming number of Freedom of Information Act requests for information on CRT at the U.S. Army officer school.

    West Point staff mobilized to respond to criticism from Congressman

    In April, May and June of that year, Congressman Mike Waltz raised concerns publicly about the use of CRT at West Point. He filed a request for information in April 2021, according to his office.

    An April 13, 2021 email had the subject line “Rep Waltz Talking Points_CSA.” CRT discussions continued to occur between Superintendent Williams and Army staff.

    “Sir, I hope you are having a great weekend! I apologize for emailing you on a Saturday and I want to state up front no need to respond,” a May 8, 2021 email stated. “I just thought you would appreciate some follow on to our discussion yesterday concerning Critical Race Theory. In particular [redacted] , and I have been talking at length on this topic and out of those conversations are a few worthy nuggets.”

    “USMA is requesting assistance with answering RFIs on Critical Race Theory. Request assistance [from] your SMEs to help formulate a nested response,” Lieutenant General Walter Piatt wrote in a June 16, 2021 email.

    “RFIs” presumably means “requests for information” while “SMEs” probably means “subject matter experts.”

    “Darryl: Let’s discuss soonest on the approach to answering the RFIs. This is important for our Academy to get this right. Mark,” an email about three hours later from someone named Mark Lewis stated.

    A number of the received emails were duplicative – sometimes public records requests will include an email on a thread each time it is fulfilled, meaning that an initial email could be included multiple times any time a subsequent response is added to the response.

    A separate public records request sent by Judicial Watch yielded over 600 pages of documents which showed the military academy pushed CRT in its trainings.

    West Point CRT FOIA respons… by The College Fix

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 14:30

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 25th September 2022

  • Will 2024 Be 1984?
    Will 2024 Be 1984?

    Authored by Daniel Greenfield via Front Page Magazine,

    From branding parents speaking out against critical race theory and sexual ideology in schools as terrorists to the Mar-a-Lago raid, Attorney General Merrick Garland’s radicalized Justice Department transforms pre-election political opposition into national security threats.

    The infamous DOJ letter on schools was sent out a month before the gubernatorial election in Virginia, where the National School Board Association, not to mention much of the D.C. establishment, is based. Much as Garland’s DOJ operatives feared, the school protests helped elect Gov. Glenn Younkin and  nearly toppled New Jersey’s Democrat governor in the bargain.

    The Mar-a-Lago raid was carefully timed around the DOJ’s day policy of avoiding politically sensitive moves 90 days before an election. The real election it has its eye on is in 2024.

    And, if it has its way, 2024 will be the new 1984.

    The Steele dossier, the Mueller investigation, the Mar-a-Lago raid, and everything before and after are part of the larger Spygate continuum which is marked by the use of national security tools to suppress the political opposition especially before and during elections. The claims of national security, whether they involve the Russians or classified documents, are just a tactic that allow Democrat officials to wield virtually unlimited investigative powers cloaked in secrecy.

    Beyond the details of these investigations, which turn as hollow as Steele or Mueller on closer examination, is the larger construct of a crisis that is described as a “threat to democracy”.

    The “threat to democracy” is shorthand for a threat to Democrats. The source of that threat are conservatives and Republicans. The vectors of that threat can be described as coming from Russia, school board parents, electoral activism or “disinformation” on the internet. The common denominator is that political activities which are inherently “democratic”, speech, protest and electioneering, are defined as a national security “threat to democracy”.

    The net of this crisis extends from individuals posting on social media to political candidates and institutions. Meeting the “threat to democracy” requires the government to monitor social media and for social media companies to censor unapproved speech, for candidates who believe the wrong things to be barred from office, for the IRS to investigate conservative non-profits, for companies to be pressured into pulling donations to conservative candidates and for the military to be prepared to intervene once again in the event of another grave “threat to democracy”.

    The threat to democracy or rather the republic here is coming from the Democrats.

    The Spygate targeting of Trump is only one strand of a number of threads drawing together to criminalize opposition to leftist agendas. Cancel culture had already contrived to economically punish speech. The next step was criminal investigations of people who non-violently stood up to Black Lives Matter race rioters or drove over BLM’s racial supremacist slogan on streets.

    The underlying rationale was that racism was a public health crisis and another threat to democracy. Individuals were components of the crisis. Those who would not take a knee and admit their privilege were perpetuating the crisis and posed a threat to the nation at large.

    The same collectivist machinery is being ramped up to enforce global warming dogma by using financial institutions, insurance companies, SEC regulations, real estate codes and countless other financial minutiae to extra-legislatively impose the Green New Deal, punishing companies and individuals until they conform. Dot com monopolies are already censoring those who don’t.

    Once again the argument is that all human life on the planet is endangered. Anyone who doesn’t toe the line is a threat to the race. And must either conform or be silenced.

    Race and the environment are not the real issues here, no more than Russia or classified documents are with Spygate. Manufactured crises are used to justify totalitarian fascist abuses of power. The details of any individual crisis or allegation matter much less than the tactics used to suppress dissent in the face of this latest imminent emergency. Every crisis is met with a centralized response weaving together federal authority, corporate complicity, national media outlets, cultural elites and all the commanding heights of power in the United States of America.

    As FBI raids blend into congressional investigations, National Security Council aides, political campaigns, opposition research labs and media outlets appear to speak with one voice because they operate as arms of the same machine. Likewise, school board leaders, DOJ officials, media outlets and publishing giants start functioning as components of a single political entity.

    Because they are just different ways of describing members of the Left.

    In true Orwellian fashion, the “threat to democracy”, like most leftist slogans, should be interpreted to mean the opposite of what it appears to. It’s democracy that is a threat to a political system that is undemocratic and built around undemocratic institutions.

    The threat to democracy manifests itself when conservative candidates win elections and is most pronounced in the least democratic institutions, government bureaucracies, national media outlets, elite universities and the upper ranks of corporations. This increasingly integrated ruling class springs into action when it’s unable to rig an election and warns of a “threat to democracy”. The worse it loses, the more urgent the crisis and the more ruthless the method of dealing with it. Having lost one election and fearing losses in 2022 and 2024, it’s getting more ruthless.

    The solutions to all the crises come down to the components of the machine, the administrative state, corporate leaders, technocratic monopolies, educational bosses, activist front groups and many others urgently grabbing more power to cope with the threat of losing elections.

    The Mar-a-Lago raid is a warning that the machine is rapidly preparing to fight off the “threat of democracy” to the 2022 and 2024 elections by once again weaponizing national security, censoring “misinformation”, and stamping out the political opposition. It will do whatever it takes to win, not because it needs to win elections to pursue its agenda, but because winning elections is a convenient cover to explain the amount of power it wields.

    Democracy is not just in its name, but its facade. When it loses the facade, people start to notice that elections don’t seem to change very much. And that things still run the same way.

    America is in a bad and dangerous place. But it will be in an even worse one by 2024.

    This is not just about winning elections, but about making them irrelevant. The goal is to eliminate the opposition, not just in the voting booth, but across society. The Left will use all the powers at its disposal to ban any kind of ideological non-conformity employing government, corporations, and the culture to prosecute, fire and cancel anyone who dissents.

    All of this is being done in the name of a rotating series of crises, threats to democracy, social harmony or the environment, not because these threats are real, but because they enable the system to invoke different components to leverage against its political enemies.

    Call it fascism, because that’s what it is.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 09/25/2022 – 00:10

  • California Legalizes 'Human Composting'
    California Legalizes ‘Human Composting’

    California is about to give people a third option for what to do with a body after death.

    A demonstration “vessel” for the deceased is pictured among the other vessels during a tour of the Return Home funeral home, which specializes in human composting, in Auburn, Wash., on March 14, 2022.
    JASON REDMOND/AFP via Getty Images

    Instead of just burial or cremation, the state will now allow people to choose human composting – or natural organic reduction (NOR) starting in 2027, after Gov. Gavin Newsom signed Assembly Bill 351 last week, according o SF Gate.

    The process of composting a cadaver, already legalized in Washington, Colorado and Oregon, involves placing the body in a reusable container, surrounding it with wood chips and aerating it to let microbes and bacteria grow. After about a month, the remains will decompose and be fully transformed into soil. Companies such as Recompose in Washington offer the service at a natural organic reduction facility. -SF Gate

    The process is considered ‘green’ – as it doesn’t require the burning of fossil fuels and emission of carbon monoxide. According to National Geographic, cremations in the US alone emit around 360,000 metric tons of carbon dioxide per year.

    An example vessel that is used in the natural organic reduction process created by Recompose, which converts human bodies into soil. Photo by Sabel Roizen, courtesy of Recompose (via RNS)

    And according to the author of the bill, Asemblymember Cristina Garcia (D), the threat of climate change motivated the new law, particularly after LA County suspended regulations on cremation emissions during the pandemic.

    “AB 351 will provide an additional option for California residents that is more environmentally-friendly and gives them another choice for burial,” Garcia said in a statement. “With climate change and sea-level rise as very real threats to our environment, this is an alternative method of final disposition that won’t contribute emissions into our atmosphere.”

    Garcia says she herself may elect NOR when she dies. “I look forward to continuing my legacy to fight for clean air by using my reduced remains to plant a tree.”

    The idea of composting human remains has raised some ethical questions. Colorado’s version of the law dictates that the soil of multiple people cannot be combined without consent, the soil cannot be sold and it cannot be used to grow food for human consumption. The California bill bans the combining of multiple peoples’ remains, unless they are family, but unlike Colorado, California is not explicitly banning the sale of the soil or its use growing food for human consumption

    The process has met opposition in California from the Catholic Church, which say the process “reduces the human body to simply a disposable commodity.” -SF Gate

    “NOR uses essentially the same process as a home gardening composting system,” said the executive director of the California Catholic Conference, Kathleen Domingo, who noted that the process involved in NOR was developed for livestock, not humans. 

    “These methods of disposal were used to lessen the possibility of disease being transmitted by the dead carcass,” she continued. “Using these same methods for the ‘transformation’ of human remains can create an unfortunate spiritual, emotional and psychological distancing from the deceased.”

    She added that the process, which may lead to human remains being scattered in public locations, “risks people treading over human remains without their knowledge while repeated dispersions in the same area are tantamount to a mass grave.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 23:35

  • 'Silent Majority' Must Speak Up When Vocal Minority Imposes Views on Society: Zuby
    ‘Silent Majority’ Must Speak Up When Vocal Minority Imposes Views on Society: Zuby

    Authored by By Ella Kietlinska and Joshua Philipp via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    If people do not speak up when faced with a vocal minority trying to impose their radical views on society, the silent majority and their children will face dire consequences, said rapper and social commentator Zuby, encouraging the “silent majority” to stop censoring themselves.

    A silent majority may as well not exist,” he said. “I think there’s a silenced majority.

    Zuby, a rapper, author, fitness coach, and political commentator, in New York on June 25, 2022. (Otabius Williams/The Epoch Times)

    As long as people stay silenced, then that vocal minority—even if it makes up only 1 percent of the population—will not be afraid to state their opinions, he said, because they are very vocal and bold.

    People like talking about a “silent majority” because it makes them think that somehow by magic, things are going to turn around for the better, Zuby said in a recent interview for EpochTV’s “Crossroads” program.

    How can you win a fight if you don’t fight? How can you win a debate when you don’t speak?” he asked.

    In a debate, if one person is “spouting off the goofiest, most ludicrous ideas” and the other person just sits there silently and nods, then the one who talks will win the debate, he said.

    “Most Americans aren’t on board with the most extreme and radical and bizarre notions that are floating around out there,” he said, referring to the recent assertions that men can become pregnant or give birth. “Over 90 percent of people don’t believe that, but those people need to be willing to say something.”

    silent majority is weak when faced with vocal minority, he added.

    Then people wonder why the world has gone crazy, Zuby said, and his answer is that “it’s happened because most people have let it happen.”

    “Most people are not being censored by the government or even censored by big tech or censored by social media,” Zuby said. “They’re censoring themselves.”

    Breaking From Cowardice

    “Over the past 10 years, we have had this pandemic of cowardice, and people are unwilling to say things in many cases that are objectively true. … They are afraid of repercussions,” he said, adding that cowardice and courage are both habits and they’re also both contagious.

    When people start acting like cowards, it can affect others around who will start behaving like cowards, Zuby said.

    “When one person stands up, starts speaking out, and using their platform to either state their opinions or to state objective facts, it encourages other people to do the same,” he said.

    I know for a fact that I’ve encouraged thousands, if not millions of people out there in this world, to be a little bit more bold, a little bit more courageous.

    Zuby made a disclaimer that he does not encourage anybody to be radical or go to extremes. He said he encourages people to be willing to say what they believe to be true, or what is true; to have conversations, debates, and discussions; and to stand up and say “no” when being forced into something the person does not want to go along with, such as a mask mandate, a vaccination mandate, or calling people by made-up pronouns.

    The rapper believes that nobody should be coerced to accept others’ opinions or punished for not accepting them.

    He said that if a man decides he identifies as a chicken and feels most comfortable wearing a chicken costume and eating birdseed, that’s his right.

    “I think it’s weird. I support your right to do it, though,” he said. “But then if you want me to—you want to force me to say that you’re a chicken and you want to force me to treat you as a chicken … no, I’m not doing that.”

    People in the West understand the concept of “freedom of religion” and “freedom from religion,” he said.

    Zuby explained that he has a right to his beliefs, a right to worship and pray, but he does not have a right to force others to accept his beliefs.

    In the same way, people should not be coerced into believing or affirming radical new social dogmas.

    ‘The Power Is Always With the People’

    People are giving up too many of their freedoms, Zuby said. “If you give them an inch, they’re gonna take a yard. If you give them a yard, they’re gonna take a mile.”

    There are mayors, governors, presidents, prime ministers, World Economic Forum members, and other unelected people who like to call themselves the elites, Zuby said. “But they are less than 0.1 percent of the population. The power is always, ultimately, with the people.”

    “Ultimately, you are the one who makes your choices. And when you understand this, and you take responsibility for it, and you take accountability, it can be a little bit scary to begin with, but it’s actually a very powerful and an empowering message,” he said.

    One person can get their own life and family in order, and that helps the wider community to get in order, he said, adding that a country is a collection of communities.

    “I look at things much more bottom-up than top-down,” he said.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 23:00

  • Biden CDC Awarded Millions To Soros-Funded Activist Group Suing DeSantis
    Biden CDC Awarded Millions To Soros-Funded Activist Group Suing DeSantis

    In February, 2021, the Biden administration-run Centers for Disease Control (CDC) awarded a Soros-backed pro-migrant nonprofit $7.5 million under the guise of pandemic-related support for “LATINX ESSENTIAL WORKERS AS HEALTH PROMOTERS,” and aimed “to reduce the spread of COVID-19 and mitigate impacts among Latinx and Latin American immigrants,” according to an analysis by the Daily Caller.

    The group, Alianza Americas, is currently suing Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis (R) and other Florida officials over migrant flights to Martha’s Vineyard earlier this month.

    The group has also received nearly $1.4 million from George Soros’ Open Society Network.

    Alianza Americas is “focused on improving the quality of life of all people in the U.S.-Mexico-Central America migration corridor.” The membership-based group, which Soros’ Open Society Foundations network (OSF) sent almost $1.4 million to between 2016 and 2020, was awarded a $7.5 million CDC grant in February 2021, according to a grant listing reviewed by the Daily Caller News Foundation. -Daily Caller

    The CDC funds were distributed under a program called “Protecting and Improving Health Globally: Building and Strengthening Public Health Impact, Systems, Capacity and Security.”

     

    The CDC grant is another example of Biden abusing tax dollars to promote illegal immigration and to enrich his liberal friends, under the guise of increasing ‘awareness’ of an emergency even Biden admitted is over,” Brian Harrison, who under former President Donald Trump was chief of staff for the Department of Health and Human Services, the agency that oversees the CDC, told the Caller.

    On Tuesday, Alianza Americas filed the DeSantis lawsuit through advocacy law firm Lawyers for Civil Rights, after the Florida governor overwhelmed Martha’s Vineyard with 50 migrants – a move Democratic lawmakers labeled “inhumane.”

    According to the lawsuit, DeSantis “intentionally targeted only individuals who are non-white and born outside the United States.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 22:35

  • How Could We Have Been So Naive About Big Tech?
    How Could We Have Been So Naive About Big Tech?

    Authored by Jeffrey A. Tucker via Brownstone Institute,

    The 1998 movie Enemy of the State starring Gene Hackman and Will Smith seemed like fiction at the time. Why I didn’t regard that movie – which still holds up in nearly every detail – as a warning I do not know. It pulls back the curtain on the close working relationship between national security agencies and the communications industry – spying, censorship, blackmailing, and worse. Today, it seems not just a warning but a description of reality. 

    There is no longer any doubt at all about the symbiotic relationship between Big Tech – the digital communications industry in particular – and government. The only issue we need to debate is which of the two sectors are more decisive in driving the loss of privacy, free speech, and liberty in general. 

    Not only that: I’ve been involved in many debates over the years, always taking the side of technology over those who warned of the coming dangers. I was a believer, a techno-utopian and could not see where this was headed. 

    The lockdowns were the great shock for me, not only for the unconscionably draconian policies imposed on the country so quickly. The shock was intensified by how all the top tech companies immediately enlisted in the war on freedom of association. Why? Some combination of industry ideology, which shifted over 30 years from a founding libertarian ethos to become a major force for techno-tyranny, plus industry self-interest (how better to promote digital media consumption than to force half the workforce to stay home?) were at work. 

    For me personally, it feels like betrayal of the most profound sort. Only 12 years ago, I was still celebrating the dawning of the Jetsons World and dripping with disdain for the Luddites among us who refused to get with it and buy and depend on all the latest gizmos. It seemed inconceivable to me at the time that such wonderful tools could ever be taken over by power and used as a means of social and economic control. The whole idea of the Internet was to overthrow the old order of imposition and control! The Internet was anarchy, to my mind, and therefore had some built-in resistance to all attempts to monopolize it. 

    And yet here we are. Just this weekend, The New York Times carries a terrifying story about a California tech professional who, on request, texted a doctor’s office a picture of his son’s infection that required a state of undress, and then found himself without email, documents, and even a phone number. An algorithm made the decision. Google has yet to admit wrongdoing. It’s one story but emblematic of a massive threat that affects all our lives. 

    Amazon servers are reserved only for the politically compliant, while Twitter’s censorship at explicit behest of the CDC/NIH is legion. Facebook and Instagram can and does bodybag anyone who steps out of line, and the same is true of YouTube. Those companies make up the bulk of all Internet traffic. As for escaping, any truly private email cannot be domiciled in the US, and our one-time friend the smartphone operates now as the most reliable citizen surveillance tool in history. 

    In retrospect, it’s rather obvious that this would happen because it has happened with every other technology in history, from weaponry to industrial manufacturing. What begins as a tool of mass liberation and citizen empowerment eventually comes to be nationalized by the state working with the largest and most politically connected firms. World War I was the best illustration of just such an outrage in the 20th century: the munitions manufacturers were the only real winners of that one, while the state acquired new powers of which it never really let go. 

    It’s hard to appreciate just what a shock that “Great War” was to a whole generation of liberal intellectuals. My mentor Murray Rothbard wrote an extremely thoughtful reflection on the naive liberalism of Victorian-age techno enthusiasts, circa 1880-1910. This was a generation that saw progress emancipation on every front: the end of slavery, a burgeoning middle class, the crumbling of the old aristocracies of power, and new technologies. All these enabled the mass production of steel, cities rising to the heavens, electricity and lighting everywhere, flight, and countless consumer improvements from indoor plumbing and heating to mass availability of food that enabled enormous demographic shifts. 

    Reading the greats from that period, their optimism about the future was palpable. One of my favorite writers, Mark Twain, held such a view. His moral outrage toward the Spanish-American War, the remnants of family feuds in the South, and reactionary class-based biases were everywhere in his writings, always with a sense of profound disapproval that these signs of revanchist thinking and behaving were surely one generation away from full expiration. He shared in the naivete of the times. He simply could not have imagined the carnage of the coming total war that made the Spanish-American war look like a practice drill. The same outlook on the future was held by of Oscar Wilde, William Graham Sumner, William Gladstone, Auberon Herbert, Lord Acton, Hillaire Belloc, Herbert Spencer, and all the rest. 

    Rothbard’s view was that their excessive optimism, their intuitive sense of the inevitability of the victory of liberty and democracy, and their overarching naivete toward the uses of technology actually contributed to the decline and fall of what they considered civilization. Their confidence in the beautiful future – and their underestimate of the malice of states and the docility of the public – created a mindset that was less driven to work for truth than it otherwise would have been. They positioned themselves as observers of ever-increasing progress of peace and well-being. They were the Whigs who implicitly accepted a Hegelian-style view of their invincibility of their causes. 

    Of Herbert Spencer, for example, Rothbard wrote this scathing criticism:

    Spencer began as a magnificently radical liberal, indeed virtually a pure libertarian. But, as the virus of sociology and Social Darwinism took over in his soul, Spencer abandoned libertarianism as a dynamic historical movement, although at first without abandoning it in pure theory. In short, while looking forward to an eventual ideal of pure liberty, Spencer began to see its victory as inevitable, but only after millenia of gradual evolution, and thus, in actual fact, Spencer abandoned Liberalism as a fighting, radical creed; and confined his Liberalism in practice to a weary, rear-guard action against the growing collectivism of the late nineteenth-century. Interestingly enough, Spencer’s tired shift “rightward” in strategy soon became a shift rightward in theory as well; so that Spencer abandoned pure liberty even in theory. 

    Rothbard was so sensitive to this problem due to the strange times in which his ideological outlook took shape. He experienced his own struggle in coming to terms with the way in which the brutality of real-time politics poisons the purity of ideological idealism. 

    The bulk of the Rothbardian paradigm had been complete by the time he finished his PhD in economics from Columbia University. By 1963-1964, he published his massive economic treatise, a reconstruction of the economics of the origins of the Great Depression, and put together the core of the binary that became his legacy: history is best understood as a competitive struggle between market and state. One of his best books on political economy – Power and Market – that appeared years later was actually written in this period but not published because the publisher found it too controversial. 

    Implicit in this outlook was a general presumption of the universal merit of free enterprise compared with the unrelenting depredations of the state. It has the ring of truth in most areas of life: the small business compared with the plotting and scamming of politics, the productivity and creativity of entrepreneurs vs the lies and manipulations of bureaucratic armies, the grimness of inflation, taxation, and war vs the peaceful trading relationships of commercial life. Based on this outlook, he became the 20th century’s foremost advocate of what became anarcho-capitalism. 

    Rothbard also distinguished himself in those years for never joining the Right in becoming a champion of the Cold War. Instead he saw war as the worst feature of statism, something to be avoided by any free society. Whereas he once published in the pages of National Review, he later found himself as the victim of a fatwa by Russia-hating and bomb-loving conservatives and thereby began to forge his own school of thought that took over the name libertarian, which had only recently been revived by people who preferred the name liberal but realized that this term had long been appropriated by its enemies. 

    What happened next challenged the Rothbardian binary. It was not lost on him that the major driving force beyond the building of the Cold War security state was private enterprise itself. And the conservative champions of free enterprise had utterly failed to distinguish between private-sector forces that thrive independently of the state and those who not only live off the state but exercise a decisive influence in further fastening the yoke of tyranny on the population through war, conscription, and general industrial monopolization. Seeing his own binary challenged in real life drove him to found an intellectual project embodied in his journal Left and Right, which opened in 1965 and ran until 1968. Here we find some of the most challenging writing and analysis of the second half of the twentieth century. 

    The first issue featured what might be his most mighty essay on political history: “Left, Right, and the Prospects for Liberty.” This essay came from a period in which Rothbard warmed up to the left simply because it was only on this side of the political spectrum where he found skepticism of the Cold War narrative, outrage at industrial monopolization, disgust at reactionary militarism and conscription, dogged opposition to violations of civil liberties. and generalized opposition to the despotism of the age. His new friends on the left in those days were very different from the woke/lockdown left of today, obviously. But in time, Rothbard too soured on them and their persistence in economic ignorance and un-nuanced hatred of capitalism in general and not just the crony variety. 

    So on it went through the decades as Rothbard was drawn ever more toward understanding class as a valuable desiderata of political dynamics, large corporate interests in a hand-in-glove relationship to the state, and the contrast between elites and common people as an essential heuristic to pile on top of his old state vs market binary. As he worked this out more fully, he came to adopt many of the political tropes we now associate with populism, but Rothbard was never fully comfortable in that position either. He rejected crude nationalism and populism, knew better than anyone of the dangers of the Right, and was well aware of the excesses of democracy. 

    While his theory remained intact, his strategic outlook for getting from here to there underwent many iterations, the last of which before his untimely death in 1995 landed him with an association with the burgeoning movement that eventually brought Trump to power, though there is every reason to believe that Rothbard would have regarded Trump as he did both Nixon and Reagan. He saw them both as opportunists who talked a good game – though never consistently – and ultimately betrayed their bases with anti-establishment talk without the principle reality. 

    One way to understand his seeming shifts over time is the simple point with which I began this reflection. Rothbard dreamed of a free society, but he was never content with theory alone. Like the major intellectual activists who influenced him (Frank Chodorov, Ludwig von Mises, and Ayn Rand) he believed in making a difference in his own time within the intellectual and political firmament he was given. This drove him toward ever more skepticism of corporate power and the privileges of the power elite in general. By the time of his death, he had traveled a distance very far from the simple binaries of his youth, which he had to do in order to make sense of them them in the face of grim realities of the 1960s through the 1990s. 

    Would he have been shocked as I have been about the apostasies of Big Tech? Somehow I doubt it. He saw the same thing with the industrial giants of his own time, and fought them with all his strength, a passion that led him to shifting alliances all in the interest of pushing his main cause, which was the emancipation of the human population from the forces of oppression and violence all around us. Rothbard was the Enemy of the State. Many people have even noted the similarities of Gene Hackman’s character in the movie. 

    The astonishing policy trends of our time are truly calling on all of us to rethink our political and ideological opinions, as simple and settled as they might have been. For this reason, Brownstone publishes thinkers on all sides. We are all disaffected in our own ways. And we know now that nothing will be the same. 

    Do we give up? Never. During lockdowns and medical mandates, the power of the state and its corporate allies truly reached its apotheosis, and failed us miserably. Our times cry out for justice, for clarity, and for making a difference to save ourselves and our civilization. We should approach this great project with our eyes wide open and with ears to hear different points of view on how we get from here to there. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 22:00

  • Nuclear War Is "Possible" For 1st Time Since Cold War: US Commander
    Nuclear War Is “Possible” For 1st Time Since Cold War: US Commander

    Soon after Russian President Vladimir Putin’s speech announcing partial mobilization of national forces for the operation in Ukraine, which included a hint of willingness to resort to nuclear defense of Russia’s territorial integrity, Navy Admiral Charles A. Richard – who currently serves as the US Strategic Command chief – confirmed that the Pentagon is taking the Russian nuclear threat seriously.

    Putin had said in his early Wednesday address that “If Russia feels its territorial integrity is threatened, we will use all defense methods at our disposal, and this is not a bluff,” while also decrying what he called the West’s “nuclear blackmail”.

    Admiral Richard addressed a national security panel event later on the same day entitled “America Under Attack—Defending the Homeland” held in Maryland. He began by acknowledging that “All of us in this room are back in the business of contemplating competition through crisis and possible direct armed conflict with a nuclear-capable peer.”

    Adm. Charles A. Richard, commander of U.S. Strategic Command, via AP

    “We have not had to do that in over 30 years. The implications of that are profound,” he emphasized. Speaking of both Russia and China as major nuclear armed powers and rivals of the US, he continued, “We just haven’t faced competitors and opponents like that in a long time,” asserting that “Russia and China can escalate to any level of violence that they choose in any domain with any instrument of power worldwide.”

    He spoke of increasing threats from both at a moment the US recently its nuclear posture review

    “We need to execute this very good strategy as the threat from China continues to increase.

    “We don’t know where that’s going to end, as the threat from Russia continues to increase, along with the other challenges that we face.”

    As tough as Putin’s initial words were, his top national security official, Dmitry Medvedev, followed up by doubling down on the nuclear warning with even bolder words. “The Donbas [Donetsk and Luhansk] republics and other territories will be accepted into Russia,” he posted to Telegram. That’s when the former president and deputy chairman of Russia’s Security Council stated

    Russia has announced that not only mobilization capabilities, but also any Russian weapons, including strategic nuclear weapons and weapons based on new principles, could be used for such protection.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Medvedev also invoked the far reach of Russia’s hypersonic weapons, saying, “Various retired idiots wearing a general’s insignia should know better than to try to scare us with speculations about a NATO strike at Crimea. Hypersonic retaliation is be able to reach targets in Europe and the United States much faster, it’s guaranteed.”

    He added that “the Western establishment and, in general, all citizens of the NATO countries, need to understand that Russia has chosen its own path. There is no turning back.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 21:25

  • Why Orwell Matters
    Why Orwell Matters

    Authored by Bruno Waterfield via Spiked-Online.com,

    Most people think that George Orwell was writing about, and against, totalitarianism – especially when they encounter him through the prism of his great dystopian novel, Nineteen Eighty-Four.

    This view of Orwell is not wrong, but it can miss something. For Orwell was concerned above all about the particular threat posed by totalitarianism to words and language. He was concerned about the threat it posed to our ability to think and speak freely and truthfully. About the threat it posed to our freedom.

    He saw, clearly and vividly, that to lose control of words is to lose control of meaning. That is what frightened him about the totalitarianism of Nazi Germany and Stalinist Russia – these regimes wanted to control the very linguistic substance of thought itself.

    And that is why Orwell continues to speak to us so powerfully today. Because words, language and meaning are under threat once more.

    Totalitarianism in Orwell’s time

    The totalitarian regimes of Nazi Germany and Stalin’s Soviet Union represented something new and frightening for Orwell. Authoritarian dictatorships, in which power was wielded unaccountably and arbitrarily, had existed before, of course. But what made the totalitarian regimes of the 20th century different was the extent to which they demanded every individual’s complete subservience to the state. They sought to abolish the very basis of individual freedom and autonomy. They wanted to use dictatorial powers to socially engineer the human soul itself, changing and shaping how people think and behave.

    Totalitarian regimes set about breaking up clubs, trade unions and other voluntary associations. They were effectively dismantling those areas of social and political life in which people were able to freely and spontaneously associate. The spaces, that is, in which local and national culture develops free of the state and officialdom. These cultural spaces were always tremendously important to Orwell. As he put it in his 1941 essay, ‘England Your England’: ‘All the culture that is most truly native centres round things which even when they are communal are not official – the pub, the football match, the back garden, the fireside and the “nice cup of tea”.’

    Totalitarianism may have reached its horrifying zenith in Nazi Germany and Stalin’s USSR. But Orwell was worried about its effect in the West, too. He was concerned about the Sovietisation of Europe through the increasingly prominent and powerful Stalinist Communist Parties. He was also worried about what he saw as Britain’s leftwing ‘Europeanised intelligentsia’, which, like the Communist Parties of Western Europe, seemed to worship state power, particularly in the supranational form of the USSR. And he was concerned above all about the emergence of the totalitarian mindset, and the attempt to re-engineer the deep structures of mind and feeling that lie at the heart of autonomy and liberty.

    Orwell could see this mindset flourishing among Britain’s intellectual elite, from the eugenics and top-down socialism of Fabians, like Sidney and Beatrice Webb and HG Wells, to the broader technocratic impulses of the intelligentsia in general. They wanted to remake people ‘for their own good’, or for the benefit of the race or state power. They therefore saw it as desirable to force people to conform to certain prescribed behaviours and attitudes. This threatened the everyday freedom of people who wanted, as Orwell put it, ‘the liberty to have a home of your own, to do what you like in your spare time, to choose your own amusements instead of having them chosen for you from above’.

    Edmond O’Brien as Winston Smith and Jan Sterling as Julia, in an adaptation of Nineteen Eighty-Four, 3 June 1955.

    In the aftermath of the Second World War, this new intellectual elite started to gain ascendancy. It was effectively a clerisy – a cultural and ruling elite defined by its academic achievements. It had been forged through higher education and academia rather than through traditional forms of privilege and wealth, such as public schools.

    Orwell was naturally predisposed against this emergent clerisy. He may have attended Eton, but that’s where Orwell’s education stopped. He was not part of the clerisy’s world. He was not an academic writer, nor did he position himself as such. On the contrary, he saw himself as a popular writer, addressing a broad, non-university-educated audience.

    Moreover, Orwell’s antipathy towards this new elite type was long-standing. He had bristled against the rigidity and pomposity of imperial officialdom as a minor colonial police official in Burma between 1922 and 1927. And he had always battled against the top-down socialist great and good, and much of academia, too, who were often very much hand in glove with the Stalinised left.

    The hostility was mutual. Indeed, it accounts for the disdain that many academics and their fellow travellers continue to display towards Orwell today.

    The importance of words

    Nowadays we are all too familiar with this university-educated ruling caste, and its desire to control words and meaning. Just think, for example, of the way in which our cultural and educational elites have turned ‘fascism’ from a historically specific phenomenon into a pejorative that has lost all meaning, to be used to describe anything from Brexit to Boris Johnson’s Tory government – a process Orwell saw beginning with the Stalinist practice of calling Spanish democratic revolutionaries ‘Trotsky-fascists’ (which he documented in Homage to Catalonia (1938)).

    Or think of the way in which our cultural and educational elites have transformed the very meanings of the words ‘man’ and ‘woman’, divesting them of any connection to biological reality. Orwell would not have been surprised by this development. In Nineteen Eighty-Four, he shows how the totalitarian state and its intellectuals will try to suppress real facts, and even natural laws, if they diverge from their worldview. Through exerting power over ideas, they seek to shape reality. ‘Power is in tearing human minds to pieces and putting them together in new shapes of your own choosing’, says O’Brien, the sinister party intellectual. ‘We control matter because we control the mind. Reality is inside the skull… You must get rid of these 19th-century ideas about the laws of nature.’

    In Nineteen Eighty-Four, the totalitarian regime tries to subject history to similar manipulation. As anti-hero Winston Smith tells his lover, Julia:

    ‘Every record has been destroyed or falsified, every book has been rewritten, every picture has been repainted, every statue and street and building has been renamed, every date has been altered. And that process is continuing day by day and minute by minute. History has stopped. Nothing exists except an endless present in which the Party is always right.’

    As Orwell wrote elsewhere, ‘the historian believes that the past cannot be altered and that a correct knowledge of history is valuable as a matter of course. From the totalitarian point of view history is something to be created rather than learned.’

    This totalitarian approach to history is dominant today, from the New York Times’ 1619 Project to statue-toppling. History is something to be erased or conjured up or reshaped as a moral lesson for today. It is used to demonstrate the rectitude of the contemporary establishment.

    But it is language that is central to Orwell’s analysis of this form of intellectual manipulation and thought-control. Take ‘Ingsoc’, the philosophy that the regime follows and enforces through the linguistic system of Newspeak. Newspeak is more than mere censorship. It is an attempt to make certain ideas – freedom, autonomy and so on – actually unthinkable or impossible. It is an attempt to eliminate the very possibility of dissent (or ‘thoughtcrime’).

    As Syme, who is working on a Newspeak dictionary, tells Winston Smith:

    ‘The whole aim… is to narrow the range of thought. In the end we shall make thoughtcrime literally impossible, because there will be no words in which to express it. Every year fewer and fewer words, and the range of consciousness always a little smaller… Has it ever occurred to you, Winston, that by the year 2050, at the very latest, not a single human being will be alive who could understand such a conversation as we are having now?’

    The parallels between Orwell’s nightmarish vision of totalitarianism and the totalitarian mindset of today, in which language is policed and controlled, should not be overstated. In the dystopia of Nineteen Eighty-Four, the project of eliminating freedom and dissent, as in Nazi Germany or Stalinist Russia, was backed up by a brutal, murderous secret police. There is little of that in our societies today – people are not forcibly silenced or disappeared.

    However, they are cancelled, pushed out of their jobs, and sometimes even arrested by the police for what amounts to thoughtcrime. And many more people simply self-censor out of fear of saying the ‘wrong’ thing. Orwell’s concern that words could be erased or their meaning altered, and thought controlled, is not being realised in an openly dictatorial manner. No, it’s being achieved through a creeping cultural and intellectual conformism.

    The intellectual turn against freedom

    But then that was always Orwell’s worry – that intellectuals giving up on freedom would allow a Big Brother Britain to flourish. As he saw it in The Prevention of Literature (1946), the biggest danger to freedom of speech and thought came not from the threat of dictatorship (which was receding by then) but from intellectuals giving up on freedom, or worse, seeing it as an obstacle to the realisation of their worldview.

    Interestingly, his concerns about an intellectual betrayal of freedom were reinforced by a 1944 meeting of the anti-censorship organisation, English PEN. Attending an event to mark the 300th anniversary of Milton’s Areopagitica, Milton’s famous 1644 speech making the case for the ‘Liberty of Unlicenc’d Printing’, Orwell noted that many of the left-wing intellectuals present were unwilling to criticise Soviet Russia or wartime censorship. Indeed, they had become profoundly indifferent or hostile to the question of political liberty and press freedom.

    ‘In England, the immediate enemies of truthfulness, and hence of freedom of thought, are the press lords, the film magnates, and the bureaucrats’, Orwell wrote, ‘but that on a long view the weakening of the desire for liberty among the intellectuals themselves is the most serious symptom of all’.

    Orwell was concerned by the increasing popularity among influential left-wing intellectuals of ‘the much more tenable and dangerous proposition that freedom is undesirable and that intellectual honesty is a form of anti-social selfishness’. The exercise of freedom of speech and thought, the willingness to speak truth to power, was even then becoming seen as something to be frowned upon, a selfish, even elitist act.

    An individual speaking freely and honestly, wrote Orwell, is ‘accused of either wanting to shut himself up in an ivory tower, or of making an exhibitionist display of his own personality, or of resisting the inevitable current of history in an attempt to cling to unjustified privilege’.

    These are insights which have stood the test of time. Just think of the imprecations against those who challenge the consensus. They are dismissed as ‘contrarians’ and accused of selfishly upsetting people.

    And worst of all, think of the way free speech is damned as the right of the privileged. This is possibly one of the greatest lies of our age. Free speech does not support privilege. We all have the capacity to speak, write, think and argue. We might not, as individuals or small groups, have the platforms of a press baron or the BBC. But it is only through our freedom to speak freely that we can challenge those with greater power.

    Orwell’s legacy

    Orwell is everywhere today. He is taught in schools and his ideas and phrases are part of our common culture. But his value and importance to us lies in his defence of freedom, especially the freedom to speak and write.

    His outstanding 1946 essay, ‘Politics and the English Language’, can actually be read as a freedom manual. It is a guide on how to use words and language to fight back.

    Of course, it is attacked today as an expression of privilege and of bigotry. Author and commentator Will Self cited ‘Politics and the English Language’ in a 2014 BBC Radio 4 show as proof that Orwell was an ‘authoritarian elitist’. He said: ‘Reading Orwell at his most lucid you can have the distinct impression he’s saying these things, in precisely this way, because he knows that you – and you alone – are exactly the sort of person who’s sufficiently intelligent to comprehend the very essence of what he’s trying to communicate. It’s this the mediocrity-loving English masses respond to – the talented dog-whistler calling them to chow down on a big bowl of conformity.’

    Lionel Trilling, another writer and thinker, made a similar point to Self, but in a far more insightful, enlightening way. ‘[Orwell] liberates us’, he wrote in 1952:

    ‘He tells us that we can understand our political and social life merely by looking around us, he frees us from the need for the inside dope. He implies that our job is not to be intellectual, certainly not to be intellectual in this fashion or that, but merely to be intelligent according to our lights – he restores the old sense of the democracy of the mind, releasing us from the belief that the mind can work only in a technical, professional way and that it must work competitively. He has the effect of making us believe that we may become full members of the society of thinking men. That is why he is a figure for us.’

    Orwell should be a figure for us, too – in our battle to restore the democracy of the mind and resist the totalitarian mindset of today. But this will require having the courage of our convictions and our words, as he so often did himself. As he put it in The Prevention of Literature, ‘To write in plain vigorous language one has to think fearlessly’. That Orwell did precisely that was a testament to his belief in the public just as much as his belief in himself. He sets an example and a challenge to us all.

    *  *  *

    This is an edited version of a speech given at this year’s Living Freedom, an annual residential school organised by the Battle of Ideas.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 20:50

  • Planned Parenthood Stealth-Edits Website To Match Stacey Abrams 'Heartbeat' Claim
    Planned Parenthood Stealth-Edits Website To Match Stacey Abrams ‘Heartbeat’ Claim

    Planned Parenthood, founded by eugenicist Margaret Sanger, stealth-edited their website to match comments made by Georgia Democratic gubernatorial candidate Stacey Abrams, who claimed that unborn children do not have detectable heartbeats at six weeks, the Washington Examiner reports.

    There is no such thing as a heartbeat a six weeks,” said Abrams. “It is a manufactured sound designed to convince people that men have the right to take control of a woman’s body..”

    Shortly after, Planned Parenthood altered its website without any acknowledgement to say that under the five to six-week mark of pregnancy “a part of the embryo starts to show cardiac activity. It sounds like a heartbeat on an ultrasound, but it’s not a fully-formed heart — it’s the earliest stage of the heart developing.”

    The website had previous said that “a very basic beating heart and circulatory system develop,” as National Review‘s John McCormack noted on Twitter.

    As the Post Millennial points out, Mayo Clinic says “A baby’s cardiovascular system begins developing five weeks into pregnancy, or three weeks after conception. The hearts starts to beat shortly afterward.”

    More via the Post Millennial’s Libby Emmons:

    In 2021, in response to the pro-life laws that were proposed then passed in Texas, that prohibited abortions from taking place after a fetal heartbeat could be detected, a post on Planned Parenthood read “In truth, the ‘fetal heartbeat’ talking point is misinformation intended to deceive the press and public. As gynecologist Dr. Jennifer Gunter explains, at six weeks of fetal development, there is no ‘heart’ that beats — instead, there is detectable activity within a four-millimeter wide growth known as a fetal pole.”

    In 2017, The Atlantic reported that “At six weeks, the ‘heartbeat’ is not audible; it is visible, a flickering that takes place between 120 and 160 times per minute on a black-and-white playback screen. As cardiac cells develop, they begin to send electrical pulses that cause their neighbors to contract. Scientists can observe the same effect if they culture cells in a petri dish.” This article, too, was in response to pro-life laws being written in some states.

    Prior to these laws being proposed, there appears to have been broad consensus that fetal heartbeats began somewhere around 5 or 6 weeks post conception, and that the beating heart was visible on ultra-sounds, and could be audible as well.

    If you’re wondering when you’ll hear baby’s heartbeat, fear not,” Parents Magazine reports, “The answer may be sooner than you think. In fact, the ‘whoosh whoosh’ of your little one’s little organ is one of the first things doctors look (and listen) for. A fetal heartbeat may first be detected by a vaginal ultrasound as early as 5 1/2 to 6 weeks.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 20:15

  • Multipolar World Order – Part 1
    Multipolar World Order – Part 1

    Authored by Iain Davis via OffGuardian.org,

    Russia’s war with Ukraine is first and foremost a tragedy for the people of both countries, especially those who live—and die—in the battle zones. The priority for humanity, though apparently not for the political class, is to encourage Moscow and Kyiv to stop killing men, women and children and negotiate a peace deal.

    Beyond the immediate confines of the conflict, the war is also seen by some as representative of an alleged clash between great powers and, perhaps, between civilisations. All wars are momentous, but the ramifications of Ukrainian war are already global.

    Consequently, there is a perception that it is the focal point of a confrontation between two distinct models of global governance. The NATO-led alliance of the Western nations continues to push the unipolar, G7, international rules-based order (IRBO). It is opposed, some say, by the Russian and Chinese-led BRICS and the G20-based multipolar world order.

    In this 3 part series we will explore these issues and consider if it is tenable to place our faith in the emerging multipolar world order.

    There are very few redeeming features of the unipolar world order, that’s for sure. It is a system that overwhelmingly serves capital and few people other than a “parasite class” of stakeholder capitalist eugenicists. This has led many disaffected Westerners to invest their hopes in the promise of the multipolar world order:

    Many have increasingly come to terms with the reality that today’s multipolar system led by Russia and China has premised itself upon the defense of international law and national sovereignty as outlined in the UN Charter. [. . .] Putin and Xi Jinping have [. . .] made their choice to stand for win-win cooperation over Hobbesian Zero Sum thinking. [. . .] [T]heir entire strategy is premised upon the UN Charter.

    If only that were so! Unfortunately, it doesn’t appear to be the case. But even if it were true, Putin and Xi Jinping basing “their entire strategy” upon the UN Charter, would be cause for concern, not relief.

    For the globalist forces that see nation-states as squares on the grand chessboard and that regard leaders like Putin, Biden and Xi Jinping as accomplices, the multipolar world order is manna from heaven. They have spent more than a century trying to centralise global power. The power of individual nation-states at least presents the possibility of some decentralisation. The multipolar world order finally ends all national sovereignty and delivers true global governance.

    World Order

    We need to distinguish between the ideological concept of “world order” and the reality. This will help us identify where “world order” is an artificially imposed construct.

    Authoritarian power, wielded over populations, territory and resources, restricted by physical and political geography, dictates the “world order.” The present order is largely the product of hard-nosed geopolitics, but it also reflects the various attempts to impose a global order.

    The struggle to manage and mitigate the consequences of geopolitics is evident in the history of international relations. For nearly 500 years nation-states have sought to co-exist as sovereign entities. Numerous systems have been devised to seize control of what would otherwise be anarchy. It is very much to the detriment of humanity that anarchy has not been allowed to flourish.

    In 1648, the two bilateral treaties that formed the Peace of Westphalia concluded the 30 Years War (or Wars). Those negotiated settlements arguably established the precept of the territorial sovereignty within the borders of the nation-state.

    This reduced, but did not end, the centralised authoritarian power of the Holy Roman Empire (HRE). Britannica notes:

    The Peace of Westphalia recognized the full territorial sovereignty of the member states of the empire.

    This isn’t entirely accurate. That so-called “full territorial sovereignty” delineated regional power within Europe and the HRE, but full sovereignty wasn’t established.

    The Westphalian treaties created hundreds of principalities that were formerly controlled by the central legislature of the HRE, the Diet. These new, effectively federalised principalities still paid taxes to the emperor and, crucially, religious observance remained a matter for the empire to decide. The treaties also consolidated the regional power of the Danish, Swedish, and French states but the Empire itself remained intact and dominant.

    It is more accurate to say that the Peace of Westphalia somewhat curtailed the authoritarian power of the HRE and defined the physical borders of some nation states. During the 20th century, this led to the popular interpretation of the nation-state as a bulwark against international hegemonic power, despite that never having been entirely true.

    Consequently, the so-called “Westphalian model” is largely based upon a myth. It represents an idealised version of the world order, suggesting how it could operate rather than describing how it does.

    Signing of the Peace of Westphalia, in Münster 1648, painting by Gerard Ter Borch

    If nation-states really were sovereign and if their territorial integrity were genuinely respected, then the Westphalian world order would be pure anarchy. This is the ideal upon which the UN is supposedly founded because, contrary to another ubiquitous popular myth, anarchy does not mean “chaos.” Quite the opposite.

    Anarchy is exemplified by Article 2.1 of the UN Charter:

    The Organization is based on the principle of the sovereign equality of all its Members.

    The word “anarchy” is an abstraction of the classical Greek “anarkhos,” meaning “rulerless.” This is derived from the privative prefix “an” (without) in conjunction with “arkhos” (leader or ruler). Literally translated, “anarchy” means “without rulers”—what the UN calls “sovereign equality.”

    A Westphalian world order of sovereign nation-states, each observing the “equality” of all others while adhering to the non-aggression principle, is a system of global, political anarchy. Unfortunately, that is not the way the current UN “world order” functions, nor has there ever been any attempt to impose such an order. What a shame.

    Within the League of Nations and subsequent UN system of practical “world order,”—a world order allegedly built upon the sovereignty of nations—equality exists in theory only. Through empire, colonialism, neocolonialism—that is, through economic, military, financial and monetary conquest, coupled with the debt obligations imposed upon targeted nations—global powers have always been able to dominate and control lesser ones.

    National governments, if defined in purely political terms, have never been the only source of authority behind the efforts to construct world order. As revealed by Antony C. Sutton and others, private corporate power has aided national governments in shaping “world order.”

    Neither Hitler’s rise to power nor the Bolshevik Revolution would have occurred as they did, if at all, without the guidance of the Wall Street financiers. The bankers’ global financial institutions and extensive international espionage networks were instrumental in shifting global political power.

    These private-sector “partners” of government are the “stakeholders” we constantly hear about today. The most powerful among them are fully engaged in “the game” described by Zbigniew Brzezinski in The Grand Chessboard.

    Brzezinski recognised that the continental landmass of Eurasia was the key to genuine global hegemony:

    This huge, oddly shaped Eurasian chess board—extending from Lisbon to Vladivostok—provides the setting for “the game.” [. . .] [I]f the middle space rebuffs the West, becomes an assertive single entity [. . .] then America’s primacy in Eurasia shrinks dramatically. [. . .] That mega-continent is just too large, too populous, culturally too varied, and composed of too many historically ambitious and politically energetic states to be compliant toward even the most economically successful and politically pre-eminent global power. [. . .] Ukraine, a new and important space on the Eurasian chessboard, is a geopolitical pivot because its very existence as an independent country helps to transform Russia. Without Ukraine, Russia ceases to be a Eurasian empire. [. . .] [I]t would then become a predominantly Asian imperial state.

    The “unipolar world order” favoured by the Western powers, often referred to as the “international rules-based order” or the “international rules-based system,” is another attempt to impose order. This “unipolar” model enables the US and its European partners to exploit the UN system to claim legitimacy for their games of empire. Through it, the transatlantic alliance has used its economic, military and financial power to try to establish global hegemony.

    In 2016, Stewart Patrick, writing for the US Council on Foreign Relations (CFR), a foreign policy think tank, published World Order: What, Exactly, are the Rules? He described the post-WWII “international rules-based order” (IRBO):

    What sets the post-1945 Western order apart is that it was shaped overwhelmingly by a single power [a unipolarity], the United States. Operating within the broader context of strategic bipolarity, it constructed, managed, and defended the regimes of the capitalist world economy. [. . .] In the trade sphere, the hegemon presses for liberalization and maintains an open market; in the monetary sphere, it supplies a freely convertible international currency, manages exchange rates, provides liquidity, and serves as a lender of last resort; and in the financial sphere, it serves as a source of international investment and development.

    The idea that the aggressive market acquisition of crony capitalism somehow represents the “open markets” of the “capitalist world economy” is risible. It is about as far removed from free market capitalism as it is possible to be. Under crony capitalism, the US dollar, as the preferred global reserve currency, is not “freely convertible.” Exchange rates are manipulated and liquidity is debt for nearly everyone except the lender. “Investment and development” by the hegemon means more profits and control for the hegemon.

    The notion that a political leader, or anyone for that matter, is entirely bad or good, is puerile. The same consideration can be given to nation-states, political systems or even models of world order. The character of a human being, a nation or a system of global governance is better judged by their or its totality of actions.

    Whatever we consider to be the source of “good” and “evil,” it exists in all of us at either ends of a spectrum. Some people exhibit extreme levels of psychopathy, which can lead them to commit acts that are judged to be “evil.” But even Hitler, for example, showed physical courage, devotion, compassion for some, and other qualities we might consider “good.”

    Nation-states and global governance structures, though immensely complex, are formed and led by people. They are influenced by a multitude of forces. Given the added complications of chance and unforeseen events, it is unrealistic to expect any form of “order” to be either entirely good or entirely bad.

    That being said, if that “order” is iniquitous and causes appreciable harm to people, then it is important to identify to whom that “order” provides advantage. Their potential individual and collective guilt should be investigated.

    This does not imply that those who benefit are automatically culpable, nor that they are “bad” or “evil,” though they may be, only that they have a conflict of interests in maintaining their “order” despite the harm it causes. Equally, where systemic harm is evident, it is irrational to absolve the actions of the people who lead and benefit from that system without first ruling out their possible guilt.

    Since WWII, millions of innocents have been murdered by the US, its international allies and its corporate partners, all of whom have thrown their military, economic and financial weight around the world. The Western “parasite class” has sought to assert its IRBO by any means necessary— sanctions, debt slavery or outright slavery, physical, economic or psychological warfare. The grasping desire for more power and control has exposed the very worst of human nature. Repeatedly and ad nauseam.

    Of course, resistance to this kind of global tyranny is understandable. The question is: Does imposition of the multipolar model offer anything different?

    Signing the UN Charter – 1948

    Oligarchy

    Most recently, the “unipolar world order” has been embodied by the World Economic Forum’s inappropriately named Great Reset. It is so malignant and forbidding that some consider the emerging “multipolar world order” salvation. They have even heaped praise upon the likely leaders of the new multipolar world:

    It is [. . .] strength of purpose and character that has defined Putin’s two decades in power. [. . .] Russia is committed to the process of finding solutions to all people benefiting from the future, not just a few thousand holier-than-thou oligarchs. [. . .] Together [Russia and China] told the WEF to stuff the Great Reset back into the hole in which it was conceived. [. . .] Putin told Klaus Schwab and the WEF that their entire idea of the Great Reset is not only doomed to failure but runs counter to everything modern leadership should be pursuing.

    Sadly, it seems this hope is also misplaced.

    While Putin did much to rid Russia of the CIA-run, Western-backed oligarchs who were systematically destroying the Russian Federation during the 1990s, they have subsequently been replaced by another band of oligarchs with closer links to the current Russian government. Something we will explore in Part 3.

    Yes, it is certainly true that the Russian government, led by Putin and his power bloc, has improved the incomes and life opportunities for the majority of Russians. Putin’s government has also significantly reduced chronic poverty in Russia over the last two decades.

    Wealth in Russia, measured as the market value of financial and non-financial assets, has remained concentrated in the hands of the top 1% of the population. This pooling of wealth among the top percentile is itself stratified and is overwhelmingly held by the top 1% of the 1%. For example, in 2017, 56% of Russian wealth was controlled by 1% of the population. The pseudopandemic of 2020–2022 particularly benefitted Russian billionnaires—as it did the billionaires of every other developed economy.

    According to the Credit Suisse Global Wealth Report 2021, wealth inequality in Russia, measured using the Gini coefficient, was 87.8 in 2020. The only other major economy with a greater disparity between the wealthy and the rest of the population was Brazil. Just behind Brazil and Russia on the wealth inequality scale was the US, whose Gini coefficient stood at 85.

    In terms of wealth concentration however, the situation in Russia was the worst by a considerable margin. In 2020 the top 1% owned 58.2% of Russia’s wealth. This was more than 8 percentage points higher than Brazil’s wealth concentration, and significantly worse than wealth concentration in the US, which stood at 35.2% in 2020.

    Such disproportionate wealth distribution is conducive to creating and empowering oligarchs. But wealth alone doesn’t determine whether one is an oligarch. Wealth needs to be converted into political power for the term “oligarch” to be applicable. An oligarchy is defined as “a form of government in which supreme power is vested in a small exclusive class.”

    Members of this dominant class are installed through a variety of mechanisms. The British establishment, and particularly its political class, is dominated by men and women who were educated at Eton, Roedean, Harrow and St. Pauls, etc. This “small exclusive class” arguably constitutes a British oligarchy. The UK’s new Prime Minister, Liz Truss, has been heralded by some because she is not a graduate of one of these select public schools.

    Educational privilege aside, though, the use of the word “oligarch” in the West more commonly refers to an internationalist class of globalists whose individual wealth sets them apart and who use that wealth to influence policy decisions.

    Bill Gates is a prime example of an oligarch. The former advisor to the UK Prime Minister, Dominic Cummings, said as much during his testimony to a parliamentary committee on May 2021 (go to 14:02:35). As Cummings put it, Bill Gates and “that kind of network” had directed the UK government’s response to the supposed COVID-19 pandemic.

    Gates’ immense wealth has bought him direct access to political power beyond national borders. He has no public mandate in either the US or the UK. He is an oligarch—one of the more well known but far from the only one.

    CFR member David Rothkopf described these people as a “Superclass” with the ability to “influence the lives of millions across borders on a regular basis.” They do this, he said, by using their globalist “networks.” Those networks, as described by Antony C. Sutton, Dominic Cummings and others, act as “the force multiplier in any kind of power structure.”

    This “small exclusive class” use their wealth to control resources and thus policy. Political decisions, policy, court rulings and more are made at their behest. This point was highlighted in the joint letter sent by the Attorneys General (AGs) of 19 US states to BlackRock CEO Larry Fink.

    The AGs observed that BlackRock was essentially using its investment strategy to pursue a political agenda:

    The Senators elected by the citizens of this country determine which international agreements have the force of law, not BlackRock.

    Their letter describes the theoretical model of representative democracy. Representative democracy is not a true democracy—which decentralises political power to the individual citizen—but is rather a system designed to centralise political control and authority. Inevitably, “representative democracy” leads to the consolidation of power in the hands of the so-called “Superclass” described by Rothkopf.

    There is nothing “super” about them. They are ordinary people who have acquired wealth primarily through conquest, usury, market rigging, political manipulation and slavery. “Parasite class” is a more befitting description.

    Not only do global investment firms like BlackRock, Vanguard and State Street use their immense resources to steer public policy, but their major shareholders include the very oligarchs who, via their contribution to various think tanks, create the global political agendas that determine policy in the first place. There is no space in this system of alleged “world order” for any genuine democratic oversight.

    As we shall see in Part 3, the levers of control are exerted to achieve exactly the same effect in Russia and China. Both countries have a gaggle of oligarchs whose objectives are firmly aligned with the WEF’s Great Reset agenda. They too work with their national government “partners” to ensure that they all arrive at the “right” policy decisions.

    US President Joe Biden, left, and CFR President Richard N. Haass, right.

    The United Nations’ Model of National Sovereignty

    Any bloc of nations that bids for dominance within the United Nations is seeking global hegemony. The UN enables global governance and centralises global political power and authority. In so doing, the UN empowers the international oligarchy.

    As noted previously, Article 2 of the United Nations Charter declares that the UN is “based on the principle of the sovereign equality of all its Members.” The Charter then goes on to list the numerous ways in which nation-states are not equal. It also clarifies how they are all subservient to the UN Security Council.

    Despite all the UN’s claims of lofty principles—respect for national sovereignty and for alleged human rights—Article 2 declares that no nation-state can receive any assistance from another as long as the UN Security Council is forcing that nation-state to comply with its edicts. Even non-member states must abide by the Charter, whether they like it or not, by decree of the United Nations.

    The UN Charter is a paradox. Article 2.7 asserts that “nothing in the Charter” permits the UN to infringe the sovereignty of a nation-state—except when it does so through UN “enforcement measures.” The Charter states, apparently without reason, that all nation-states are “equal.” However, some nation-states are empowered by the Charter to be far more equal than others.

    While the UN’s General Assembly is supposedly a decision-making forum comprised of “equal” sovereign nations, Article 11 affords the General Assembly only the power to discuss “the general principles of co-operation.” In other words, it has no power to make any significant decisions.

    Article 12 dictates that the General Assembly can only resolve disputes if instructed to do so by the Security Council. The most important function of the UN, “the maintenance of international peace and security,” can only be dealt with by the Security Council. What the other members of the General Assembly think about the Security Council’s global “security” decisions is a practical irrelevance.

    Article 23 lays out which nation-states form the Security Council:

    The Security Council shall consist of fifteen Members of the United Nations. The Republic of China, France, the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics [Russian Federation], the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, and the United States of America shall be permanent members of the Security Council. The General Assembly shall elect ten other Members of the United Nations to be non-permanent members of the Security Council. [. . .] The non-permanent members of the Security Council shall be elected for a term of two years.

    The General Assembly is allowed to elect “non-permanent” members to the Security Council based upon criteria stipulated by the Security Council. Currently the “non-permanent” members are Albania, Brazil, Gabon, Ghana, India, Ireland, Kenya, Mexico, Norway and the United Arab Emirates.

    Article 24 proclaims that the Security Council has “primary responsibility for the maintenance of international peace and security” and that all other nations agree that “the Security Council acts on their behalf.” The Security Council investigates and defines all alleged threats and recommends the procedures and adjustments for the supposed remedy. The Security Council dictates what further action, such as sanctions or the use of military force, shall be taken against any nation-state it considers to be a problem.

    Article 27 decrees that at least 9 of the 15 member states must be in agreement for a Security Council resolution to be enforced. All of the 5 permanent members must concur, and each has the power of veto. Any Security Council member, including permanent members, shall be excluded from the vote or use of its veto if they are party to the dispute in question.

    UN member states, by virtue of agreeing to the Charter, must provide armed forces at the Security Council’s request. In accordance with Article 47, military planning and operational objectives are the sole remit of the permanent Security Council members through their exclusive Military Staff Committee. If the permanent members are interested in the opinion of any other “sovereign” nation, they’ll ask it to provide one.

    The inequality inherent in the Charter could not be clearer. Article 44 notes that “when the Security Council has decided to use force” its only consultative obligation to the wider UN is to discuss the use of another member state’s armed forces where the Security Council has ordered that nation to fight. For a country that is a current member of the Security Council, use of its armed forces by the Military Staff Committee is a prerequisite for Council membership.

    The UN Secretary-General, identified as the “chief administrative officer” in the Charter, oversees the UN Secretariat. The Secretariat commissions, investigates and produces the reports that allegedly inform UN decision-making. The Secretariat staff members are appointed by the Secretary-General. The Secretary-General is “appointed by the General Assembly upon the recommendation of the Security Council.”

    Under the UN Charter, then, the Security Council is made king. This arrangement affords the governments of its permanent members—China, France, Russia, the UK and the US—considerable additional authority. There is nothing egalitarian about the UN Charter.

    The suggestion that the UN Charter constitutes a “defence” of “national sovereignty” is ridiculous. The UN Charter is the embodiment of the centralisation of global power and authority.

    UN Headquarters New York – Land Donated by the Rockefellers

    The United Nations’ Global Public-Private Partnership

    The UN was created, in no small measure, through the efforts of the private sector Rockefeller Foundation (RF). In particular, the RF’s comprehensive financial and operational support for the Economic, Financial and Transit Department (EFTD) of the League of Nations (LoN), and its considerable influence upon the United Nations Relief and Rehabilitation Administration (UNRRA), made the RF the key player in the transformation of the LoN into the UN.

    The UN came into being as a result of public-private partnership. Since then, especially with regard to defence, financing, global health care and sustainable development, public-private partnerships have become dominant within the UN system. The UN is no longer an intergovernmental organisation, if it ever was one. It is a global collaboration between governments and a multinational infra-governmental network of private “stakeholders.”

    In 1998, then-UN Secretary-General Kofi Annan told the World Economic Forum’s Davos symposium that a “quiet revolution” had occurred in the UN during the 1990s:

    [T]he United Nations has been transformed since we last met here in Davos. The Organization has undergone a complete overhaul that I have described as a “quiet revolution”. [. . .] [W]e are in a stronger position to work with business and industry. [. . .] The business of the United Nations involves the businesses of the world. [. . .] We also promote private sector development and foreign direct investment. We help countries to join the international trading system and enact business-friendly legislation.

    In 2005, the World Health Organisation (WHO), a specialised agency of the UN, published a report on the use of information and communication technology (ICT) in healthcare titled Connecting for Health. Speaking about how “stakeholders” could introduce ICT healthcare solutions globally, the WHO noted:

    Governments can create an enabling environment, and invest in equity, access and innovation.

    The 2015, Adis Ababa Action Agenda conference on “financing for development” clarified the nature of an “enabling environment.” National governments from 193 UN nation-states committed their respective populations to funding public-private partnerships for sustainable development by collectively agreeing to create “an enabling environment at all levels for sustainable development;” and “to further strengthen the framework to finance sustainable development.”

    In 2017, UN General Assembly Resolution 70/224 (A/Res/70/224) compelled UN member states to implement “concrete policies” that “enable” sustainable development. A/Res/70/224 added that the UN:

    [. . .] reaffirms the strong political commitment to address the challenge of financing and creating an enabling environment at all levels for sustainable development [—] particularly with regard to developing partnerships through the provision of greater opportunities to the private sector, non-governmental organizations and civil society in general.

    In short, the “enabling environment” is a government, and therefore taxpayer, funding commitment to create markets for the private sector. Over the last few decades, successive Secretary-Generals have overseen the UN’s formal transition into a global public-private partnership (G3P).

    Nation-states do not have sovereignty over public-private partnerships. Sustainable development formally relegates government to the role of an “enabling” partner within a global network comprised of multinational corporations, non-governmental organisations (NGOs), civil society organisations and other actors. The “other actors” are predominantly the philanthropic foundations of individual billionaires and immensely wealthy family dynasties—that is, oligarchs.

    Effectively, then, the UN serves the interests of capital. Not only is it a mechanism for the centralisation of global political authority, it is committed to the development of global policy agendas that are “business-friendly.” That means Big Business-friendly. Such agendas may happen to coincide with the best interests of humanity, but where they don’t—which is largely the case—well, that’s just too bad for humanity.

    Kofi Annan (8 April 1938 – 18 August 2018)

    Global Governance

    On the 4th February 2022, a little less then three weeks prior to Russia launching its “special military operation” in Ukraine, Presidents Vladimir Putin and Xi Jinping issued an important joint statement:

    The sides [Russian Federation and Chinese People’s Republic] strongly support the development of international cooperation and exchanges [. . .], actively participating in the relevant global governance process, [. . .] to ensure sustainable global development. [. . .] The international community should actively engage in global governance[.] [. . .] The sides reaffirmed their intention to strengthen foreign policy coordination, pursue true multilateralism, strengthen cooperation on multilateral platforms, defend common interests, support the international and regional balance of power, and improve global governance. [. . .] The sides call on all States [. . .] to protect the United Nations-driven international architecture and the international law-based world order, seek genuine multipolarity with the United Nations and its Security Council playing a central and coordinating role, promote more democratic international relations, and ensure peace, stability and sustainable development across the world.

    The United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs (UN-DESA) defined “global governance” in its 2014 publication Global Governance and the Global Rules For Development in the Post 2015 Era:

    Global governance encompasses the totality of institutions, policies, norms, procedures and initiatives through which States and their citizens try to bring more predictability, stability and order to their responses to transnational challenges.

    Global governance centralises control over the entire sphere of international relations. It inevitably erodes a nation’s ability to set foreign policy. As a theoretical protection against global instability, this isn’t necessarily a bad idea, but in practice it neither enhances nor “protects” national sovereignty.

    Domination of the global governance system by one group of powerful nation-states represents possibly the most dangerous and destabilising force of all. It allows those nations to act with impunity, regardless of any pretensions about honouring alleged “international law.”

    Global governance also significantly curtails the independence of a nation-state’s domestic policy. For example, the UN’s Sustainable Development Agenda 21, with the near-time Agenda 2030 serving as a waypoint, impacts nearly all national domestic policy—even setting the course for most domestic policy—in every country.

    National electorates’ oversight of this “totality” of UN policies is weak to nonexistent. Global governance renders so-called “representative democracy” little more than a vacuous sound-bite.

    As the UN is a global public-private partnership (UN-G3P), global governance allows the “multi-stakeholder partnership”—and therefore oligarchs—significant influence over member nation-states’ domestic and foreign policy. Set in this context, the UN-DESA report (see above) provides a frank appraisal of the true nature of UN-G3P global governance:

    Current approaches to global governance and global rules have led to a greater shrinking of policy space for national Governments [. . . ]; this also impedes the reduction of inequalities within countries. [. . .] Global governance has become a domain with many different players including: multilateral organizations; [. . .] elite multilateral groupings such as the Group of Eight (G8) and the Group of Twenty (G20) [and] different coalitions relevant to specific policy subjects[.] [. . .] Also included are activities of the private sector (e.g., the Global Compact) non-governmental organizations (NGOs) and large philanthropic foundations (e.g., Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, Turner Foundation) and associated global funds to address particular issues[.] [. . .] The representativeness, opportunities for participation, and transparency of many of the main actors are open to question. [. . .] NGOs [. . .] often have governance structures that are not subject to open and democratic accountability. The lack of representativeness, accountability and transparency of corporations is even more important as corporations have more power and are currently promoting multi-stakeholder governance with a leading role for the private sector. [. . .] Currently, it seems that the United Nations has not been able to provide direction in the solution of global governance problems—perhaps lacking appropriate resources or authority, or both. United Nations bodies, with the exception of the Security Council, cannot make binding decisions.

    A/Res/73/254 declares that the UN Global Compact Office plays a vital role in “strengthening the capacity of the United Nations to partner strategically with the private sector.” It adds:

    The 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development acknowledges that the implementation of sustainable development will depend on the active engagement of both the public and private sectors[.]

    While the Attorneys General of 19 states might rail against BlackRock for usurping the political authority of US senators, BlackRock is simply exercising its power as valued a “public-private partner” of the US government. Such is the nature of global governance. Given that this system has been constructed over the last 80 years, it’s a bit too late for 19 state AGs to complain about it now. What have they been doing for the last eight decades?

    The governmental “partners” of the UN-G3P lack “authority” because the UN was created, largely by the Rockefellers, as a public-private partnership. The intergovernmental structure is the partner of the infra-governmental network of private stakeholders. In terms of resources, the power of the private sector “partners” dwarfs that of their government counterparts.

    Corporate fiefdoms are not limited by national borders. BlackRock alone currently holds $8.5 trillion of assets under management. This is nearly five times the size of the total GDP of UN Security Council permanent member Russia and more than three times the GDP of the UK.

    So-called sovereign countries are not sovereign over their own central banks nor are they “sovereign” over international financial institutions like the IMF, the New Development Bank (NDB), the World Bank or the Bank for International Settlements. The notion that any nation state or intergovernmental organisation is capable of bringing the global network of private capital to heel is farcical.

    At the COP26 Conference in Glasgow in 2021, King Charles III—then Prince Charles—prepared the conference to endorse the forthcoming announcement of the Glasgow Financial Alliance for Net Zero (GFANZ). He made it abundantly clear who was in charge and, in keeping with UN objectives, clarified national governments role as “enabling partners”:

    The scale and scope of the threat we face call for a global systems level solution based on radically transforming our current fossil fuel based economy. [. . .] So ladies and gentleman, my plea today is for countries to come together to create the environment that enables every sector of industry to take the action required. We know this will take trillions, not billions of dollars. [. . .] [W]e need a vast military style campaign to marshal the strength of the global private sector, with trillions at [its] disposal far beyond global GDP, and with the greatest respect, beyond even the governments of the world’s leaders. It offers the only real prospect of achieving fundamental economic transition.

    Unless Putin and Xi Jinping intend to completely restructure the United Nations, including all of its institutions and specialised agencies, their objective of protecting “the United Nations-driven international architecture” appears to be nothing more than a bid to cement their status as the nominal leaders of the UN-G3P. As pointed out by UN-DESA, through the UN-G3P, that claim to political authority is extremely limited. Global corporations dominate and are currently further consolidating their global power through “multi-stakeholder governance.”

    Whether unipolar or multipolar, the so-called “world order” is the system of global governance led by the private sector—the oligarchs. Nation-states, including Russia and China, have already agreed to follow global priorities determined at the global governance level. The question is not which model of the global public-private “world order” we should accept, but rather why we would ever accept any such “world order” at all.

    This, then, is the context within which we can explore the alleged advantages of a “multipolar world order” led by China, Russia and increasingly India. Is it an attempt, as claimed by some, to reinvigorate the United Nations and create a more just and equitable system of global governance? Or is it merely the next phase in the construction of what many refer to as the “New World Order”?

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 19:40

  • Dozens Of Chicago Inmates Scored PPP Loans To Make Bond
    Dozens Of Chicago Inmates Scored PPP Loans To Make Bond

    At least 25 people in Joliet, Illinois who were facing drug or weapons charges obtained PPP loans for fake businesses, and then used the money to make bond to get out of jail, Fox32 Chicago reports.

    So far, 15 people have been arrested and charged with offenses ranging from wire fraud to theft, during an investigation dubbed “Operation Triple P.”

    (Joliet police)

    Another 10 individuals are wanted for the same crimes.

    (Joliet police)

    According to officials, inmates at the Will County Jail had been applying for, and receiving Paycheck Protection Program (PPP) loans using fraudulent information. It’s unclear if any of the inmates claimed to own a motorcycle dealer.

    “Some of the targets bonded out on their felony cases days after receiving their fraudulent PPP loan,” said Joliet Police Chief William Evans during a Wednesday press conference.

    The scheme was uncovered in November 2021, when Joliet detectives began comparing names on PPP loans to the names of inmates facing felonies – which should have disqualified them from the program.

    “The majority of them also use their home address. So we did several periodic spot checks on the residence,” said Detective James Kilgore of the Joliet PD.

    Maria Beach and Adrian Clark were locked up during the pandemic for unrelated gun offenses.

    Police say from their cellphone, they applied for and received PPP loans. Beach claimed to run a barbershop from a home in Rockdale, while Clark claimed to run a barbershop from an apartment in a Joliet house.

    According to records, Beach received nearly $21,000 dollars in PPP loans. Clark got two PPP loans for the same barbershop location totaling nearly $42,000.

    Both are now part of the 15 people locked up again. –Fox32 Chicago

    Joliet PD worked with US Marshals and the Will County State Attorney’s office, as well as the Department of Labor and Chicago’s office of Homeland Security Investigations. 

    “These triple-P loans, that they’re obtaining fraudulently, they are taking that money out of the businesses in our local area that actually need them,” said Acting Special Agent in charge of the Chicago DHS Investigations office, adding that this type of PPP loan fraud has happened across the country.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 19:05

  • The Smartphone's Role In Dumbing Down America
    The Smartphone’s Role In Dumbing Down America

    Authored by Bruce Wilds via the Advancing Time Blog,

    The smartphone has begun to play a huge role In dumbing down America. Rather than being a source to move us forward, it has become an albatross around the necks of many weak-minded souls that depend on them. People turn to these devices for all kinds of unneeded updates including performing simple math problems so they don’t have to think.

    Originated in 1933, the term “dumbing down” was movie-business slang, used by screenplay writers, meaning: “to revise to appeal to those of little education or intelligence.” For those with little drive or purpose, the tendency to seek distraction and relief from unpleasant realities, especially by seeking entertainment or engaging in fantasy find great comfort in the constant flow of dribble a cell phone can provide. In short, dumbing down is the deliberate oversimplification of intellectual content in education, literature, cinema, news, video games, and culture.

    It should be noted this is being written just as the world is on the cusp of being offered a whole new recipe that may lead to more social dysfunction. That comes in the form of “virtual reality” which offers an even stronger form of escapism that may result in damaging the ability of people to relate to each other in the real world. Especially worrisome is the effect it might have on children that experience and embrace it. Their ability to separate this fake virtual world from reality could become impaired.

    A great deal of the problems with smartphones are rooted in the idea everyone deserves one. Yes, I said deserves, not needs. Smartphones are now considered by many people as an extension of their being. A government program started years ago has mushroomed in size and transfers a huge amount of wealth down the social ladder. Years ago I wrote an article that outlined a government program supplying free phones to people with low incomes or that have been declared needy. At that time these phones have become known as “Obama Phones.” Below I give some of the details about the program including who qualifies. If you want to be popular with the voters give them free stuff and let them know that they should not bite the hand that feeds them.

    The term “Obama phone” is not a myth as an online search rapidly confirms. This popular government program explains why we see so many people that would appear to not have a dime in their pockets walking along or driving down the street talking on a cell phone. What exactly is the free Obama phone? It is a program that is meant to help the financially unstable who cannot afford access to a cell phone. It seems that communication should not be limited to people based on what they can afford. The Lifeline program started decades ago to help low-income families have access to landlines has been expanded. Over the years the cost of cell phones and cellular service has decreased and the program has been extended to cover cell phones.

    So who qualifies? It appears little has changed over the years, it seems that if you or members of your household are, receiving the following benefits you automatically qualify for the Lifeline program. The best way to know if you qualify is by filling out an application for a Lifeline provider in your state. Those interested in the program must have an income of less than 135% of the Federal Poverty Guidelines or about $22,350 per year for a family of four.

    • Food Stamps or Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP)

    • Medicaid

    • Supplemental Security Income – commonly known as SSI

    • Health Benefit Coverage under Child Health Insurance Plan (CHIP)

    • The National School Lunch Program’s Free Lunch Program.

    • Low-Income Energy Assistance Program – LIHEAP

    • Federal Public Housing Assistance ( Section 8 )

    • If you are a low-income Eligible Resident of Tribal Lands

    • Temporary Assistance to Needy Families – TANF

    Lifeline is a government-sponsored program, but who is paying for it? Some people claim that the government is using taxpayers’ money to run this program, however, the claim is false. The clever clowns we have sent to Washington found a backhanded under-the-table sort of way to make it appear it is not taxpayer money. Universal Service Fund (USF) which is administered by the Federal Communication Commission along with the Universal Service Administration Company (USAC), pays for the Lifeline phone assistance program. The Universal Service Fund (USF) was created back in 1997 by Federal Communication Commission to achieve the goals set by Congress under the Telecommunication Act of 1996. According to the Act, service providers are obliged to contribute a portion of their interstate and international telecommunications revenues. In short, paying phone customers are paying for it.

    It is written that if you are one of those people who have lost their jobs due to the recession, then probably you’re having a hard time with your daily expenses. On top of that, paying telephone bills is just another pressure. You can get rid of this burden by applying to the “Lifeline Assistance Program” run by the government. To get a phone contact the provider of this service. The government has approved many companies at the national and regional levels to provide this service to eligible people.
     

    Just how much might one of these free government cell phones change your life?

    • An employer can more easily reach you with a job offer if you have a free government cell phone.

    • You can stay in touch with your doctor and other emergency medical professionals more easily with a free government cell phone.

    • A free government cell phone can help you keep in touch with family and other loved ones.

    And the good news is that while a government-assisted cell phone provides you with up to 250 monthly minutes to go with your free cell phone. While that’s a generous contribution from the government, it’s barely enough airtime to last many people a month. But good news is they can easily buy more minutes for the phone from each of the major Lifeline cell phone companies. You can see this is what has happened when it has gotten to the point where people carry their phone in their hand as they go about their business. Apparently, if you use a promotion code, you can get some very good deals.

    A great deal of attention has been given to some of the ideas and visions the World Economic Forum has floated. A powerful and very visible glimpse was contained in the public relations video entitled: “8 Predictions for the World in 2030. Its 2030 agenda promotes the idea that  by 2030, “You will own nothing. And you’ll be happy.” Smartphones dovetail with edging the general population towards such an existence. With the government transferring the costs for millions of customers to those that pay full price, another face of corporate welfare is exposed.
     
    Over The Years This Addiction Has Only Grown Stronger

    Interestingly while many people admit they are addicted to these phones that seem to offer a form of escapism from the real world, some users are moving back to dumbphones. A video by ColdFusion (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=02mIRnPJm6g), an Australian-based online media company, looks into this “Anti-Smartphone Revolution.” It points out how the dumbphone or what is sometimes called a brick is far less intrusive in our lives. Surprisingly, it is those users between the age of 25-35 that are leading this charge.

    We should never underestimate the role of the smartphone in dumbing down America. We can only hope people will begin to take a closer look at these society-changing devices. When a phone will provide the answer to simple math problems many people no longer feel compelled to learn or memorize the things which give us perspective and help us to understand the world around us. It has become apparent, that smartphones change more than society. They change people, too. Being able to push a few buttons does not necessarily make you smarter.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 18:30

  • China's "Zombie" Housing Market Could Persist Due To Lack Of Marriages
    China’s “Zombie” Housing Market Could Persist Due To Lack Of Marriages

    For the most part, everybody understands that China’s property market is in a precarious position, suffering from a massive inventory glut and little demand.

    But what most people haven’t considered is that the lack of demand may actually be attributable to a “decline in the number of marriages” in the country, SCMP pointed out this week

    A revival of the industry “won’t work” because the government, despite being able to cut debt costs and ease financial pressure for developers, can’t revive the marriage rate, the report says. 

    SCMP notes how marriage creates demand for the housing market:

    The industry has enjoyed an incredible combination of huge volumes and high prices for so long partly due to the unique dynamics of China’s modern marriage market – men looking to marry were expected to own property, preferably debt-free.

    The man’s parents and grandparents tended to pitch in, often exhausting their savings. The prospective bride’s family, free of financial pressure, would often push for purchase regardless of the price. Debt was sometimes used to plug the cash shortfall, borrowed under the names of the groom’s parents. Such demand has been a pillar of the property market.

    The report then notes that marriages have fallen to a record low of 7.6 million last year, about half of what it was during its peak in 2013. 

    In China, the financial burden for housing has traditionally fallen on the groom, which has acted as a tailwind for the property market. 

    But now, marriage has become more expensive and demand has “plummeted”. With traditional ideas of marriage and financial responsibility being questioned, social change is taking place that has slowed the rush to elope and, in turn, the rush to collectively own property. 

    Author Andy Xie writes that China’s real estate industry is simply becoming a “zombie” – and so are “many local governments”.

    And while he makes the argument for China to restructure its economy, China is unlikely to do so, he says. 

    Instead, he predicts a “long slog” before the market returns to any type of normalcy. Xie says that if every marriage leads to a property purchase in the country, and if marriages don’t fall further, it would still take about 10 years to run through the inventory currently on the market. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 17:55

  • GOP Lawmaker Pushes To End COVID Emergency After Biden Says 'Pandemic Is Over'
    GOP Lawmaker Pushes To End COVID Emergency After Biden Says ‘Pandemic Is Over’

    Authored by Rita Li via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Sen. Roger Marshall (R-Kan.) urged on Sept. 22 for the repeal of the years-long national emergency declaration following President Joe Biden’s recent remarks that the COVID-19 pandemic “is over.”

    Sen. Roger Marshall (R-Kan.) speaks in Washington in a file photograph. (Greg Nash/Pool/AFP via Getty Images)

    The Republican lawmaker of Kansas introduced on Thursday a privileged resolution that calls for a vote to end the undergoing emergency declaration over the global pandemic, which has been in place since being firstly announced by then-President Donald Trump in March 2020.

    GOP lawmakers in the House previously attempted in March to end the state of emergency yet failed to scrap the declaration.

    The latest move came after Biden made the comments during CBS’s “60 Minutes” interview that aired Sunday night. “We still have a problem with COVID. We’re still doing a lot of work on it. But the pandemic is over,” the president said.

    “Since President Biden used his appearance on 60 Minutes to declare COVID is over, he must immediately terminate the COVID-19 national emergency declaration and wind down other emergency authorities that his Administration continues to force us to live under,” Marshall said in a Sept. 22 statement.

    “The American people are fatigued and yearning to operate outside of the confines of supersized government. They long for their God-given freedoms, and for leaders to take their side,” said Marshall. “It’s high time for Joe Biden and his Administration to stop using COVID to implement their partisan political agenda and focus on the surge in crime and the fentanyl epidemic.”

    The ongoing use of the emergency declaration has allowed the administration to leverage Congress into steer additional funds to address the pandemic, provides a legal basis for suspending payment interest and deadlines for student loans, and shut down ports of entry.

    Hot Water

    Biden’s off-the-cuff comment has surprised his health officials and other Democrat colleagues, with White House chief medical adviser Dr. Anthony Fauci attempting to reshape the president’s narrative, warning that “people should not be cavalier that we’re out of the woods.”

    Earlier this month, the Biden administration asked Congress for more than $22 billion in additional COVID-19 funding to support research on vaccines, testing, preparations, and treatment. Republicans argued that the additional relief funding isn’t necessary given Biden’s comment. Previously, GOP lawmakers signaled they aren’t willing to back the White House’s latest request.

    Moreover, the president announced in August he would wipe out the federal student loan balances of millions of people with up to $20,000 in debt per recipient, using authority under the 2003 HEROES Act that allows the government to waive or modify student loans during national emergencies such as a war.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 17:20

  • "I'm Afraid…" Wharton Prof Rips Powell Apart Over Fed's "Biggest Policy Mistake" Ever
    “I’m Afraid…” Wharton Prof Rips Powell Apart Over Fed’s “Biggest Policy Mistake” Ever

    Wharton professor Jeremy Siegel went on an epic rant against Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell on Friday.

    Appearing on CNBC as the market melted down, the longtime market guru argued that the Fed made a massive error last year by not moving to tighten monetary policy before inflation got out of hand – and then mocked Powell and crew for assuming inflation would simply fade away on its own.

    When we had all commodities going up at rapid rates, Chairman Powell and the Fed said, ‘We don’t see any inflation. We see no need to raise interest rates in 2022.’

    Now when all those very same commodities and asset prices are going down, he says, ‘Stubborn inflation that requires the Fed to stay tight all the way through 2023.’ It makes absolutely no sense to me whatsoever,” Siegel said during CNBC’s “Halftime Report.”

    Siegel expects central bank errors to hit working and middle-class Americans in what he thinks will be a serious recession – and that instead of continuing to hike rates to tame inflation, the Fed should let falling commodity prices shoulder more of the burden.

    “I think the Fed is just way too tight,” he said, adding “They’re making exactly the same mistake on the other side that they made a year ago.”

    Watch:

     

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 16:45

  • FBI Responds To Whistleblower Saying Child Abuse Cases Being Dropped In Favor Of Jan. 6
    FBI Responds To Whistleblower Saying Child Abuse Cases Being Dropped In Favor Of Jan. 6

    Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The FBI responded Tuesday after alleged bureau whistleblowers came forward and accused it of moving agents from child abuse cases to “domestic violent extremist” cases.

    The J. Edgar Hoover FBI Building in Washington on July 21, 2022. (Chung I Ho/The Epoch Times)

    On Monday evening, House Judiciary Republicans wrote on Twitter that an unnamed whistleblower came forward and told them that the FBI is moving agents from child sexual abuse cases to pursue investigations relating to the Jan. 6 Capitol breach.

    The whistleblower, according to Republicans and Rep. Jim Jordan (R-Ohio), “told that child sexual abuse material investigations were no longer an FBI priority and should be referred to local law enforcement agencies.” Jordan sent a letter to FBI Director Christopher Wray asking why there is a purported shift in focus from the child abuse cases to Jan. 6.

    When contacted by The Epoch Times for comment on Tuesday, a spokesperson for the FBI said that “the FBI is charged with protecting the American people from a wide variety of threats, from terrorism, cyber threats, and violent crime to public corruption, hate crimes, and crimes against children.”

    Our commitment to one does not come at the expense of another,” the spokesperson added, disputing House Republican’s key assertion. “The threat posed by domestic violent extremists is persistent, evolving, and deadly. The FBI’s authority to investigate a case as domestic terrorism requires the existence of a potential criminal federal violation, the unlawful use or threat of force or violence, and ideological motivation of any type.”

    The spokesperson added that the bureau does “not investigate ideology” and only “investigates individuals who commit or intend to commit violence and other criminal activity that constitutes a federal crime or poses a threat to national security.”

    We are committed to upholding the constitutional rights of all Americans and will never open an investigation based solely on First Amendment activity,” the FBI said.

    Letter

    The Monday letter from House Republicans alleged that the FBI is breaking its own rules and miscategorizes files to create the impression that domestic violent extremism cases are emerging across the United States.

    New whistleblowers have come forward with concerning information about how the FBI is deliberately manipulating the way case files related to Jan. 6 investigations are maintained in order to create a false and misleading narrative that domestic violent extremism is increasing around the country,” the letter said. “The whistleblower alleged ‘the F.B.I. has not followed regular procedure’ with respect to Jan. 6 cases.”

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 16:10

  • CNN Slammed Into A Brick Wall Named Joe Rogan
    CNN Slammed Into A Brick Wall Named Joe Rogan

    Submitted by QTR’s Fringe Finance

    I started out 2022 by predicting that the mainstream media was in the midst of losing the fight of its life at the hands of popular podcaster and comedian Joe Rogan.

    No media outlet has proven me right this year quite like CNN has.

    Through honest and open dialogue, often in good faith and jest, Rogan has earned himself innumerably more viewers than almost all outlets in mainstream media on both sides of the aisle. He officially started putting the screws to the mainstream media, in my opinion, when he refused to settle for the “company line” on Covid, dutifully peddled by Dr. Anthony Fauci and various government regulators, and welcomed alternative points of view on treatments, lockdowns and how the world was handling the pandemic.

    I wrote back in January that I thought it was the invitations Rogan extended to iconoclastic guests, like Dr. Robert Malone, M.D., that officially marked the beginning of the end the “official” Covid narratives going unquestioned. I predicted that Rogan’s willingness to have an alternative dialogue would force the mainstream media to eventually fall in line, and would throw a wet blanket over the “journalism” of parroting whatever “the science” dictated was objective truth that week.

    Chicago won't cancel Halloween as Mayor Lori Lightfoot unveils rules for  the holiday

    (Chicago Mayor Lori Lightfoot adhering to “the science” last Halloween.)

    “For 2022, I’m gonna make a bold prediction. The media, and maybe even politicians, are going to start to realize that the narratives that they have been pushing with regard to Covid, lockdowns, vaccinations and our economy are no longer being accepted at face value by their viewers,” I wrote in January.

    I predicted:

    The same capitalistic engine keeping Joe Rogan on the air is going to force the change in legacy media. While they may not correct themselves totally or do a full 180°turn, they will fall in line behind those breaking new ground in the space – content creators like Rogan – and they will start to commit more to reason and less to political narratives.”

    Nine months later, CNN stands as a shell of its former self, with several personnel including Jeff Zucker, John Harwood and Brian Stelter either resigning or being cancelled, other anchors like Don Lemon being demoted, the company’s CNN+ streaming platform discarded as an abject $300 million failure, and the network desperately trying to adopt a business model that can cauterize the open wound of defecting viewers.

    Or, as Sean Hannity put it:

    Lo and behold, The New York Post summed up the pivot (or as I called it, the ‘falling in line’), as follows:

    “[Chris] Licht, who has been at the helm of CNN for a few months, has been given a mandate by his corporate bosses at Warner Bros. Discovery to steer the cable network away from opinion-based programming and more toward hard news.”


    If you enjoy this article, would like to support my work and have the means, I would love to have you as a subscriber: Get 50% off forever


    You certainly can’t say the whole thing wasn’t a mess of CNN’s own making. Not only did the network carry the “official” narrative for the Democratic Party over the last couple of years, they also made the mistake of targeting Joe Rogan directly, when the announced that he had used the drug ivermectin to treat Covid late last year.

    CNN went on what I can only describe as a blatantly false misinformation campaign, inaccurately accusing Rogan of taking the veterinary form of ivermectin, used to de-worm horses, while plastering their network with both banners and lobotomized talking heads who were happy to prattle on about the network’s take on the situation.

    The campaign was especially egregious because CNN was essentially alleging that Rogan was so stupid and such a conspiracy theorist that he would purposely take horse de-wormer instead of just falling in line, adhering to “the science” and sticking to Pfizer-endorsed Covid treatments only.

    This hairbrained campaign by CNN was met by a casual threat when Rogan joked about potentially suing the network because of their claims.

    Rogan then promptly put the screws to CNN’s on-network doctor, Sanjay Gupta.

    “It’s a lie. It’s a lie on a news network. And it’s a lie that’s a willing…that they’re conscious of. It’s not a mistake. They’re unfavorably framing it as veterinary medicine,” Rogan said to Gupta.

    “Why would you say that when you’re talking about a drug that’s been given out to billions and billions of people? Why would they lie and say that’s horse de-wormer?”

    “They shouldn’t have said that,” Gupta was forced to uncomfortably admit.

    “They shouldn’t have done that,” Gupta says again.

    “It’s defamatory!” Rogan replies. “Six days after infection I was back at the gym.”

    The Mortal Kombat-style “FINISH HIM” moment came when Rogan asked:

    “You’re working for a news organization. If they’re lying about a comedian taking horse medication, what are they telling us about Russia? What are they telling us about Syria?


    The aftermath of the situation resulted in tremendous embarrassment for the news network, whose viewership at the time paled in comparison to that of Rogan’s.

    It was a true comeuppance for CNN and it was long overdue.

    UFC News: Joe Rogan seemingly has millions more listeners than Tucker  Carlson, Fox News and CNN

    After years of willingly peddling what turned out to be a false narrative regarding President Trump and Russia, CNN solidified any doubts anybody may have had about their true biases and who they were carrying water for with their coverage of Rogan.


    It should come as no surprise that the network self-immolated in the months that followed.

    CNN attempted to launch its own streaming service shortly thereafter, and effort that The New York Times characterized as a “near instant collapse” that “amounted to one of the most spectacular media failures in years.”

    They called it a “$300 million experiment that ended abruptly with layoffs in the offing and careers in disarray.”

    On the legacy network, Brian Stelter was canned because CNN’s boss reportedly was trying to get CNN to “evolve back to the kind of journalism that it started with, and actually have journalists, which would be unique and refreshing.”

    Because, obviously, Brian Stelter wasn’t much of a journalist.

    And the hits didn’t stop there. Like a drunk being escorted out of a bar at 2AM, fellow Mensa-candidate Don Lemon was ushered out of his primetime spot in favor of a morning time-slot. It was an obvious demotion that Lemon seemed to take well and handle with grace.

    Just kidding. Lemon had an embarrassing full-scale on-air toke of the copium in a cringe-worthy segment, smiling maniacally and raving about how he wasn’t actually demoted.

    Further proving that he is fully in touch with reality, with absolutely no cognitive distortions whatsoever, Lemon went with the bold strategy of referring to his demotion as a promotion.

    “I was not demoted. None of that. This is an opportunity. This is a promotion. This is an opportunity for me to create something around me and I get to work with two great ladies [Poppy Harlow and Kaitlan Collins] who you know.”


    As I wrote above, there’s no doubt in my mind that the moment it became clear that Rogan was doing the work the mainstream media should have been doing was when he brought on Dr. Peter McCullough and Dr. Robert Malone to offer their opinions about Covid.

    Putting aside your thoughts on these two credentialed doctors – and their opinion on Covid – it was simply the willingness to engage them in dialogue that I think finally made it clear to the public, and perhaps the higher ups at CNN, that carrying water for “the science” and the Biden administration was no longer a winning strategy. Instead, it was likely having the opposite effect.

    And when all was said and done the entire ordeal was a relatively low-key flex for Rogan. Despite a couple of moments chuckling about it, he didn’t seem to take the whole incident too seriously after it had passed and he allowed the situation to resolve itself. After all, when you’re the king of the media world, that’s likely the winning attitude to adopt; there’s no point in routinely punching downward.

    But for me, CNN and the rest of the mainstream media are still upwards of my trajectory – which is why I have no problem sharing my opinion that CNN’s last six months of scorched Earth could very well also play out for other obviously biased news organizations that let their emotions get the best of them and, as a result, cross boundaries in their reporting.

    My mother, who leans left, often makes a great point about news networks. She says that no matter what side they are rooting for, they all have their own agenda. She is 100% right, but, in my opinion, CNN took it one step further than just having an agenda. Now, they’re facing the very real consequences. And don’t get me wrong, I think the same exact thing would happen to Fox News if they branched out too far on the right and simply started to lie, openly, about popular public figures.

    The mainstream media has definitely hit an immovable object in The Joe Rogan Experience. He’s doing everything they aren’t: asking open-minded questions, not pandering to either political party, thinking for himself and encouraging others to do the same.

    The lesson that other media organizations can now learn the easy way is the same one that CNN just learned the hard way: stay in your (heavily biased) lane. The “mainstream” has a new face.

    Thank you for venturing over to the Fringe. This post is public so feel free to share it : Share

    If you enjoy this article, would like to support my work and have the means, I would love to have you as a subscriber: Get 50% off forever

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 15:35

  • The Decline And Fall Of The American Empire
    The Decline And Fall Of The American Empire

    Authored by Doug Casey via International Man,

    As some of you know, I’m an aficionado of ancient history. I thought it might be worthwhile to discuss what happened to Rome and based on that, what’s likely to happen to the U.S. Spoiler alert: There are some similarities between the U.S. and Rome.

    But before continuing, please seat yourself comfortably. This article will necessarily cover exactly those things you’re never supposed to talk about—religion and politics—and do what you’re never supposed to do, namely, bad-mouth the military.

    There are good reasons for looking to Rome rather than any other civilization when trying to see where the U.S. is headed. Everyone knows Rome declined, but few people understand why. And, I think, even fewer realize that the U.S. is now well along the same path for pretty much the same reasons, which I’ll explore shortly.

    Rome reached its peak of military power around the year 107, when Trajan completed the conquest of Dacia (the territory of modern Romania). With Dacia, the empire peaked in size, but I’d argue it was already past its peak by almost every other measure.

    The U.S. reached its peak relative to the world, and in some ways its absolute peak, as early as the 1950s. In 1950 this country produced 50% of the world’s GNP and 80% of its vehicles. Now it’s about 21% of world GNP and 5% of its vehicles. It owned two-thirds of the world’s gold reserves; now it holds one-fourth. It was, by a huge margin, the world’s biggest creditor, whereas now it’s the biggest debtor by a huge margin. The income of the average American was by far the highest in the world; today it ranks about eighth, and it’s slipping.

    But it’s not just the U.S.—it’s Western civilization that’s in decline. In 1910 Europe controlled almost the whole world—politically, financially, and militarily. Now it’s becoming a Disneyland with real buildings and a petting zoo for the Chinese. It’s even further down the slippery slope than the U.S.

    Like America, Rome was founded by refugees—from Troy, at least in myth. Like America, it was ruled by kings in its early history. Later, Romans became self-governing, with several Assemblies and a Senate. Later still, power devolved to the executive, which was likely not an accident.

    U.S. founders modeled the country on Rome, all the way down to the architecture of government buildings, the use of the eagle as the national bird, the use of Latin mottos, and the unfortunate use of the fasces—the axe surrounded by rods—as a symbol of state power. Publius, the pseudonymous author of The Federalist Papers, took his name from one of Rome’s first consuls. As it was in Rome, military prowess is at the center of the national identity of the U.S. When you adopt a model in earnest, you grow to resemble it.

    A considerable cottage industry has developed comparing ancient and modern times since Edward Gibbon published The Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire in 1776—the same year as Adam Smith’s Wealth of Nations and the U.S. Declaration of Independence were written. I’m a big fan of all three, but D&F is not only a great history, it’s very elegant and readable literature. And it’s actually a laugh riot; Gibbon had a subtle wit.

    There have been huge advances in our understanding of Rome since Gibbon’s time, driven by archeological discoveries. There were many things he just didn’t know, because he was as much a philologist as an historian, and he based his writing on what the ancients said about themselves.

    There was no real science of archeology when Gibbon wrote; little had been done even to correlate the surviving ancient texts with what was on the surviving monuments—even the well-known monuments—and on the coins. Not to mention scientists digging around in the provinces for what was left of Roman villas, battle sites, and that sort of thing. So Gibbon, like most historians, was to a degree a collector of hearsay.

    And how could he know whom to believe among the ancient sources? It’s as though William F. Buckley, Gore Vidal, H. L. Mencken, Norman Mailer, and George Carlin all wrote about the same event, and you were left to figure out whose story was true. That would make it tough to tell what really happened just a few years ago… forget about ancient history. That’s why the study of history is so tendentious; so much of it is “he said/she said.”

    In any event, perhaps you don’t want a lecture on ancient history. You’d probably be more entertained by some guesses about what’s likely to happen to the U.S. I’ve got some.

    Let me start by saying that I’m not sure the collapse of Rome wasn’t a good thing. There were many positive aspects to Rome—as there are to most civilizations. But there was much else to Rome of which I disapprove, such as its anti-commercialism, its militarism and, post-Caesar, its centralized and increasingly totalitarian government. In that light, it’s worth considering whether the collapse of the U.S. might not be a good thing.

    So why did Rome fall? In 1985, a German named Demandt assembled 210 reasons. I find some of them silly—like racial degeneration, homosexuality, and excessive freedom. Most are redundant. Some are just common sense—like bankruptcy, loss of moral fiber, and corruption.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 15:00

  • Blinken Warns China FM Against Support To Russia At UN
    Blinken Warns China FM Against Support To Russia At UN

    Secretary of State Antony Blinken met his Chinese counterpart Foreign Minister Wang Yi on the sidelines of the United Nations General Assembly in New York on Friday – at a moment tensions over Taiwan are still on edge following Nancy Pelosi’s early August trip to the self-ruled island.

    Blinken took the opportunity to again warn Beijing against providing any support to ongoing Russian operations amid the invasion of Ukraine. A statement said the top US diplomat “reiterated the United States’ condemnation of Russia’s war against Ukraine and highlighted the implications if the PRC [People’s Republic of China] were to provide support to Moscow’s invasion of a sovereign state.” 

    “He underscored that the United States remains open to cooperating with the PRC where our interests intersect,” State Department spokesman Ned Price said of Blinken’s meeting with the Chinese FM.

    Blinken told Wang that the US administration desires to keep lines of communication open and wants peace, directly invoking the Taiwan crisis, also after a recent sail through of a US Navy warship of contested waters in the strait. 

    Blinken “emphasized that the United States is committed to maintaining peace and stability across the Taiwan Strait, consistent with our longstanding one China policy,” Price said.  

    President Biden’s address to the UNGA the day prior struck a conciliatory tone when compared to his 60 Minutes interview last week, wherein he said the US would intervene militarily if China invaded Taiwan

    In remarks to the UNGA on Wednesday, Biden said the US opposes “unilateral changes in the status quo” in Taiwan by either side. He also stressed that Washington does not want a confrontation with Beijing.

    “Let me be direct about the competition between the United States and China as we manage shifting geopolitical trends: the United States will conduct itself as a reasonable leader,” Biden said.

    “We do not seek conflict. We do not seek a cold war. We do not ask any nation to choose between the United States or any other partner,” Biden had followed with, also speaking in the general context of the Russia-Ukraine conflict.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 14:25

  • Strong Dollar Fatigue: Japan's Yen Intervention Will Not Work. How Can It?
    Strong Dollar Fatigue: Japan’s Yen Intervention Will Not Work. How Can It?

    Authored by Mike Shedlock via MishTalk.com,

    Japan has intervened in the Forex markets to defend the Yen. Let’s discuss why that tactic will not work, and the irony of the process itself.

    Image from Tweet below.

    “What it looks like when a big central bank steps into an FX market. The Bank of Japan  draws a line at 146.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This is majorly funny. Let’s flash back to a 2016 post of mine.

    Central Banks Fail in Efforts to Destroy Currency 

    In 2016, Japan complained about “one-sided” moves, a signal of possible intervention. Instead, of taking the warning into account, the yen soared to its highest since October 2014.

    Please recall my April 8, 2016 post Central Banks Fail in Efforts to Destroy Currency (Mish Offers Advice)

    Japan is angry. Rightfully so, in a perverse way. What is Japan angry about? It has not succeeded in destroying its own currency, a seemingly simple task.

    It’s pretty damn pathetic when you cannot destroy your own currency. But that’s where we are given the competitive currency devaluation madness.

    Strong “One Sided” Yen Synopsis

    • From January 2012 until the tip of the decline in May 2015, the Yen declined 39.43% vs. the US dollar

    • Since then, the Yen has gained 13.54%

    • Alternatively, using the same starting point of January 2012, the Yen is down a mere 29.95% vs. the US dollar.

    • Supposedly, this is one-sided “strength”.

    How one-sided can you get going down while complaining about going up?

    Mish Advice

    If you cannot destroy your own currency, don’t blame others with “one-sided” complaints, just try harder.

    Yen Daily Chart

    In inverse pairs, up is getting weaker. Think of it this way. In April it took 121 Yen to buy a dollar, now it takes 142. That’s a weakening of 14.8 percent.

    Yen Monthly Chart 

    What a Hoot! 

    Japan wanted a weaker Yen. It should be pleased. But it isn’t.

    Instead, Japan is complaining with words and intervention actions about getting what it wanted. 

    Will Currency Interventions Work? 

    They never have, so why would this time be any different? 

    This reminds me of the Bank of England – George Soros story. The Bank of England was defending the British Pound from a speculative short attack. 

    A reporter told Soros something to the effect that the BOE just spent some number of £ to defend the pound. Soros replied with a question “Ok, what is the BOE going to do tomorrow?”

    Black Wednesday

    The next day, known as Black Wednesday, the pound collapsed.

    Black Wednesday (or the 1992 Sterling crisis) occurred on 16 September 1992 when the UK Government was forced to withdraw sterling from the European Exchange Rate Mechanism (ERM), after a failed attempt to keep its exchange rate above the lower limit required for the ERM participation. At that time, the United Kingdom held the Presidency of the Council of the European Union.

    The crisis damaged the credibility of the second Major ministry in handling of economic matters. The ruling Conservative Party suffered a landslide defeat five years later at the 1997 United Kingdom general election and did not return to power until 2010. The rebounding of the UK economy in the years after Black Wednesday led to a reassessment of the legacy of the crisis, as John Major’s government adopted an inflation targeting policy as an alternative to the ERM and set the foundation for a prospering economy in the years prior to the financial crisis of 2007–08, and the British public turned increasingly Eurosceptic.

    OK, What Will the BOJ Do Tomorrow?

    It’s a fool’s move to waste foreign reserves defending a currency. Nothing good ever comes from it because all it does is paper over a problem. 

    Japan’s intervention will never work although it’s possible that it will later look like it did.

    For example, if this is an exhaustion move on the dollar, and the Yen slide stops, it is because that was going to happen anyway, not because of the intervention.

    Japan Playing With Fire

    Japan is playing with fire. 

    The more currency reserves it blows now, the greater the Yen will collapse later when the BOJ, like the BOE finally throws in the towel.

    If Japan wants to stop the slide, it needs to aggressively hike interest rates, something it refuses to do.

    End of the 40-Year Bull in Debt and a “Global Depression” Threat

    I have been discussing the possibility of a currency crisis for years, suggesting that Japan was a likely candidate.

    For discussion, please see End of the 40-Year Bull in Debt and a “Global Depression” Threat

    How many are watching emerging markets and the Yen?

    Over the years I maintained a currency crisis was far more likely in Japan than the US. We will see.

    Regardless, the end of the 40-year bull market in debt does not rate to be a pretty affair.

    So, asking again,  What Will the BOJ Do Tomorrow?

     

    *  *  *

    Please Subscribe to MishTalk Email Alerts.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 13:50

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 24th September 2022

  • The US Empire Is Accelerating Toward Global Conflict On Two Fronts: Johnstone
    The US Empire Is Accelerating Toward Global Conflict On Two Fronts: Johnstone

    Authored by Caitlin Johnsone via Medium,

    Vladimir Putin has announced that referenda will be held in four regions of the eastern part of Ukraine whose populations will now vote on whether to join the Russian Federation, much like the Crimea referendum of 2014 which resulted in Russia’s annexation of that territory. Putin announced that 300,000 additional troops will be mobilized for the war to help facilitate this action, which is a major escalation in the conflict by any measure.

    Putin also issued a stern nuclear warning that’s being hysterically spun by empire managers as a shocking and unprecedentedly bellicose threat, but if you read what he actually said it’s clear that he’s really reminding the west of the same principles of Mutually Assured Destruction that have been in place for generations, and isn’t expressing any position that western nuclear powers don’t also hold:

    Nuclear blackmail was also launched. We are talking not only about the shelling of the Zaporizhzhya nuclear power plant, which is encouraged by the West, which threatens a nuclear catastrophe, but also about the statements of some high-ranking representatives of the leading NATO states about the possibility and admissibility of using weapons of mass destruction against Russia — nuclear weapons.

    To those who allow themselves to make such statements about Russia, I would like to remind you that our country also has various means of destruction, and for some components more modern than those of the NATO countries. And if the territorial integrity of our country is threatened, we will certainly use all the means at our disposal to protect Russia and our people. It’s not a bluff.

    The citizens of Russia can be sure that the territorial integrity of our Motherland, our independence and freedom will be ensured, I emphasize this again, with all the means at our disposal. And those who are trying to blackmail us with nuclear weapons should know that the wind can also turn in their direction.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    So while this war is indeed insanely dangerous, it’s not because of any of the words coming out of Vladimir Putin’s mouth.

    Westerners who are expressing shock and astonishment at Putin’s frank acknowledgement of what’s at stake in Russia’s increasingly direct confrontation with the US empire are really just admitting that they haven’t been paying attention. The risk of nuclear war is why sensible people have spent years calling for de-escalation and detente between the US and Russia while tensions have been steadily building since long before the invasion of Ukraine. Now there are western officials who say the world is actually at greater risk of nuclear war than it ever was during the last cold war.

    A nuclear conflict could be sparked by either side making a calculated decision to use nuclear weapons (and you’re fooling yourself if you believe the US is any less trigger happy in that regard than Russia), but it can also be sparked by either side due to a mistake resulting from a technological malfunction, miscommunication, misunderstanding or miscalculation, as nearly happened many times during the last cold war. The more things escalate, the more likely both such possibilities become.

    And, clearly, things are escalating.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And that’s just Russia; tensions are rapidly escalating between the US-centralized empire and China as well. In an article for Antiwar.com titled “There’s Little More Washington Can Do To Convince China To Invade Taiwan,” Andrew Corbley describes the frighteningly extensive provocations the US has been pouring into another massive geopolitical powderkeg just in the past few weeks.

    In the last 50 days, the executive and legislative branches in Washington have done more than in the last 50 years to convince China that America’s imperial policy is simply relentless, and must be met with force,” Corbley writes. “That’s not to say it’s by any means a given that the People’s Republic of China will invade its cross-straits neighbor of Taiwan, but that is to say that if strategic planners in Washington sat down and created a bulleted list of how to facilitate such an invasion, they would have probably gone through all the bullets by now.”

    Corbley notes the incendiary visit to Taiwan by Nancy Pelosi (which has since been followed by a deluge of additional US officials), President Biden’s repeated and increasingly explicit commitment to plunge the US into direct hot war with China if there’s an attack on Taiwan, and the Senate Foreign Relations Committee’s insanely escalatory Taiwan Policy Act. When you look at the brazenness, ferocity and aggression of these provocations between two nations who logically should never go to war with each other, it really does look as though the empire is putting the pedal to the metal in acceleration toward global conflict.

    On paper it looks completely irrational for the US empire to be ramping up aggressions against two powerful military and economic forces simultaneously, but it’s undeniable at this point that that is what’s happening. Clearly our rulers have some kind of strategy for how they’re going to see this through, though it remains to be seen whether that strategy is the desperate Hail Mary pass of a dying empire or a potentially highly effective plan using tools that aren’t currently visible to the public.

    Either way, it looks like it’s probably a good time to relish human life on this planet while it’s here to be relished.

    ______________

    My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, following me on Facebook, Twitter, Soundcloud or YouTube, buying an issue of my monthly zine, or throwing some money into my tip jar on Ko-fi, Patreon or Paypal.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 09/24/2022 – 02:00

  • House Passes Election Bill That Makes It Harder To Decertify Presidential Results
    House Passes Election Bill That Makes It Harder To Decertify Presidential Results

    Authored by Joseph Lord via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours)

    The House of Representatives on Sept. 21 passed an election law bill designed to address President Donald Trump’s legal efforts to decertify some electoral slates in 2021.

    The U.S. Capitol building in Washington on Dec. 29, 2020. (Eric Baradat/AFP via Getty Images)

    The bill, dubbed the Presidential Election Reform Act, passed in a mostly-party line vote with a handful of GOP defections. The final vote, coming in at 229–203, included the support of 221 Democrats and nine Republicans.

    During the aftermath of the 2020 election, when Trump was trying to determine how to move forward on his claims of widespread election fraud, lawyer John Eastman was among the attorneys in Trump’s inner circle who supported an effort to refuse to certify electoral slates from states where concerns of election fraud were most prevalent.

    The 12th Amendment

    Eastman’s position—that Vice President Mike Pence had the power under the 12th Amendment to reject some electoral slates—was heavily taken to by Trump, who tried to convince Pence to refuse to certify some electoral slates.

    Specifically, the effort centered on an ambiguous line in the 12th Amendment, passed after the near-crisis of the election of 1800 which saw Congress go through dozens of ballots before finally declaring Thomas Jefferson the winner.

    That line reads “the President of the Senate [i.e., the vice president] shall, in the presence of the Senate and House of Representatives, open all the certificates and the votes shall then be counted.”

    Eastman proposed that Pence could legally refuse to count the ballots of states deemed most at risk of election fraud.

    Opponents of Trump’s 2021 effort have said that the Constitution only intends for the vice president’s role in the Jan. 6 certification of electoral slates to be a “ceremonial” one, while proponents of the effort have pointed to similar events in the past, particularly in regards to the presidential elections of 1800, 1876, and 1960. However, there is no hard-set legal consensus on the issue either way.

    Ultimately, the effort was unsuccessful, as Pence refused to use his role to deny certification of contested electoral slates.

    ‘Opening the Door to Mass Litigation’

    Though there is no consensus among legal experts as to the lawfulness or validity of the effort, altering the electoral certification process has been a key focus for many of Trump’s adversaries during the 117th Congress. The focus on the issue has intensified since the beginning of the Jan. 6 Committee hearings, which presented Trump’s efforts as criminal and undemocratic.

    The bill passed by the House on Wednesday was sponsored by Rep. Zoe Lofgren (D-Calif.) and co-sponsored by outgoing Rep. Liz Cheney (R-Wyo.). Both members serve on the House Jan. 6 panel.

    In addition to naming the vice president’s role in electoral certification a ceremonial one, the bill would up the number of lawmakers needed to sustain an objection to a state’s reported electoral slate.

    Currently, a vote on the validity of electoral slates can be forced by a single member of the House and a single member of the Senate, causing the House and Senate to have to vote to sustain or strike down the objection. Under the new bill, that figure would be upped to one-third of the House and one-third of the Senate before a vote on an objection could move forward.

    Cheney fell into the camp of those who claim the role is purely ceremonial, saying on the House floor in Washington that the bill would guarantee that Jan. 6 is “as the constitution envisioned, a ministerial day.”

    Further, Cheney said that it will “ensure that in the future our election process reflects the will of the people.”

    The American people are supposed to decide an election, not Congress,” Lofgren said, echoing Cheney.

    Jan. 6 panel member Rep. Jamie Raskin (D-Md.) portrayed the bill as a necessary one to update the rules of the Electoral College, which has long been targeted by Democrats, who often portray the system as undemocratic. The party has long hosted calls for the total abolition of the college and movement to a popular vote basis for electing the president.

    However, most House Republicans are critical of the bill.

    House Administration Committee Ranking Member Rodney Davis (R-Ill.) said that the bill is “opening the door to mass litigation.” In addition, Davis argued that the legislation tramples state sovereignty over election law.

    Davis added that Democrats are “desperately trying to talk about their favorite topic, and that is former President Donald Trump.”

    In his opening speech on the bill delivered on the House floor, Davis argued that, despite efforts to present the contrary perspective, the 12th Amendment has long been used by members of both parties to ensure the legitimacy of an election’s results.

    Davis describes the mechanism as one that preserves the checks and balances of the three federal branches on each other.

    Contrary to the position espoused by Democrats, Davis said, lawmakers challenging election results when they see something suspicious “is not an affront to democracy—it’s democracy in action.”

    Rep. Barry Loudermilk (R-Ga.), who has faced accusations from the Jan. 6 Committee of leading reconnoitering missions into the Capitol in the days before Jan. 6, also blasted the bill, saying that Congress’s focus should be on pressing contemporary issues like inflation and energy costs rather than on Jan. 6.

    Democrats, by contrast, spent much of their time speaking on the floor by relating the bill to the events of Jan. 6 and the future of American democracy.

    In a statement indicative of this approach, Rep. Steny Hoyer (D-Md.) insisted that the bill was not a partisan issue, but “a democracy issue.”

    “There are ambiguities in our electoral system and they can jeopardize our democracy—that’s what this bill is about,” Hoyer added later.

    The party also spent a great deal of time applauding Cheney for her role in pushing for the bill.

    “President Abraham Lincoln would be standing with Liz Cheney if he were on this floor,” said Hoyer, who called Cheney “as Republican as anyone” in the House.

    12th Amendment Issue Remains Contested

    John Eastman, the Trump attorney who was most supportive of the 12th Amendment scheme, disagreed about the legality of the effort.

    Eastman told The Epoch Times before the vote that discussing the role of the 12th Amendment out of the context of the situation on the ground at the time is mistaken.

    He noted that the Constitution gives states the power to make their own election laws and determine the manner in which states will choose their electoral slates. In every U.S. state at this point, the popular vote is the method for choosing this slate.

    But Eastman also pointed to several last-minute changes by secretaries of state, executive orders from governors, and county clerks that changed or overshot the statutorily-required, legislature-approved legal regulations like deadlines and signature verification.

    “Those election codes were violated, there’s no dispute about that,” Eastman contended. “That means the election was not constitutionally conducted. How big the impact was is hard to say.”

    He added, “It was rather extraordinary, the illegality of it.”

    The use of the 12th Amendment and the vice president’s role, Eastman argued, was a last resort—albeit a legal one—stemming from the unwillingness of courts to consider the legal issues involved and the unwillingness of governors to call legislatures into special sessions to address the concerns.

    Finally, Eastman turned to the issue of the 12th Amendment.

    “It seems a little odd that [the Founders] would waste a whole amendment on just a ceremonial thing,” Eastman argued, shunting the claim that the vice president’s role is merely ceremonial. “That’s not the way the Founders typically operate.”

    Eastman further argued that the electoral process was designed in large part to ensure that Congress does not have the final say in choosing the president, as such a system would “destroy the separation of powers.”

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 22:55

  • Hiding In Plain Sight: The Looming Health Care Cost Fight
    Hiding In Plain Sight: The Looming Health Care Cost Fight

    Authored by Donald Trigg & Jarrett Lewis via RealClear Wire,

    In the 1992 campaign, the always colorful James Carville hung a sign in Bill Clinton’s Little Rock headquarters with three key messages. And if “It’s the Economy, Stupid” became the iconic election-cycle takeaway, Carville’s third dictate bears a 30th anniversary reminder: “Don’t Forget Health Care.”   

    The Conference Board’s closely watched gauge of consumer sentiment released on August 30th  found that consumer expectations for the next 6 months were 75.1. While the data showed month-over-month improvement, the index remained well below 80, suggesting as the Conference Board wrote last week that “a recession risk persists.”

    Rising inflation has been at the heart of declining consumer expectations. Over the course of election-year 2022, it also has been a tactical focus for both political parties ranging from the Democratic push to pass the Inflation Reduction Act earlier this month to a flood of Republican advertisements in key swing districts blaming President Biden and Congressional leaders for fueling inflation.

    If this political posturing is unsurprising, a surprising election-year consensus in both parties is: health care is only a modest concern for voters this fall. Nothing arguably tells that story more than the most recent CBS News survey. The nonpartisan poll conducted July 27-29 did not even ask voters about health care as a top issue. It was missing from the “most important issue facing the country” list altogether. But alas, as Carville admonished, “Don’t Forget Health Care.”

    Declining health care affordability will be a defining political issue this decade. It is hiding in plain sight —and very few in Washington are positioning to solve it.

    When asked specifically about health care costs, the saliency of the issue jumps from the page. A Pew Research Center survey in April found 55% believe “affordability of health care” is a very big problem – receiving a higher share than all other issues tested except for inflation. A Public Opinion Strategies (POS) survey in March found 52% believe “health insurance costs and coverage” is “extremely important” to determining which candidate to support this November.

    Beyond the Beltway, health care cost concerns have driven voters to act. Since 2017, six Republican states have expanded Medicaid through ballot initiatives. South Dakota is set to vote on expansion in November. Moreover, voter concerns on health care also have spurred legislative action. In 2019, Virginia legislators voted to approve Medicaid expansion; and efforts to expand coverage are afoot in North Carolina, with the state Senate voting overwhelmingly 44-2 in June in favor of expansion.

    The political opportunity for the party that effectively tackles the cost curve is a generational one. Leadership success is grounded in a single question that must be asked about every potential statute or regulatory rulemaking: does this change hold the promise to decrease costs for individuals and families? If you are on the right side of that question, you are working on solving the number one health care concern for voters.

    Importantly, as we look beyond the off-year election cycle, there is sound reason to believe health care costs will move materially higher. Health care pricing is typically a laggard. Government programs like Medicare are set on an annual basis. Commercial rates are tied to a plan or calendar year. As a result, increased costs elsewhere in the economy around things like labor costs and supplies have not yet been reflected in the health care pricing structure. As former Clinton Treasury Secretary Larry Summers wrote last month, “large nursing shortages, COVID burdens, deferred elective procedures and financial problems for hospitals” should set an expectation that medical inflation will accelerate going forward.

    Rising medical inflation will further challenge families already struggling with the cost of care. A Kaiser Family Foundation survey from March found 43% of Americans live in a household where someone has postponed receiving medical care over the past year due to cost. Two-thirds of Americans express concern that an illness or medical emergency in their family would force them into bankruptcy. The latter number alone represents more than 130 million voters. And yet, just 6% of voters across the country express confidence their member of Congress will take action to lower the cost of health care over the next 12 months.

    During the Clinton-era debate on health care reform, James Carville said, “I like being on the side of the health care consumer.” The individual is the decision-maker on issues of health and care, accelerated by the experience of Covid-19. Health care affordability is their great challenge. Neither Republicans nor Democrats can afford to forget that as they navigate the fall campaign.

    Donald Trigg is the CEO of apree health and co-author of ‘The New Health Economy: Ground Rules for Leaders’ (Georgetown University Press). Jarrett Lewis is a Partner at national opinion research firm Public Opinion Strategies (POS).

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 22:25

  • Psychopathic Leftist Intolerance And The Death Of Cayler Ellingson
    Psychopathic Leftist Intolerance And The Death Of Cayler Ellingson

    Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.us

    One of the go-to accusations of the political left against conservatives is the notion that we are “intolerant” of others to the point of being hateful and dangerous. There is very little actual evidence to support this claim. We continue to hear about how we are racists and extremists, yet the only event leftists are ever able to cite as an example is the January 6th protests – An event which did involve rioters, violence and injuries, but also zero deaths actually caused by conservative protesters. You would think a supposed insurrection attempt would involve plenty of guns, bombs, fire and murder, but nothing close to this occurred. Amazing what little damage has been caused by such a group of “extremists.”

    In comparison, the progressive BLM and Antifa riots of the past couple of years have led to dozens of deaths and billions in property damage across the nation. This was not called an “insurrection,” it was called a “peaceful but fiery protest.” In fact, the media continues to deny the deaths and the extent of the destruction caused by BLM and still refuses to refer to the violence as “riots.”

    Keep in mind that BLM and other leftist social justice groups received billions of dollars from corporate America and globalist institutions like the Ford Foundation, Open Society Foundation, Rockefeller Foundation, etc. One could argue that BLM would not exist without the constant flow of cash from the power elites. BLM also had the full support of the corporate media. BLM leaders even allegedly embezzled millions upon millions of dollars while members COMPLAINED that corporate America should be giving them MORE MONEY.

    But somehow, conservatives are called dangerous “pawns of capitalism?” In reality, leftist groups are the very villains that they claim to be fighting against.

    What we have here is a combination of problems – Leftist projection as well as leftist gaslighting combined with radicalization by the media and certain politicians. Leftists are so convinced of the righteousness of their ideology and the “evil” of anyone that disagrees with them that they believe they are justified in any action, including murder.

    There is an ancient word for this kind of behavior: Zealotry.

    The swirling atmosphere of political elitism and rage that leftists have produced makes all people who oppose them into monsters; not enemies, but “monsters.” The level of vitriol and animosity expressed not only against conservatives, but also moderate democrats that refuse to toe the line is astonishing. It is something you might see in the old world, in places where religious fundamentalism dominates all of society. The kind of seething hatred that leads to mob mentality and the crushing boots of tyrants.

    It is here that we have to address the recent murder of an 18-year-old named Cayler Ellingson at the hands of a 41 year-old leftist named Shannon Brandt. I feel the need to cover this situation in part because the mainstream media is barely talking about it.

    The details are still limited and the case is still unfolding, but much of what we know was openly confessed by Brandt himself. Cayler Ellingson, participating in a local street dance in the small town of McHenry North Dakota, apparently found himself in a political argument with Brandt. The specific cause of the debate is not yet known. Brandt proceeded to assault Ellingson by punching him.

    Brant said that the teen then made a phone call, which he believed was to make contact with an “extremist group,” and that this group was going to come after him. In reality, Ellingson was calling his mother to see if she knew who Brandt was. The self professed leftist then got into his car and ran Ellingson down, injuring him to the point of near death, and then left him in the street.

    Brandt later called the police, telling the dispatcher that he “struck a pedestrian because the pedestrian was threatening him,” but it was too late. He later admitted to running down the teen in his vehicle because he thought Ellingson was part of a “Republican extremist group.” Investigators say that they have found no evidence that Ellingson was a part of an any such group, not that it matters.

    Brandt was charged with manslaughter and released on $50,000 bail. Compare this to Kyle Rittenhouse, who killed armed leftists in self defense and was charged with multiple counts of murder and given a bail of $2 million. He was also called a “racist extremist” by the media even though the people he shot were white.

    The core danger of zealotry is not only that it radicalizes normal people into doing horrible things, it also opens the door for naturally psychopathic people to do evil under the cover of social justification. They can now commit all the atrocities they dream of committing, that they enjoy committing, while claiming to be acting in the best interests of a particular movement.

    Imagine that this event was now flipped – A middle aged conservative gets into an altercation with an 18-year-old blue haired progressive, then punches him and kills him with his car. The media firestorm would be endless, we would be hearing about it for the next year and numerous conservative politicians would have to come out publicly to admonish the behavior as not representative of our principles.

    Where is the firestorm over the death of Cayler Ellingson? Where are all the leftist leaders coming out to make things right and offer a diplomatic hand of consolation? They are nowhere to be found because they don’t care and they know the media is on their side.

    Joe Biden’s recent “Red Rant” speech in which he proclaimed that tens of millions of American conservatives are enemies of democracy that threaten the very foundations of our country is partially to blame. It was a clear provocation, an open declaration of war against conservatives. The hypocrisy in his statements is mind boggling and they represent deliberate gaslighting designed to demonize his political opponents.

    The foundations of our country were built on rebellion against tyranny and injustice, and the only group perpetuating tyranny and injustice in the US today is the political left. Biden, operating under the direction of a host of elitist advisers, was nearly instrumental in the complete destruction of our constitutional freedoms through his covid restrictions and vaccine passport executive order. The mandates and lockdowns were resoundingly supported by the political left as blue states suffered months of oppression well after conservative red states abandoned the mandates as useless.

    As noted, it was leftists that were setting fire to cities across America while calling for the destruction of our founding values and the replacement of our current system with a more socialist oriented framework. They do not care about the foundations of our country. Rather, they despise what our nation represents and want to see the erasure of our past to make way for their delusional Utopian future.

    Real conservatives stand for constitutionalism, the Bill of Rights, protection of innocent life, limited government, private property, sound money and free markets, equality of opportunity, meritocracy and decentralization. We stand against collectivism, socialism/communism/globalism, the forced equality of outcome and false notions of equity, big government authoritarianism, identity politics and victimhood grifting, entitlement culture, mob rule and centralization.

    At the root of it all, though, is the fact that conservatives represent a choice outside of the mainstream narrative that in order for the world to progress we must continue to give up more and more of ourselves and our rights.

    Leftist claim we “live in a society” and thus we are required to sacrifice for the greater good. But, who made them the arbiters of the “greater good?” Who said we want to live in their vision of a society? Why is their ideology suddenly the ideology of the future? Maybe, their ideology is actually old, outdated and totalitarian. They don’t represent the future, they represent an archaic and villainous past.

    As the political left drives headlong into zealotry there will be more events like the death of Cayler Ellingson. It’s not a matter of if, but when. Maybe Brandt’s attack on Cayler was politically motivated, or maybe it was just a story he made up to explain away his crime. Regardless, the details of the story he chose matter. He painted a tale of Ellingson as a Republican extremist for a reason. He did it because he believed that when people heard this it would vindicate the attack, and in the case of many leftists he is probably right.

    This kind of ideology always ends the same way – With moral relativism and the attempted elimination of a group’s ideological detractors. It is in the nature of zealots to destroy what they cannot control. It is also in their nature to attack people and then accuse those same people of being the aggressors.  Leftists cannot live with any other group in peace, they will seek to absorb or eliminate, this is what they do, and in the process many people will end up hurt or dead.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 21:55

  • Grassroot Election Integrity Movement Sweeps Battleground States
    Grassroot Election Integrity Movement Sweeps Battleground States

    Authored by Gary Bai via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    At ten past five in the morning on Election Day in 2021, retired construction company owner Warren Jenkins slid into his business-casual attire in a panic, knowing he had to get to the polling station in 20 minutes. He was the only Republican poll watcher at an important precinct.

    Cleta Mitchell speaks at the “Election Integrity Summit” in Harrisburg, Pa., on Aug. 20, 2021. (Courtesy of Cleta Mitchell)

    Jenkin’s wife, prescient, pre-made lunch for her husband, who then arrived at the polls to begin his 15-hour shift—from 5:30 a.m. to about 9 p.m.—just in time.

    As a volunteer poll watcher in Virginia, Jenkins would run back and forth between the outdoor ballot box and the in-door voting place, observe the conduct of the election, and report irregularities and violations of the Election Code, if any, to election officials.

    For his entire life, Jenkins has been somewhat of a model American man: he served in the army, built houses, and loves spending his weekends at church and with family and friends—and wasn’t into politics, at all.

    But as the battleground blaze simmered at the conclusion of the 2020 election lawsuits, Jenkins still had in his mind the lingering silhouette of Zuckerbucks (private funding in election administration that was allowed in 2020 and now banned in some states), whispers of faulty mail-in ballots, and alleged—later court-confirmed—election law-flaunting. He then thought he could do more for the country as an American.

    With the Trump-Biden election, there was so much press on the dishonesty in the election. I thought I would see for myself,” Jenkins told The Epoch Times. “I’m retired now—and I thought, it was time to roll up my sleeves and to go out and to help out.”

    “I felt like being a poll watcher—even though we didn’t get paid—was an important role,” Jenkins said. “I didn’t really care about the money.”

    A poll watcher monitors the counting of ballots at the Allegheny County elections warehouse in Pittsburgh, Pa., on Nov. 6, 2020. (Jeff Swensen/Getty Images)

    Jenkins is one of many who saw themselves as a part of a movement to defend the integrity of America’s elections, concerned that the 2020 election was not conducted well.

    Some offered explanations for what went wrong in 2020—some had substantial proof—but none seemed to be able to convince the courts to rule in favor of what they were proposing, which often consisted of flipping the election results for a district, or the Biden presidency altogether.

    Many realized this, so they pivoted forward.

    They formed a movement, driven by the belief that citizens should participate in the election process to give rise to transparency, and that accompanying the right to vote is the right to have every legal vote counted—and faulty vote trashed.

    Ground-up Movement

    Jenkin’s resolve to act proved fortuitous, because just as Republicans like him across the country decided to become more involved in elections, roads were built to help them do exactly that.

    Cleta Mitchell, who fought alongside former President Donald Trump in one of the 2020 election lawsuits disputing the election results in Georgia, was getting a lot of calls—and a lot of ideas—following the 2020 election.

    “What has happened in 2020 was that many people across the country realized that things were not right, and that the election was not conducted according to law in many cases,” Mitchell told The Epoch Times. “And so a lot of people have said, ‘What can I do to help? What can we do to make sure this doesn’t ever happen again?’”

    “As somebody who spent a lot of time in a lot of different aspects of the election, I’ve tried to say, here are things you can do: You can go to rallies and have somebody get yelled at,” Mitchell said. “Or, we can train you. We can tell you what you need to do to make sure it never happens again. And there’s plenty to do.”

    Mitchell, a seasoned lawyer with a swath of experience in all corners of election issues (and a Democrat-turned-Republican), leads the Election Integrity Network, a project of the Conservative Partnership Institute, a Washington-based non-profit.

    Since its launch, the network developed into a nationwide mobilization base and knowledge-sharing platform that operates at national, state, and local levels to work on election integrity initiatives, such as pushing legislation for voting security, hiring more poll watchers and election officials, and examining potential loopholes in election administration processes.

    Through training and discussion “summits,” the network has kicked off state-level “coalitions” across the country, and these state coalitions would then become the headquarters of mobilizing precinct-level task forces in that state to work on election integrity projects.

    “Ultimately, all elections take place at the local level,” Mitchell said when asked about her vision for launching the network. “We are asking people to become involved in apparatus at their local level, because that’s where the elections take place. And that’s where many of the problems occur, because that’s where the voting takes place.”

    Getting to Work

    The Election Integrity Network started humbly with weekly telephone calls, during which state coalition leaders in various battleground states would bounce ideas off of each other on how to improve election security and share the issues they spot.

    But things quickly picked up speed when Lynn Taylor, a regular on these calls who leads Virginia Fair Elections, a state-level coalition in Virginia, saw that time is cutting short for her state.

    “Virginia is one of two states that have statewide elections every year, Virginia and New Jersey,” Taylor said in an interview with The Epoch Times, sharing how she was concerned about the way the 2020 election was run and wanted to help improve the security of the 2021 election—the question now is how.

    “The idea came from Cleta when she and I were on the phone together, and she said, ‘you really need a summit,’” Taylor said, recounting her conversation with Mitchell. “I said, ‘I don’t have the budget for that,’ and she said, ‘I do.’ Two and a half weeks later, we had a summit.”

    “This was very different from the way that things had been done,” Taylor said. “You know, people have been having summits for ages, but this is the first one in my years that we actually use it for training purposes.”

    With the help of Mitchell and the Election Integrity Network, Taylor organized the network’s first “Election Integrity Summit” in August 2021 in Virginia. The two-day event featured election integrity training and information for grassroots who wanted to help improve election security. These included poll observers’ recruitment, scheduling, training, and administration; a project to document potential illegal voter registrations; and a discussion on the alleged influence of private funding in the 2020 election.

    During the summit, people who had already been working on related initiatives—improving security around the ballot box, analyzing election data for potential anomalies, or pushing for election integrity legislation, for example—found others scattered across Virginia working on similar things, and quickly fused into local work groups called “Election Integrity Task Forces” and began collaborating on projects on a county basis.

    “The coalition was how you get involved. You work on a county basis. Then you come up to the state coalition to bring your questions … to see if other counties are running into the same things,” Taylor said, recounting how there were a little more than a dozen task forces in the state during the time of the summit, a number that quadrupled to more than 50 in a few months.

    “I’ve been doing this for 26 years, and I’ve never seen people come together where they all left their logos at the door,” Taylor said. “They are more interested in the election integrity issue—and making sure that there are free and fair elections—than they are in promoting their own agenda. It is the first time I have ever seen this—in the 26 years that I’ve been working in the nonprofit arena.”

    Shelley Oberlander, a Republican Precinct Captain for ten years, was leading a local election integrity task force in the Virginia coalition. After learning from the summit about the election integrity projects that she could start in her county, Oberlander started to expand her team.

    After the summit, Oberlander connected with other county-level task forces and had weekly conference calls to share their experiences. Within a year, Oberlander’s team grew from a few members to six work groups, each specializing in areas of election integrity including legislation, education, data analysis, election technology, and voter administration.

    “We brought it home, we put it in practice, and we got it going,” Oberlander said in an interview with The Epoch Times.

    A Helpful Hand

    The backstory to Oberlander’s involvement in this grassroots election integrity movement is illustrative of the other driving force behind the movement: the Republican National Committee (RNC).

    As a member of a county-level GOP, Oberlander started the local election integrity team in the Loudoun County GOP at the calling of the state-level GOP, the Virginia GOP, which operates joint forces with the RNC earlier this year and started an election integrity program. Earlier this year, the Virginia GOP sent out a marching order to county-level Republican units in the state asking them to start election integrity teams.

    “The RNC and Virginia GOP are encouraging unit chairs to hone in on local election integrity efforts,”  Emma Vaughn, an RNC spokesperson, told The Epoch Times in a statement.

    In other words, Oberlander, as a part of the Republican Party, was able to utilize resources within the GOP establishment, as well as the Election Integrity Network to expand her task force and knowledge base.

    But the RNC wasn’t always able to do this, as its hands were only recently freed.

    The RNC, the powerhouse and teller machine of Republican initiatives, was legally barred from organizing and sponsoring ballot security operations like poll watching from 1982 to 2018, due to a 1982 consent decree (pdf) issued by Dickinson R. Debevoise, a judge appointed by former U.S. President Jimmy Carter.

    This has been consequential. The consent decree meant that for nearly 40 years, the Democratic National Committee had a structural advantage over the RNC in strategizing and developing election administration infrastructure in accordance with its vision of how voting should be done.

    “Because of the DNC v. RNC Consent Decree, the RNC had been shut out of most election integrity efforts for nearly four decades, which led to a lack of institutional knowledge to conduct election integrity operations,” the RNC’s 2021 election integrity report reads (pdf).

    After the consent decree expired in 2018, the RNC began building infrastructure around election integrity projects. This includes spending more than 30 million on election protection efforts in battleground states across the country during the 2021 cycle, and continued building election security infrastructure for the 2022 cycle, Vaughn told The Epoch Times.

    The RNC has made a multi-million-dollar investment for the 2022 cycle, including 17 state Election Integrity directors, 35 in-state election integrity counsels, and in recruiting over 43,000 poll workers and poll watchers in battleground states across the country,” Vaughn wrote in a statement.

    “The RNC works with other groups who have an interest in promoting election integrity but the party’s efforts are independent from any outside organization,” Vaughn wrote.

    The Movement Ripples

    The Election Integrity Network’s success in Virginia, which Mitchell calls the “Virginia model,” was promptly replicated in other states. By mid-2022, the Election Integrity Network held summits in eight battleground states—Virginia, Georgia, Arizona, Florida, Pennsylvania, Michigan, Wisconsin, and North Carolina—and mobilized thousands to start election integrity projects at the local level, according to Mitchell.

    “What we are focused on is building out the infrastructure—creating state coalitions and local election integrity task forces,” Mitchell said. “We really are measuring our success by the number of states who are up and running with statewide election integrity coalitions.

    We measure that by helping them bring together the various groups to have weekly calls, then getting their local task forces going and then getting a framework for recruiting and training poll workers, election officials and starting the working groups within each state,” Mitchell said.

    According to Marshall Yates, Executive Director of the network, the network’s state-level conference calls in North Carolina, Michigan, and Georgia had over 75 in attendance, and Arizona and Pennsylvania had about 40 in attendance. The attendees are like Oberlander: they mostly consist of task force leaders who would put what they learned in the calls into practice at their local counties.

    Even Congress hopped on.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 21:25

  • Victor Davis Hanson: Martha's Meltdown Model
    Victor Davis Hanson: Martha’s Meltdown Model

    Authored by Victor Davis Hanson via RealClear Politics (emphasis ours),

    Martha’s Vineyard has been all over the news.

    The tony resort community so loves aiding and comforting the undocumented immigrants who were flown in from Florida that it hugged them — for all of 48 hours.

    Oddly, the Left became unhinged when red-state governors — whose states the last two years were flooded with some 3 million people who entered the country illegally — finally decided to spread welcoming chores among affluent blue-state communities.

    It was a natural fit.

    Most, like Washington, D.C., and New York, were on record as sanctuary city jurisdictions. In the abstract, they endorse open borders and celebrate diversity — from the serenity of thousands of miles away.

    The uproar at Martha’s Vineyard prompted the Democratic hierarchy to do some explaining. Why had it not earlier objected to the federal government night flights of tens of thousands of border-crossers to red-state communities that had opposed illegal immigration?

    And why be angry with governors who were only emulating that policy by flying in a mere 50 newcomers — in the light of day — to a far wealthier and liberal-minded sanctuary resort?

    Florida Governor Ron DeSantis gave the nearly all-white, rich vacation spot an opportunity to match noble words with even nobler deeds. But in response, the 1 percent screamed that their small community could not possibly cope with a mere 50 new arrivals.

    So far, wealthy progressive enclaves in Malibu, Aspen, and Napa have not stepped up to alleviate the “burden” put on their Martha’s Vineyard brethren.

    They should ask how does a poor Yuma or El Paso sustain hundreds of thousands crossing illegally into their communities — once Joe Biden effectively rendered federal immigration law null and void?

    The Martha’s Vineyard vacation mansion of the Obamas is currently vacant, as are most of his neighbors’ estates. Their sizable and expansive grounds could still serve as ideal centers for hundreds of immigrants to camp out.

    Almost all arrivals would surely prefer the Obama estate, scenery, and view than crowding among the impoverished at the border.

    Here where I live in southern Fresno County, California, often ground-zero for those arriving without documentation, receptive communities try hard to make space for immigrants.

    On my avenue, small farmhouses are now rented to landlords who often manage to accommodate 20 or 30 immigrants on their small lots.

    In fact, almost all farmhouses in my environs are surrounded by trailers, shacks, and sheds where hundreds of the undocumented live — to the total indifference of the state and utter neglect of California’s left-wing elite.

    Instead, our apartheid living elite virtue signal that increased crime, gangs, drug smuggling, prostitution, and child trafficking do not accompany open borders.

    From personal experience, I can attest that many have found otherwise.

    But, to be fair, Martha’s Vineyard could serve as a permanent way station for border-crossers. That way it might offer a more disinterested long-term assessment of the impact of illegal immigration on U.S. social services and communities.

    The Vineyard could also offer the nation a test case to ascertain whether the frantic panic of its privileged reveals their xenophobic racism and stereotyping — or if those are all too understandable reactions to the politically driven, reckless, and inhumane open-borders policies of the Biden administration.

    This new idea of redirecting undocumented immigrants from swamped communities on the border to more supportive sanctuary well-off cities might also serve as an ethical model for us all on a variety of other issues.

    For those who object to establishing grounds for the homeless far away from urban parks and downtowns, might they instead offer their own yards to help spread the burden among the entire community?

    For those who mocked the efficacy of border walls, might they take a vow not to erect walls around their own estates?

    For those who decry the inordinate carbon footprints of the consumer classes, might they pledge not to fly in private jets until catastrophic climate change abates?

    For those who believe that natural gas is too carbonized a fuel to generate electricity or warm homes, can they pledge not to heat swimming pools or cool down their homes below 78 degrees?

    For those who supported defunding the police and decriminalizing an array of previous misdemeanors and felonies, might they highlight the ensuing safety and security by not hiring private security guards?

    For those who call for extensive gun control and decry the ubiquity of handguns, might they pledge not to hire armed security details?

    For those who feel that charter schools undermine the public schools as much as unionized faculty empower them, might they eschew private prep schools?

    The Martha’s Vineyard experience marks a unique opportunity for modern bicoastal progressivism.

    View it as a landmark teachable moment to prove to the nation that leftists’ loud theories and Utopian agendas merely reflect — rather than are at odds with — their own prior concrete and well-lived experiences.

    Victor Davis Hanson is the Martin and Illie Anderson Senior Fellow at the Hoover Institution and the author, most recently, of The Case for Trump. You can reach him by e-mailing author@victorhanson.com.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 20:55

  • Biden Family Worked To Sell American Gas To China, GOP Lawmaker Says Citing Whistleblower
    Biden Family Worked To Sell American Gas To China, GOP Lawmaker Says Citing Whistleblower

    Authored by Eva Fu and Frank Fang via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The Biden family was selling U.S natural gas to China long before Joe Biden became president, who was aware of how his son Hunter Biden was making the sale possible, according to Rep. James Comer (R-Ky.), ranking member of the House Oversight Committee, citing documents and information provided by a whistleblower.

    President Joe Biden, right, and his son Hunter Biden walk to a vehicle after disembarking Air Force One upon arrival at Joint Base Andrews in Maryland on Aug. 16, 2022. (Nicholas Kamm/AFP via Getty Images)

    Hunter Biden had a Chinese Communist Party member as his assistant while dealing with the Chinese side for the shipping of American natural gas to China in 2017, and the Biden family was promising business associates that they would reap rewards once Biden became president, said Comer in a letter to Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen dated Sept. 20.

    The President has not only misled the American public about his past foreign business transactions, but he also failed to disclose that he played a critical role in arranging a business deal to sell American natural resources to the Chinese while planning to run for President,” Comer wrote.

    Joe Biden, Comer said, was a business partner in the arrangement and had office space to work on the deal, and a firm he managed received millions from his Chinese partners ahead of the anticipated venture.

    While part of what Comer stated had previously been reported in the news, the letter, citing whistleblower testimonies, as well as emails, a corporate PowerPoint presentation, screenshot of encrypted messages, and bank documents that committee Republicans obtained, provides a more complete picture suggesting Biden’s knowledge and involvement in the plan from at least 2017.

    From 2017 to 2021, the Bidens promised business associates that Joe Biden would run for president in 2020 and those who worked with them from 2017 onward would “reap the rewards in a future Biden administration,” according to Comer’s recount of a whistleblower testimony to Oversight Committee Republicans.

    As America now struggles in an energy crisis, it is critical to understand why the Biden family was selling American energy reserves to the Chinese, if that is affecting President Biden’s decision making today, and why President Biden has never disclosed his relationship with the Chinese to the American public,” Comer wrote to Yellen.

    “If President Biden has worked to enrich not only himself but his family by promising, in exchange for millions of dollars, access or policy influence in a future Biden Administration, Congress and the American people are entitled to that information.”

    ‘Good for Both the United States and China’

    Emails attached in the letter show that Hunter Biden was actively facilitating the natural gas deal with top executives from the now-defunct CEFC China Energy, at the time one of the largest energy firms in China.

    In a November 2017 email to CEFC executive Dong Gongwen, Hunter told his partner he had sent information regarding liquified natural gas opportunities in Louisiana.

    We began to investigate the opportunities in United States well before the public announcement by the Chinese government of its interest in Natural Gas imports from around the world,” Hunter wrote. He offered the prospect of contracts for large quantities of liquified natural gas “at very competitive rates” in the short term, as well as the possibility of acquisition or partnership in a promising natural gas project in Louisiana that would advance CEFC’s long term goals.

    Hunter Biden, son of U.S. President Joe Biden, attends an event at the White House in Washington on April 18, 2022. (Drew Angerer/Getty Images)

    “The proposal I have shared with you has the added benefit of being good for both the United States and China simultaneously,” he added.

    According to the letter, Hunter’s Chinese assistant, Bao Jiaqi, who previously worked as the research assistant at China’s macroeconomic management agency National Development and Reform Commission, sent him a detailed presentation containing political and topography maps, along with Chinese annotations, carving up America based on natural gas reserves. The 30-page presentation made particular emphasis on Pennsylvania, Louisiana, Texas, Oklahoma, and Wyoming.

    The emails that accompanied the slides revealed a plan to advance a natural gas sale to China through Hudson West III LLC, a company set up by Hunter and CEFC officials, according to the letter.

    Joe Biden’s Alleged Role

    By one whistleblower’s account, Joe Biden was an “obfuscated partner” in the transactions with the Chinese, and his son would hold 10 percent of the joint venture to hide his involvement, according to Comer’s letter. The same information was previously confirmed by former business associate Tony Bobulinski to The Epoch Times.

    “Don’t mention Joe being involved, it’s only when [you] are face to face, I know [you] know that but they are paranoid,” an associate for Hunter told another partner on May 20, 2017, in a WhatsApp conversation, a screenshot of which was attached in the letter.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 20:30

  • Who's Responsible For Space Junk?
    Who’s Responsible For Space Junk?

    It turns out that, after polluting our planet, we are now polluting space. Thousands of pieces of debris from broken down satellites, rocket boosters and weapons tests that we’ve launched over the years have got stuck in orbit, creating clutter, which could not only crash into the active satellites we need for monitoring the Earth but also release harmful chemicals into the atmosphere as they burn up on re-entry, depleting the ozone layer, as well as potentially creating problems for future launches and space exploration.

    As Statista’s Anna Fleck shows in the chart below, most space junk comes from three countries: Russia, the U.S. and China.

    Infographic: Who’s Responsible for Space Junk? | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    Last November, Russia blew up one of its old satellites using an anti-satellite (ASAT) weapon, sending thousands of pieces of debris into orbit and risked hitting the International Space Station. The Secure World Foundation estimates at least 16 debris-creating ASAT weapons tests have been carried out to date, with the most potentially damaging carried out by China in 2007, as the country downed one of their own satellites, creating an estimated 3,000 pieces of debris. However, it was the U.S. that created the first ASAT test, back in the 1950s, and according to Data Center Dynamics, has since conducted at least three ASAT debris-creating tests; two in the mid-1980s and one in 2008.

    According to the OECD, active debris removal faces several “technological, geopolitical and economic challenges.”

    Manufacturing and launching debris removal vehicles is expensive and, if it goes wrong, there’s the risk of simply creating further debris.

    On top of this, OECD analysts explain:

    “the retrieval of debris could involve sharing potentially sensitive data about the debris object’s design that could involve national security, foreign policy, intellectual property, etc. Therefore, countries would realistically be limited to removing their own satellites or those of close military allies.”

    Despite this, a number of space missions are planned over the next few years, including the European Space Agency’s ClearSpace-1 and the Japanese Commercial Removal of Debris Demonstration (CRD2) mission. According to the OECD, possible solutions that are being worked on include space or ground based lasers to “nudge” objects out of the way, as well as the possibility to create an “artificial atmosphere” to divert its orbit. The organization’s analysts conclude: “All legal, technological and economic hurdles aside, these approaches depend on a much more accurate capability of space situational awareness and space tracking than exists today.”

    Evidently the issue of space debris will need to be solved soon as companies such as Boeing Co. and SpaceX get set to launch some 65,000 spacecraft into low-Earth orbit, upping the likelihood of more collisions and even further debris in the future.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 20:05

  • US Marine: "I Didn't Join The Military To Fight For Taiwan"
    US Marine: “I Didn’t Join The Military To Fight For Taiwan”

    Authored by 13-year military veteran Dan McKnight,

    Are you ready to go to war to “protect” a place, thousands of miles away from our nation, which we have no treaty alliance with and no overriding national interest? I’m not talking about Ukraine, even though we continue to pump that country full of billions of dollars in weapons and supplies in a proxy war against Russia.

    I’m talking about Taiwan, located off the coast of China in the Pacific Ocean. Joe Biden just promised to defend it with the full military might of the United States. When I joined the U.S. Marine Corps Reserves, and later the Idaho Army National Guard, I signed up to protect and defend the U.S. Constitution and our Bill of Rights—not Taipei.

    File image: US Marines/We Are The Mighty

    Here’s the story.

    After the Chinese Civil War ended in 1949, and Chairman Mao consolidated the rule of the Communist Party in Beijing, a small collection of anti-communists flew the coop and established themselves on the island of Formosa, about 100 miles from the mainland.

    That’s where they’ve been ever since, developing from a military dictatorship to a parliamentary democracy with two major parties. One wants closer integration with Beijing, the other wants full independence. Both Taipei and Beijing claim to be the legitimate government of all of China.

    In the 1970s, our government normalized relations with the Chinese mainland, and de-recognized the “Republic of China” in Taiwan, severing diplomatic relations and abrogating a defense pact.

    For over 40 years since then our foreign policy has been guided by “strategic ambiguity.” We recognize there is “One China,” but that there’s some creases we’d like to see ironed out peacefully and without violence.

    That’s why Nancy Pelosi’s visit last month to the island was so explosive. It was a high-level American leader playing recklessly with our diplomacy for the cameras. Now on Sunday, when 60 Minutes asked President Biden…

    “…to be clear, sir, U.S. forces, U.S. men and women would defend Taiwan in the event of a Chinese invasion?”

    “Yes,” he answered.

    You don’t get any clearer than that.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The administration has attempted to walk back the statement, and claims there’s been no change to “strategic ambiguity.” This is the third or fourth time the White House communications department has had to “correct” the commander in chief about our relationship with Taiwan.

    So who’s actually guiding policy in our country? It’s not Joe Biden and his rapidly decking cognitive abilities. It’s the War Party, the same group that’s been dictating U.S. foreign policy for over seventy years.

    That includes Republicans like Mitt Romney too. That carpetbagger just voted for a new bill slithering through Congress called the “Taiwan Policy Act,” which among other things will give the island $6,500,000,000 in military aid.

    “We’re doing something that’s highly provocative and bellicose,” Romney said, not to disparage but to praise the legislation. Then there’s Senator Marsha Blackburn of Tennessee, as faux conservative as they come. She says the American people have to fight for Taiwan and Ukraine on behalf of “international democracy.”

    You know what I call that? Globalism.

    Our soldiers are not cannon fodder for these imperial, one-world government schemes. They’re patriotic men and women who committed their lives to protect and defend our liberties and our borders.

    I say let the Chinese, on the mainland and on Formosa, work out their own problems in their own neighborhood while we Americans focus on building the strongest and freest economy in the world. That’s America First.

    But I’m not in charge.

    Left to their own devices, Joe Biden, Nancy Pelosi, Mitt Romney, and Marsha Blackburn will start World War III and try to fight Russia and China at the same time. They’ll destroy our country and leave us to pick through the rubble.

    That’s why you need to stop them.

    Read the rest at The Libertarian Institute

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 19:45

  • A 'Significant Threat To National Security': China Has Been Embedding Scientists At Los Alamos For Decades
    A ‘Significant Threat To National Security’: China Has Been Embedding Scientists At Los Alamos For Decades

    At least 154 Chinese scientists who worked on government-sponsored research at Los Alamos National Laboratory have been recruited by China to perform scientific work over the past two decades – including helping advance China’s military technology that now threatens America’s national security, according to a new private intelligence report obtained by NBC News.

    The report, by Strider Technologies, describes what it calls a systemic effort by the government of China to place Chinese scientists at Los Alamos National Laboratory, where nuclear weapons were first developed.

    Many of the scientists were later lured back to China to help make advances in such technologies as deep-earth-penetrating warheads, hypersonic missiles, quiet submarines and drones, according to the report. -NBC News

    The scientists – paid as much as $1 million – were recruited through Chinese government “talent programs” designed to funnel them back to China.

    As Peter Schweizer wrote last week, The Chinese approach is to “capture” elite institutions and individuals in the US: politicians, leading universities, large pension funds, social media, and Hollywood among them. My latest book, Red Handed, documents this capture in the areas of politics, diplomatic and business consulting, Big Tech, academia, and on Wall Street. There is insight in the Soviet-era statement, attributed to Lenin, about capitalists “selling us the rope with which to hang them.” Yet, it is the Chinese that understood how to sell the rope at a good price.

    Much as they are doing with products such as solar panels, the Chinese realize that cornering the market in an area where reach equals access is critical to their long-term plans to dominate. Their pattern includes stealing technology they cannot create themselves and using any means available to aid in that theft. Therefore, every bit of access to information they can scour is of more value to them than the product used to get it.

    Understanding these patterns is crucial to recognizing that the Chinese do this to their own people as well. As Gordon Chang’s recent piece for the Gatestone Institute discusses, the Chinese Communist Party maintains tight control of Chinese people overseas through many different forms of what we may baldly call blackmail. The many stories of intimidation of Chinese students and academics in the US who speak up about human rights abuses by China, or in support for democracy in Hong Kong and Taiwanese independence, all demonstrate this.

    Universities have put up with this in exchange for foreign funds for decades. They are only recently being confronted by the costs of this indulgence. For example, the former chairman of Harvard University’s Chemistry and Chemical Biology Department was convicted by a federal jury for lying to federal authorities about his affiliation with the People’s Republic of China’s Thousand Talents Program and the Wuhan University of Technology (WUT) in Wuhan, China, as well as failing to report income he received from WUT.

    * * *

    According to Greg Levesque, co-founder of Strider and the lead author of the report, China’s talent transfer “poses a direct threat to U.S. national security,” adding “China is playing a game that we are not prepared for, and we need to really begin to mobilize.”

    Current and former US intelligence officials tell NBC that the Strider report shows how the Chinese government has been acquiring insights into US technology in order to strengthen their military – and in a way which poses a ‘significant threat to national security.’

    In 2020, FBI Director Christopher Wray said that “Through talent recruitment programs like the Thousand Talents, China pays scientists at American universities to secretly bring our knowledge and innovation back to China — including valuable, federally funded research,” adding “To put it bluntly, this means American taxpayers are effectively footing the bill for China’s own technological development.”

    Read the rest of the report here

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 19:20

  • South Korean Leader's Hot Mic "F**kers" Moment After Biden Handshake Goes Viral
    South Korean Leader’s Hot Mic “F**kers” Moment After Biden Handshake Goes Viral

    South Korea’s President Yoon Suk-yeol was caught in an embarrassing hot mic moment on the sidelines of the UN General Assembly meeting in New York this week. The incident happened immediately after a meeting with President Joe Biden at a conference for the Global Fund on Wednesday. He was heard referring to US lawmakers collectively as “f**kers” in Korean, and suggested that Biden is being humiliated:

    “How could Biden not lose damn face if these f**kers do not pass it in Congress?” he said. Prior to his insulting remarks, Biden pledged $6 billion to fight HIV and tuberculosis. The aid would need the approval of Congress. “F**kers,” was the top trending topic on South Korean Twitter this Thursday.

    Global Fund’s Seventh Replenishment Conference in New York City on September 21, via AFP

    According to CNN, “The YouTube clip – which has not yet been taken down – has been viewed more than four million times since it was uploaded and drawn tens of thousands of comments.”

    The report notes further that President Yoon has been facing an avalanche of criticism, also related to his traveling to the UK for Queen Elizabeth’s funeral: “While in London, Yoon’s opponents accused him of disrespect because he missed the chance to view the queen’s coffin lying in state – which he blamed on heavy traffic.”

    The hot mic moment included the words uttered in Korean, and was published by a South Korean broadcaster, where the clip went viral (captured at the end of the below clip):

    Yoon has only been in office since May, and his viral gaffe comes amid increased US-South Korea military ties. He’s been cold toward the idea of seeking diplomacy with Pyongyang, as the North ramps up its weapons testing, even teasing the potential for an upcoming nuclear test.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 18:55

  • "No Longer Employed": Administrator At $60K Per Year NYC School Out After Project Veritas Exposé
    “No Longer Employed”: Administrator At $60K Per Year NYC School Out After Project Veritas Exposé

    Authored by Mimi Nguyen Ly via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Jennifer ‘Ginn’ Norris, then-director of student activities at Trinity School in New York City, speaks with an undercover journalist of Project Veritas in a video dated June 12, 2022. (Screenshot via The Epoch Times)

    An administrator at a private $60,000-a-year New York City school located in the city’s Upper West Side is “no longer employed” just under a month after Project Veritas published a video of her admitting to “promoting an agenda” in the classroom.

    In a letter to parents on Sept. 21, Trinity School announced that Jennifer “Ginn” Norris is “no longer employed” there.

    It is unclear whether her departure was voluntary or if she was fired.

    Undercover news organization Project Veritas had on Sept. 1 published footage of Norris talking about how she and other teachers were working together to promote political agendas and left-wing ideology in the classroom.

    At the time, Norris was Trinity School’s director of student activities.

    There’s always groups of teachers who want to do these [activist] things but the administration just wouldn’t let us,” Norris is seen in a video dated June 12, 2022 telling an undercover journalist. “So, we’ve been just sneaking things in [through] the cracks.”

    She was also captured on video complaining about “white boys” who don’t align with her worldview.

    “Unfortunately, it’s the white boys who feel very entitled to express their opposite opinions and just push back. There’s a huge contingent of them that are just horrible,” she told the undercover journalist.

    We need to find some, like, Dexter, sort of like a vigilante, taking people out. You know the show ‘Dexter?’ … We just need some vigilante Dexters. Like, ‘Here’s your community of targets,’” she also said.

    Norris had been placed on paid leave on Sept. 2 following publication of the Project Veritas video.

    John Allman, the head of Trinity School, and David Perez, the president of the Board of Trustees, told parents in the Sept. 21 letter that the school has “retained independent counsel to investigate the matter” and that the probe into comments made by Norris is underway.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 18:30

  • US Eases Iran Tech Sanctions To Make Way For Musk's Starlink Amid Protests
    US Eases Iran Tech Sanctions To Make Way For Musk’s Starlink Amid Protests

    It’s not often these days that the US administration announces it is easing sanctions on Iran, but that’s what the US Treasury Department unveiled on Friday.

    It appears a strategy for encouraging protests by freeing up communications and social media platforms. The anti-government protests have now been raging for a full week: “The Treasury Department announced exceptions to Iranian sanctions Friday to allow companies to provide more online services in the country after Iran’s government cut internet access for most of the country amid protests,” The Hill reports.

    Protests in Tehran this week: WANA (West Asia News Agency) via Reuters

    “With these changes, we are helping the Iranian people be better equipped to counter the government’s efforts to surveil and censor them,” Deputy Secretary of the Treasury Wally Adeyemo explained of the new measure.

    Specifically the partial sanctions rollback applies to US and international tech companies which are in a position to help the Iranian population access outside secure platforms and services, in the hopes of the freer flows of information, especially on social media platforms. According to the new US Treasury text

    As courageous Iranians take to the streets to protest the death of Mahsa Amini, the United States is redoubling its support for the free flow of information to the Iranian people,” said Deputy Secretary of the Treasury Wally Adeyemo. “

    “Today, Treasury is announcing the expansion of Iran General License D-2, which will expand the range of internet services available to Iranians. With these changes, we are helping the Iranian people be better equipped to counter the government’s efforts to surveil and censor them. In the coming weeks, OFAC will continue issuing guidance to support the Administration’s commitment to promoting the free flow of information, which the Iranian regime has consistently denied to its people.”

    The Islamic Republic reportedly blocked Instagram and other popular sites this week as part of a broadening crackdown on anti-hijab protests in the wake of the death of 22-year old Mahsa Amini.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The young woman from Iranian Kurdistan reportedly died due to being beaten by police for “unsuitable attire” – or not conforming to Islamic Republic standards of a hijab. She was said to have fallen into a coma after being beaten in police custody. Social media videos have shown protests in various cities spiraling into increased violence, with Western pundits promoting this as a full-on anti-regime “revolution”.

    US Treasury action appears to have been hastened after Elon Musk urged a lessening of anti-Iran tech restrictions particularly for Starlink shortly after the protests broke out. Musk said days ago he would pursue an exemption to US sanctions on Iran to supply Starlink internet access to the highly sanctioned Mideast country:

    “Internet access is an important tool for protesters and activists in Iran, which blocks many services like YouTube and many foreign media outlets in an effort to impose what the country describes as a halal internet, or one that conforms to its interpretation of Islamic law,” wrote WSJ. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The billionaire businessmen suggested he was looking to bring Starlink satellite internet service to Iran at a moment internet speeds were being throttled by Iranian authorities across most parts of the nation as they sought to quell protests:

    Earlier this week, Musk announced on the social media service: “Starlink is now active on all continents, including Antarctica.” After reading Musk’s tweet, Iranian-born science reporter Erfan Kasraie then posted his own message to the SpaceX chief.

    “I’m sure you won’t answer it Mr Musk, but is it technically possible to provide Starlink to Iranian people?” Kasraie asked. “It could be a game changer for the future.”

    Musk did answer Kasraie. He wrote, “Starlink will ask for an exemption to Iranian sanctions in this regard.” The sanctions he commented about are linked to Iran’s nuclear activities. The restrictions bar a wide range of U.S. companies from doing business with Iran.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Bipartisan lawmakers have reportedly been pressuring Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen to act following Musk’s statements.

    Tehran has denied the opposition narrative surrounding Amini’s death, describing that she had a heart attack and fell and hit her head. On Thursday the US Treasury sanctioned Iran’s hardline morality police as more and more women take off their headscarves in public displays of defiance.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Iranian state TV has confirmed that at least 26 have been killed after a week of clashes with police, but some external rights monitor say it’s actually more. What is clear from emerging and widely circulating videos is that the demonstrations are growing fiercer, triggering a more brutal police and security force response. The Iranian government says that some among the casualties are from security services.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 18:05

  • Newsom Signs Legislation To Protect Workers Who Use Cannabis Outside Work
    Newsom Signs Legislation To Protect Workers Who Use Cannabis Outside Work

    Authored by Jill McLaughlin via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    California Governor Gavin Newsom speaks at California State University Long Beach on March 3, 2021. (John Fredricks/The Epoch Times)

    California employers will soon be prohibited from firing—or not hiring—workers over their use of cannabis outside of their workplace and work hours.

    Gov. Gavin Newsom put his signature on Assembly Bill 2188 Sept. 18 to prevent employers from discriminating against a person in hiring, termination, or terms and conditions of employment based on a drug screening test finding the presence of non-psychoactive cannabis metabolites in their system or for the person’s off-duty use.

    Recreational use of cannabis is legal in the state.

    AB 2188 was part of a series of legislation signed by the governor to “strengthen California’s cannabis laws, expand the legal cannabis market and redress the harms of cannabis prohibition,” according to a Sept. 18 statement by Newsom’s office.

    “For too many Californians, the promise of cannabis legalization remains out of reach,” Newsom said. “These measures build on the important strides our state has made toward this goal, but much work remains to build an equitable, safe and sustainable legal cannabis industry. I look forward to partnering with the Legislature and policymakers to fully realize cannabis legalization in communities across California.”

    The California state capital building in Sacramento on April 18, 2022. (John Fredricks/The Epoch Times)

    The legislation’s author, Assemblyman Bill Quirk (D-Hayward), said the measure was “long overdue.”

    Thank you to the advocates and sponsors for your continued support,” Quirk wrote on Twitter after the signing. “I applaud the Governor for his commitment to redress the harms of cannabis prohibition.”

    The law goes into effect Jan. 1, 2024, and exempts those working in building and construction, and job positions that require federal background clearances.

    The Drug Policy Alliance, a pro-legal marijuana organization co-founded by George Soros, advocated for the bill’s passage.

    CA employees deserved the same rights as workers in other states like [New York and Nevada] that already passed laws protecting against workplace punishment for legal marijuana use off-the-clock,” the alliance wrote on Twitter.

    California NORML, a non-profit group dedicated to protecting and expanding cannabis consumers’ rights, sponsored the bill. The group told legislators workers have a right to engage in legal activity while away from the job, yet workers and applicants are losing job opportunities or being fired because they test positive for marijuana use.

    Customers shop for marijuana products at Catalyst Cannabis Dispensary in Santa Ana, Calif., on Feb. 18, 2021. (John Fredricks/The Epoch Times)

    The California Cannabis Industry Association told The Epoch Times in a previous interview the bill still allows employers to use tests to determine “whether someone is under the influence of cannabis while actively on the job.”

    The bill does not prevent employers from drug-testing employees but rather states that a test for non-psychoactive cannabis metabolites linger in the body for up to months after someone uses cannabis, is not grounds for hiring or termination,” the association’s Executive Director Lindsay Robinson said.

    The California Chamber of Commerce opposed the bill, saying it will still risk workplace safety and “create a protected status for marijuana use in [Fair Employment and Housing Act].”

    “California employers may face liability when they take legitimate disciplinary measures against their employees,” the California Chamber of Commerce said, according to a bill analysis. “If California policymakers wish to force a shift towards newer testing technologies—that is one thing. But we do not believe marijuana should be elevated to a legally protected status above comparable drugs (like alcohol).”

    A file photo of a cannabis sample in Santa Ana, Calif., on Feb. 18, 2021. (John Fredricks/The Epoch Times)

    The governor also signed several other cannabis-related bills, including the following:

    • SB 1186 preempts local bans on medicinal cannabis delivery, expanding patients’ access to legal, regulated cannabis products.
    • AB 1706 allows Californians with old cannabis-related convictions to have them sealed.
    • SB 1326 creates a process for California to enter into agreements with other states to allow cannabis transactions with entities outside California.
    • AB 1885 allows veterinarians to recommend cannabis for pets.
    • AB 2210 allows venues hosting temporary events to obtain both liquor and cannabis licenses as long as the sale and consumption of marijuana and alcoholic beverages occur separately, according to Quirk, who is also the author of this legislation.
    • AB 1186, dubbed the Medicinal Cannabis Patients’ Right of Access Act, prohibits a local jurisdiction from restricting the retail sale of medicinal cannabis by delivery to patients or their primary caregivers by licensed medicinal cannabis businesses.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 17:40

  • Crash
    Crash

    No cute videos today, just one photo summarizes the absolute carnage today, this week, this month and this year.

    A week that started off with a huge chip on its shoulder after last week’s dramatic post-CPI plunge, and which was the worst since June, only got worse, as stocks tumbled a jarring 5% this week, which together with last week’s 4.7% means that in just the past two weeks the S&P has lost 10% of its value (it could have been worse if spoos had not bounced modestly off their June, and YTD, lows of 3,660).

    And while the catalyst for the plunge is clear – and as highlighted on the chart below it was all about the unexpectedly hawkish FOMC meeting on Wednesday where the 2024 dot came in at 4.6%, hotter than even the biggest hawks had expected – the result was a non-stop liquidation scramble as Powell finally made it clear that he will keep hiking well into the recession and beyond.

    To be sure, we’ve had powerful selloffs before in 2022, but today was the first time since June that the VIX finally spiked above 30. For it to achieve that when everyone in the institutional community is super-hedged with puts, is certainly remarkable.

    Today’s selloff was so broad-based and uniform that not only was everything deep red…

    … but TICK barely made it above 0.

    While everything was red, not every sector was pummeled equally – energy stuck out like a sore thumb….

    … and the XLE plunged by almost 7%, its second biggest drop since May 9, when oil unexpectedly crashed in what appeared like a government-mandated intervention.

    Today’s plunge in energy was driven not only by the now-certainty of a looming recession – even as most energy stocks now trade as if oil was priced in the low $50 – but also by the sudden collapse in the price of oil, which saw WTI tumble below $80 for the first time since January, and on pace to lose all of 2022’s gains!

    The plunge in oil was also a direct result of the now laughably exponential surge in the US dollar, where one look at the Bloomberg dollar index – where the USD is hitting new record highs every single day – shows all one needs to know.

    It wasn’t just the Fed’s tightening plans that were behind the relentless surge in the dollar, which alone were enough to push the market’s pricing of the May Fed Funds rate to a whopping 4.7%…

    … there was another key catalyst: today’s “mini budget” unveiled by the Liz Truss cabinet in the UK, which proposed the biggest tax cuts since the 1970s funded mostly with new debt sales, sent both gilts and the cable crashing…

    … with the former tumbling to 1.0872, or levels not seen since February 1985. And with whispers of parity getting louder, it’s only a matter of time before we test new record lows for the british currency.

    While it was sterling that stole the currency spotlight today, yesterday it was the yen’s turn, as the Japanese currency plunged after the BOJ affirmed it will keep buying billions in bonds for years to protect YCC, only to then turn around and intervene in the FX market for the first time since 1998, selling an unknown amount of dollars in the tens of billions for an intervention that has barely achieved anything at all!

    Of course, the FX fireworks also meant lots of excitement in the US bond market, where the 10Y yield today briefly spiked to the highest level since April 2010, when it touched a high of 3.8248% before retracing most of the move.

    And as the 10Y yield keeps rising, so does the real 10Y, which just hit 1.32%, well above the 2018 highs when the Fed was forced to pivot. And since the fwd P/E tracks the real rate, this suggests there is much more downside for stocks as the following chart shows.

    Meanwhile, the 2Y remains sticky, and is now trading around 4.20%, which means that the 2s10s is now inverted some -52bps…

    … and just shy of a new record inversion, one which screams not recession but full-blown depression.

    And speaking of the coming depression, remember, the Fed won’t stop until it breaks something…

    … and after this week there are so many more things that “something” can be: Japan, the UK (which may be locked out of the market sooner even than Italy), as well as things closer to home such as Junk bonds or even Investment Grade securities: don’t look now, but the LQD just took out its March 2020 covid crash lows when the Fed stepped in to bail out corporate debt by buying it directly…

    … or maybe it will be a certain bank again that catalyzes the next crash…

    … or just maybe the next mega-crash will be the 640 trillion yuan panda in the room.

    And until we wait, well… there’s always Joe Biden’s “greatest recovery ever”…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 17:11

  • Watch: Sparks Fly From United Flight After Takeoff At Newark Airport
    Watch: Sparks Fly From United Flight After Takeoff At Newark Airport

    The Federal Aviation Administration has launched an investigation into a mechanical issue that resulted in sparks shooting out from the bottom of a United Airlines flight on Wednesday night from Newark Liberty International Airport. 

    United Airlines Flight 149 departed from Newark around 2300 ET Wednesday, headed to Sao Paulo–Guarulhos International Airport with 256 passengers on board. Moments after takeoff, the Boeing 777-200ER suffered a “mechanical issue,” United said in a statement indicating that an initial maintenance inspection pointed to a failed hydraulic pump. 

    A photographer on the ground captured video of sparks shooting out the back of the Boeing 777. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Here’s what appears to be some of the metal debris that fell from the passenger jet. 

    United said Flight 149 “remained in the air to burn fuel and then landed safely.” 

    Flightaware data shows the plane went hundreds of miles off the coast of New York City to burn fuel before returning to Newark. 

    FAA released this statement about the incident:

    “United Airlines Flight 149, a Boeing 777-200, landed safely at Newark Liberty International Airport shortly before 1 a.m. local time today after the crew reported an emergency. The flight departed Newark and was headed to So Paulo, Brazil before it returned. The FAA will investigate.”

    The photographer who caught the incident on video told ABC7 New York: “Never I would’ve imaged that I would witness one in real life… I was pretty shocked.” 

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 16:50

  • Trump Special Master Reveals New Plan After Appeals Court Ruling
    Trump Special Master Reveals New Plan After Appeals Court Ruling

    Authored by Zachary Stieber via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    U.S. District Judge Raymond Dearie presides over his first public hearing since his appointment as special master to review documents seized last month by the FBI from former President Donald Trump’s Florida home, at a courtroom in New York on Sept. 20, 2022. (Jane Rosenberg/Reuters)

    The judge designated as the special master in former President Donald Trump’s records case has proposed that a government official swear that the government properly listed items taken from Trump’s home in August.

    U.S. District Judge Raymond Dearie, the special master, also left open the possibility of recommending the government be ordered to return some of the seized materials.

    Dearie outlined the plan on Sept. 22, following an order that blocks him and Trump’s lawyers from accessing materials with classified markings that were taken from Trump’s home in Palm Beach, Florida.

    Dearie, a George W. Bush appointee, was chosen by Trump attorneys and Department of Justice (DOJ) lawyers and put into place by U.S. District Judge Aileen Cannon, a Trump appointee. Trump and the DOJ can object to components of the plan; Cannon would adjudicate any objections.

    Declaration

    Dearie’s case management plan starts with having a government official “with sufficient knowledge of the matter” submitting a declaration or affidavit regarding an inventory list DOJ officials have released.

    The official would attest that the list “represents the full and accurate extent of the property seized from” from Mar-a-Lago, Trump’s Florida residence.

    If the plan is put into place, Trump would then respond with a list of any items listed by the government that were not seized from Mar-a-Lago.

    Trump would also detail items that were seized but not included in the inventory.

    “This submission shall be Plaintiff’s final opportunity to raise any factual dispute as to the completeness and accuracy of the Detailed Property Inventory,” Dearie said.

    The government would then be allowed to respond to Trump.

    Seized Materials

    Based on an appeals court order, Cannon earlier Tuesday blocked Dearie and Trump lawyers from viewing the roughly 100 materials that were marked classified and seized from Mar-a-Lago.

    Dearie and the Trump attorneys are still poised to review each page of non-classified materials taken from the resort.

    Dearie wants the government to list each document and say whether the government filter team identified the document as potentially covered by a form of privilege, such as attorney-client privilege. Trump’s team has already received an initial set of potentially privileged documents, according to Dearie. After Trump’s team reviews the materials, they would specify any privilege claims, including any claims for documents that were not deemed potentially privileged by the government. Dearie will resolve any disputes on privilege.

    The final log of privilege designations is due to Dearie on or before Oct. 21.

    Delay on Ruling

    The special master will not decide whether Trump shall receive any of the seized materials back until after Cannon rules on any objections to his plan.

    Trump has already motioned for the return of property.

    Trump must submit a brief in support of the motion no less than seven days after Cannon finishes ruling on the case management plan and any objections. The government will then respond, and Trump can respond to the government’s response.

    Either party can request an oral argument.

    Dearie said that he will “promptly issue a report and recommendation after briefing and oral argument has been completed.” Cannon has the final say on the motion.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 16:25

  • No Charges: Gaetz Sex-Trafficking Case Crumbles As Prosecutors Doubt Witness Credibility
    No Charges: Gaetz Sex-Trafficking Case Crumbles As Prosecutors Doubt Witness Credibility

    Career Justice Department prosecutors have recommended against charging Rep. Matt Gaetz (R-FL) in connection with a long-running sex-trafficking investigation.

    According to the Washington Post, prosecutors told DOJ superiors that a conviction would be unlikely – in part because of credibility issues with the two central witnesses, according to people familiar with the matter.

    Senior department officials have not made a final decision on whether to charge Gaetz, but it is rare for such advice to be rejected, these people told The Washington Post, speaking on the condition of anonymity to discuss the deliberations. They added that it is always possible additional evidence emerges that could alter prosecutors’ understanding of the case. -WaPo

    As such, it’s unlikely that Gaetz will face charges in an investigation which began in late 2020 over allegations of involvement with a 17-year-old girl.

    DOJ investigators were probing whether Gaetz paid to have sex with a then-17-year-old in violation of federal sex-trafficking laws.

    The 40-year-old lawmaker has repeatedly denied wrongdoing, and said that the only time he’s had sex with a 17-year-old is when he was also 17.

    Earlier this year, Gaetz’s ex-girlfriend testified to a federal grand jury in Orlando, who went on a 2018 trip to the Bahamas along with several other women – including the accuser (who was 18 or older by that time), and Gaetz. According to people familiar with the case, the accuser is one of two people whose testimony has issues that veteran prosecutors don’t think would fly with a jury.

    The other witness is a former friend of Gaetz’s, former Seminole County tax collector Joel Greenberg, who pleaded guilty last year to sex trafficking a minor, along with several other crimes.

    Greenberg was first charged in 2020 with fabricating allegations and evidence to smear a political opponent, but prosecutors continued to investigate and added additional charges to his case. He ultimately agreed to plead guilty to six criminal charges, including sex trafficking of a child, aggravated identity theft and wire fraud.

    In exchange for his guilty plea, prosecutors agreed to dismiss the other 27 counts Greenberg faced and recommend a term within federal sentencing guidelines, which are often far less than the statutory maximum penalties. They also agreed to recommend other possible sentencing breaks. -WaPo

    According to Greenberg’s plea agreement, prosecutors might ask a judge to lower his minimum required penalty in exchange for “substantial assistance” in building other cases. He is set to be sentenced later this year. 

    After investigating Greenberg, prosecutors claim to have found evidence potentially implicating Gaetz in sex trafficking, and have since been probing whether Greenberg paid women to have sex with Gaetz – as well as whether the two shared sexual partners, including the 17-year-old girl in question.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 15:45

  • Hurricane Fiona Barrels Toward Canada; New Caribbean Storm Threatens Southeast US
    Hurricane Fiona Barrels Toward Canada; New Caribbean Storm Threatens Southeast US

    After battering Puerto Rico earlier this week with torrential rain and strong winds, Hurricane Fiona is now a Category 3 storm barreling towards northeastern Canada. There’s also a new tropical storm developing in the Caribbean and forecasted to become a threat to Southeast US next week. 

    As of Friday morning, Fiona’s center was passing northwest of Bermuda with maximum sustained winds of 125 mph, the National Hurricane Center said. The storm was downgraded from a Category 4 hurricane. 

    Now Fiona sets sights on northeastern Canada, where hurricane warnings are in effect for Nova Scotia, Prince Edward Island, the Magdalen Islands, and the coast of Newfoundland. 

    NHC forecasts the storm to be a “large and powerful post-tropical cyclone with hurricane-force winds,” as it’s expected to make landfall across parts of Nova Scotia on Saturday. 

    “This storm is shaping up to be a severe event for Atlantic Canada and eastern Quebec,” the Canadian Hurricane Centre said on its website. 

    Hurricanes making landfall in Canada are relatively rare because colder waters tend to weaken the storms. 

    “This could be the storm of a lifetime for some people,” AccuWeather Chief Meteorologist Jonathan Porter said.

    There are several fuel refineries in the storm’s path. 

    GasBuddy chief petroleum analyst Patrick De Haan pointed out that a major refinery in New Brunswick is in the storm’s path. However, forecast models show that the storm will make landfall east of the facility. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, Tropical Depression Nine formed in the Caribbean Sea and could become a hurricane threat for the western Caribbean and Southeast US by mid-next week. 

    Tropics are lighting up with activity as hurricane season peaked earlier this month. 

    Fiona and Tropical Depression Nine are two storms to monitor into the weekend. 

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 15:45

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 23rd September 2022

  • Escobar: The Real US Agenda In Africa Is Hegemony
    Escobar: The Real US Agenda In Africa Is Hegemony

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Cradle,

    Forget development. Washington’s primary interest in Africa today is keeping the Chinese and Russians out…

    In a rational environment, the 77th session of the UN General Assembly (UNGA) would discuss alleviating the trials and tribulations of the Global South, especially Africa.

    That won’t be the case. Like a deer caught in the geopolitical headlights, UN Secretary-General Antonio Guterres issued platitudes about a gloomy “winter of global discontent,” even as the proverbial imperial doomsayers criticized the UN’s “crisis of faith” and blasted the “unprovoked war” started by Russia.

    Of course the slow-motion genocide of Donbass russophone residents for eight years would never be recognized as a provocation.

    Guterres spoke of Afghanistan, “where the economy is in ruins and human rights are being trampled” – but he did not dare to offer context. In Libya, “divisions continue to jeopardize the country” – once again, no context. Not to mention Iraq, where “ongoing tensions threaten ongoing stability.”

    Africa has 54 nations as UN members. Any truly representative UNGA meeting should place Africa’s problems at the forefront. Once again, that’s not the case. So it is left to African leaders to offer that much-needed context outside of the UN building in New York.

    As the only African member of the G20, South African President Cyril Ramaphosa recently urged the US not to “punish” the whole continent by forcing nations to demonize or sanction Russia. Washington’s introduction of legislation dubbed the Countering Malign Russian Activities in Africa Act, he says, “will harm Africa and marginalize the continent.”

    South Africa is a BRICS member – a concept that is anathema in the Beltway – and embraces a policy of non-alignment among world powers. An emerging 21st century version of the 1960s Non-Aligned Movement (NAM) is strengthening across the Global South – and especially Africa – much to the revulsion of the US and its minions.

    Back at the UNGA, Guterres invoked the global fertilizer crisis – again, with no context. Russian diplomacy has repeatedly stressed that Moscow is ready to export 30 million tons of grain and over 20 million tons of fertilizer by the end of 2022. What is left unsaid in the west, is that only the importation of fertilizers to the EU is “allowed,” while transit to Africa is not.

    Guterres said he was trying to persuade EU leaders to lift sanctions on Russian fertilizer exports, which directly affect cargo payments and shipping insurance. Russia’s Uralchem, for instance, even offered to supply fertilizers to Africa for free.

    Yet from the point of view of the US and its EU vassals, the only thing that matters is to counter Russia and China in Africa. Senegal’s President Macky Sall has remarked how this policy is leaving “a bitter taste.”

    ‘We forbid you to build your pipeline’

    It gets worse. The largely ineffectual EU Parliament now wants to stop the construction of the 1,445 km-long East African Crude Oil Pipeline (EACOP) from Uganda to Tanzania, invoking hazy human rights violations, environmental threats, and “advising” member countries to simply drop out of the project.

    Uganda is counting on more than 6 billion barrels of oil to sustain an employment boom and finally move the nation to middle-income status. It was up to Ugandan Parliament Deputy Speaker Thomas Tayebwa to offer much-needed context:

    It is imprudent to say that Uganda’s oil projects will exacerbate climate change, yet it is a fact that the EU block with only 10 percent of the world’s population is responsible for 25 percent of global emissions, and Africa with 20 percent of the world’s population is responsible for 3 percent of emissions. The EU and other western countries are historically responsible for climate change. Who then should stop or slow down the development of natural resources? Certainly not Africa or Uganda.”

    The EU Parliament, moreover, is a staunch puppet of the biofuel lobby. It has refused to amend a law that would have stopped the use of food crops for fuel production, actually contributing to what the UN Food Program has described as “a global emergency of unprecedented magnitude.” No less than 350 million people are on the brink of starvation across Africa.

    Instead, the G7’s notion of “helping” Africa is crystallized in the US-led Build Back Better World (B3W) – Washington’s anaemic attempt to counter Beijing’s ambitious Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) – which focuses on “climate, health and health security, digital technology, and gender equity and equality,” according to the White House. Practical issues of infrastructure and sustainable development, which are at the heart of China’s plan, are simply ignored by the B3W.

    Initially, a few “promising” projects were identified by a traveling US delegation in Senegal and Ghana. Senegalese diplomatic sources have since confirmed that these projects have nothing whatsoever to do with building infrastructure.

    B3W, predictably, fizzled out. After all, the US-led project was little more than a public relations gimmick to undermine the Chinese, with negligible effect on narrowing the $40-plus trillion worth of infrastructure needed to be built across the Global South by 2035.

    Have YALI, will travel

    Imperial initiatives in Africa – apart from the US military’s Africa Command (AFRICOM), which amounts to raw militarization of the continent – brings us to the curious case of YALI (Young African Leaders Initiative), widely touted in the Washington-New York axis as “the most innovative” policy of the Obama years.

    Launched in 2010, YALI was framed as “empowering the new generation of Africa leadership” – a euphemism for educating (or brainwashing) them the American way. The mechanism is simple: investing in and bringing hundreds of young African potential leaders to US universities for a short, six-week “training” on “business, civil leadership, entrepreneurship, and public management.” Then, four days in Washington to meet “leaders in the administration,” and a photo op with Obama.

    The project was coordinated by US embassies in Africa, and targeted young men and women from sub-Saharan Africa’s 49 nations – including those under US sanctions, like Sudan, Eritrea, and Zimbabwe – proficient in English, with a “commitment” to return to Africa. Roughly 80 percent during the initial years had never been to the US, and more than 50 percent grew up outside of big cities.

    Then, in a speech in 2013 in South Africa, Obama announced the establishment of the Washington Fellowship, later renamed the Mandela-Washington Fellowship (MWF).

    That’s still ongoing. In 2022, MWF should be granted to 700 “outstanding young leaders from sub-Saharan Africa,” who follow “Leadership Institutes” at nearly 40 US universities, before their short stint in Washington. After which, they are ready for “long-term engagement between the United States and Africa.”

    And all that for literally peanuts, as MWF was enthusiastically billed by the Democrat establishment as cost-efficient: $24,000 per fellow, paid by participant US universities as well as Coca-Cola, IBM, MasterCard Foundation, Microsoft, Intel, McKinsey, GE, and Procter & Gamble.

    And that didn’t stop with MWF. USAID went a step further, and invested over $38 million – plus $10 million from the MasterCard Foundation – to set up four Regional Leadership Centers (RLCs) in South Africa, Kenya, Ghana, and Senegal. These were training, long distance and in-class, at least 3,500 ‘future leaders’ a year.

    It’s no wonder the Brookings Institution was drooling over so much “cost-efficiency” when it comes to investing “in Africa’s future” and for the US to “stay competitive” in Africa. YALI certainly looks prettier than AFRICOM.

    A few success stories though don’t seem to rival the steady stream of African footballers making a splash in Europe – and then reinvesting most of their profits back home. The Trump years did see a reduction of YALI’s funding – from $19 million in 2017 to roughly $5 million.

    So many leaders to ‘train’

    Predictably, the Joe Biden White House YALI-ed all over again with a vengeance. Take this US press attache in Nigeria neatly outlining the current emphasis on “media and information literacy,” badly needed to tackle the “spreading of disinformation” including “in the months leading up to the national presidential election.”

    So the US, under YALI, “trained 1,000 young Nigerians to recognize the signs of online and media misinformation and disinformation.” And now the follow-up is “Train the Trainer” workshops, “teaching 40 journalists, content creators, and activists (half of whom will be women) from Yobe, Borno, Adamawa, Zamfara, and Katsina how to identify, investigate, and report misinformation.” Facebook, being ordered by the FBI to censor “inconvenient,” potentially election-altering facts, is not part of the curriculum.

    YALI is the soft, Instagrammed face of AFRICOM. The US has participated in the overthrow of several African governments over the past two decades, with troops trained under secrecy-obsessed AFRICOM. There has been no serious Pentagon audit on the weaponizing of AFRICOM’s local “partners.” For all we know – as in Syria and Libya – the US military could be arming even more terrorists.

    And predictably, it’s all bipartisan. Rabid neo-con and former Trump national security adviser John Bolton, in December 2018, at the Heritage Foundation, made it crystal clear: the US in Africa has nothing to do with supporting democracy and sustainable development. It’s all about countering Russia and China.

    When it learned that Beijing was considering building a naval base in oil-rich Equatorial Guinea, the Biden White House sent power envoys to the capital Malabo to convince the government to cease and desist. To no avail.

    In contrast, Russian Foreign Minister Sergei Lavrov was received like a superstar in his recent extensive tour of Africa, where it’s widely perceived that global food prices and the fertilizer drama are a direct consequence of western sanctions on Russia. Uganda leader Yoweri Museveni went straight to the point when he said, “How can we be against somebody who has never harmed us?”

    On 13-15 December, the White House plans a major US-Africa Leaders Summit in Washington to discuss mostly food security and climate change – alongside the perennial lectures on democracy and human rights. Most leaders won’t be exactly impressed with this new showing of “the United States’ enduring commitment to Africa.” Well, there’s always YALI. So many young leaders to indoctrinate, so little time.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 09/23/2022 – 02:00

  • Masters Of Deceit: The Government's Propaganda Of Fear, Mind Control, & Brain Warfare
    Masters Of Deceit: The Government’s Propaganda Of Fear, Mind Control, & Brain Warfare

    Authored by John and Nisha Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “It is the function of mass agitation to exploit all the grievances, hopes, aspirations, prejudices, fears, and ideals of all the special groups that make up our society, social, religious, economic, racial, political. Stir them up. Set one against the other. Divide and conquer. That’s the way to soften up a democracy.

    – J. Edgar Hoover, Masters of Deceit

    The U.S. government has become a master of deceit.

    It’s all documented, too.

    This is a government that lies, cheats, steals, spies, kills, maims, enslaves, breaks the laws, overreaches its authority, and abuses its power at almost every turn; treats its citizens like faceless statistics and economic units to be bought, sold, bartered, traded, and tracked; and wages wars for profit, jails its own people for profit, and has no qualms about spreading its reign of terror abroad.

    Worse, this is a government that has become almost indistinguishable from the evil it claims to be fighting, whether that evil takes the form of terrorism, torture, drug traffickingsex trafficking, murder, violence, theft, pornography, scientific experimentations or some other diabolical means of inflicting pain, suffering and servitude on humanity.

    With every passing day, it becomes painfully clear that this is not a government that can be trusted with your life, your loved ones, your livelihood or your freedoms.

    Just recently, for example, the Pentagon was compelled to order a sweeping review of clandestine U.S. psychological warfare operations (psy ops) conducted through social media platforms. The investigation comes in response to reports suggesting that the U.S. military has been creating bogus personas with AI-generated profile pictures and fictitious media sites on Facebook, Twitter and Instagram in order to manipulate social media users.

    Psychological warfare, as the U.S. Army’s 4th Psychological Operations Group explained in a recruiting video released earlier this year, enables the government to pull the strings, turn everything they touch into a weapon, be everywhere, deceive, persuade, change, influence, and inspire.

    Of the many weapons in the government’s vast arsenal, psychological warfare (or psy ops) can take many forms: mind control experiments, behavioral nudging, propaganda.

    In the 1950s, MK-ULTRA, the mind control program developed under CIA director Allen Dulles as part of his brain warfare Cold War campaigns, subjected hundreds of unsuspecting American civilians and military personnel to doses of LSD, some having the hallucinogenic drug slipped into their drinks at the beach, in city bars, at restaurants. For Operation Midnight Climax, the CIA hired prostitutes to lure men into a bugged room, where they would be dosed with LSD and observed having sex

    As Brianna Nofil explains, “MK-Ultra’s ‘mind control’ experiments generally centered around behavior modification via electro-shock therapy, hypnosis, polygraphs, radiation, and a variety of drugs, toxins, and chemicals.”

    The CIA spent nearly $20 million on its MKULTRA program, reportedly as a means of programming people to carry out assassinations and, to a lesser degree, inducing anxieties and erasing memories, before it was supposedly shut down.

    As one study reported, detainees held in CIA safe-houses abroad “were literally interrogated to death in experimental methods combining drugs, hypnosis and torture, to attempt to master brainwashing techniques and memory erasing.”

    Similarly, the top-secret Montauk Project, the inspiration for the hit Netflix series Stranger Things, allegedly was working to develop mind-control techniques that would then be tested out on locals in a nearby village, triggering crime waves or causing teenagers to congregate.

    As journalist Lorraine Boissoneault concludes, “Despite MK-ULTRA violating ethical norms for human experiments, the legacy of brainwashing experiments continued to live on in U.S. policy. The same methods that had once been used to train American soldiers ended up being used to extract information from terrorists in Abu Ghraib, Iraq and Guantanamo Bay.”

    Fast forward to the present day, and it’s clear that the government—aided and abetted by technological advances and scientific experimentation—has updated its psy ops warfare for a new era. For instance, the government has been empowered to use its ever-expanding arsenal of weapons and technologies to influence behaviors en masse and control the populace.

    It’s a short hop, skip and a jump from a behavioral program that tries to influence how people respond to paperwork to a government program that tries to shape the public’s views about other, more consequential matters. Thus, increasingly, governments around the world—including in the United States—are relying on “nudge units” to steer citizens in the direction the powers-that-be want them to go, while preserving the appearance of free will.

    Back in 2014, for example, a Fusion Center in Washington State (a Dept. of Homeland Security-linked data collection clearinghouse that shares information between state, local and federal agencies) inadvertently released records on remote mind control tactics (the use of “psycho-electronic” weapons to control people from a distance or subject them to varying degrees of pain).

    Indeed, the COVID-19 pandemic could easily be considered psychological warfare disguised as a pandemic threat. As science writer David Robson explains: “Fears of contagion lead us to become more conformist and tribalistic… Daily reminders of disease may even sway our political affiliations… Various experiments have shown that we become more conformist and respectful of convention when we feel the threat of a disease… the evocative images of a pandemic led [participants in an experiment] to value conformity and obedience over eccentricity or rebellion.”

    This is how you persuade a populace to voluntarily march in lockstep with a police state and police themselves (and each other): by ratcheting up the fear-factor, meted out one carefully calibrated crisis at a time, and teaching them to distrust any who diverge from the norm.

    This is not a new experiment in mind control.

    Add the government’s inclination to monitor online activity and police so-called “disinformation,” and you have the makings of a restructuring of reality straight out of Orwell’s 1984, where the Ministry of Truth polices speech and ensures that facts conform to whatever version of reality the government propagandists embrace.

    This “policing of the mind” is exactly the danger author Jim Keith warned about when he predicted that “information and communication sources are gradually being linked together into a single computerized network, providing an opportunity for unheralded control of what will be broadcast, what will be said, and ultimately what will be thought.”

    We’ve already seen this play out on the state and federal level with hate crime legislation that cracks down on so-called “hateful” thoughts and expression, encourages self-censoring and reduces free debate on various subject matter. 

    The end goal of these mind-control campaigns—packaged in the guise of the greater good—is to see how far the American people will allow the government to go in re-shaping the country in the image of a totalitarian police state.

    The government’s fear-mongering is yet another key element in its mind-control programming.

    It’s a simple enough formula. National crises, global pandemics, reported terrorist attacks, and sporadic shootings leave us in a constant state of fear. The emotional panic that accompanies fear actually shuts down the prefrontal cortex or the rational thinking part of our brains. In other words, when we are consumed by fear, we stop thinking.

    A populace that stops thinking for themselves is a populace that is easily led, easily manipulated and easily controlled whether through propaganda, brainwashing, mind control, or just plain fear-mongering.

    Fear not only increases the power of government, but it also divides the people into factions, persuades them to see each other as the enemy and keeps them screaming at each other so that they drown out all other sounds. In this way, they will never reach consensus about anything and will be too distracted to notice the police state closing in on them until the final crushing curtain falls.

    This Machiavellian scheme has so ensnared the nation that few Americans even realize they are being brainwashed—manipulated—into adopting an “us” against “them” mindset. All the while, those in power—bought and paid for by lobbyists and corporations—move their costly agendas forward.

    This unseen mechanism of society that manipulates us through fear into compliance is what American theorist Edward L. Bernays referred to as “an invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country.”

    It was almost 100 years ago when Bernays wrote his seminal work Propaganda:

    “We are governed, our minds are molded, our tastes formed, our ideas suggested, largely by men we have never heard of… In almost every act of our daily lives, whether in the sphere of politics or business, in our social conduct or our ethical thinking, we are dominated by the relatively small number of persons…who understand the mental processes and social patterns of the masses. It is they who pull the wires which control the public mind.”

    As I point out in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People and in its fictional counterpart The Erik Blair Diaries, to this invisible government of rulers who operate behind the scenes—the architects of the Deep State—we are mere puppets on a string, to be brainwashed, manipulated and controlled.

    For years now, the powers-that-be—those politicians and bureaucrats who think like tyrants and act like petty dictators regardless of what party they belong to—have attempted to brainwash us into believing that we have no rights: to think for ourselves, make decisions about our health, protect our homes and families and businesses, act in our best interests, demand accountability and transparency from government, or generally operate as if we are in control of our own lives.

    Well, the government is wrong.

    We have every right, and you know why? Because, as the Declaration of Independence states, we are endowed by our Creator with certain inalienable rights—to life, liberty, property and the pursuit of happiness—that no government can take away from us.

    It’s time we started reminding the government that “we the people” are the ones in charge.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 23:40

  • Secretive B-21 Raider To Be Unveiled To Public In December
    Secretive B-21 Raider To Be Unveiled To Public In December

    Northrop Grumman Corporation and the US Air Force will unveil the highly-classified, next-generation stealth bomber, known as the B-21 Raider, as early as the first week of December. 

    USAF hasn’t solidified a final date but announced the unveiling event would take place at Northrop’s facilities in Palmdale, California. 

    “We are still working to nail down all the plans,” Air Force acquisition executive Andrew Hunter said during a discussion with reporters at the Air Force Association’s Air, Space, and Cyber conference, on Tuesday. 

    Northrop disclosed that it has six B-21s in “various stages of final assembly” at the Palmdale facility, with the first flight scheduled for 2023. 

    “The B-21 is the most advanced military aircraft ever built and is a product of pioneering innovation and technological excellence. 

    “The Raider showcases the dedication and skills of the thousands of people working every day to deliver this aircraft,” said Doug Young, sector vice president and general manager, Northrop Grumman Aeronautics Systems.

    December’s event will be the first time in 34 years Northrop has unveiled a stealth bomber. In 1988, Northrop gave the first public display of the B-2 bomber that flew the following year and was introduced into service in 1997. 

    “Northrop Grumman is proud of our partnership with the US Air Force as we deliver the B-21 Raider, a sixth-generation aircraft optimized for operations in highly contested environments,” said Tom Jones, corporate vice president and president, Northrop Grumman Aeronautics Systems.

    Northrop has been preparing to unveil the B-21 well before the war in Ukraine. China and Russia have also revealed renderings of stealth bombers, but the US could beat them to the skies. As far as hypersonic missiles, that’s a different story… 

    When the B-21s are ready for service, Whiteman Air Force Base in Missouri will be their new home. 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 23:20

  • Why Orwell Matters
    Why Orwell Matters

    Authored by Bruno Waterfield via Spiked-Online.com,

    Most people think that George Orwell was writing about, and against, totalitarianism – especially when they encounter him through the prism of his great dystopian novel, Nineteen Eighty-Four.

    This view of Orwell is not wrong, but it can miss something. For Orwell was concerned above all about the particular threat posed by totalitarianism to words and language. He was concerned about the threat it posed to our ability to think and speak freely and truthfully. About the threat it posed to our freedom.

    He saw, clearly and vividly, that to lose control of words is to lose control of meaning. That is what frightened him about the totalitarianism of Nazi Germany and Stalinist Russia – these regimes wanted to control the very linguistic substance of thought itself.

    And that is why Orwell continues to speak to us so powerfully today. Because words, language and meaning are under threat once more.

    Totalitarianism in Orwell’s time

    The totalitarian regimes of Nazi Germany and Stalin’s Soviet Union represented something new and frightening for Orwell. Authoritarian dictatorships, in which power was wielded unaccountably and arbitrarily, had existed before, of course. But what made the totalitarian regimes of the 20th century different was the extent to which they demanded every individual’s complete subservience to the state. They sought to abolish the very basis of individual freedom and autonomy. They wanted to use dictatorial powers to socially engineer the human soul itself, changing and shaping how people think and behave.

    Totalitarian regimes set about breaking up clubs, trade unions and other voluntary associations. They were effectively dismantling those areas of social and political life in which people were able to freely and spontaneously associate. The spaces, that is, in which local and national culture develops free of the state and officialdom. These cultural spaces were always tremendously important to Orwell. As he put it in his 1941 essay, ‘England Your England’: ‘All the culture that is most truly native centres round things which even when they are communal are not official – the pub, the football match, the back garden, the fireside and the “nice cup of tea”.’

    Totalitarianism may have reached its horrifying zenith in Nazi Germany and Stalin’s USSR. But Orwell was worried about its effect in the West, too. He was concerned about the Sovietisation of Europe through the increasingly prominent and powerful Stalinist Communist Parties. He was also worried about what he saw as Britain’s leftwing ‘Europeanised intelligentsia’, which, like the Communist Parties of Western Europe, seemed to worship state power, particularly in the supranational form of the USSR. And he was concerned above all about the emergence of the totalitarian mindset, and the attempt to re-engineer the deep structures of mind and feeling that lie at the heart of autonomy and liberty.

    Orwell could see this mindset flourishing among Britain’s intellectual elite, from the eugenics and top-down socialism of Fabians, like Sidney and Beatrice Webb and HG Wells, to the broader technocratic impulses of the intelligentsia in general. They wanted to remake people ‘for their own good’, or for the benefit of the race or state power. They therefore saw it as desirable to force people to conform to certain prescribed behaviours and attitudes. This threatened the everyday freedom of people who wanted, as Orwell put it, ‘the liberty to have a home of your own, to do what you like in your spare time, to choose your own amusements instead of having them chosen for you from above’.

    Edmond O’Brien as Winston Smith and Jan Sterling as Julia, in an adaptation of Nineteen Eighty-Four, 3 June 1955.

    In the aftermath of the Second World War, this new intellectual elite started to gain ascendancy. It was effectively a clerisy – a cultural and ruling elite defined by its academic achievements. It had been forged through higher education and academia rather than through traditional forms of privilege and wealth, such as public schools.

    Orwell was naturally predisposed against this emergent clerisy. He may have attended Eton, but that’s where Orwell’s education stopped. He was not part of the clerisy’s world. He was not an academic writer, nor did he position himself as such. On the contrary, he saw himself as a popular writer, addressing a broad, non-university-educated audience.

    Moreover, Orwell’s antipathy towards this new elite type was long-standing. He had bristled against the rigidity and pomposity of imperial officialdom as a minor colonial police official in Burma between 1922 and 1927. And he had always battled against the top-down socialist great and good, and much of academia, too, who were often very much hand in glove with the Stalinised left.

    The hostility was mutual. Indeed, it accounts for the disdain that many academics and their fellow travellers continue to display towards Orwell today.

    The importance of words

    Nowadays we are all too familiar with this university-educated ruling caste, and its desire to control words and meaning. Just think, for example, of the way in which our cultural and educational elites have turned ‘fascism’ from a historically specific phenomenon into a pejorative that has lost all meaning, to be used to describe anything from Brexit to Boris Johnson’s Tory government – a process Orwell saw beginning with the Stalinist practice of calling Spanish democratic revolutionaries ‘Trotsky-fascists’ (which he documented in Homage to Catalonia (1938)).

    Or think of the way in which our cultural and educational elites have transformed the very meanings of the words ‘man’ and ‘woman’, divesting them of any connection to biological reality. Orwell would not have been surprised by this development. In Nineteen Eighty-Four, he shows how the totalitarian state and its intellectuals will try to suppress real facts, and even natural laws, if they diverge from their worldview. Through exerting power over ideas, they seek to shape reality. ‘Power is in tearing human minds to pieces and putting them together in new shapes of your own choosing’, says O’Brien, the sinister party intellectual. ‘We control matter because we control the mind. Reality is inside the skull… You must get rid of these 19th-century ideas about the laws of nature.’

    In Nineteen Eighty-Four, the totalitarian regime tries to subject history to similar manipulation. As anti-hero Winston Smith tells his lover, Julia:

    ‘Every record has been destroyed or falsified, every book has been rewritten, every picture has been repainted, every statue and street and building has been renamed, every date has been altered. And that process is continuing day by day and minute by minute. History has stopped. Nothing exists except an endless present in which the Party is always right.’

    As Orwell wrote elsewhere, ‘the historian believes that the past cannot be altered and that a correct knowledge of history is valuable as a matter of course. From the totalitarian point of view history is something to be created rather than learned.’

    This totalitarian approach to history is dominant today, from the New York Times’ 1619 Project to statue-toppling. History is something to be erased or conjured up or reshaped as a moral lesson for today. It is used to demonstrate the rectitude of the contemporary establishment.

    But it is language that is central to Orwell’s analysis of this form of intellectual manipulation and thought-control. Take ‘Ingsoc’, the philosophy that the regime follows and enforces through the linguistic system of Newspeak. Newspeak is more than mere censorship. It is an attempt to make certain ideas – freedom, autonomy and so on – actually unthinkable or impossible. It is an attempt to eliminate the very possibility of dissent (or ‘thoughtcrime’).

    As Syme, who is working on a Newspeak dictionary, tells Winston Smith:

    ‘The whole aim… is to narrow the range of thought. In the end we shall make thoughtcrime literally impossible, because there will be no words in which to express it. Every year fewer and fewer words, and the range of consciousness always a little smaller… Has it ever occurred to you, Winston, that by the year 2050, at the very latest, not a single human being will be alive who could understand such a conversation as we are having now?’

    The parallels between Orwell’s nightmarish vision of totalitarianism and the totalitarian mindset of today, in which language is policed and controlled, should not be overstated. In the dystopia of Nineteen Eighty-Four, the project of eliminating freedom and dissent, as in Nazi Germany or Stalinist Russia, was backed up by a brutal, murderous secret police. There is little of that in our societies today – people are not forcibly silenced or disappeared.

    However, they are cancelled, pushed out of their jobs, and sometimes even arrested by the police for what amounts to thoughtcrime. And many more people simply self-censor out of fear of saying the ‘wrong’ thing. Orwell’s concern that words could be erased or their meaning altered, and thought controlled, is not being realised in an openly dictatorial manner. No, it’s being achieved through a creeping cultural and intellectual conformism.

    The intellectual turn against freedom

    But then that was always Orwell’s worry – that intellectuals giving up on freedom would allow a Big Brother Britain to flourish. As he saw it in The Prevention of Literature (1946), the biggest danger to freedom of speech and thought came not from the threat of dictatorship (which was receding by then) but from intellectuals giving up on freedom, or worse, seeing it as an obstacle to the realisation of their worldview.

    Interestingly, his concerns about an intellectual betrayal of freedom were reinforced by a 1944 meeting of the anti-censorship organisation, English PEN. Attending an event to mark the 300th anniversary of Milton’s Areopagitica, Milton’s famous 1644 speech making the case for the ‘Liberty of Unlicenc’d Printing’, Orwell noted that many of the left-wing intellectuals present were unwilling to criticise Soviet Russia or wartime censorship. Indeed, they had become profoundly indifferent or hostile to the question of political liberty and press freedom.

    ‘In England, the immediate enemies of truthfulness, and hence of freedom of thought, are the press lords, the film magnates, and the bureaucrats’, Orwell wrote, ‘but that on a long view the weakening of the desire for liberty among the intellectuals themselves is the most serious symptom of all’.

    Orwell was concerned by the increasing popularity among influential left-wing intellectuals of ‘the much more tenable and dangerous proposition that freedom is undesirable and that intellectual honesty is a form of anti-social selfishness’. The exercise of freedom of speech and thought, the willingness to speak truth to power, was even then becoming seen as something to be frowned upon, a selfish, even elitist act.

    An individual speaking freely and honestly, wrote Orwell, is ‘accused of either wanting to shut himself up in an ivory tower, or of making an exhibitionist display of his own personality, or of resisting the inevitable current of history in an attempt to cling to unjustified privilege’.

    These are insights which have stood the test of time. Just think of the imprecations against those who challenge the consensus. They are dismissed as ‘contrarians’ and accused of selfishly upsetting people.

    And worst of all, think of the way free speech is damned as the right of the privileged. This is possibly one of the greatest lies of our age. Free speech does not support privilege. We all have the capacity to speak, write, think and argue. We might not, as individuals or small groups, have the platforms of a press baron or the BBC. But it is only through our freedom to speak freely that we can challenge those with greater power.

    Orwell’s legacy

    Orwell is everywhere today. He is taught in schools and his ideas and phrases are part of our common culture. But his value and importance to us lies in his defence of freedom, especially the freedom to speak and write.

    His outstanding 1946 essay, ‘Politics and the English Language’, can actually be read as a freedom manual. It is a guide on how to use words and language to fight back.

    Of course, it is attacked today as an expression of privilege and of bigotry. Author and commentator Will Self cited ‘Politics and the English Language’ in a 2014 BBC Radio 4 show as proof that Orwell was an ‘authoritarian elitist’. He said: ‘Reading Orwell at his most lucid you can have the distinct impression he’s saying these things, in precisely this way, because he knows that you – and you alone – are exactly the sort of person who’s sufficiently intelligent to comprehend the very essence of what he’s trying to communicate. It’s this the mediocrity-loving English masses respond to – the talented dog-whistler calling them to chow down on a big bowl of conformity.’

    Lionel Trilling, another writer and thinker, made a similar point to Self, but in a far more insightful, enlightening way. ‘[Orwell] liberates us’, he wrote in 1952:

    ‘He tells us that we can understand our political and social life merely by looking around us, he frees us from the need for the inside dope. He implies that our job is not to be intellectual, certainly not to be intellectual in this fashion or that, but merely to be intelligent according to our lights – he restores the old sense of the democracy of the mind, releasing us from the belief that the mind can work only in a technical, professional way and that it must work competitively. He has the effect of making us believe that we may become full members of the society of thinking men. That is why he is a figure for us.’

    Orwell should be a figure for us, too – in our battle to restore the democracy of the mind and resist the totalitarian mindset of today. But this will require having the courage of our convictions and our words, as he so often did himself. As he put it in The Prevention of Literature, ‘To write in plain vigorous language one has to think fearlessly’. That Orwell did precisely that was a testament to his belief in the public just as much as his belief in himself. He sets an example and a challenge to us all.

    *  *  *

    This is an edited version of a speech given at this year’s Living Freedom, an annual residential school organised by the Battle of Ideas.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 23:00

  • Manhattan Apartment Rents Finally "Plateau" After Red-Hot Summer
    Manhattan Apartment Rents Finally “Plateau” After Red-Hot Summer

    Manhattan’s hottest residential rental market in decades has finally “plateaued,” according to Bloomberg, citing a new report from appraiser Miller Samuel Inc. and brokerage Douglas Elliman Real Estate. 

    After six months of “record number of records” as median rent in the borough soared to $4,150 in July, the hottest run in decades appears to have subsided as new leases signed in August averaged around $4,100, down $50 from July’s all-time high. 

    “Rents are robust but they are starting to plateau,” said Jonathan Miller, president of Miller Samuel. He doesn’t expect prices to plunge unless recessionary trends materialize, such as increased job loss, making it more challenging for people to pay rent and bills in current apartments. 

    Source: Bloomberg

    August’s median rent decline is barely a relief and still holds 17% above prices seen three years ago. The good news is rapid price increases have stopped (well, at least for now). 

    Sigh… 

    “There’s no bottom dropping out here … and landlords are still pushing their rents,” said Hal Gavzie, executive vice president of residential leasing at Douglas Elliman. 

    We correctly pointed out that rent prices in the borough would skyrocket this summer in an April note titled “Not A Peak” – Manhattan Apartment Rents Hit Another Record High,” informing readers who were looking at renting in the city to hold off because there will be “cooling in the fall.” 

    Gavzie said landlords aren’t slashing rents yet, but “concessions have slowly started to creep up, which doesn’t really surprise me.” 

    “All along, we were all wondering how long the high rents could be sustained,” he added. 

    Miller added the percentage of new leases with bidding wars is still at levels seen earlier this year, which is about 20% of deals, and average rents over asking were approximately 12.6%, indicating “the market is extremely tight.” 

    Perhaps wait until 2023 to lock in a new residential lease in Manhattan as the likelihood of a Fed-induced recession rises in the months ahead. 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 22:40

  • Trump Says He Thinks FBI Agents Took His Will
    Trump Says He Thinks FBI Agents Took His Will

    Authored by Zachary Stieber via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Former President Donald Trump speaks at a rally in Youngstown, Ohio, on Sept. 17, 2022. (Jeff Swensen/Getty Images)

    FBI agents raiding Mar-a-Lago in August might have taken former President Donald Trump’s will, Trump said on Sept. 21.

    They took a lot. I think they took my will. I found out yesterday, I said, ‘where is it?’ I think they took my will,” Trump said on Fox News’ “Hannity.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The FBI has referred inquiries on the raid to the Department of Justice, its parent agency. The DOJ did not immediately respond to a request for comment.

    Agents executing a search warrant at Mar-a-Lago in Florida on Aug. 8 took some 100 documents marked classified in addition to over 11,000 non-classified documents, according to an inventory list released by the government. The government has also acknowledged that agents seized three of Trump’s passports.

    U.S. District Judge Aileen Cannon, a Trump appointee, later revealed in a court filing that the seized materials include “medical documents, correspondence related to taxes, and accounting information.”

    Trump has said the FBI took his “complete and highly confidential medical file and history” in addition to tax records.

    If the will was taken, “that could cause a lot of problems if that gets published,” Trump said on Tuesday, adding that some people may not be happy while others might be pleased.

    A law enforcement officer stands outside Mar-a-Lago in Palm Beach, Fla., on Aug. 8, 2022. (Giorgio Viera/AFP/Getty Images)

    Surveillance Footage

    When agents went to Mar-a-Lago, they asked representatives of Trump to turn off surveillance cameras, Trump and his team have said. Trump’s representatives refused, but Trump has yet to release the footage.

    Sean Hannity, host of the Fox show, wondered why that was.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 22:20

  • Russia Prepares To 'Ramp Up' Stealth Jet Production Amid Rising Threat Of War With West
    Russia Prepares To ‘Ramp Up’ Stealth Jet Production Amid Rising Threat Of War With West

    Russia’s war in Ukraine escalated this week when Russian President Vladimir Putin announced a partial mobilization of the country’s military and vowed to use “all available means” to deter future attacks against Russia — a reference to the country’s diverse nuclear weapons arsenal. 

    Then Dmitry Medvedev, the deputy chairman of Russia’s Security Council, provided fresh warnings Thursday on the heels of Putin’s nuclear threats that “Hypersound [hypersonic weapons] will be able to reach targets in Europe and in the United States much faster, guaranteed.” 

    Now there’s word that Russian state-owned defense corporation Rostec will increase production of Su-57 5th-generation stealth fighter jets. 

    “The Russian Air Force will receive new Su-57 jet fighters this year,” Rostec head Sergey Chemezov said on the company’s Telegram channel. 

    Chemezov said the “production speed” of the stealth fighter jets “will be increased.” He said the plant is based in Russia’s Far East and is undergoing expansion to ramp up output. 

    The multirole fifth-generation fighter was first delivered to Russia’s Aerospace Force in 2019. A video surfaced in 2018 of the jets used in Syria for combat operations. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, the US has been training for aerial warfare against Su-57s. We noted in 2019, Nellis Air Force Base had a General Dynamics F-16 Fighting Falcon painted to mimic Russia’s fifth-generation stealth fighter

    “The next world war will be fought with fifth-generation fighters and hypersonic weapons,” we said in 2019. 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 22:00

  • This $5 Billion Dubai Moon Hotel Will Simulate An Outer Space Experience On Earth
    This $5 Billion Dubai Moon Hotel Will Simulate An Outer Space Experience On Earth

    Authored by Elijah Cohen via TheMindUnleashed.com,

    The most populous city in the United Arab Emirates is due to be remodeled by a brand new hotel, which Moon World Resorts believes will live up to Dubai’s reputation for opulent building design.

    The Canadian corporation intends to construct a total of four MOON resorts, with Dubai being the location of the first one.

    Standing at 735-foot-tall, the copy of the Moon will have all of the conveniences and luxuries that one would anticipate from a high-end resort, in addition to unique experiences that are designed to simulate a trip to Earth’s moon.

    The goal of the $5 billion venture is to bring the experience of “lunar surface” and “lunar colony” down to Earth so that it may be enjoyed by tourists interested in space travel. Once it is finished being constructed, Sandra Matthews and Michael Henderson, who are the creators of the company, believe that the resort will be able to welcome up to 10 million guests each year.

    The moon “colony” alone has the ability to host 2.5 million visitors annually, and there are plans to include a training platform for space programs and astronauts within the complex as well.

    Naturally, MOON is still a resort, and as such, there will be a wide variety of activities and amenities available for visitors to try out and appreciate throughout their stay. The resort will have a nightclub, an event center that can accommodate as many as 5,000 people, a spa and wellness center, a jazz piano bar, and a multi-level lounge designed to seem like an alien spaceship.

    A sizable conference center is being built with the intention of luring exhibitors from the aerospace and technology industries.

    As part of its private home concept, MOON will also have 144 premium apartments that are available for purchase. Every 2,000-square-foot home has a lifetime membership to MOON, which gives the owner access to a variety of special benefits.

    The business anticipates that it will take two years to build this one-of-a-kind resort, even if the formal designs for Dubai are still in the process of being approved. “From an architectural, engineering, and design perspective, MOON can be built,” Henderson shares.

    Moon resort in Vegas.

    Moon World Resorts has a history of creating waves, therefore this is not the first time that they have done so. The business made the announcement in 2021 that they intended to bring MOON to Las Vegas at some point in the future. Henderson said at the time that he and Matthews had first conceived of the idea in the year 2000 and that “the objective was to develop an authentic, mega-scale reproduction of planet Earth’s Moon, incorporating the world’s largest sphere.”

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 21:40

  • China Accuses NSA Of Hacking Into Government-Funded University
    China Accuses NSA Of Hacking Into Government-Funded University

    Three months after US security agencies warned that Chinese-backed hackers had been targeting “major telecommunications companies and network service providers” for over two years, Chinese state media on Thursday accused the National Security Agency (NSA) of infiltrating a government-funded university and gaining access to ‘China’s telecommunications network,’ CNBC reports.

    Citing an unnamed source, the Global Times accused the NSA of phishing – a hacking technique which uses malicious links or other methods to trick users into providing access credentials – to gain access to Northwestern Polytechnical University, where they allegedly stole “core technology data including key network equipment configuration, network management data, and core operational data,” along with other files.

    The report goes on to claim that the NSA infiltrated Chinese telecom operators in an effort to “control the country’s infrastructure.”

    The Global Times, citing its unnamed source, reported that more details about the attack on Northwestern Polytechnical University will be released soon.

    For several years, China has accused the U.S. of cyberattacks but has not been specific. However, in the last few weeks, Beijing has been more vocal in attributing particular attacks to the U.S., in a ramping up of tensions between the two nations in the cyber sphere. -CNBC

    The alleged attack was discovered by China’s National Computer Virus Emergency Response Center several weeks ago, which also accused the US of engaging in “tens of thousands” of cyberattacks on Chinese targets.

    Conversely, the US has accused China of massive hacking operations – with FBI Director Christopher Wray claiming in February that Beijing’s cyberattacks have become “more brazen, more damaging, than ever before,” in their attempts to steal US information and technology.

    In June, US security agencies warned that Chinese-backed hackers were targeting “major telecommunications companies and network service providers” since 2020.

    In a June 7 cybersecurity advisory, they urged those affected to take immediate remedial action.

    The advisory, coauthored by the National Security Agency (NSA), the Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency (CISA), and the Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI), said the hackers “continue to exploit publicly known vulnerabilities,” using tactics to bypass defenses and keeping themselves undetected.

    The agencies pointed out that the hackers allegedly utilized open-source tools, such as RouterSploit and RouterScan, and known software flaws in networking devices such as routers.

    “[T]hese devices are often overlooked by cyber defenders, who struggle to maintain and keep pace with routine software patching of Internet-facing services and endpoint devices,” noted the agencies.

    The agencies did not identify the victim companies in the advisory, but they included a list of the common vulnerabilities and exposures (CVEs) most frequently exploited by the Chinese regime’s hackers since 2020, together with vulnerability types and the major vendors—Cisco, Citrix, D-Link, Fortinet, and Netgear.

    They urged potential victims to shore up their networks by applying immediate patches, updating infrastructure, and disabling unnecessary ports and protocols.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 21:20

  • Sri Lanka Mulls Taking On More Debt From China, India To Pay For Energy
    Sri Lanka Mulls Taking On More Debt From China, India To Pay For Energy

    Authored by Aldgra Fredly via The Epoch Times,

    Sri Lanka is considering purchasing solar panels through a credit line from India and China to offset rising electricity tariffs, Power and Energy Minister Kanchana Wijesekara said on Tuesday.

    The Sri Lankan government raised electricity tariffs by 75 percent in August, the first increase in nine years, triggering protest among local Buddhist clergy who were struggling to pay their electricity bills.

    The Central Provincial Sangha of the Ramanya Nikaya said it would switch off the lights in all temples in the province on Poya Day—a Buddhist holiday—to protest against the increase in electricity costs, Daily Mirror reported.

    Speaking in parliament on Tuesday, Wijesekara proposed using renewable energy sources and installing solar panels for religious institutions, particularly those that pay higher electricity charges.

    “We have the problem of foreign exchange, making it difficult to pay for imports. One solution we have to think is to have a credit line from India or China as panels are imported from them,” he said, according to the Press Trust of India.

    The state-owned Ceylon Electricity Board (CEB) is heavily in debt, owing more than 80 billion rupees ($225 million) in fuel costs and another 46 billion rupees ($129 million) to renewable energy suppliers.

    Daily Power Cuts

    Sri Lanka’s population of 22 million people has been struggling with hours-long daily power cuts due to the government’s acute lack of foreign currency to pay for essential imports.

    The Public Utilities Commission of Sri Lanka (PUCSL) reportedly scheduled an 80-minute power cut on Tuesday and Wednesday, citing inadequate power generation caused by a fuel shortage.

    A few weeks earlier, PUCSL imposed power cuts on Aug. 27 and Aug. 28, and later extended to Aug. 29 for the same reason. Sri Lanka also imposed a nationwide 13-hour power cut in March, according to local reports.

    CEB Engineers Union President Anil Ranjith said at a press conference on Sept. 15 that Sri Lanka’s ongoing power cuts could continue for at least three years if the government refused to increase the nation’s electricity supply.

    “The demand peaks at night times. The power mainly comes from hydro, thermal and, if there is wind, then from wind power plants. If we don’t have coal or oil, then we have to go for power cuts,” he said, Economy Next reported.

    “Until we increase our supply, through thermal, wind, [liquefied natural gas], coal or solar, and store our energy, the power cuts will continue,” Ranjith added.

    IMF Agreement

    The International Monetary Fund (IMF) earlier approved a $2.9 billion bailout fund under a new 48-month Extended Fund Facility to help restore Sri Lanka’s macroeconomic stability and debt sustainability.

    The IMF said that its deal with Sri Lanka is contingent on approval by IMF management and the executive board, as well as on financing assurances from Sri Lanka’s creditors, including China, Japan, and India.

    President Ranil Wickremesinghe told reporters on Monday that Sri Lanka will hold talks with major creditors India, China, and Japan, as well as private creditors.

    “While we look at our issues of debt, we also have to repay what we have borrowed. This means we need 25 years from now to 2048. Then we will be 100, by then will be a prosperous society,” Wickremesinghe said in his speech.

    Sri Lanka defaulted its debt in May. The island nation has $10 billion in bilateral debt as of August, of which 44 percent is owed to China, according to the Finance Ministry (pdf). Japan holds 32 percent of Sri Lanka’s debt, while India holds another 10 percent.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 21:00

  • Activist Group Suing DeSantis Received Nearly $1.4 Million From Soros Network
    Activist Group Suing DeSantis Received Nearly $1.4 Million From Soros Network

    An activist group which has filed a class-action lawsuit against Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis and other Florida officials over last week’s migrant flights to Martha’s Vineyard received nearly $1.4 million from George Soros’ Open Society Network.

    According to Fox News, nonprofit immigrant advocacy group Lawyers for Civil Rights filed the suit on behalf of Alianza Americas, which was described in a press release as “a network of migrant-led organizations supporting immigrants across the United States.”

    The lawsuit was filed in the District of Massachusetts, and alleges that DeSantis and other officials “designed and executed a premeditated, fraudulent and illegal scheme centered on exploiting this vulnerability for the sole purpose of advancing their own personal, financial and political interests.”

    A man who is part of a group of immigrants that had just arrived flashes a thumbs-up in Edgartown, Massachusetts, on Sept. 14, 2022. (Ray Ewing/Vineyard Gazette via AP)

    According to Open Society Foundation records, Alianza Americas received $1,383,947 between 2016 and 2020 – with grants coming from three Soros nonprofits; Open Society Institute, Open Society Policy Center and Foundation to Promote Open Society.

    The grants were to support policy advocacy on immigration, a Global Compact for Migration initiative and to strengthen the group’s international work in Central America and Mexico.

    The law firm filing the suit, Lawyers for Civil Rights, received $50,000 from the Borealis Philanthropy in 2019, tax forms show. Borealis is a left-wing donor-advised fund that acts as an intermediary steering Democratic money to organizations.

    Borealis has partnered with Black Lives Matter and the left-wing Marguerite Casey Foundation, which advocates for the abolishment of policing and prisons. -Fox News

    Another liberal group, the MacArthur Foundation, gave Alianza Americas $1.26 million between 2008 and 2020.

    The class-action lawsuit filed by Lawyers for Civil Rights alleges that migrants were told they were headed towards Boston or Washington, “which is completely false,” and that they were induced to cross state lines under false pretenses – carrying perks such as $10 McDonald’s gift certificates.

    DeSantis’ office, meanwhile, says that 50 Venezuelan migrants voluntarily signed forms agreeing to be flown to Martha’s Vineyard last week, and called the lawsuit legally flawed.

    I agree to hold the benefactor or its designated representatives harmless of all liability arising out of or in any way relating to any injuries and damages that may occur during the agreed transport to locations outside of Texas until the final destination of Massachusetts,” states the form.

    DeSantis’ office cited the form as evidence that the migrants were not misled.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 20:40

  • Whistleblowers Allege Intelligence, Command-And-Control Failures At US Capitol Police, Lawmaker Says
    Whistleblowers Allege Intelligence, Command-And-Control Failures At US Capitol Police, Lawmaker Says

    Authored by Joseph M. Hanneman via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Several U.S. Capitol Police whistleblowers have exposed what they call intelligence failures leading up to the events of Jan. 6, 2021, and problems in the law enforcement agency’s command structure, an Illinois congressman said.

    U.S. Capitol Police guard the steps leading to the Columbus Doors and the Capitol Rotunda on January 6, 2021. (U.S. DOJ/Screenshot via The Epoch Times)

    Rep. Rodney Davis (R-Ill.), the ranking member of the Committee on House Administration, said whistleblower testimony speaks directly to the need to reform the $460 million police agency with some 2,300 employees.

    We have heard from several whistleblowers within USCP who fear retribution, and we take seriously the need to protect their identities,” Davis told The Epoch Times in a statement. “Many have brought to light issues with the command-and-control structure of USCP, including the Capitol Police Board.

    News of the USCP whistleblowers came shortly after an email surfaced from a former USCP intelligence analyst to senior staff at the agency. The memo by Eric Hoar, dated Jan. 9, 2021, blasted the USCP for failure to share information on threats from groups that talked about attacking the Capitol on January 6.

    “We analysts have been reporting for weeks that patriot groups are commenting on social media their intentions to storm the U.S. Capitol with overwhelming numbers,” Hoar wrote in the email, disclosed by John Solomon at Just the News.

    “I don’t know what was occurring behind the scenes, but I hope that information was briefed with the veracity it deserved and not just a one-time event assessment,” wrote Hoar, who was assigned to the USCP Intelligence and Inter-Agency Coordination Division. He has since left Capitol Police.

    A U.S. Capitol Police officer patrols the east mezzanine of the Capitol on Jan. 6, 2021. (Bobby Powell/Special to The Epoch Times)

    Solomon’s report said in the two weeks leading up to January 6, USCP received “detailed warnings from the FBI, Homeland Security Department, the U.S. Marshals Service and D.C. Metropolitan Police that right-wing extremists were plotting to storm the Capitol and attack lawmakers.”

    Hoar said he hoped his memo would “provide insight to help prevent another disaster.”

    The notion that valid intelligence is trumped by optics or political decisions is unacceptable and puts lives in danger,” he wrote.

    Bulletin Reflected No Threats

    Hoar’s concerns (pdf) were not reflected in the information shared in a Jan. 5, 2021, memo (pdf) from the USCP’s Civil Disturbance Unit (CDU). Titled, “CDU Operational Plan,” the document’s threat analysis reads, “At this time there are no specific known threats related to the Joint Session of Congress – Electoral College Vote Certification.”

    The CDU plan said if violence occurred on Jan. 6, the plan was to use the FN-303 anti-riot gun along with the PepperBall launcher system, which deploys powdered chemical irritants. Kinetic impact projectiles “will not be fired indiscriminately into crowds,” the memo said.

    Numerous protesters were injured on January 6 when flashbangs, dispersion grenades, and other explosive devices were fired and tossed into the tightly packed crowds on the west side of the Capitol. The heavy use of munitions was chronicled in The Epoch Times documentary, “The Real Story of Jan. 6.”

    About 140 police officers from USCP and the Metropolitan Police Department were injured on January 6.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 20:20

  • Nobody Cares: Trump Approval Rating Remains Stable Despite Multiple Investigations
    Nobody Cares: Trump Approval Rating Remains Stable Despite Multiple Investigations

    Despite the best efforts of the January 6th committee and Biden’s ‘weaponized‘ DOJ (which took 18 months to stage a public raid on the former President’s home), Americans just don’t care.

    According to the most recent New York Times/Siena College pollvoters held nearly identical views from those earlier in the summer when it comes to a favorable view of Trump, whether they think he committed serious federal crimes, and who they would support in a potential 2024 Trump-Biden rematch.

    Also worth noting that the Times poll sampled 49% Biden voters and 42% Trump voters, weighted towards younger Democrats and older Republicans.

    Overall, 44 percent of voters viewed Mr. Trump favorably, and 53 percent viewed him unfavorably. The recent poll was fielded early this month, after news of the Justice Department’s inquiry into Mr. Trump’s handling of confidential documents but before the New York attorney general announced she was suing Mr. Trump and his family business.

    That level of Trump support has effectively been unchanged since the last Times/Siena poll, which was fielded in July amid televised hearings by the House committee investigating the Jan. 6 storming of the Capitol. It was also fundamentally similar to levels of support Times/Siena polls and other surveys found in recent years. –NYT

    Approximately half of voters said they thought Trump had committed serious federal crimes, while 38% said they thought he hadn’t – which was essentially identical to similar responses from July.

    The Times also acknowledges that Trump supporters’ loyalty towards the former president “has long been clear in his favorability ratings, which remained stable throughout his time in office, even during moments of peak turmoil, such as his first impeachment trial.”

    Many of Mr. Trump’s signature policy proposals have remained fairly popular among the public, the September poll found. Half of all respondents favored a wall along the U.S.-Mexico border, including more than 15 percent of those who said they would vote for Mr. Biden in 2024. And a majority said they agreed more with the Republican Party than with the Democratic Party when it came to illegal immigration. -NYT

    Meanwhile, the poll also found that 49% of registered voters think Democrats “have gone too far in pushing a ‘woke’ ideology on issues related to race and gender,” while 34% think Democrats have not gone far enough in exposing “racism and sexism.”

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 20:00

  • NATO Says China's Role In Ukraine War A "Challenge" To The Alliance
    NATO Says China’s Role In Ukraine War A “Challenge” To The Alliance

    Authored by Kyle Anzalone & Connor Freeman via The Libertarian Institute,

    During remarks on Wednesday, the civilian head of the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) slammed China as a “challenge” to the alliance. In an interview with Reuters, Secretary-General Jens Stoltenberg said Beijing’s support for the war in Ukraine, its opposition to NATO expansion, and its territorial claims justify the alliance assigning China this label. 

    Largely in response to Washington’s increasing hostility, Moscow and Beijing have strengthened their ties for well over a decade. Prior to the invasion of Ukraine, China and Russia carried out several rounds of military exercises. Russian President Vladimir Putin and Chinese President Xi Jinping have met several times since the war began, reaffirming the two Asian powers’ growing ties. 

    While Beijing has not given public support to Moscow’s war, China has refused several demands to condemn Russia’s invasion. Beijing has drastically increased its economic ties with Moscow as Russia has become more isolated from Western markets. 

    NATO image

    After Moscow’s invasion of Ukraine, Washington leveled massive sanctions on Russia and many NATO member states agreed to scale back Russian energy purchases. The intention was to crush the Russian economy and disable the Kremlin’s war machine. 

    However, the Western economic war on Russia caused energy prices to spike, allowing Moscow to replace the shrinking European market with Asian customers. While Russian oil is selling below market rates, Moscow’s increased exports to China, India and Turkey pushed the rouble to seven-year highs this summer. 

    “The sum of all is this just increases the importance of NATO allies standing together and realizing that China is part of the security challenges we need to face today and in the future,” Stoltenberg said in the interview with Reuters

    Meanwhile, India and Turkey have followed Beijing in importing more Russian goods. Ankara is a NATO member state. The US and several other NATO members recently engaged in war games with India.

    Stoltenberg also took issue with Beijing over its opposition to NATO expansion. At the fall of the USSR in 1990, the North Atlantic alliance only had 16 members. In the 30 years since, NATO has added 14, soon to be 16, new members. Many of the new additions to the alliance are former Warsaw Pact or USSR states. Moscow has long protested NATO expansion. In 2008, the US Ambassador to Russia said expanding the alliance to Ukraine and Georgia violated all of Russia’s red lines. NATO has also expanded its global reach. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This week, NATO members, the US and Canada, conducted a joint transit through the Taiwan Strait. Last year – eyeing Beijing and following Washinton’s imperial lead, with British, French and German warships sailing the South China Sea.

    This year, NATO targeted China in its new Strategic Concept document. UK Prime Minister Liz Truss has even openly called for a “global NATO”  to defend Taiwan and confront China in the Asia Pacific. Under Truss, Beijing will be classified as a “threat” to England’s “national security for the first time… for a tougher approach to Beijing,” the Times reported last month. In his first Congressional address, Biden boasted he “told President Xi that we will maintain a strong military presence in the Indo-Pacific just as we do with NATO in Europe…”

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 19:40

  • Pennsylvania County Sues Dominion Voting Systems Over 'Severe Anomalies' In 2020 Election
    Pennsylvania County Sues Dominion Voting Systems Over ‘Severe Anomalies’ In 2020 Election

    Officials in Fulton County, Pennsylvania have sued Dominion Voting Systems, alleging “severe” issues with voting data discovered after the 2020 US election, Just the News reports.

    The lawsuit, filed Tuesday, claims that county officials “became aware of severe anomalies in the Dominion Voting Systems due to the inaccuracy and/or inability to reconcile voter data with votes actually cast and counted” by the company’s proprietary system at or about the time of the 2020 election.

    Officials cite a report from earlier this month which revealed that “security measures necessary to harden and secure” Dominion’s systems had not been performed, and that “external USB hard drives had been inserted in the machines on several occasions” when there was “no known list of approved external drives that could have been or were used or inserted into the machines.”

    The county allegedly discovered that a “python script” had been installed on one device, which was “connected to an external device on an external network” reportedly located in Canada.

    The script “can exploit and create any number of vulnerabilities including, external access to the system, data export of the tabulations, or introduction of other metrics not part of or allowed by the certification process.”

    Officials also claim that the machines were running a July, 2016 version of Windows Defender, which would have left the machine vulnerable to “viruses or malicious software” created after that date.

    The suit alleges “breach of contract and breach of warranty, and breach of other common-law and statutory duties, by Dominion,” which the county says entitles it to “all fees, expenditures and costs made in reliance upon and in consideration for the provision by Dominion of a serviceable product that was fit for its intended purpose and use.”

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 19:20

  • Latino Vote To Determine Outcome In Dozens Of 2022 Midterm Races
    Latino Vote To Determine Outcome In Dozens Of 2022 Midterm Races

    Authored by John Haughey via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    How 32 million eligible Latinos will vote in dozens of pivotal House, Senate, and gubernatorial elections across the country in November will be vital in determining which party controls Congress after this year’s midterm elections.

    U.S. Rep. Mayra Flores (R-Texas) is applauded after being sworn into Congress in Washington on June 21, 2022, after winning a special election in the state’s Congressional District 34, a traditionally Democratic district where she is running as an underdog in November as one of more than 100 Latino candidates running for the U.S. House and U.S. Senate. (Anna Moneymaker/Getty Images)

    Latinos make up the second-largest voting bloc in the United States, constituting 18.7 percent of the nation’s total population.

    That’s no secret, of course, with candidates of all persuasions aggressively soliciting the Latino vote with Spanish-language political ads in tight races in Texas, Pennsylvania, Nevada, Oregon, and Florida.

    The Republican National Committee (RNC) on Sept. 8 announced it had hosted this year more than 5,000 separate events appealing for minority votes at 38 voter outreach centers in 19 states, including dozens labeled “Hispanic community centers.” The campaign is meant to sustain the momentum Republicans gained among Latino voters during the Trump presidency.

    Meanwhile, Democratic heavyweights are directly appealing to Latino voters to seal erosion in what had been a solid, reliable bank of support. Critics within and without the party say Democrats may have taken the Hispanic vote for granted and are only now belatedly focusing on it.

    President Joe Biden addressed the 45th Congressional Hispanic Caucus Institute Gala on Sept. 15. He used the occasion to tout how the American Rescue Plan benefits Latinos by providing access to vaccines, better health care, and keeping schools open.

    On Sept. 25, former President Barak Obama, a Democrat, will address the 5th annual L’ATTITUDE Conference, the nation’s “premier Latino business event,” in San Diego, Calif.

    Both parties are trying to tailor their candidates’ campaigns to appeal to Latino votes with tactics and strategies based on data and polls collected and analyzed since June by research firms, media groups, and campaigns.

    Regardless of how the data is interpreted, there is ample opportunity for candidates of both parties to gain favor with a Latino “voting bloc” that is hardly monolithic but—despite distinct ethnic and regional variations—appears predominately commonly concerned with jobs, cost-of-living, and the economy.

    In 2020, when Latinos cast one-10th of ballots in the presidential election, Biden received an estimated 61 percent of that vote, down from over 70 percent Barak Obama received in his two elections.

    Latino voters nationwide identified jobs, the economy, health care, schools, and public safety as top priorities in a survey of Latino voters conducted in July by UnidosUS, the nation’s largest Hispanic advocacy group. A Siena College poll of Hispanic voters published Sept. 16 reaffirmed the findings.

    Both surveys indicate that Latinos are amenable to Republican messaging on jobs and the economy, but a significant majority want progress on gun control and immigration policies. An overwhelming number favor legal access to abortion.

    The emergence of abortion access as an issue among Latino voters may spell trouble for some Republican hopefuls. For the first time since it conducted Latino voter surveys this century, UnidosUS reported access to abortion was cited by Latino voters as a top five issue, with more than 70 percent of respondents saying it should remain legal.

    This emerging trend in the wake of June’s U.S. Supreme Court repeal of Roe v Wade could stem the eroding Latino support for their party, Democrats say.

    That claim may have some validation in the Siena College survey of 522 Hispanic voters conducted Sept. 6-14 within a broader poll of 1,399 registered voters nationwide. That survey found Latinos are more likely to agree with Democrats on more issues than Republicans but will support GOP candidates strong on crime and policing.

    Worryingly for Democratic candidates, 40 percent of Latino respondents in the Siena poll expressed reservations about the Democratic Party’s progressive wing’s focus on race and gender.

    Most Latino survey respondents ultimately said their vote would come down to which candidates best address their economic concerns. According to the Sienna poll, Latino voters are evenly split on which party they think can best deliver jobs and lower the cost of living.

    Overall, 56 percent of the Sienna poll respondents said they would vote blue, and 32 percent said they would vote red in November.

    While that may sound like good news for Democrats, it may not be enough good news for the party to thwart the forecast that Republicans will retake the House and Senate.

    According to the Siena survey, young Latino voters, especially men in Texas and Florida, are increasingly registering as Republicans.  That trend is confirmed in a Sept. 2-11 nationwide survey of 400 registered Latino voters published Sept. 14 by BSP Research.

    All the data, polls, and analyses add to uncertainty for Nov. 8 candidates in dozens of U.S. House races where Latinos constitute 20 percent or more of the constituency.

    The “Latino vote” is also expected to be a key determinant in several close gubernatorial and U.S. Senate races, such as Arizona and Nevada, where Spanish speakers comprise 25 percent of eligible voters.

    Latinos are projected to sway outcomes even in districts or states without a large presence in overall voter numbers. In Pennsylvania, Latinos account for less than 10 percent of total voters but have proven to be key in determining winners and losers in close races.

    Arizona Republican gubernatorial candidate Kari Lake speaks at the Conservative Political Action Conference (CPAC) in Dallas, Texas, on Aug. 6, 2022. (Brandon Bell/Getty Images)

    Arizona

    Latinos constitute one-third of Arizona’s residents and one-quarter of the state’s registered voters, according to a July analysis by UCLA’s Latino Policy & Politics Institute. By some estimates, Latinos will comprise half the state’s population by 2050.

    Approximately 840,000 Latinos voted in the 2020 election in Arizona, which saw a record 3.4 million turnout. Biden edged Trump by 10,457 votes.

    Approximately 644,600 will cast ballots on Nov. 8, according to one forecast. That would amount to a record Latino turnout for an Arizona midterm election and four times the number who voted in the 2002 primary.

    According to the Arizona Secretary of State’s office, 45 percent of approximately 1 million Latinos registered to vote in the state are enrolled Democrats, 15 percent are registered as Republicans, and nearly 40 percent are not affiliated with a party, reflecting a national trend among all voters in registering as independents or “NAs,” meaning “Non-Affiliated” with a party.

    How Latinos within that unaffiliated contingent will vote could determine if incumbent Democrat Sen. Mark Kelly (D-Ariz.) defeats Trump-endorsed Republican challenger Blake Masters as he is favored to do, and if Trump-endorsed Republican Kari Lake beats Democrat Kati Hobbes, Arizona’s current secretary of state in the “tossup” gubernatorial race.

    Lake has made border security an integral component of her campaign, posting on Twitter after her primary win that on “Day 1, I take my hand off the Bible, give the Oath of Office and we Declare an Invasion on our Southern Border.”

    But Arizona Latinos, while identifying immigration policy as a concern and opposed to “open borders,” do not rate “border security” as a high priority, making it uncertain how the state’s Latino voters will receive Lake’s campaign.

    In one survey, Arizona Latinos said they favor keeping abortion legal by 30 percentage points, which hasn’t caused Lake to change her campaign messaging but has prompted Masters to remove his anti-abortion stance from his campaign website.

     Pennsylvania Democratic Senate candidate Lt. Gov. John Fetterman celebrates with supporters after a rally in Erie, Pa., on Aug. 12, 2022, while campaigning against Republican hopeful Mehmet Öz in a “tossup” race that could be determined by Latino voters. (Nate Smallwood/Getty Images)

    Pennsylvania

    Latinos constitute only 7.6 percent of the Keystone State’s residents and 5.3 percent of its registered voters, according to an analysis by Pew Research. But they are regarded as one of the difference-making constituencies in several congressional district races.

    While cities such as Philadelphia and Pittsburgh include long-established Latino neighborhoods that traditionally vote Democratic, demographic shifts indicate pockets of GOP-registered Latino voters in cities such as Reading and Allentown.

    Therefore, Pennsylvania Latino voters are targeted as potential lynchpins in the battleground race for governor between Trump-endorsed Republican state Sen. Doug Mastriano (R-Gettysburg) and Democrat Josh Shapiro. The same is true for the U.S. Senate race between Trump-endorsed TV celebrity Dr. Mehmet Öz and Democrat Lt. Gov. John Fetterman.

    Latinos made up 4 percent of the total turnout in Pennsylvania’s 2020 election, up from 3 percent in the 2018 midterms, according to Pew Research.

    Latino voters backed Biden by at least a 3-1 margin in Pennsylvania in 2020, according to UCLA. That proved pivotal in his narrowly winning the battleground state.

    Latinos in Pennsylvania will play a decisive role in the 2022 election cycle,” Mi Familia Vota National Programs Manager Irving Zavaleta said during an Aug. 25 media call.

    According to NALEO’s National Latino Voter Tracking Poll, Pennsylvania Latino respondents generally favored Democrats over Republicans by a 32 percentage-point margin; 21 percent said they were undecided.

    Seventy-three percent of respondents said abortion should remain legal, with 41 percent saying it was a “deal-breaker” for them; 83 percent said it was important for Pennsylvania’s elected officials to speak out against white nationalism and white supremacy.

    Only 61 percent of NALEO survey respondents in Pennsylvania were sure they’d vote in November. Zavaleta’s said that relatively low percentage. He added that the large percentage of undecideds among those who say they will vote indicates there has been little outreach to Latino voters in the state by candidates.

     Colorado Republican U.S Senate candidate Joe O’Dea speaks during a primary election night watch party on June 28, 2022, in Denver, after securing the GOP nod to challenge Democratic incumbent Sen. Michael Bennet (D-Colo.) in a state where 21 percent of voters identify as Latino. (David Zalubowski/AP Photo)

    Colorado

    According to Univision’s Hispanic Vote, Latinos constitute 21 percent of Colorado’s residents and cast 11 percent of the state’s vote in 2020.

    NALEO projects that 8.9 percent more Latinos will vote in this year’s midterm election compared to 2018.

    According to a May study from Emerson College’s nationwide initiative on Latinos, non-registered Colorado Latino voters were split over whether their vote would make a difference, with 41 percent believing their votes don’t matter, 40 percent saying they could be swayed to vote  “if …more informed”, and but 39 percent saying they have no intention of voting.

    Libre Initiative Action, an Hispanic outreach group backed by Koch-funded Americans for Prosperity, maintains that concerns over inflation and the cost of living among Latinos are giving Republicans an opportunity to win the U.S. Senate race between GOP challenger and underdog Joe O’Dea and incumbent Democrat Sen. Michael Bennett (D-Colo.) Both are running Spanish-language campaign ads.

    One of seven new U.S. House districts created nationwide following post-2020 Census redistricting, Colorado’s Congressional District 8 (CD 8) has the largest concentration of Hispanic residents, at 38 percent, of any Colorado congressional district.

    CD 8’s inaugural election in November pits state Rep. Yadira Caraveo (D-Thornton), a pediatrician who ran unopposed in the Democratic primary, against Republican state Sen. Barbara Kirkmeyer (R-Fort Lupton).

    The RNC earlier this year opened a “Hispanic Community Center” in Thornton to appeal to CD 8 voters. At the same time, Libre Initiative Action has been very active on behalf of Kirkmeyer’s platform, claiming it has knocked on more than 4,000 doors in the district since August.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 19:00

  • Azov Fighters For Pro-Kremlin Oligarch? Biggest Prisoner Swap Of War Has Outraged Some In Russia
    Azov Fighters For Pro-Kremlin Oligarch? Biggest Prisoner Swap Of War Has Outraged Some In Russia

    Turkey’s government is touting that it was President Recep Tayyip Erdoğan who was a main driver behind a successful prisoner swap between the two warring sides of Russia and Ukraine, resulting in the exchange of over 200 prisoners of war. Some reports are saying the Saudi government also helped mediate the deal. Erdoğan while speaking in New York City on the sidelines of the UN General Assembly said it was an “important step” towards ending the war.

    It was a major swap involving the freeing of 215 high-profile Ukrainian prisoners of war, notably leading Azov militants and even an Azov battalion commander and his deputy, for 55 Russian troops. But importantly, crucial to the deal was the return of Kremlin-ally and wealthy businessman Viktor Medvedchuk, who had been arrested by Ukrainian authorities in the opening months of the invasion on charges of treason. Medvedchuk had long been seen as Vladimir Putin’s closest ally in Ukraine, and the two are said to be personal friends.

    Via AP: Azov officer Sviatoslav Palamar, center, who was released in a prisoner exchange between Russia and Ukraine, speaks on the phone in Ankara, Turkey, late Wednesday.

    But the deal has sparked outrage in some political and media circles in Russia, given that – as The Intercept and much of the mainstream media previously recognized – Azov regiment is a Ukrainian neo-Nazi military group, and is especially hated in Russia, also having not long ago been formally designated a terrorist organization. On the list of those freed from Russian detention also appear to be a handful of foreign fighters from the US and UK.

    “Wednesday’s record prisoner swap between Moscow and Kyiv nearly seven months into the war saw the release of fighters from Ukraine’s Azov Battalion who led the defense of Mariupol in the first months of the war that later became a symbol of Ukrainian resistance,” The Moscow Times writes. “Moscow’s decision to release Azov soldiers, including the battalion’s commander and his deputy, was seen as a betrayal by pro-war and far-right voices.”

    Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky first proposed a major prisoner swap in April, just after images of Viktor Medvedchuk in handcuffs appeared in the media. “I propose to the Russian Federation to exchange ‘your guy’ for our boys and our girls who are now in Russian captivity. It is therefore important that our law enforcement and military also consider this possibility,” Zelensky said in the video address at the time. “We will establish the full truth about all these savages. No matter how much time and effort it takes, we will find them all,” Zelensky said, warning also that Ukrainian forces will capture many more soldiers and Russia sympathizers such as Medvedchuk. He stressed at the time this should be taken as a “warning” – saying, “Let Medvedchuk be an example for you.”

    Below: after Medvedchuk’s arrest, when Ukraine undertook a “purge” of influential Ukrainians who were seen as Kremlin sympathizers…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Videos have been circulating late Wednesday into Thursday showing scenes of each side’s prisoners after having been released…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Some ten foreigners were among those let go by Russia, including Americans and British nationals. Ukraine’s Zelensky is meanwhile doing a victory lap:

    “This is clearly a victory for our state, for our entire society,” Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky said in his nightly address, adding that the swap had been in the works for quite a long time.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Kiev officials are currently alleging that some of those freed Ukrainians show signs of having been tortured. According to further details of what’s being hailed as the biggest and most high-profile prisoner swap thus far in the conflict

    Ten prisoners of war from countries including the United States and Britain were earlier on Wednesday transferred to Saudi Arabia as part of the exchange between Moscow and Kyiv, Zelenskyy said.

    “We have managed to liberate 215 people,” the head of Zelenskyy’s office, Andriy Yermak, announced on television. Zelenskyy said five military commanders including leaders of the defense of the Azovstal steelworks in Mariupol were taken to Türkiye as part of an operation prepared well in advance and agreed with Erdoğan.

    The released prisoners will remain in Türkiye “in total security and in comfortable conditions” until the end of the war, Zelenskyy added.

    Fifty-five Russian servicemen arrived in Russia, captured in the following TASS photo…

    But from Moscow’s point of view, this could serve to accentuate Russia’s battlefield setbacks amid the Ukrainian counteroffensive in the East – given according to some critics its forces should have never been this much on the defensive to the point of having to broker a “bad” deal in the first place.

    The Wall Street Journal in reporting on still-emerging details quoted the following Russian pundits who are outraged:

    Igor Girkin, a former intelligence officer who led pro-Russian militants in a separatist movement in eastern Ukraine in 2014, denounced the release of the Azov commanders as treachery and said it was an insult to those now being mobilized.

    “The release…is worse than a crime…and worse than a mistake. It is incredible stupidity,” he wrote. “It was apparently impossible to do this at least a couple of days before the presidential decree announcing mobilization.”

    …“It is very strange when Russian heroes are met like this. Empty airfield, no flags, no flowers. Not to mention any greeters,” wrote Andrey Medvedev, a journalist who is often quoted by Kremlin supporters.

    And more:

    Dmitry Seleznev, another pro-war blogger who writes for the WarGonzo Telegram channel, was also critical. “I am not personally against Azov fighters being exchanged. But the fact that Azov commanders must now holiday in Turkey for the rest of the special military operation as a condition for their exchange is a bit of a mockery.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A fresh UK tabloid news headline on the swap:

    UK Prime Minister Liz Truss announced, “Hugely welcome news that five British nationals held by Russian-backed proxies in eastern Ukraine are being safely returned, ending months of uncertainty and suffering for them and their families.”

    All of this comes, ironically enough, as conscripts and reservists have been seen lining up ready to board military buses and transport planes in cities and towns across Russia following Putin’s ‘partial mobilization’ order from the day prior, headed to the frontlines in Ukraine.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 18:40

  • 24 Attorneys General Demand Credit Card Companies Drop Plans To Track Gun Sales
    24 Attorneys General Demand Credit Card Companies Drop Plans To Track Gun Sales

    Authored by Tom Ozimek via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Two dozen Republican attorneys general have sent a letter to Visa, Mastercard, and American Express demanding the credit card companies abandon plans to track gun sales in the United States through firearm-specific transaction codes.

    A handgun in a holster in a file photo. (David Ryder/Getty Images)

    Credit card companies face pressure from gun control groups and lawmakers sympathetic to their cause to adopt new merchant category codes (MCC) for firearms, which now fall into the “general merchandise” category.

    This, in turn, was prompted by a decision on the part of the International Organization for Standardization (ISO), a Switzerland-based group that sets and monitors quality standards for various industries, to establish firearm-specific codes.

    Reacting to the ISO decision, Visa said in a statement that it would “proceed with next steps, while ensuring we protect all legal commerce on the Visa network in accordance with our long-standing rules.”

    The National Rifle Association (NRA) criticized the shift, calling it an erosion of Second Amendment rights.

    The decision to create a firearm-specific code is nothing more than a capitulation to anti-gun politicians and activists bent on eroding the rights of law-abiding Americans, one transaction at a time,” an NRA spokesperson said.

    More pushback against the adoption of firearm-specific codes came in the form of a Sept. 20 letter penned by 24 Republican attorneys general.

    In the letter, the attorneys general argued that the new codes won’t protect public safety, unfairly single out law-abiding merchants and customers, and are prone to being misused.

    “First, efforts to track and monitor sales at gun stores would only result in vague and misleading information. This categorization would not recognize the difference, for example, between the purchase of a gun safe and a firearm,” they wrote.

    The codes also wouldn’t capture gun sales at department stores and so would result in “arbitrarily disparate treatment” targeting sellers and buyers at gun stores.

    “More importantly, purposefully tracking this information can only result in its misuse, either unintentional or deliberate,” the attorneys general wrote.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 18:20

  • The Mobilization Begins – Scenes Around Russia: "What Are We Going For?"
    The Mobilization Begins – Scenes Around Russia: “What Are We Going For?”

    The day after President Putin’s partial mobilization order – wherein at least 300,000 Russian reservists have been called up – was met Thursday with some scenes of enthusiasm in Moscow, but also many instances of frustration and confusion in various parts of the country.

    “Summons delivered to eligible men at midnight. Schoolteachers pressed into handing out draft notices. Men given an hour to pack their things and appear at draft centers,” The Guardian observed. “Women sobbing as they sent their husbands and sons off to fight in Russia’s war in Ukraine.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Putin’s speech had cited a “threat to the territorial integrity” of Russia, but in some places sparked immediate protest by local anti-war voices who complain that the country’s young men will be sent to front lines in Ukraine as “cannon fodder”.

    This as Russian airports continue to be packed, and tickets abroad reportedly sold out for days or even weeks, as people with means exit the country on fears of being sent to fight…

    Thousands of men across Russia were handed draft papers and NGOs helping conscripts were flooded with requests for help Thursday amid the military mobilization launched by President Vladimir Putin to provide extra manpower for the Ukraine war,” The Moscow Times reports Thursday.

    “One Muscovite who was detained with her husband at an anti-mobilization demonstration told The Moscow Times that male protesters were given draft papers at the police station.”

    Footage of men lined up on the tarmac of a military airbase, wearing civilian clothes while toting military gear bags, has emerged and was circulated on social media after being published by regional outlet Mash.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to a further description of another scene wherein a Moscow woman watched her husband leave for war:  

    “There was a military recruiting officer who gave the detained men draft notifications,” she told The Moscow Times. 

    “When the first person was asked to go to a separate room, we did not understand what was going on — but when he returned with a draft slip, we just started crying.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Recruitment and mobilization has reportedly been met with some pushback and controversy particularly in outlying ethnic minority regions of the Russian Federation.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Another regional report described of some clips being widely shared:

    One video, reportedly taken in Yakutia, shows the management of local companies summoning their workers and loading them onto buses heading to recruitment offices.

    Another video, taken in the province of Zabaykalsky Krai, north of Mongolia, shows local military enlistment officers “collecting cannon fodder” late at night.

    Videos from Chechnya have also appeared. Local warlord Ramzan Kadyrov has seemingly decided to implement Putin’s decree as quickly as possible, gathering several hundred young men.

    Tickets for travel abroad have skyrocketed in price, with most being for one-way flights out of the country. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Associated Press has meanwhile reported of ongoing anti-war protests popping up in various locales across the country, particularly in large cities

    As protest calls circulated online, the Moscow prosecutor’s office warned that organizing or participating in such actions could lead to up to 15 years in prison. Authorities issued similar warnings ahead of other protests recently. Wednesday’s were the first nationwide anti-war protests since the fighting began in late February.

    The state communication watchdog Roskomnadzor also warned media that access to their websites would be blocked for transmitting “false information” about the mobilization. It was unclear exactly what that meant.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Protests have been filmed in and around Moscow and St. Petersburg Wednesday night into Thursday, with hundreds of arrests reported…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    One activist group was cited in The Guardian as saying of Putin’s Wednesday speech and military order related to Ukraine mobilization, “It’s not a partial mobilization, it’s a 100% mobilization.” 

    Men boarding buses in the Belgorod region after being handed their orders…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Writes The Guardian: “During a televised interview on Wednesday, Shoigu said Russia would be targeting 300,000 draftees, mainly those with recent military experience. But the actual number in an order signed by Putin is secret.”

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 09/22/2022 – 18:00

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 22nd September 2022

  • Should We Be Worried About The Next (Digital) Apocalypse?
    Should We Be Worried About The Next (Digital) Apocalypse?

    Authored by Alexandra Marshall via The Epoch Times,

    Everyone loves a good apocalypse, and in 2022, there’s an end-times for everyone.

    Some apocalypses are fictional—great for corporate lobbying and political ambition. Others are overplayed as a “get rich quick” scheme that vanishes without explanation.

    But the real apocalypses, the ones that pose a genuine threat to civilisation, rarely make it to print. After all, there’s a difference between fear and terror, and no sensible politician wants to start a panic.

    Societies built on technology become vulnerable to its flaws in the same way desert empires fear cloudless skies.

    At the rate human civilisation is evolving, a true digital catastrophe would likely cause a Year Zero event, an epoch defined by digital darkness.

    If important data was lost—assets wiped and identity data destroyed—there would be a resetting of civilisation. However, it would be foolish to imagine human beings can recover as quickly as a computer operating system.

    Humanity has come close to digital calamity before, but not since crawling into the womb of Silicon Valley.

    The digital revolution happened within a single lifetime, and we find ourselves in the difficult position of wanting to embrace technology without ending up imprisoned by it.

    While we are busy avoiding virtual mouse traps laid by the government, we must take care to keep redundancies within society to protect against inevitable periods of digital failure. After all, one week without power is enough to send advanced cities into ruin.

    The next digital apocalypse will not be stopped by teams of sweaty programmers, red-eyed and shaking in the din of the world’s server rooms.

    The Y2K Bug

    Some of us are old enough to remember when an innocent mistake from the dawning age of computers created panic in 1999.

    The “Y2K bug” was a simple flaw in the handling of dates during calculations when four-digit dates were truncated into two digits to save space. This was fine from 1960 to 1999, but as the year 2000 approached, programmers had to stop procrastinating and patch the error which threatened the security of everything from banking to nuclear power plants, airliners, factory machinery, and the commercial world, while satellite systems and GPS posed a physical risk to safety.

    Missile Commanders Lt. (L) and Lt. Col. Ken Reed confirm a launch warning over the phone during a practice drill at the North America Aerospace Defense Command (NORAD) Cheyenne Mountain Complex in Colorado Springs, Colo., Nov. 9, 1999. (Mark Leffingwell/AFP via Getty Images)

    The tech industry was all at sea during this time, fixing micro-cracks on a listing cruise liner. It was an odd apocalypse because if you were not a programmer, there was nothing you could do.

    Unlike the “bend the knee” mantra of climate change, the December of 1999 ended with an almost Norse fatalism culminating in a massive party beneath the Sydney Harbour Bridge (at least in Australia).

    The crowd was covered in glitter, neon glow sticks, and outrageous heart-antenna headbands—three sheets to the wind on champagne. Most expected their city to go black and for the world’s computers to cough and die.

    They didn’t. Those programmers worked to the last stroke of midnight. The bridge erupted in colourful plumes of gunpowder. The apocalypse was so uneventful that 22 years on, there are articles wrongly dismissing the danger.

    No one had anything to gain from the Y2K bug. It was a pest ruthlessly exterminated by every government. (Shhhh. Let’s not talk about the year 2038 problem).

    The Next Digital Apocalypse May Lead to a ‘Great Reset’

    If the next long-prophesied digital apocalypse proves advantageous for those hoping to “reset” the global economy, our data may be sacrificed to serve “the greater good.”

    A catastrophic loss of data would require a “fair system” of recovery—a “re-distribution” of assets, like a toddler knocking over a Monopoly board only for the parents to “fairly” put the houses back on all the squares regardless of who bought them. Those in dispute are gifted to the bank. Depending on a nation’s debt, loan-forgiveness in exchange for property acquisition is likely.

    A digital apocalypse of this scale would probably arise from physical damage to the world’s largest server farms rather than cyber warfare. It’s much more effective to flatten a building, cut a cable, or even sustain a natural occurrence such as the Carrington Event of 1859.

    An unstable energy grid, while not permanently destructive, would induce periods of digital interference that may alter our dependence on high-tech solutions in our economy.

    In the real world, retailers are quick to switch to cash after an hour of blackouts.

    If the tech community is honest with the public, the next digital apocalypse will not be malicious attacks from our friends in North Korea. It won’t be a gremlin from the 70s chewing on the cords nor a Nigerian Prince with a recently deceased relative.

    Our apocalypse will be conducted in the halls of Parliament, designed by lobbyists and politicians who are rapidly transforming the digital world into an intangible prison block.

    The loss of citizen control over the digital realm, replaced by the desires of the state, is an apocalypse humanity can never recover from. It would be the end of the free market Eden that forged our greatest technological achievements.

    In its place, we will find an arms race of control that extends into our thoughts and beneath our skin.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 23:40

  • Mapping The Biggest Tech Talent Hubs In The US & Canada
    Mapping The Biggest Tech Talent Hubs In The US & Canada

    The tech workforce just keeps growing. In fact, there are now an estimated 6.5 million tech workers between the U.S. and Canada – 5.5 million of which work in the United States.

    This infographic, via Visual Capitalist’s Nick Routley, draws from a report by CBRE to determine which tech talent markets in the U.S. and Canada are the largest. The data looks at total workforce in the sector, as well as the change in tech worker population over time in various cities.

    The report also classifies which metro areas and regions can rightly be considered tech hubs in the first place, by looking at a variety of factors including cost of living, average educational attainment, and tech employment levels as a share of different industries.

    The Top Tech Hubs in the U.S.

    Silicon Valley, in California’s Bay Area, remains the most prominent (and expensive) U.S. tech hub, with a talent pool of nearly 380,000 tech workers.

    Here’s a look at the top tech talent markets in the country in terms of total worker population:

    America’s large, coastal cities still contain the lion’s share of tech talent, but mid-sized tech hubs like Salt Lake City, Portland, and Denver have put up strong growth numbers in recent years. Seattle, which is home to both Amazon and Microsoft, posted an impressive 32% growth rate over the last five years.

    Emerging tech hubs include areas like Raleigh-Durham. The two cities have nearly 70,000 employed tech workers and a strong talent pipeline, seeing a 28% increase in degree completions in fields like Math/Statistics and Computer Engineering year-over-year to 2020. In fact, the entire state of North Carolina is becoming an increasingly attractive business hub.

    Houston was the one city on this list that had a negative growth rate, at -2%.

    The Top Tech Hubs in Canada

    Tech giants like Google, Meta, and Amazon are continuously and aggressively growing their presence in Canada, further solidifying the country’s status as the next big destination for tech talent. Here are the country’s four tech hubs with a total worker population of more than 50,000:

    Toronto saw the most absolute growth tech positions in 2021, adding 88,900 jobs. The tech sector in Canada’s largest city has seen a lot of momentum in recent years, and is now ranked by CBRE as North America’s #3 tech hub, after the SF Bay Area and Seattle.

    Vancouver’s tech talent population increased the most from its original figure, climbing 63%. Seattle-based companies like Microsoft and Amazon have established sizable offices in the city, adding to the already thriving tech scene. Furthermore, Google is set to build a submarine high-speed fiber optic cable connecting Canada to Asia, with a terminus in Vancouver.

    Not to be left behind, Ottawa has also taken giant strides to increase their tech talent and stamp their presence. The country’s capital even has the highest concentration of tech employment in its workforce, thanks in part to the success of Shopify.

    The small, but well-known tech hub of Waterloo also had a very high concentration on tech employment (9.6%). The region has seen its tech workforce grow by 8% over the past five years.

    Six out of the top 10 cities by tech workforce concentration are located in Canada.

    Evolution of Tech Hubs

    The post-COVID era has seen a shifting definition of what a tech hub means. It’s clear that remote work is here to stay, and as workers migrate to chase affordability and comfort, traditional tech hubs are seeing some decline — or at least slower growth — in their population of tech workers.

    While it isn’t evident that there is a mass exodus of tech talent from traditional coastal hubs, the rise in high-paying tech jobs in smaller markets across the country could point to a trend and is positive for the industry.

    While more workers with great talent, resources, and education continue to opt for cost-friendly places to reside and work remotely, will newer markets like Charlotte, Tennessee, and Calgary see a rise of tech companies, or will large corporations and startups alike continue to opt for the larger cities on the coast?

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 23:20

  • Ed Snowden: America's Open Wound – The CIA Is Not Your Friend
    Ed Snowden: America’s Open Wound – The CIA Is Not Your Friend

    Authored by Edward Snowden via ‘Continuing Ed’ Substack,

    “Better that right counsels be known to enemies than that the evil secrets of tyrants should be concealed from the citizens. They who can treat secretly of the affairs of a nation have it absolutely under their authority; and as they plot against the enemy in time of war, so do they against the citizens in time of peace.”

    – Baruch Spinoza

    It hasn’t been a month since President Biden mounted the steps of Philadelphia’s Independence Hall, declaring it his duty to ensure each of us understands the central faction of his political opposition are extremists that “threaten the very foundations of our Republic.” Flanked by the uniformed icons of his military and standing atop a Leni Riefenstahl stage, the leader clenched his fists to illustrate seizing the future from the forces of “fear, division, and darkness.” The words falling from the teleprompter ran rich with the language of violence, a “dagger at the throat” emerging from the “shadow of lies.”

    “What’s happening in our country,” the President said, “is not normal.”

    Is he wrong to think that? The question the speech intended to raise—the one lost in the unintentionally villainous pageantry—is whether and how we are to continue as a democracy and a nation of laws. For all the Twitter arguments over Biden’s propositions, there has been little consideration of his premises.

    Democracy and the rule of law have been so frequently invoked as a part of the American political brand that we simply take it for granted that we enjoy both.

    Are we right to think that?

    Our glittering nation of laws observes this year two birthdays: the 70th anniversary of the National Security Agency, on which my thoughts have been recorded, and the 75th anniversary of the Central Intelligence Agency.

    The CIA was founded in the wake of the 1947 National Security Act. The Act foresaw no need for the Courts and Congress to oversee a simple information-aggregation facility, and therefore subordinated it exclusively to the President, through the National Security Council he controls.

    Within a year, the young agency had already slipped the leash of its intended role of intelligence collection and analysis to establish a covert operations division. Within a decade, the CIA was directing the coverage of American news organizations, overthrowing democratically elected governments (at times merely to benefit a favored corporation), establishing propaganda outfits to manipulate public sentiment, launching a long-running series of mind-control experiments on unwitting human subjects (purportedly contributing to the creation of the Unabomber), and—gaspinterfering with foreign elections. From there, it was a short hop to wiretapping journalists and compiling files on Americans who opposed its wars.

    In 1963, no less than former President Harry Truman confessed that the very agency he personally signed into law had transformed into something altogether different than he intended, writing:

    “For some time I have been disturbed by the way CIA has been diverted from its original assignment. It has become an operational and at times a policy-making arm of the Government. This has led to trouble…”

    Many today comfort themselves by imagining that the Agency has been reformed, and that such abuses are relics of the distant past, but what few reforms our democracy has won have been watered-down or compromised. The limited “Intelligence Oversight” role that was eventually conceded to Congress in order to placate the public has never been taken seriously by either the committee’s majority—which prefers cheerleading over investigating—or by the Agency itself, which continues to conceal politically-sensitive operations from the very group most likely to defend them.

    “Congress should have been told,” said [Senator] Dianne Feinstein. “We should have been briefed before the commencement of this kind of sensitive program. Director Panetta… was told that the vice president had ordered that the program not be briefed to Congress.”

    How can we judge the ultimate effectiveness of oversight and reforms? Well, the CIA plotted to assassinate my friend, American whistleblower Daniel Ellsberg, in 1972, yet nearly fifty years of “reforms” did little to inhibit them from recently sketching out another political murder targeting Julian Assange. Putting that in perspective, you probably own shoes older than the CIA’s most recent plot to murder a dissident… or rather the most recent plot that we know of.

    If you believe the Assange case to be a historical anomaly, some aberration unique to Trump White House, recall that the CIA’s killings have continued in series across administrations. Obama ordered the killing of an American far from any battlefield, and killed his 16 year-old American son a few weeks later, but the man’s American daughter was still alive by the time Obama left.

    Within a month of entering the White House, Trump killed her.

    She was 8 years old.

    Nawar al-Awlaki

    It goes beyond assassinations. Within recent memory, the CIA captured Gul Rahman, who we know was not Al-Qaeda, but it seems did save the life of Afghanistan’s future (pro-US) President. Rahman was placed in what the Agency described as a “dungeon” and tortured until he died.

    They stripped him naked, save a diaper he couldn’t change, in a cold so wicked that his guards, in their warm clothes, ran heaters for themselves. In absolute darkness, they bolted his hands and feet to a single point on the floor with a very short chain so that it was impossible to stand or lie down – a practice called “short shackling” – and after he died, claimed that it was for his own safety. They admit to beating him, even describing the “forceful punches.” They describe the blood that ran from his nose and mouth as he died.

    Short-shackling, as described by survivors

    Just pages later, in their formal conclusion, declare that there was no evidence of beating. There was no evidence torture. The CIA ascribes responsibility for his death to hypothermia, which they blamed on him for the crime of refusing, on his final night, a meal from the men that killed him.

    The CIA claimed the complaints of a man they tortured to death — regarding the violation of his human rights — were evidence of a “sophisticated level of resistance training.”

    In the aftermath, the Agency concealed the death of Gul Rahman from his family. To this day, they refuse to reveal what happened to his remains, denying those who survive him a burial, or even some locus of mourning.

    Ten years after the torture program investigated, exposed, and ended, no one was charged for their role in these crimes. The man responsible for Rahman’s death was recommended for a $2,500 card award — for “consistently superior work”.

    A different torturer was elevated to the Director’s seat.

    The Judgment of Solomon, Rubens, 1617

    This summer, in a speech marking the occasion of the CIA’s 75th birthday, President Biden struck a quite different note than he did in Philadelphia, reciting what the CIA instructs all presidents: that the soul of the institution really lies in speaking truth to power.

    “We turn to you with the big questions,” Biden said, “the hardest questions. And we count on you to give your best, unvarnished assessment of where we are.  And I emphasize “‘unvarnished.’”

    But this itself is a variety of varnishing — a whitewash.

    For what reason do we aspire to maintain — or achieve — a nation of laws, if not to establish justice?

    Let us say we have a democracy, shining and pure. The people, or in our case some subset of people, institute reasonable laws to which government and citizen alike must answer. The sense of justice that arises within such a society is not produced as a result of the mere presence of law, which can be tyrannical and capricious, or even elections, which face their own troubles, but is rather derived from the reason and fairness of the system that results.

    What would happen if we were to insert into this beautiful nation of laws an extralegal entity that is not directed by the people, but a person: the President? Have we protected the nation’s security, or have we placed it at risk?

    This is the unvarnished truth: the establishment of an institution charged with breaking the law within a nation of laws has mortally wounded its founding precept. 

    From the year it was established, Presidents and their cadres have regularly directed the CIA to go beyond the law for reasons that cannot be justified, and therefore must be concealed — classified. The primary result of the classification system is not an increase in national security, but a decrease in transparency. Without meaningful transparency, there is no accountability, and without accountability, there is no learning.

    The consequences have been deadly, for both Americans and our victims. When the CIA armed the Mujaheddin to wage war on Soviet Afghanistan, we created al-Qaeda’s Osama bin Laden. Ten years later, the CIA is arming, according to then-Vice President Joe Biden, “al-Nusra, and Al-Qaeda and the extremist elements of jihadis coming from other parts of the world.” After the CIA runs a disinformation operation to make life hard for the Soviet Union by fueling a little proxy war, the war rages for twenty-six years — far beyond the Union’s collapse.

    Do you believe that the CIA today — a CIA free from all consequence and accountability — is uninvolved in similar activities? Can you find no presence of their fingerprints in the events of the world, as described in the headlines, that provide cause for concern? Yet it is those who question the wisdom of placing a paramilitary organization beyond the reach of our courts that are dismissed as “naive.”

    For 75 years, the American people have been unable to bend the CIA to fit the law, and so the law has been bent to fit the CIA. As Biden stood on the crimson stage, at the site where the Declaration of Independence and Constitution were debated and adopted, his words rang out like the cry of a cracked-to-hell Liberty Bell: “What’s happening in our country is not normal.”

    If only that were true. 

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 23:00

  • Xi Tells Armed Forces Focus On Preparing For Wars As Geopolitical Flashpoints Intensify 
    Xi Tells Armed Forces Focus On Preparing For Wars As Geopolitical Flashpoints Intensify 

    Coming off last week’s Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO) in Uzbekistan where the two leaders met, the Australian Strategic Policy Institute observes, “Xi has likely sensed the opportunity to use the Sino-Russian ‘no limits’ partnership to extract greater Russian resources from Putin in exchange for China’s continued backing.”

    “Despite his seemingly unimpressed face at the summit, Xi is unlikely to break ties with Putin over the lack of Russian progress in Ukraine. Russia simply remains too important a partner in China’s strategy to challenge the United States’ position in the Indo-Pacific,” the institute’s analysis adds.

    And interesting given the timing, Xi on Wednesday – the same day that Putin declared a ‘partial’ national military mobilization – addressed a national military seminar, telling top officers to focus their attention on gearing up for potential military action on the horizon.

    “It is imperative to conscientiously summarize and apply successful experience in reforms, to master new situations and [understand] the requirements of the tasks, to focus on preparing for wars, and to have the courage to explore and innovate,” Xinhua News Agency quoted the Chinse president as saying.

    He said further at the Beijing-hosted defense conference, which included high-ranking representatives of China’s Central Military Commission (CMC), as well as the People’s Armed Police Force and military academies, that major reforms to the nations armed forces he initiated starting years ago have been successful.

    “Long-standing systemic obstructions, structural incongruities and policy issues in the development of national defense and the armed forces have been resolved,” he told the top defense officials.

    Last week’s SCO conference involved moments where Putin seemed on the defensive, particularly in dialogue with China’s Xi and India’s Modi…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, on Tuesday a pair of Western warships make a provocative sail through of the contested Taiwan Strait, at a moment the PLA military continues its heavy patrol presence surrounding Taiwan in the wake of the early August Pelosi visit, as CNN describes:

    US and Canadian warships sailed through the Taiwan Strait on Tuesday following weekend remarks from President Joe Biden that the US would defend Taiwan in the event it is attacked by China.

    A US Navy ship, the Arleigh Burke-class guided-missile destroyer USS Higgins, conducted a “routine Taiwan Strait transit” on Tuesday, US Navy spokesperson Lt. Mark Langford said in a statement.

    The US ship conducted the transit “in cooperation with Royal Canadian Navy Halifax-class frigate HMCS Vancouver,” Langford said.

    It wasn’t the first time Biden answered with a simple “yes” when pressed on whether the US would defend Taiwan if the island were invaded. 

    He issued the blunt response when asked in a CBS “60 Minutes” interview which aired Sunday what the US reaction would be if China decided to invade Taiwan. “Yes, if, in fact, there was an unprecedented attack,” he said in a sit-down with CBS’ Scott Pelley. Xi no doubt had such provocative comments from the US commander-in-chief fresh on his mind when he addressed Wednesday’s military conference in Beijing.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 22:40

  • Four Reasons Why Dollar Dominance Won't Be Permanent
    Four Reasons Why Dollar Dominance Won’t Be Permanent

    Authored by Mark Nestmann via Nestmann.com,

    We periodically read missives to the effect that “the dollar is doomed.” And we’ve been reading them for many years.

    Consider this newsletter promotion from 1985. The headline was a lot like those we see today: “Get Your Dollars Out of the USA Before Uncle Sam Gets Them Out of You.” The copy predicted an imminent collapse in the US dollar’s value, along with hyperinflation.

    Of course, neither of these things happened in 1985 … or over the next 37 years. Given this, you can understand why we tend to be skeptical when we read breathless pronouncements of impending gloom and doom for the greenback.

    That’s especially true because at the moment, the dollar is surging in value. It’s at a 20-year high against the euro; a 24-year high against the Japanese yen; and a 37-year high against the British pound.

    And we wouldn’t be surprised if the dollar strengthens further in the next few months, especially if the Federal Reserve follows through on its promises to continue raising interest rates.

    But behind the scenes, the dollar looks more vulnerable.

    We see four trends pointing the way.

    First, while the dollar is effectively the world’s reserve currency, its share of global central bank currency reserves has been steadily shrinking for many years.

    Today, about 59% of global central bank currency reserves are held in dollars. But in 2000, that number was 70%.  

    Second, American politicians have grossly abused the dollar’s privileged status.

    One way they’ve done so is to borrow trillions of dollars to finance the country’s welfare-warfare state while simultaneously cutting taxes. No matter how much money its politicians borrow, central banks still need to accumulate dollars since so many global transactions are settled in dollars. Companies everywhere that conduct business internationally need to exchange their local currencies into dollars to pay for goods and services.

    Third, Uncle Sam persists in using the dollar as a hammer to hold over the heads of its adversaries.  

    One form this hammer takes is US domination of the international payments settlement system called SWIFT – the Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunication. This organization offers over 11,000 financial institutions in more than 200 countries a network enabling them to send and receive payment orders – mainly dollars – in a secure, standardized format.

    Even though SWIFT is headquartered in Belgium, Uncle Sam has a great deal of influence over it. Thus, we anticipated that within days of Russia’s invasion of Ukraine earlier this year, SWIFT ejected most Russian banks from its network. Russia now joins Iran and North Korea as countries effectively isolated from the global dollar clearing network.

    Fourth, the targets of US sanctions are taking steps to de-dollarize.

    We wrote about some of them in this article last year. Since then, Russia and China have taken steps to end the use of dollars altogether. The latest initiative in this direction occurred in June at the 14th BRICS summit. BRICS – an acronym for the countries of Brazil, Russia, India, China, and South Africa – isn’t an organization as such, but rather a group of countries pursuing common goals. High on the list of those goals, as Chinese President Xi stated in his keynote speech:

    We should expand BRICS cooperation on cross-border payment … to facilitate trade, investment, and financing among our countries.

    Russian President Putin disclosed another crucial BRICS objective – setting up a new global reserve currency. It would consist of a basket of BRICS countries’ currencies.

    It’s unlikely any of these initiatives pose any short-term threat to the dollar. Yet, the BRICS countries collectively account for 41% of global population, 24% of global GDP, and 16% of global trade.

    Meanwhile, Americans are enjoying the effects of having the dollar riding high. For instance, they’re flocking to Europe to buy real estate. The hottest markets at the moment for buyers with fistfuls of dollars are in France (Paris and Provence); Italy (Tuscany and the Lake Como region); Portugal (Lisbon); and England (London).

    The dollar’s run-up in value has also led to a prolonged decline in values of gold and silver. So far in 2022, gold has lost nearly 6% of its value; silver nearly 19%.

    Still, gold’s performance is noteworthy, since the US Dollar Index, which tracks the strength of the dollar against a trade-weighted basket of foreign currencies, is up more than 14% for the year.

    It’s anyone’s guess if the continuing efforts to dethrone the dollar’s reserve currency status will be successful, and when. But one thing is for sure. Eventually, the dollar is fated to join the long list of fiat currencies (i.e., currencies backed only by the governments that issued them rather than by a tangible asset such as gold) that have been debased out of existence.

    On its way out, you’ll see even higher inflationbail-ins, and exchange controls.

    It’s only a matter of time. Make sure you’re ready when it comes.

    *  *  *

    On another note, many clients first get to know us by accessing some of our well-researched courses and reports on important topics that affect you. Like How to Go Offshore in 2022, for example. It tells the story of John and Kathy, a couple we helped from the heartland of America. You’ll learn how we helped them go offshore and protect their nestegg from ambulance chasers, government fiat and the decline of the US Dollar… and access a whole new world of opportunities not available in the US. Simply click here to register for this free program.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 22:20

  • World's Highest Penthouse Listed For Record $250 Million
    World’s Highest Penthouse Listed For Record $250 Million

    A housing reset is underway and will soon affect home prices. Before the bottom falls out of the market, a penthouse apartment at New York’s Central Park Tower, the world’s tallest residential condominium, at 1,550 feet high, aims to be the country’s highest-ever home sale price. 

    WSJ reported that the 17,500-square feet penthouse is a staggering 1,400 feet above city streets and has a whopping $250 million asking price.  

    Extell Development’s Gary Barnett priced the deal while the real estate market still holds up, but signs of soaring mortgage rates indicate trouble ahead. Suppose he lands a buyer before the housing market corrects. It could end up being the most expensive home ever sold, surpassing hedge billionaire Ken Griffin’s $238 million condo across the street at 220 Central Park South. 

    Listing agent Ryan Serhant of Serhant said, “the uber-wealthy are looking for places to diversify assets, and real estate has become one of the most popular and sought-after mega-assets.” 

    Serhant said the price tag comes with a penthouse designed as one entire unit and the only one on top of the building. He said it has unobstructed views, unlike Griffin’s pad. 

    At $250 million, Barnett said it seems expensive but a relative bargain when breaking down square feet into dollar amounts, coming in at around $15,000 a square foot. He said that’s cheaper than buyers paid at Vornado Realty Trust’s 220 Central Park South. As well as Saudi billionaire Fawaz Al Hokair’s 432 Park Avenue condo, which was recently listed for more than $20,000 a square foot. 

    Barnett said instead of owning a piece of “artwork going for $100 million and even $200 million,” why not own “17,000 feet of steel and brick and glass at the top of the world, this seems like a relative bargain.” 

    If Serhant can find a buyer for Barnett at the $250 million asking price, it would beat out Griffin and other billionaires who’ve recently splurged on mansions. 

    The most expensive house to ever be listed is just another sign of a market top. 

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 22:00

  • The "Stunning Success" Of The Green Revolution Is Yet Another Progressive Myth
    The “Stunning Success” Of The Green Revolution Is Yet Another Progressive Myth

    Authored by Kristoffer Mousten Hansen via The Mises Institute,

    One of the key myths of the twentieth century is the benign role played by international, American-led institutions after the Second World War. American liberals/progressives, fresh from imposing the New Deal in the thirties and planning and directing a world war, turned their eyes to international affairs: the United States had a world historic mission of messianic proportions: lifting developing countries into modernity by remaking them (and all other countries, for that matter) in America’s own image.

    The Cold War era was rife with projects and organizations to carry out this vision, from Bretton Woods and the International Monetary Fund (IMF) in the area of international finance to the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) in military affairs to the CIA-funded Congress for Cultural Freedom used to spread progressive, US-friendly propaganda. These organizations all had mainly deleterious influences—I have previously indicated how Bretton Woods and the modern international financial system can best be described as financial imperialism—but in one area American interventionism is to this day universally acclaimed as benign: the Green Revolution.

    The Official History of the Green Revolution

    Population growth was considered a major problem in the sixties. Paul Ehrlich of Stanford University in his 1968 Population Bomb predicted widespread hunger as soon as the 1970s and advocated immediate action to limit population growth. The world simply could not feed a larger human population. Although mainly focused on environmental damage from pesticide use, Rachel Carson’s famous 1962 book, Silent Spring, made similar points. Human population was bound to continue to grow, and this would result in untold suffering and environmental damage.

    A key and imminent danger in the 1960s was India: always on the verge on starvation, only massive imports of American wheat kept the specter of mass death away. Then, in 1965, catastrophe struck: drought across most of the subcontinent caused the Indian harvest to fail. As the drought continued into the two following years, it appeared that Ehrlich’s and the other Neo-Malthusians’ predictions had come true.

    Then, a miracle happened: in stepped a man, a veritable demigod, to judge by the worship lavished on him by contemporary normies. Norman E. Borlaug, the father of the Green Revolution, had since the forties been researching and breeding new wheat varieties in Mexico, initially funded by the Rockefeller Foundation and after 1964 as leader of the International Maize and Wheat Improvement Center (Centro Internacional de Mejoramiento de Maíz y Trigo, CIMMYT, initially funded by the Rockefeller and Ford Foundations and the Mexican government).

    Borlaug bred high-yielding dwarf wheat varieties that were widely adapted to different ecological environments. Since the early sixties, he had been working with M.S. Swaminathan of the Indian Agricultural Research Institute, and together they planted Borlaug’s new dwarf wheat varieties in northern India. Success was immediate: 1968 returned a bumper crop, as the new wheat yields were the highest ever recorded in India.

    It appeared that the population doomers had been wrong. So said Borlaug himself when he in 1970 received the Nobel Peace Prize: in his acceptance speech, he proclaimed victory in the perpetual war between “two opposing forces, the scientific power of food production and the biologic power of human reproduction.” But the war was not over, he warned, and only continuous funding for technological research into food production and limits on reproduction could avert disaster.

    Governments and philanthropists rose to the challenge, and capital poured into agricultural research of the Borlaugian variety as new international institutes were set up to continue the work Borlaug had begun in Mexico and in collaboration with the International Rice Research Institute in the Philippines (founded in 1960). The Green Revolution eradicated the scourge of famine, and since agriculture with Borlaugian technology had much higher yields, masses of land were liberated from agricultural use and returned to nature. A 2021 study in the Journal of Political Economy estimates that gross domestic product (GDP) per capita in the developing world would have been up to 50 percent lower had it not been for Borlaug, Swaminathan and the other international Brahmins ready and willing to guide the unwashed masses of ignorant peasants.

    There is a twofold problem with this account of agricultural history: it is based on bad economics, and its connection to the actual history of Indian agriculture is tangential at best.

    The Green Revolutionaries’ Bad Economics

    Celebrating the Green Revolution rests on two fundamental errors in economic reasoning: Malthusianism and misunderstanding agricultural economics.

    Malthusianism is the mistaken belief that human population will grow faster than the food supply; in Thomas Malthus’s formulation, population growth follows a geometric progression (2, 4, 8, 16 …) and food supply an arithmetic progression (2, 3, 4, 5 …). As a result, mankind is destined, apart from brief periods, to live at the margin of subsistence: only disease, war, and famine will limit population growth.

    The problem with Malthusianism is that it’s completely wrong, both as a matter of theory and of historical record. For one, food production and population growth are clearly not independent variables, since human labor is a key input in food production, a point made by Joseph A. Schumpeter. More fundamentally, as Ludwig von Mises explained, the Malthusian law of population is only a biological law—it is true for all animal species, but men are not simply animals. With the use of reason, they can refrain from mindless procreative activity, and they will do so if they themselves must support the result of said activity. Malthus himself clearly saw this and amended his theory in the second and later editions of his famous Essay on the Principle of Population (Frédéric Bastiat, as is his wont, has a much better and more optimistic explanation of the population principle).

    Neither do the technophiliacs understand the economics of agriculture and food production. Ester Boserup, who is a key inspiration for the following brief explanation, developed the correct understanding of this issue in the 1960s, after studying Indian farming. The ignorance of Borlaug and company and their cheerleaders today and in the past is thus hardly excusable: the exact same historical conditions that they saw as “Malthusian,” after all, inspired Boserup to lay out the correct understanding of the matter.

    As population grows, the labor supply expands, and more labor is applied to agricultural plots. The land’s yield therefore increases, although the returns on additional labor input diminish—as per the law of returns. Once the return on additional labor input is insufficient to justify it, new land is instead brought into cultivation, and once the land has been cleared, the physical productivity of labor increases. Since clearing new land requires some additional effort, farmers always have to weigh the potential returns from new lands versus the returns from more intensive cultivation of already cleared lands.

    We can see this clearly in monetary terms: as more labor is applied to working the land, wages fall and land rents rise. As land rents and land values rise, the potential value of unsettled lands increases, and as wages fall, the expenditure needed to clear the land falls. Once the expected return on new lands outweighs the estimated cost of bringing it into cultivation, labor will be applied to clearing new lands. Then land rents will fall and wages rise until bringing more land into agricultural use is no longer deemed profitable.

    Thus, population and food production expand in unison, sometimes due to more intensive cultivation, sometimes due to an increase in the area cultivated. The same analysis holds under more capitalistic conditions (i.e., when farmers have more tools and other capital inputs available): the return on applying more capital goods to present land is compared to potential returns from applying capital goods to expanding the cultivated land area. Even the most primitive form of agriculture is, of course, capitalistic, as agriculture is a roundabout production process, in which productive effort is widely separated in time from valuable output.

    Indian agriculture in the 1960s functioned well, except when it was impeded by government meddling and institutional barriers. Such meddling can be extremely destructive, as Mao Zedong had shown in China just a few years previously during the Great Leap Forward. However, there was nothing Malthusian about that episode nor, as we shall see, about the alleged famine in India in the 1960s.

    The 1960s Indian Famine: Bad History

    The 1960s famine in India launched the Green Revolution and the international fame of its main protagonist, Norman Borlaug. From the outset, however, the narrative was skewed by political considerations.

    American agriculture was heavily subsidized in the sixties, resulting in huge surplus production. This surplus could not be sold at the market price, at least not without bankrupting American farmers. Under typical interventionist logic, the American government intervened to subsidize the export of American farm products to maintain an artificially high price in the domestic market.

    India was thereby inundated by cheap American wheat in the early sixties, but as G.D. Stone writes, this did not alleviate India’s food shortages—it caused them. In a simple case of farmers adjusting to their comparative advantage, Indians shifted their production to cash crops (such as sugarcane and jute) for export and thereby financed their imports of cheap American grain.

    The drought of 1965 and the following years was real enough, but its impact was not simply a failure of food crops. The jute and sugarcane crops suffered, leading to real hardship for agricultural laborers. But this hardship never amounted to widespread famine. This did not matter for the narrative, however: in 1965, the American president, Lyndon B. Johnson, was trying to get Congress to approve a new farm bill with increased subsidies for agricultural exports and foreign aid in the shape of the Food for Peace plan. Reports of Indian drought were a godsend: faced with a recalcitrant Congress, Johnson played up the specter of drought and mass starvation. His legislation duly passed, and even more American grain was shipped to India, which doubtlessly did help alleviate some hardship in the short term.

    Playing up the dire situation in India naturally also fed the agenda of Borlaug and company. The special wheat varieties bred in Mexico were widely introduced across northern India, and as the drought conveniently ended, the first harvest yielded a massive crop. Borlaug took credit, quite undisturbed by the coincidence that nearly all crop yields were at record levels in India and in neighboring China. The alleged success of American technocracy also played into the wider political narrative of American progressive leadership of the “free world”: in 1968, the administrator of the United States Agency for International Development (USAID), William Gaud, addressed the Society for International Development in Washington, DC, claiming that foreign aid and wise agricultural policies had fostered “a new revolution. Not a violent Red Revolution like that of the Soviets, nor is it a White Revolution like that of the Shah of Iran. I call it the Green Revolution.”

    The Green Revolution, led by government and NGO technocrats and financed mainly by Western development agencies, was off to the races. The breeding of hybrid rice and wheat varieties by the International Rice Research Institute and CIMMYT, respectively, was the flagship of modernity in farming. But even on its own terms, this is misleading at best. What happened was that agriculture in the developed world as well as in the West shifted to a very intensive cultivation that required a lot of capital inputs. Borlaug’s wheat varieties are a case in point, as Stone points out: only when large amounts of fertilizer were applied did these varieties outyield native Indian tall wheats. Technologies, it turns out, are not exogenous forces that are simply imposed and reshape the environment. The local people had developed crops and techniques suited to their situation, and it’s unlikely that Borlaug’s wheat would have been widely used had the Indian government (and foreign aid agencies) not at the same time massively subsidized the use of fertilizer and the construction of new irrigation systems.

    The Reality of the Green Revolution

    A last line of defense for the proponents of the Green Revolution’s benefits is that it has resulted in efficient food production, liberated labor for nonagricultural work, and that we can now go on to use modern genetic technologies to increase the quality of food and avoid malnutrition. Thus, for example, otherwise sensible people like Bjørn Lomborg have long championed the introduction of “golden rice”—a rice variety genetically engineered to be high in vitamin A—as a solution to malnutrition in rice-growing countries.

    But the technocrats and their cheerleaders forget to mention or ignore the fact that the Green Revolution has itself been a cause of malnutrition. As wheat yields increased in India according to Stone, for instance, the relative price of wheat declined, and wheat thereby outcompeted alternative food sources rich in protein and micronutrients. Malnutrition rates in India thereby rose as a direct result of the Green Revolution. A similar development occurred in developed countries, for different but analogous reasons.

    When it comes to technology freeing up labor, what has really happened is that overinvestment of capital in agriculture has reduced the demand for agricultural labor, but this has not increased the demand for labor elsewhere. On the contrary, since less capital is available for investment in nonagricultural sectors, the demand for labor and wages elsewhere has not risen. Thus, the Green Revolution has been an important contributing factor in the growth of third-world slums where people subsist on low-paying jobs and government handouts.

    All in all, as we should expect when dealing with technocrats driven by progressive hubris to intervene in the economy’s natural development, the Green Revolution was not a blessing, the victory of wise scientists over the propensity of stupid peasants to breed uncontrollably. Rather, it has been an ecological, nutritional, and social disaster.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 21:40

  • Tesla To Unveil "Optimus" Robot At Upcoming September 30th AI Event
    Tesla To Unveil “Optimus” Robot At Upcoming September 30th AI Event

    Call us not quite surprised that Elon Musk has amassed his fair share of skeptics over the last few years. And these skeptics are likely going to be in full force now that Tesla is getting ready to unveil its “Optimus” robot. 

    With a plan to “deploy thousands of humanoid robots” called Tesla Bots within its factories, “buzz” is reportedly building inside Tesla about the prospect of the auto company branching out into robotics, according to a new Reuters report

    Elon Musk has said the longer term goal for such robots would be for use “in homes, making dinner, mowing the lawn and caring for the elderly people” – and lets not forget also as a “sex partner”, according to the report. 

    In fact, Musk has speculated that the company’s robotics business could eventually be worth more than the company’s current car business – a carrot on a stick for investors and just the type of forward looking statement you’d want to make if trying to prop up a company’s already aggressive valuation. 

    Coming on September 30, Tesla plans to unveil a prototype of the robot at its “AI Day”, the report says. Not unlike the case with autonomous driving and rockets that land themselves, humanoid robots have already been under development for “decades” by companies like Honda Motor Co and Hyundai Motor Co’s Boston Dynamics unit.

    The lead of NASA’s Dexterous Robotics Team, Shaun Azimi, told Reuters: “Self-driving cars weren’t really proved to be as easy as anyone thought. And it’s the same way with humanoid robots to some extent.”

    Azimi continued: “If something unexpected happens, being flexible and robust to those kinds of changes is very difficult.”

    Musk has claimed the robots will perform boring and dangerous jobs, and that the company can leverage its expertise in AI to build robots at scale. “The code you will write will at term run in millions of humanoid robots across the world, and will therefore be held to high quality standards,” a recent job listing for robot designers said. 

    Recall, it was at an autonomy event in 2019 that Musk promised 1 million robotaxis on the road by 2020. None of those have materialized as we head toward 2023. As such, skepticism about Tesla’s robot is high going into the event. 

    Nancy Cooke, a professor in human systems engineering at Arizona State University, says Musk will need to show robots doing multiple unscripted actions to be taken seriously. She commented: “If he just gets the robot to walk around, or he gets the robots to dance, that’s already been done. That’s not that impressive.”

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 21:20

  • Jim Beam Is Making Renewable Gas From Bourbon
    Jim Beam Is Making Renewable Gas From Bourbon

    By Haley Zaremba of OilPrice.com

    The renewable energy revolution just got a whole lot more fun. The Beam Suntory company has announced that it’s going to be increasing its production of Kentucky bourbon using the power of renewable gas. In order to meet the growing demand for whiskey, Jim Beam is going to increase capacity by a whopping 50% at its Booker Noe distillery in Boston, Kentucky while also reducing its greenhouse gas emissions by the same percentage. A recent press release from Jim Beam and its Japanese parent company Suntory announced a $400 million investment in a renewable biogas system.

    “This expansion will help ensure we meet future demand for our iconic bourbon in a sustainable way that supports the environment and the local community that has helped build and support Jim Beam,” CEO Albert Baladi said.

    Beam Suntory is building its renewable biogas facility 36 miles south of Louisville, Kentucky. The facility, which will be built across the street from the Booker Noe distillery, will use otherwise wasted byproduct (known as ‘spent stillage’) from the whiskey-making process to be converted into fuel through the use of “digesters.” The result is a so-called ‘renewable natural gas’ that will be piped right back into the distillery in a sustainable closed-loop system. The digesters will also produce a high-quality, low-cost fertilizer which Beam Suntory says they will make available to local farmers, “thereby supporting sustainable and regenerative agricultural practices.” 

    Renewable natural gas is an industry term for a biogas that has been upgraded to be used in place of fossil fuels. It’s often seen as a “bridging fuel” which diverts methane and carbon emissions by making use of waste products, allowing entities like Beam Suntory to lower their carbon footprint without totally revamping their infrastructure. As such, biofuels are a lower-emissions stepping stone between our current carbon-based economy and a future energy landscape that won’t revolve around fuels that emit any greenhouse gasses whatsoever. Biomethanes and biogases such as the ‘renewable natural gas’ to be produced for Jim Beam have much lower carbon dioxide and methane emissions than standard natural gas, but their emissions are not null – in fact, they are underestimated

    While biogas and biomethane are not perfect, they are a huge step in the right direction and will create a considerable positive impact on Jim Beam’s ecological footprint – all while ramping up production of the good stuff. The biogas-fuelled expansion project is supposed to be completed by 2024. By then, Suntory Bean says that the Booker Noe distillery will be 65% renewable natural gas-powered. What’s more, the project is expected to be a considerable job creator in the region. 

    As natural gas prices soar around the world, the move makes good economic sense, and will hopefully set a precedent in Kentucky, where 95% of the world’s bourbon is made. Lowering production costs is a good goal in any environment, but it’s especially attractive now when demand for both natural gas and alcohol is soaring. In the first half of 2022, Beam Suntory’s global net sales grew by 13% according to company reports. 

    Alcohol consumption climbed to new heights during the pandemic, ushering in a “new golden age” for the booze industry, as well as some very worrying trends for the health sector and addiction specialists. And alcohol demand is expected to keep climbing. A market analysis report from Grand View Research finds that the “global alcoholic drinks market size was valued at USD 1,448.2 billion in 2021 and is expected to expand at a compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of 10.3% from 2022 to 2028.”

    For those of us who enjoy a responsible nip now and then, the whiskey-fuelled renewable revolution does seem like a golden age, indeed.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 21:00

  • At Least 7 Dead In Iran As Anti-Hijab Protests Grow
    At Least 7 Dead In Iran As Anti-Hijab Protests Grow

    A fifth day of protests in Iran have resulted in multiple deaths amid a security crackdown, following the death last week of Mahsa Amini, a 22-year-old from Iranian Kurdistan who reportedly died due to being roughed up by police for “unsuitable attire” – or not conforming to Islamic Republic standards of a hijab.

    Iranian officials say seven people have died since protests erupted Saturday, following Amini’s funeral, where women began removing their headscarves in protest, sometimes burning them in public displays of defiance. Demonstrators have decried instances of what they say is ‘live fire’ tactics and deadly forced used by police to disperse the protests, which have now spread across several provinces.

    New Arab/Getty Images: Mahsa Amini was reportedly bludgeoned repeatedly against a wall after she was detained for showing too much hair.

    At least one of the dead has been reported as a security member, coming also amid hundreds of arrests. “Crowds cheered when women burned their hijabs on a bonfire in Sari on Tuesday, the fifth successive day of unrest,” BBC has reported of scenes coming from the country Tuesday. “Activists said a woman was among three protesters shot dead by security forces in Urmia, Piranshahr and Kermanshah.”

    Dozens of videos showing fierce anti-hijab protests, as well as chants against the country’s ‘morality police’ have been circulating widely on the internet.

    According to a description of some of the viral protest videos reviewed by The New York Times

    Protesters have been calling for an end to the Islamic Republic, chanting things like “Mullahs get lost,” “We don’t want an Islamic republic,” and “Death to the supreme leader.” Women have also burned hijabs in protest against the law, which requires all women above the age of puberty to wear a head covering and loose clothing.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tehran has responded Tuesday by throttling internet speeds and also outright blocking social media sites, including Instagram.

    “For security reasons, the relevant authorities may impose certain restrictions on internet speed,” Iran’s Information Ministry announced in a fresh statement.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, the circumstances surrounding Amini’s death have been contested, with authorities painting a narrative of a girl brought into custody who then suffered a heart attack:

    There were reports that police beat Ms Amini’s head with a baton and banged her head against one of their vehicles, Acting UN High Commissioner for Human Rights Nada al-Nashif said.

    The police have denied that she was mistreated and said she suffered “sudden heart failure”. But her family has said she was fit and healthy.

    Authorities days ago even released a video which purports to show a young woman collapsing – though it remains impossible to verify the identity of the person in the clip or context…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In his UN General Assembly address Wednesday, at a moment his government is facing international criticism including by Biden himself at the assembly meeting, Iranian President Ibrahim Raisi decried the West’s ‘double standard’, saying “human rights belong to all but unfortunately this is trampled upon by many governments,” and cited the example of “the native tribes of Canada, whose bodies of hundreds of their children were discovered in mass graves in a school.”

    The Iranian leader claimed further before the assembly, “We are defenders of a fight against injustice in all of its forms, against humanity, against spirituality, against the almighty, against the people of the world, no matter where it may occur.”

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 20:40

  • I Told You So: Aramco CEO Slams Unrealistic Energy Policies
    I Told You So: Aramco CEO Slams Unrealistic Energy Policies

    Authored by Tsvetana Paraskova via OilPrice.com,

    Years of underinvestment in oil and gas production is the leading cause of today’s energy crisis, and when the global economy rebounds from the current slowdown, the little spare oil production capacity that’s left will be wiped out, Saudi Aramco’s chief executive Amin Nasser said on Tuesday.

    “Many of us have been insisting for years that if investments in oil and gas continued to fall, global supply growth would lag behind demand, impacting markets, the global economy, and people’s lives,” the CEO of the world’s largest oil company and top oil exporter said at the Schlumberger Digital Forum 2022 in Switzerland today.

    Investment in oil and gas more than halved between 2014 and 2021, Nasser said, adding that “The increases this year are too little, too late, too short-term.”

    Back in 2014, annual investment in oil and gas was $700 billion, which dropped to just over $300 billion last year, Aramco’s top executive said.

    “These are the real causes of this state of energy insecurity: under-investment in oil and gas; alternatives not ready; and no back-up plan. But you would not know that from the response so far,” he added, reiterating a long-held view of Saudi Arabia that underinvestment in previous years will come back to bite energy supply.

    “Even with strong economic headwinds, global oil demand is still fairly healthy today,” Nasser said.

    But when the global economy recovers, we can expect demand to rebound further, eliminating the little spare oil production capacity out there. And by the time the world wakes up to these blind spots, it may be too late to change course,” he added.

    “That is why I am seriously concerned.”

    Saudi Aramco called once again for more investment in oil and gas, especially capacity development.

    “And at least this crisis has finally convinced people that we need a more credible energy transition plan,” Aramco’s CEO added.

    Saudi Arabia has plans to boost its production capacity to 13 million barrels per day (bpd) by 2027, from around 12 million bpd now, but not much further above that. The Kingdom is one of just two major oil producers believed to hold some additional spare capacity now. The other producer is fellow OPEC member the United Arab Emirates (UAE).

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 20:20

  • The Fed Is Wrong Again: Core Inflation Rapidly Rolling Over And Will Drop To 3% By Q1
    The Fed Is Wrong Again: Core Inflation Rapidly Rolling Over And Will Drop To 3% By Q1

    The Fed was dead wrong for the past decade in perpetuating QE long after the economic crisis had passed, but especially in 2020 and 2021 when it saw nothing but transitory inflation, and refused to step in an contain soaring prices which we are seeing today everywhere in action. And the Fed is also dead wrong now in its crusade to crush inflation – as it confirmed today when it hiked 75bps and telegraphed another 145bps of rate hikes – even if it means a grave recession.

    Why is the Fed wrong again? Because besides sliding commodity prices (which will very likely soar in the very near future, especially once winter arrives in Europe and once Biden’s drain of the SPR is over), the bulk of core CPI components – and certainly some of the biggest drivers such as shelter, cars and airfares are rolling over fast.

    That’s according to a new report by JPM’s Phoebe White (full note available to pro subs here), who writes that she forecasts a material softening in inflation across all of the components that have been the largest contributors of core inflation over the past year—not only vehicle prices, but rents, medical care services, and airfares as well—and last week’s hot CPI report does not change this view.

    At a high level, we have seen a continued rotation in the composition of core inflation over recent months, with core services inflation accelerating from 3.7% Y/Y as of December 2021 to 6.1% as of August 2022, while core goods inflation has decelerated from 10.7% to 7.1%. Notably, even while core goods inflation continues to run hotter than core services inflation, services receive nearly triple the weight in the calculation of the core index, with the rent components alone comprising more than 40% of the basket (Exhibit 1).  Thus, it is clear to see why rent inflation, which has accelerated above 6% Y/Y in recent months, is the largest contributor to core CPI inflation as of the August report: Exhibit 2 shows that the two rent measures, owners’ equivalent rent and rent of primary residence, account for 1.9%-pts and 0.7%-pts, respectively.

    Let’s drill down into the data, starting start with rent inflation – which is the largest contributor to Core Inflation – and which the JPM analyst expects to peak in the next few months and roll over.  Why? Take the Zillow Observed Rent Index which like the Apartment list price index (which we have discussed countless times especially when it was soaring higher), tends to lead the CPI rent measures, and this index has been softening recently.

    And while JPM expects shelter inflation to break above 7% Y/Y by early next year – due to its several month delay from real-world prices – the bank also expects the pace of monthly gains to peak within the next few months. The rate of increases in the Zillow Observed Rent Index, which measures asking rents on new leases, peaked above 17% in February, but has softened to 12%
    oya as of August—a notable softening, albeit still elevated versus the ~4% average pace observed prior to the pandemic. Unlike the Zillow data, the rent components in CPI track average rents across both new and existing leases. Thus fluctuations in the Zillow index slowly pass-through to official measures as the stock of leases begins to resemble the recent flow of new leases, with each percentage-point increase in the Zillow rent index preceding a 0.6%-pt cumulative increase in shelter CPI .

    To be sure, one complicating dynamic that we have been highlighting is the fact that tighter monetary policy could temporarily exacerbate rental inflationary pressure, as high mortgage rates discourage home-buying. Indeed, now that no new home buyer reliant on a mortgage can possibly afford a house, they will likely have no choice but to find a rental. On the other hand, there is a limit to how high rents can go simply as a function of disposable income: outside of the top income cohort, JPM finds that rent affordability is already stretched, implying it will be difficult for rent inflation to sustain rates much above the pace of wage growth. And once neither housing nor rent is affordable, well then it becomes a political issue and Democrats will scream bloody murder – as Liz Warren already did today – and will demand Powell to start cutting rates.

    Away from rents, new and used vehicles have had the next largest contributions to core CPI. And with demand softening, supply constraints easing, and raw material costs falling, JPM thinks declines in used vehicle prices are on the near-term horizon. Declines in new vehicle prices are likely to follow in 2023. In fact, the Manheim Used Vehicle Value Index, which measures the prices dealerships pay for used cars at auctions, has declined since its peak in January, with the index falling 4% in August alone, and another 2.3% over the first half of September.

    When will this slowdown appear in official data: as chart 5 illustrates, the pass-through from the Mannheim index to the BLS data exhibits a 1-3 month lag, making it somewhat difficult to forecast the precise timing of inflections in the used vehicle CPI. Looking ahead, JPM expects the trend of falling used vehicle prices to continue over coming months: Chart 6 shows that the J.P Morgan Automotive Commodities Index is now down 35%, reflecting the cost-weighted average price of the commodities used to manufacture a vehicle. Used vehicle prices tend to be more sensitive to raw commodity costs compared with new vehicles, given that scrap value reflects a greater share of the overall price of a used vehicle.

    The component with the next largest contributions to core CPI inflation is airline fares which is one of the more highly volatile categories of inflation. The still-high rate of airfare inflation on a year-ago basis reflects the surge observed through the spring alongside rising jet fuel prices, but this component has fallen by more than 14% since its peak in May, with prices likely to be somewhat more stable going forward.

    Finally, the recent surge in health insurance inflation likely reflects, at least in part, the drop in insurance claims over a year ago, given the “retained earnings” methodology that BLS uses to calculate this component. Some utilization metrics are now tracking in line with pre-pandemic levels

    Overall, when taking a deeper look at the largest contributors to core CPI inflation over the past year, JPMorgan sees clear evidence that core inflation is peaking and is likely to moderate fairly quickly on a sequential basis over the near term, falling from 6.5% in the three months through August, to about a 3.5% SAAR pace in 1Q 23 and just 3.1% in 2Q23, or essentially in line with the Fed’ target.

    To be sure, the longer it takes for these dynamics to play out, the greater the risks that high inflation could become more ingrained. However, what is even more relevant is that the latest hawkish rate hike by the Fed – which guarantees that the Fed overshoots, driving a more material weakening in demand and triggering a recession — will certainly lead to even softer inflation. In other words, if the Fed halts its tightening campaign here, not only will core prices drop to where the Fed wants them, but a recession may even be averted. However, if Powell continues blindingly to hike, a crushing recession is virtually guaranteed. And since the Fed is always wrong about everything, the worst case scenario is now in play.

    Much more in the full report available to pro subs in the usual place.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 20:00

  • Three Martha Vineyard Migrants File Lawsuit Against DeSantis
    Three Martha Vineyard Migrants File Lawsuit Against DeSantis

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    The undocumented migrants who were transferred to Martha’s Vineyard have quickly adopted one common American practice: litigation. A firm, Lawyers for Civil Rights, in conjunction with the migrant-led nonprofit Alianza Americas, filed the action on behalf of Yanet Doe, Pablo Doe and Jesus Doe who are using pseudonyms for the action “on behalf of themselves and all others similarly situated.” The filing is a Jackson Pollock of legal claims with twelve claims thrown against Florida from false imprisonment to intentional infliction of emotional distress to misuse of the Coronavirus State Fiscal Recovery Fund. The splattering of a claims face considerable legal barriers based on the consent of the migrants, as shown in a waiver released by Florida.

    The filing of a lawsuit upon entry to the United States is not unprecedented, of course.

    Indeed, I teach in torts where an immigrant to the United States filed a tort action for an involuntary inoculation upon entry in O’Brien v. Cunard. Yet, this is a case involving undocumented migrants who allegedly signed a waiver and agreed to the trip.

    The filing does not include the widespread claims of kidnapping and human trafficking made by Democratic politicians and some legal experts. Cables programs are still claiming that criminal kidnapping charges should be brought after the flight.

    The lawyers are alleging that the migrants were mislead or defrauded in going to Martha’s Vineyard. The flight is portrayed as “designed and executed a premeditated, fraudulent, and illegal scheme centered on exploiting this vulnerability for the sole purpose of advancing their own personal, financial and political interests.”

    Gov. DeSantis responded by calling the lawsuit “political theater,” which is ironic given that the flight was clearly designed as precisely that type of political theater.

    However, most of these claims are highly dubious and will require substantially more factual support to survive a threshold challenge. The first challenge will be to show that the waiver was secured by trick or fraud.  The consent form – available in English and Spanish – states:

    “I agree to hold the benefactor or its designed representatives harmless of all liability arising out of or in any way relating to any injuries and damages that may occur during the agreed transport to locations outside of Texas until the final destination in Massachusetts.”

    The lawyers are citing a brochure to support the claim of fraud. The brochure reads “Massachusetts Refugee Benefits” with instructions for how to change an address with U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services (USCIS), including USCIS Form AR-11, “Alien’s Change of Address Card.” The complaint states:

    On information and belief, the brochure was manufactured by Defendants. The brochure echoed the type of false representation that had been given orally, including statements such as: “During the first 90 days after a refugee’s arrival in Massachusetts, agencies provide basic needs support including…assistance with housing…furnishings, food, and other basic necessities…clothing, and transportation to job interviews and job training…assistance in applying for Social Security cards…registering children for school….”

    The brochure had a separate section entitled “Refugee Cash Assistance (RCA),” which stated: “Provides up to 8 months of cash assistance for income-eligible refugees without dependent children, who reside in Massachusetts.” It had other sections that described “targeted services for . . . employment.”

    The state says that the brochure takes material from the state website for refugees and migrants.

    The state is also likely to replay media accounts of migrants expressing satisfaction with going to the island, including an NBC report as well as a Telemundo report of migrants thanking Desantis.

    The most serious allegation is that Florida officials “told them they were flying to Boston or Washington, D.C., which was completely false.” The question is the proof of that representation since the waiver refers only to the destination being “the State of Massachusetts.”

    Most of the claims are barely defined, let alone supported. For example, on false imprisonment, the complaint merely restates defrauding claims:

    The Plaintiffs’ participation in the federal immigration processes—to which they are constitutionally entitled—was impeded, as they were transported thousands of miles away from where they needed to continue immigration proceedings. Plaintiffs were not informed that they would be flown to an island off the coast of Massachusetts that can only be reached by plane or ferry. The first time that many of the putative class learned that their destination was Martha’s Vineyard was when they were in mid-air. When they arrived, they were not provided with any of the goods and services which they were promised by Defendants. They felt defrauded and tricked and were traumatized by the experience.

    The only confinement alleged is the flight itself, which necessarily does not allow people to leave mid flight. Thousands of migrants have been transferred by flights to locations around the country, including trips arranged by the Biden Administration and a Democratic mayor.

    The complaint is stronger on rhetoric than supporting facts or law. It will face a motion to dismiss and that the litigants may be able to offer more evidence of a fraud or misrepresentations to negate their signed waivers. However, this is unlikely to result in a serious threat to these ongoing flights by various states. This is a civil action that, even if it can survive threshold challenges, will be in the court system for a long time in seeking to establish these claims. Many of these claims are likely to be dismissed or abandoned in the course of that litigation.

    Here is the complaint: Alianza-Americas v. DeSantis

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 19:40

  • Man Accused Of Murdering 18-Year-Old Conservative Released On Bail
    Man Accused Of Murdering 18-Year-Old Conservative Released On Bail

    A 41-year-old man accused of murdering 18-year-old Cayler Ellingson for being a supposed “Republican extremist” was released on $50,000 bail Tuesday from the Stutsman County jail in North Dakota.

    According to the NY Post, Sannon Brandt spent just days in lockup after he was arrested in connection with the death of Ellingson – who Brandt initially told first responders that “he struck the pedestrian because the pedestrian was threatening him,” according to a probable-cause affidavit provided to Fox News Digital Wednesday morning.

    Ellingson was walking on the street shortly before 3am following a weekend street dance in Foster County when he was struck with a pickup truck, according to the North Dakota Highway Patrol. He was rushed to Carrington Hospital where he was pronounced dead upon arrival.

    “Brandt stated that the pedestrian called some people and Brandt was afraid they were coming to get him,” the document continues. “Brandt admitted to State Radio that he hit the pedestrian and that the pedestrian was part of a Republican extremist group.”

    North Dakota Highway Patrol reported on Sunday that there was a “street dance” on Jones Street near Hohneck Street in McHenry when Brandt struck Ellingson and then fled the scene.

    Ellingson was rushed to a local hospital with serious injuries, but could not be saved. 

    Brandt’s and Ellingson’s families both showed up at the scene shortly after police arrived, court records show. 

    Ellingson’s parents later told police they knew Brandt, but they did not believe their son did. Ellingston’s mother described how she was on her way to pick up her son from McHenry when he called her and said “that ‘he’ or ‘they’ were chasing him.” She could no longer reach him after that. -NY Post

    Brandt was arrested early Saturday morning in his Glenfield home after police stopped him outside. He “admitted to consuming alcohol prior to the incident,” according to the records.

    “Brandt admitted to striking the pedestrian with his car because he had a political argument with the pedestrian and believed the pedestrian was calling people to come get him,” the court document continues. “Brandt admitted to leaving the scene of the incident and returning shortly after where he called 911.”

    Brandt allegedly admitted to fatally hitting a teenage pedestrian with his car.
    Foster County State’s Attorney

    Brandt had a blood-alcohol level above the legal limit of 0.08, and was charged with criminal vehicular homicide. While he was charged with driving under the influence according to jail records, a criminal complaint did not include the charge, the Post reports.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 19:20

  • Oil And Gas Jobs Are Bouncing Back In The Lone Star State
    Oil And Gas Jobs Are Bouncing Back In The Lone Star State

    By Charles Kennedy of OilPrice.com

    Two years ago, oil and gas companies in Texas were laying off employees amid the most severe downturn in the industry’s history.

    This year, job growth in America’s oil and gas heartland has been so strong that labor shortages have prevented the industry from expanding.

    According to the latest data, Texas added 2,600 new oil and gas jobs in August in the upstream sector. That was a decline from July when the upstream industry added 3,100 new jobs, but still a robust number and the latest proof that oil and gas companies are over the pandemic.

    “Upstream employment is growing steadily alongside the world’s demand for affordable, reliable energy. The Texas oil and natural gas industry continues to play its leadership role in enhancing national and energy security in our nation and for our trade allies around the world,” said the president of the Texas Oil and Gas Association, commenting on the numbers released by the Texas Workforce Commission.

    The data shows that since September 2020, the trough of the latest downturn, the upstream industry in Texas has added jobs at an average monthly rate of 1,943, for a total of 44,700 jobs added over the past two years. As of August, the total number of people employed by Texas upstream businesses stood at 201,700.

    Upstream oil and gas employment is growing strongly in New Mexico as well: Texas and New Mexico share the Permian basin, seen as the top performer in the U.S. shale patch. The New Mexico Department of Workforce Solutions expects employment in that sector to expand by 10.8 percent by 2028.

    Even with these strong employment growth rates, U.S. oil and gas is being plagued by a labor shortage that is interfering with growth plans, as frugal as these plans are. A lot of the limited production growth in the shale patch has been blamed on shareholders insisting they see some cash returns after years of backing drillers, but the lack of workers has also had a part to play.

    Back in April this year, the Wall Street Journal reported that the Permian was “running out of the workers, cash and equipment needed to produce more oil.” Author Collin Eaton noted that many workers who were let go during the pandemic simply did not return to their old jobs when those became available. Some, he noted, left mid-project to look for higher wages elsewhere.

    Since then, the number of oil and gas jobs has continued to grow, but not fast enough, it appears, compounded by shortages of materials and equipment, too. Shareholders in public companies are still the biggest culprit, according to analysts and to the companies themselves.

    “Investors generally don’t want shale companies to pursue a growth model,” Ben Dell, chief executive of private equity firm Kimmeridge Energy, told the FT this month.

    “The capital availability is extremely limited.”

    According to data from Baker Hughes and Primary Vision, drilling activity in the U.S. shale patch is slowing down from its strong post-pandemic growth. Even in the Permian, cited as the biggest growth engine of the shale patch, the number of active rigs in the basin fell two weeks in a row leading up to the most recent data release.

    A recent Wall Street Journal attributed this slowdown to private drillers running out of low-cost drilling locations. If this is indeed the case, it does not bode well for the near future of the industry. And it does appear to be the case, based on the Enverus data the WSJ cited: private drillers in the Permian have an inventory averaging some six years of low-cost locations.

    What all this implies for employment in the U.S. oil industry is that growth there may well slow down at some point in the near future as analysts expect the limited inventory of private drillers to prompt another consolidation wave. For now, the going is good, but it won’t last forever.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 19:00

  • Most Adults Should Be Screened For Anxiety, Depression According To US-Funded Panel
    Most Adults Should Be Screened For Anxiety, Depression According To US-Funded Panel

    A panel of experts operating under the Department of Health and Human Services has recommended that all adults under the age of 65 should be screened for anxiety disorders, and all adults regardless of age should be checked for depression amid an uptick in American reporting mental-health issues following the Covid-19 pandemic.

    The guidance, released Tuesday, marks the first such recommendation regarding adult anxiety disorders from the US Preventative Services Task Force, which issued similar draft guidance several months ago for children and adolescents, the Wall Street Journal reports.

    This is a really important step forward,” said American Psychological Association CEO Arthur C. Evans. “Screening for mental-health conditions is critical to our ability to help people at the earliest possible moment.”

    The task force said that there wasn’t enough evidence on whether or not screening all adults without signs or symptoms ultimately helps prevent suicide. The group didn’t recommend for or against screening for suicide risk, but called for more research in the area.

    The task force, a panel of 16 independent volunteer experts, issues guidance on preventive-care measures. Health insurers are often required to cover services recommended by the task force under a provision in the Affordable Care Act. -WSJ

    According to estimates from the federal Household Pulse Survey, over 30% of adults reported having symptoms of anxiety disorder or depressive disorder this summer, while the CDC reports that the percentage of US adults who received mental-health treatment over the past year increased from 19% in 2019 to 22% in 2021.

    Mental health issues are often caught during doctor’s office screenings, where patients fill out questionnaires that can identify at-risk individuals who may not be showing obvious signs of a problem. The surveys ask about feelings of depression or hopelessness, trouble sleeping, eating, or thoughts of harming themselves, on a scale of ‘not at all’ to ‘nearly every day.’

    “It helps me get a better idea about whether their insomnia is really pure insomnia or if it is part of depressive symptoms,” Dr. Riza Conroy, a primary-care physician at Ohio State University, told the Journal.

    That said, widespread screening can also yield false-positives, leading to potential overdiagnosis and unnecessary treatment that may instead cause side effects, along with ‘unease and stigma,’ according to the task force and other mental-health experts.

    “You could be flagging a lot of older adults for having an anxiety disorder when they don’t,” said Dr. Lori Pbert, task-force member and professor in the department of population and quantitative health sciences at UMass Chan Medical School.

    “You end up with a score that you feel you have to act on,” said Stephanie Collier, a psychiatrist at McLean Hospital and a consulting psychiatrist for the Population Health Management Team at Newton-Wellesley Hospital in Massachusetts, who wasn’t involved with the new guidance.

    To inform the new recommendations, task-force members reviewed evidence from some 173 studies that looked at screening-test accuracy and the effectiveness of available interventions for depression, anxiety disorders and suicide risk. A few studies looked at the direct impacts of the screening itself on health outcomes.

    The task force concluded that screening all adults for depression, including those who are pregnant or postpartum as well as older adults, has a moderate net benefit, echoing its previous 2016 recommendations. The task force also recommended screening adults under 65, including pregnant and postpartum people, for anxiety but said that there wasn’t enough evidence to make the same recommendation for older adults. -WSJ

    According to the report, the Task Force received some pushback in April over its lack of recommendation for suicide screening among adolescents.

    “It could present a threat to forward progress in preventing suicide at a time when it’s clearly showing up as a national health crisis,” said Christine Yu Moutier, chief medical officer at the American Foundation for Suicide Prevention.

    According to task force member Gbenga Ogedegbe, healthcare providers should use their professional judgement for each patient to determine whether to screen for suicide risks.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 18:40

  • Polls: Americans Oppose Increasing Ukraine Aid, Defending Global Democracy
    Polls: Americans Oppose Increasing Ukraine Aid, Defending Global Democracy

    Authored by Kyle Anzalone & Connor Freeman via The Libertarian Institute,

    Two new polls from Morning Consult and Concerned Veterans for America show at least a plurality of Americans are tired of interventionism. The results show twice as many Americans want to send less aid to Ukraine than those who would support sending more. Meanwhile, only 17% of Americans are concerned about defending democracy around the globe. 

    The Joe Biden White House built its foreign policy around the idea it would move away from fighting wars against terrorists in the Middle East, and refocus the Department of Defense on “Great Power Competition.” The administration marketed the policy as “autocracy versus democracy” with the White House leading the Western countries against Russia, China, Iran, North Korea and other ostensibly bad countries

    Morning Consulting Polling

    The White House has faced some criticism for claiming to promote democracy and selling weapons to brutal tyrants in Egypt, Saudi Arabia, UAE and apartheid Israel. Though Morning Consult’s polling released last week shows the White House’s idea of promoting democracy is not resonating with the American people

    The poll asked Americans about their views on the country’s most pressing foreign policy challenges. Only 17% of respondents told the pollsters that “upholding global democracy” was a top five concern, ranking 11th behind drugs, climate, immigration, terrorism and the economic crisis. 

    The poll was backed by another by Concerned Veterans for America that found US citizens do not want increased involvement in Ukraine:

    “Only 15% of the American public support sending more military and financial aid to Ukraine than wealthy European countries, with almost twice as many people (34%) wanting to send less assistance,” CVA wrote.

    Chart via Morning Consult…

    Additionally, a majority of Americans only want the assistance to continue if Europeans match the American commitment. 

    Image: American Friends Service Committee

    The poll shows Americans are firmly opposed to military intervention in Ukraine. Over 55% of respondents oppose direct American military intervention while only 14% percent support fighting a war for Kiev. The results for Ukraine were similar to Americans wanting a scaled-back role in the world, with 42% of respondents saying they want a smaller role and only 7% supported more intervention.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 18:20

  • "Have U Been F**ked": Washington Monument Vandalized
    “Have U Been F**ked”: Washington Monument Vandalized

    The Washington Monument was defaced Tuesday night when a vandal wrote “Have u been fucked by this” in red paint, along with an arrow pointing up towards the phallic obelisk.

    “Gov says tough shit” reads smaller text below.

    An individual was arrested following the incident, according to Fox5 DC‘s Katie Barlow. According to Fox, the suspect is being charged with trespassing, tampering and vandalism.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to the US Park Service, the monument has been temporarily closed for an investigation and cleanup of the famous landmark built between 1848 and 1888.

    A spokesman for the National Parks Service told Fox that the graffiti echoes a similar incident on the nearby Lincoln Memorial, and may require a similar cleanup process. 

    “It’s very similar to the vandalism at the Lincoln Memorial in 2008 when a woman threw green paint at the base of the statue,” according to Mike Litterst. “Same material, paint on marble is very difficult to remove. Like we expect here – that one took multiple treatments over a couple of weeks. But ultimately it was entirely successful.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 18:00

  • Colorado Becomes First State To Accept Bitcoin As Payment For Taxes
    Colorado Becomes First State To Accept Bitcoin As Payment For Taxes

    Authored by ‘NAMCIOS’ via BitcoinMagazine.com,

    Colorado residents can now pay state taxes with bitcoin and cryptocurrency… but only with a PayPal account

    Colorado has become the first U.S. state to accept bitcoin for tax payments.

    Gov. Jared Polis announced the implementation of the new payment method on Monday, at Denver Startup Week, according to a report by Axios Denver.

    Citizens can use cryptocurrency to pay individual income tax, business income tax, sales and use tax, withholding tax, severance tax and excise fuel tax are eligible, per the report.

    The state government’s Department of Revenue now lists “cryptocurrency” as a payment method among the more well-established debit and credit cards, ACH debit and credit, and cash.

    However, users interested in parting with their bitcoin holdings to pay Colorado state taxes need to use a PayPal account.

    “Only PayPal Personal accounts can pay using cryptocurrency,” Colorado’s Department of Revenue details, adding that the user needs to have the entire value of their invoice in a single cryptocurrency in their PayPal Cryptocurrencies Hub.

    Citizens paying their taxes with cryptocurrency will be charged an additional $1 plus 1.83% of the payment amount in fees.

    U.S. states have raced for the trophy of the most cryptocurrency-friendly jurisdiction as they seek to attract workers and businesses of the new remote-first economy.

    However, it is hard to make the case for paying taxes with bitcoin, especially in Colorado’s fixed arrangement with PayPal. While the user would likely forgo future capital appreciation from the bitcoin price by doing so, that buying power wouldn’t be transferred to Colorado as the state doesn’t seek to hold BTC or cryptocurrency on its balance sheet.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 17:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 21st September 2022

  • German Domestic Intelligence Is Running 100s Of Fake Right-Wing Extremist Social Media Accounts; Report
    German Domestic Intelligence Is Running 100s Of Fake Right-Wing Extremist Social Media Accounts; Report

    Authored by John Cody via Remix News,

    Hundreds of the radical Nazis and right-wing extremists online are actually German domestic intelligence agents, and many of them may even responsible for “inciting hatred” and even violence. These agents, who once needed to drink and directly socialize with members of the extreme right, are now running right-wing extremist accounts online in Germany.

    Germany’s Federal Office for the Protection of the Constitution (BfV) argues that these accounts are needed to gather information, but critics say that they may also be promoting and actively encouraging radicalism, according to a report from German newspaper Süddeutshce Zeitung.

    “This is the future of information gathering,” an unnamed head of a relevant state office told Süddeutsche Zeitung.

    According to research by the newspaper, the authority has invested heavily in “virtual agents” since 2019, which it finances with taxpayers’ money. Both the federal office and the federal states employ spies, who besides right-wing extremists, are also tasked with keeping an eye on the left-wing extremists, Islamists, and the “conspiracy-ideological” scene.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    However, the activities of the BfV running hundreds of right-wing extremist accounts have come to light at the same time that Germany’s left-wing government has labeled right-wing extremism the biggest threat to the country, despite data showing that left-wing extremists and radical Islam pose bigger threats. The country’s interior minister, Nancy Faeser, has launched a 10-point plan to fight “right-wing extremism,” and much like the Biden administration in the United States, has turned the domestic security state against political opponents and labeled them terrorism threats and a danger to democracy. In Germany’s case, the opposition conservative Alternative for Germany party (AfD) is actively surveilled in certain federal states, with membership in the party the only prerequisite for agents being able to read emails and listen in on telephone calls of private citizens.

    With the BfV operating hundreds of right-wing extremist accounts, the agency argues that it is about “playing a little right-wing radical yourself” in order to gain the trust of other users. The employees of the Office for the Protection of the Constitution are likely to conduct “propaganda” for this and sometimes also commit crimes such as “incitement to hatred.”

    However, what exactly these extremist accounts are posting that involve “incitement to hatred” is unclear, as there is little to no public oversight regarding these activities.

    “In order to be really credible, it is not enough to share or like what others say, you also have to make statements yourself. That means that the agents also bully and agitate,” says the report of an agent who claims to have joined the agency to “do something against right-wing extremists.” This involves actively encouraging people in their worldview, but she says it is her job to “feed” the scene.

    In fact, there are now so many accounts operated by different German authorities that a nationwide agreement has become necessary. Otherwise, these different agents would be targeting each other with surveillance and monitoring.

    Germany’s new government has taken an aggressive stance against anonymity on the web and free speech, and has targeted apps like Telegram, which is one of the few tech companies openly supporting free speech. Under a new regime, the German government is expected to open thousands of hate speech cases against the public every year.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 09/21/2022 – 02:00

  • MSNBC, CNN Guest Roasted After Calling Evangelical Prayer-Hands 'Nazi Salute'
    MSNBC, CNN Guest Roasted After Calling Evangelical Prayer-Hands ‘Nazi Salute’

    A lawyer and recurring guest on MSNBC and CNN has come under fire after claiming in a viral tweet that Doug Mastriano supporters were giving ‘a Nazi salute’ during a Sunday campaign rally in Chambersburg, Pennsylvania.

    Evangelical leader Lance Wallnau asked the crowd to rise, and asked them “if a proclamation can be a spiritual thing,” before asking them to raise their hands for a prayer rally in support of Mastriano’s run for PA Governor.

    “Can you say what they said at Gettysburg? ‘When you see us lined up as one, sweep down the hill to victory,'” Wallnau prompted the crowd, before beginning the prayer: “Father I pray, that indeed Pennsylvania will be like Little Round Top, and America will have a new birth of liberty.”

    Attorney and frequent MSNBC guest Tristan Snell commented on the clip, which now has 3.6 million views, saying “Yes, this is a Nazi salute, at a Doug Mastriano campaign event in Pennsylvania. In 2022,” adding “Democracy is literally on the ballot in November.”

    Watch the entire clip below:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jsSnell’s ‘hot propaganda’ take was too much even for CNN‘s K-File, who replied “This is just people praying and it doesn’t even resemble a Nazi salute.”

    Others followed suit:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And of course, the Lincoln Project went with the ‘Nazi salute’ thing and turned it into an anti-Mastriano ad.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 23:46

  • Alleged Oath Keepers Jan. 6 Radio Traffic Actually "A Recording Of People Watching TV", Former Attorney Says
    Alleged Oath Keepers Jan. 6 Radio Traffic Actually “A Recording Of People Watching TV”, Former Attorney Says

    Authored by Joseph M. Hanneman via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    A Twitter post by the U.S. House Jan. 6 Select Committee purporting to contain walkie-talkie traffic between Oath Keepers at the Capitol on Jan. 6 is actually “a recording of people watching TV,” a former Oath Keepers attorney contends.

    Two Oath Keepers inside the U.S. Capitol on Jan. 6, 2021. The first Oath Keepers criminal trial is scheduled for Sept. 27, 2022. (U.S. DOJ/Screenshot via The Epoch Times)

    Jonathon Moseley, who formerly represented Oath Keepers defendant Kelly Meggs, said the audio snippets released by the Jan. 6 Committee are part of a nearly 2.5-hour recording.

    The committee’s Twitter post paired the audio clips with an unrelated video of the Oath Keepers to make it appear it was Oath Keepers speaking on radios at the Capitol, he said.

    I can speak from personal, direct, first-hand knowledge that this is a 2-hour, 20-minute recording of people watching TV,” Moseley told The Epoch Times in a statement on Sept. 18. “This is NOT Oath Keepers at the Capitol.”

    Defense attorneys in several Oath Keepers criminal cases have complained to the courts for months that these kinds of utterances from the Jan. 6 Select Committee will poison the jury pool, making it impossible for defendants to get a fair trial in the heavily Democratic District of Columbia. Numerous Oath Keepers motions for trial delays or changes of venue have been denied.

    The controversial Zello transmissions were under court seal when the Jan. 6 Committee published its Twitter post on Sept. 15.

    The highest profile Oath Keepers case goes to trial on Sept. 27. Oath Keepers founder Elmer Stewart Rhodes III and four other defendants—Kelly Meggs, Jessica Watkins, Kenneth Harrelson, and Thomas Caldwell—are charged with seditious conspiracy to attack the Capitol and a range of other Jan. 6-related crimes.

    “The J6 Committee is operating as a partisan campaign PAC,” Moseley said. “Its public relations releases are not legislative actions. It is a Democrat campaign PAC for the November 2022 elections.”

    Oath Keepers defendant Jessica Watkins (front left) moves down the steps of the U.S. Capitol on Jan. 6, 2021. (The Real Story of Jan. 6/Epoch TV)

    The Epoch Times reached out to a spokesman for the Jan. 6 Select Committee for comment, but did not receive a reply.

    The disputed Zello communications used by the Jan. 6 Committee have been part of a month-long fight in U.S. District Court between federal prosecutors, who want to introduce them as evidence, and Oath Keepers defense attorneys, who argued they are inadmissible hearsay.

    District Judge Amit Mehta on Sept. 19 ruled (pdf) that the statements made by the user—alleged to be defendant Watkins—are admissible as they are her first-hand impressions of conditions on the ground. Some of the statements made by other Zello users on the audio chat will be admitted as they provide context to what the user was saying, the judge said.

    Most of the inflammatory statements made by the chat leader “1% Watchdog” will be barred from evidence as being highly prejudicial, Mehta ruled.

    Tying Audio to One Oath Keeper

    Although the recording from the smartphone app Zello was given to Moseley and other defense attorneys in October 2021, it was only in late August 2022 that the U.S. Department of Justice said it would seek to admit parts of the 69-page transcript as evidence against the Oath Keepers, according to court records.

    Prosecutors allege Oath Keepers defendant Watkins spoke on Zello about what was happening in the Capitol, but defense attorneys say there is no evidence that she is the speaker.

    Zello is a phone application that mimics the push-to-talk features of a walkie-talkie, except that it uses cellular networks and internet connectivity to link users. It allows smartphones to operate like the popular Nextel push-to-talk phones developed and popularized in the 1990s. Based in Austin, Texas, Zello Inc. offers a variety of service plans for a monthly fee.

    The full 2 hour 22 minute audio file of the Jan. 6 broadcast on the “Stop the Steal J6” channel on Zello, referenced in the Oath Keepers criminal conspiracy case.

    Prosecutors allege that Watkins is heard on the recordings, although no Zello user account could be directly tied to her name or cell phone. The FBI found no Zello-related audio files on her phone, according to court records. Prosecutors contend Watkins was the user “OhioRegularsActual–Oathkeeper.”

    A recording of the public Zello transmissions was discovered on the audio-sharing website Soundcloud by two journalists in 2021. Zello does not store recordings from chats or channels.

    In a pretrial conference on Sept. 14, Assistant U.S. Attorney Jeffrey Nestler told Mehta a law enforcement officer could testify at trial that the voice heard on parts of the recording belongs to Watkins.

    A Zello channel named “Stop the Steal J6,” created by user “1% Watchdog,” was opened to the public at 1:48 p.m. on Jan. 6, court records state. Zello users had to subscribe to the channel to have access. All subscribers were able to comment on the public channel.

    The conversations included unidentified individuals with account names including “1% Watchdog,” “Gen. Mark Davis CFA” and “iWatch Director Laureen.”

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 23:25

  • Russian Oil, Coal Exports To China Soar In August
    Russian Oil, Coal Exports To China Soar In August

    China’s imports of crude oil and coal imports from Russia exploded in August, data showed on Tuesday, but despite the jump in supply, Russia handed back its top oil supplier ranking to Saudi Arabia for the first time in four months, even as coal exports hit a record high.

    According to data from the Chinese General Administration of Customs, imports of Russian oil, including supplies pumped via the East Siberia Pacific Ocean (ESPO) pipeline and seaborne shipments from Russia’s European and Far Eastern ports, totalled 8.342 million tonnes, up 28% Y/Y, the equivalent of 1.96 million barrels per day (bpd), and just slightly off May’s record of nearly 2 million bpd. China is Russia’s largest oil buyer, especially now that most of the western world has sanctioned Russian energy.

    China’s purchases of Russian oil have soared in order to reap the benefits of a plunge in European buying and tumbling prices for Russian oil…

    … just when Beijing needs it most as the Ukraine crisis pushes Moscow in search of alternative markets

    Russian imports rose as Chinese independent refiners extended purchases of discounted Russian supplies that elbowed out rival cargoes from West Africa and Brazil.

    But despite the full price, imports from Saudi Arabia rebounded last month to 8.475 million tonnes, or 1.99 million bpd, 5% above the year ago levels, and just inching out Russia for the top spot.  Saudi Arabia also remains the biggest supplier on a year-to-date basis, shipping 58.31 million tonnes of oil from January to August, down 0.3% on the year, versus 55.79 million tonnes from Russia, which was up 7.3% from the year ago period.

    In total, China crude oil imports in August fell 9.4% from a year earlier, as outages at state-run refineries and lower operations at independent plants caused by weak margins capped buying.

    The table below shows imports by country, with volumes in metric tonnes and percentage change calculated by Reuters.

    The strong purchases of Russian oil continued to weigh on competing supplies from Angola and Brazil, which fell in August by 34% and 47% year-on-year, respectively. Customs reported no imports from Venezuela or Iran last month. State oil firms have shunned purchases since late 2019 for fear of falling foul of secondary U.S. sanctions, although many still engage in illicit trade which is not disclosed on the books. One such company is defense-focused China Aerospace Science and Industry Corp (CASIC) which moved 25 million barrels of Venezuelan crude into China since late 2020, which Chinese customs does not report.

    Tuesday’s customs data also showed imports from Malaysia, often used as a transfer point in the past two years for oil originating from Iran, Venezuela and more recently Russia, nearly doubled from a year earlier, to 3.37 million tonnes, or 794,000 bpd.

    China did not import any crude from the United States, data showed.

    But it wasn’t just Russian oil that Beijing was waving in: China’s coal imports from Russia also exploded in August, exceeding last month’s level and hitting the highest in at least five years, as power utilities in the world’s biggest coal consumer sought overseas supplies to meet soaring demand in extreme hot weather.

    Arrivals of Russian coal last month reached 8.54 million tonnes, up from the previous peak of 7.42 million tonnes in July and 57% higher than in the same period last year, Chinese customs data showed on Tuesday. In fact, the monthly figure was the highest on record, since comparable statistics began in 2017.

    Prices for Russian coal have climbed as both China and India stepped up buying, traders said, but were still cheaper than the domestic coal of same quality. Russian thermal coal at 5,500 kcal on delivery basis to China was assessed at about $155 a tonne in late August, up from about $150 a tonne a month earlier.

    As Reuters notes, after a severe drought and heatwave hit western and southern China from late July, coal-fired power plants geared up production to meet the spiking demand for air conditioning and the supply gap from hydropower stations. They also increased purchases of higher quality thermal coal, such as Russian coal, to improve electricity generation efficiency.

    China brought in 15.82 million tonnes of the dirty fuel from its top supplier Indonesia in August, 35% higher from July, data showed. But that was still lower than the 17.3 million tonnes imported in August last year.

    The increase of Indonesian coal purchases came as lucrative prices encouraged utilities to place more orders. In August, Indonesian 3,800 kcal thermal coal was about 170 yuan ($24.26) a tonne cheaper than the same quality Chinese coal, and 4,700 kcal coal was 140 yuan lower.

    Power utilities are expected to increase imports in October to replenish stocks ahead of the kick-off of the heating season in most of northern China in mid-November.

    However, as renminbi depreciation continues, imported coal will become more expensive for Chinese buyers and potentially dent demand.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 23:05

  • Lindell To Sue FBI To Return His Phone, Or Have Special Master Appointed
    Lindell To Sue FBI To Return His Phone, Or Have Special Master Appointed

    Authored by Eva Fu via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    My Pillow’s CEO Mike Lindell is set to file a lawsuit against the FBI and the U.S. government after federal agents seized his phone last week as part of a federal grand jury investigation run out of Colorado.

    The agents cornered Lindell in three cars on Sept. 13 as he was driving back from a hunting trip in Iowa. In a search warrant they handed him, authorities outlined an expansive list of information they were seeking from Lindell’s phone relating to allegations of fraud during the 2020 presidential election. It also named a number of individuals allegedly implicated in the 2021 breach of election software in Mesa County, Colorado.

    The search warrant cites potential breaches of three U.S. laws relating to identity theft, intentional damage to a protected computer, and conspiracy to comment on such offenses. Some of the information to be seized concerned the alleged tampering of voting machines and the “attempt to impair the integrity or availability” of the voting system.

    Alleged Violation of Rights

    The search and seizure warrant, Lindell and his lawyer Kurt Olsen argue, violated the businessman’s First, Fourth, and Fifth Amendment rights, which safeguards free speech, protects citizens from unreasonable searches and seizures, and shields citizens from criminal prosecution without due process, respectively. It also brought reputational harm and millions of dollars in monetary damage, Lindell told The Epoch Times ahead of the filing.

    The lawsuit, to be filed on Sept. 20 in the U.S. District Court for the District of Minnesota, will seek the return of the seized phone that Lindell had relied on, in lieu of a laptop, to run his five businesses.

    That specific device was everything for me,” Lindell told The Epoch Times, describing his phone as a “filing cabinet.” The FBI wouldn’t allow him to back up his phone, he said in a previous interview.

    Lindell is now trying to reconfigure everything as much as he can, the businessman said. “There are so many apps now I don’t have the passwords to, also my hearing aids, everything run off that,” he said, referring to the fact that his hearing aids had previously been connected to his phone.

    The search warrant listed more than 20 types of data to be taken from Lindell’s phone, including the geographical location of Lindell and other named “co-conspirators” in the search warrant since Nov. 1, 2020, records indicating their state of mind regarding the alleged offenses, and the identity of any individuals he communicated with on the matter.

    Lindell’s attorney said the lawsuit will seek to bar the U.S. government from using this information, and failing that, requests the appointment of an independent arbiter known as a special master to review the data for privileged information to be withheld from authorities.

    In any data that they access, we’re going to suppress the release of any information that they unlawfully obtained, and in the alternative, we’re going to ask for a special master to be appointed to review and segregate the data on his phone from what was required under the warrant,” Olsen told The Epoch Times.

    Monetary Loss

    The consequences of the FBI action were not limited to the loss of access to critical data, Lindell added.

    Four companies who partnered Lindell’s MyStore, an online marketplace featuring American-made products, have backed out of agreements over the federal investigation—either “out of fear” or out of the belief that the businessman has “done something wrong,” Lindell said. A bank last week also informed Lindell that they will stop financing one of MyPillow’s products.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 22:45

  • The US Has A Jails Suicide Crisis On Its Hands
    The US Has A Jails Suicide Crisis On Its Hands

    Suicide is one of the leading causes of death in jails in the United States, with a rate more than three times higher to that of the general public, according to the latest available data from the U.S. Bureau of Justice Statistics (BJS).

    As Statista’s Anna Fleck shows in the chart below, there is also a disparity between jails and federal or state prisons.

    In the U.S, a jail is where people are held before they are sentenced in court. It is also a place where people are sent after receiving a sentence, usually for lighter crimes. A prison is where people go to carry out longer sentences.

    Infographic: The U.S. Has a Jails Suicide Crisis on Its Hands | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    The gap in suicide rates comes down to a number of reasons.

    In a state prison, officials have more detailed information when trying to assess inmates for suicide risks and there is greater focus on educational programmes. By comparison, jails are considered to have worse conditions, uncertainty over pending sentences, and according to reporting in NPR, are more likely to receive first-time offenders who might experience a traumatic “shock of confinement”, as they are suddenly cut off from social support.

    Leah Wang of The Prison Policy Initiative writes that the increase of suicides in jails can also be mapped onto the rising number of women being incarcerated, often in rural, smaller jails. She adds that mental health issues and drug or alcohol disorders are significantly more likely among this group, although often not identified at the time, and that jails’ policies do not reflect the needs of women. Wang writes: “Jails are shameful replacements for key social and medical services, and too often low-level offenses are used to justify locking people up, out of sight, when they simply need help.”

    As Statista’s chart shows, the suicide gap goes back at least two decades – when BJS reports on the topic first began – and is getting worse. And where federal and state prisons have had historically lower suicide rates than jails, their rates have been climbing in recent years too.

    Delays with data reporting mean we do not yet have the numbers on jail and prison suicides from 2020 to 2022. These will likely be impacted by the pandemic, whether through fears of the virus itself, the trauma of losing loved ones and fellow inmates, limited visiting times or with staffing shortages making it hard to monitor inmates.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 22:25

  • "Explosion" Rocks BP Refinery In Ohio
    “Explosion” Rocks BP Refinery In Ohio

    The BP-Husky Toledo refinery in Oregon, Ohio, was rocked by an “explosion” around 1830 local time, according to local news WTOL, citing witnesses. 

    Videos posted on social media show the fire at the BP refinery. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    WTOL learned at least two people were severely burned. The cause of the fire remains yet to be determined. 

    Chris Howard was waiting to hear from his father who works at the plant Tuesday night. He received a phone call around 7 p.m. from a friend who works security at the refinery.

    “He said it was like some sort of explosion,” Howard said. “He told me there was just a big rumble at the refinery, lots of fire everywhere. He said it’s the worst he’s seen. Lots of people injured.” — WTOL

    BP’s website explained the refinery “process up to 160,000 barrels of crude oil each day, providing the Midwest with gasoline, diesel, jet fuel, propane, asphalt, and other products.” 

    It added: “On a daily basis the refinery can produce 3.8 million gallons of gasoline, 1.3 million gallons of diesel fuel and 600,000 gallons of jet fuel.” 

    *Developing… 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 22:03

  • Musk Says Starlink Now "Active" On All Seven Continents
    Musk Says Starlink Now “Active” On All Seven Continents

    Elon Musk said his satellite-internet system Starlink is “active” on all continents. However, the availability map on Starlink’s website says otherwise.

    “Starlink is now active on all continents, including Antarctica,” Musk tweeted. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    But the availability map of the low-latency, high-speed satellite internet service only appears “available” across the Americas, Europe, Australia — Russia, China, and Iran appear to be blocked with no service in the foreseeable future. And not even a sign of progress in Africa (nevertheless Musk’s home country of South Africa). 

    Even though Ukraine is shown on the “waitlist” with service not officially available — there have been countless stories in Western media about how Musk’s space satellites changed the war on the ground against Russia. Maybe there’s more than meets the eye, as coverage is more widespread than reported on the map. 

    This month, more than 2,300 Starlink satellites are in orbit. Another 54 Starlink satellites via SpaceX’s Falcon 9 reusable rocket were launched into space on Sunday night from the Cape Canaveral Space Force Station in Florida. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Last week, Musk tweeted Starlink “is meant for peaceful use only,” in what appears to be a response to Russia’s complaints about Western countries using “elements of civilian, including commercial, infrastructure in outer space for military purposes” at a recent United Nations meeting. 

    “It seems like our colleagues do not realize that such actions in fact constitute indirect involvement in military conflicts,” Konstantin Vorontsov, the head of the Russian delegation to the UN Office for Disarmament Affairs working group, said last week. 

    Meanwhile, Musk has said he would pursue an exception to US sanctions on Iran to supply Starlink access to the country in the Middle East:

    “Internet access is an important tool for protesters and activists in Iran, which blocks many services like YouTube and many foreign media outlets in an effort to impose what the country describes as a halal internet, or one that conforms to its interpretation of Islamic law,” said WSJ. 

    Starlink’s worldwide expansion appears more widespread than what is being shown on the map offered by the company. As for “peaceful use only” applications, that remains to be seen… 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 21:45

  • Pentagon Opens Review Of Its Clandestine Psychological Operations
    Pentagon Opens Review Of Its Clandestine Psychological Operations

    Authored by Dave DeCamp via AntiWar.com,

    The Pentagon has ordered a sweeping review of how it conducts clandestine information warfare after social media sites removed fake accounts that were suspected of being linked to the US militaryThe Washington Post reported on Monday.

    A report published last month by research groups Graphika and the Stanford Internet Observatory detailed the activity of fake accounts on Facebook and Twitter that were promoting pro-Western narratives in posts targeting audiences overseas. The social media companies removed around 150 accounts over the past few years, with some removed recently as they were promoting anti-Russia narratives about the war in Ukraine.

    Soldiers assigned to the Military Information Support Task Force-Central (MISTF-C) Production Development Detachment at Al Udeid Air Base, Qatar. Image: US Army

    The report did not attribute blame for the accounts, but two unnamed military officials speaking to the Post hinted that US Central Command (CENTCOM) was involved. Separately, the Post said that Facebook removed fictitious personas created by CENTCOM to counter a Chinese claim that Covid-19 originated from the US Army bio lab in Fort Detrick, Maryland.

    In response to the Graphika and Stanford Internet Observatory report, Colin Kahl, the undersecretary of defense for policy, ordered the review, which instructed US military command involved in psychological operations to fill the White House in on their activities by next month. Kahl said he wanted to know what types of operations were being carried out and if they were effective.

    The US military has a long history of psychological operations, but its activities online in that area are shrouded in secrecy. While there are military units that specialize in psyops, such as the US Army’s 4th Psychological Operations Group, the Pentagon also employs more covert forces in this area.

    A video published by the US Army’s 4th Psychological Operations Group earlier this year:

    Last year, Newsweek reported that over the past decade, the Pentagon had created the world’s largest clandestine force that consists of about 60,000 people, many of whom use fake identities and operate across the world.

    A major part of the Pentagon’s undercover force are people that operate exclusively online. Newsweek described them as “cutting-edge cyber fighters and intelligence collectors who assume false personas online.” These cyber fighters work to gather data, but some also “engage in campaigns to influence and manipulate social media.”

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 21:25

  • FOMC Preview: If 2023 Dot Comes In Higher Than 4.5%, The Stock Market Will Not Like It
    FOMC Preview: If 2023 Dot Comes In Higher Than 4.5%, The Stock Market Will Not Like It

    There is a longer preview of what the Fed will likely say and do tomorrow, but up front we wanted to recap the main points from Goldman’s call this morning with Josh Schiffrin, the bank’s co-head of US and global rates.

    1. Tomorrow will be brief and to the point: the fed was unhappy with markets reaction to July hike (percived as dovish and potential pivot) … “we are hiking 75bps and are single minded in resolve to bring down inflation”

    2. Dot plot to offer quasi forward guidance, showing restrictive policy until around 2025 (recall in aug fed hammered home the idea that cutting rates in ’23 was the wrong takeaway)

    3. Rhetoric + dots will show us headed for fed funds rate >4% for some time

    Here is flow trader John Flood chimes in that the base case is:

    1. 75bps hike
    2. Hawkish commentary and dots 4.0-4.25% for 2022 and 4.25%-4.5% for 2023.

    Today, the Terminal rate again ticked to 4.5% today. Which is why as Flood warns, “if 2023 dot comes in higher than this 4.5% mark the stock mkt will NOT like it.”

    Of course, the good news is that most of this is already priced in: here is a quick snapshot of what the market has already priced in: 75bps fully, and 18% chance of a 100bps rate hike.

    For those who have been sleeping under a rock this summer, Goldman’s Michael Nocerino recaps the market action over the past month:

    SPX reached a high of 4325 back on August 16th after tapping up against the 200dma only to immediately fade [just as BofA’ Michael Hartnett said at the time would happen]. At that point, markets were running hot rallying over 16% off the July 14 lows to that August 16th technical stall (NYC was also hot with 10 days over 90 degrees in July). Markets have since retraced ~10% from that most recent peak, but overall the summer season has proven to provide solid returns of 6% after starting the year down nearly 23%. Now that we Fall back, one thing that hasn’t cooled is inflation.

    FOMC tomorrow is the focus, but at this point I don’t think anyone is going to be fooled by at least a 75bps hike (market is pricing in only a ~20% chance of a 100bps). Once the capitulation happened into late August, we started to see HF positioning tick higher (See our PB data) with LO’s starting to put some cash back to work. This continue into the CPI print and our flows confirmed the move with LO’s leaning in with a heavy buy skew. Post CPI, everything unraveled as our flows flipped aggressively for sale, with HF positioning back in 2nd percentile and LO’s with record amount of cash on the sidelines.

    That brings us to today where we’ve seen our second day of muted price action with flows neutral as the fact remains that US real rates are now the highest they have been for a decade and US mortgage rates at levels not seen since 2008. So what can we expect and what’s is going to take to get us to a soft-landing and investors back on their feet?

    With all that in mind, here is an official preview of what the Fed will do tomorrow, courtesy of Newsquawk:

    75 OR 100: The FOMC is expected Wednesday to hike the FFR by 75bps to 3.00-3.25%, with risks of a larger 100bps hike after the super-hot August CPI data shattered expectations for any imminent downturn in inflation. While the angst around CPI is deafening, it’s worth highlighting the decline in long-term inflation expectations (via UoM and NY Fed surveys), lower prices paid components in September Philly Fed and Empire State releases, and also the more contained August PPI data (which will keep the Fed’s preferred inflation gauge, Core PCE, more anchored) as factors that may temper some of the extreme hawkishness, ergo votes for 100bps.

    MARKET PRICING: Markets took down implied 100bps September pricing to near 15% in wake of the decline in the UoM consumer inflation expectations survey, although crept back up to 20% as of Monday. Money markets have priced in just shy of 150bps of hikes across the September and November meetings, with 190bps priced through December, taking the 2022-end rate into a 4.00-4.25% range up from 3.75-4% before CPI, while 215bps of tightening is currently priced into the terminal rate (March 2023) taking rates towards the top-end of the 4.25-4.5% range up from 3.75-4% pre-CPI. Markets are currently pricing a 2023-end Fed rate at 4%. In its preview, Goldman writes that it expects the FOMC to deliver a third 75bp rate hike on Wednesday, taking the funds rate to 3-3.25%. “The bond market is pricing a roughly three-in-four chance of a 75bp hike and a one-in-four chance of a 100bp hike instead. We expect the pace of tightening to then slow to 50bp in November and December, which would leave the funds rate at 4-4.25% at the end of 2022.”

    A quick caveat from Goldman here: “a third “unusually large” hike would represent a reversal from the plan Chair Powell laid out in his July press conference to slow the pace of rate hikes in order to reduce the risk of overtightening. We see little net surprise in the economic data during the intermeeting period: activity growth has remained soft, and inflation and labor market data came in firmer than expected one month and softer the other.”

    GUIDANCE: The broad-based upside seen in the August CPI (Core +0.6% M/M, +6.3% Y/Y, with services gaining momentum) broke what could have been more evidence toward a series of lower readings, a condition that would have allowed the Fed to start considering a slowdown in the pace of tightening. With the dovish runoff now closed, at least in the near term, the likelihood of the Fed hiking until the economy crashes, a ‘hard landing’, has increased further and markets have shifted to reflect that notion. Aside from risks of 100bps in September, another 75bps in November looks more likely. Fed officials have stressed their data-dependence and have on the whole been coy to tie their hands to guidance on the rate path. We can expect a reiteration in the statement, “the Committee… anticipates that ongoing increases in the target range will be appropriate.” Powell will likely be pressed on his preference for the November meeting in the press conference. Absent guidance, the data-dependent stance will instead see greater attention put on the SEPs.

    DOT PLOT: The SEP (‘Dot Plot’) will be updated, since their last iteration in June, to show both a higher year-end and terminal rate with some desks in wake of CPI forecasting new dots that could reach heights of 4% (prev. 3.4% median in June) and 5% (prev. 3.8% in June), respectively, reflective of both the worsening inflation outlook and stubbornly tight labour market. Fed Governor Waller, to wit, “right now there is no tradeoff between the Fed’s employment and inflation objectives, so we will continue to aggressively fight inflation.” However, there is no clear consensus among analysts for the terminal rate, but forecasts are seen more common around 4.25%, with some dovish estimates pencilling in a terminal beneath 4%. A few are also forecasting rate cuts heading into 2024 and 2025.

    Bloomberg compiled the following economist survey between September 9th-14th, meaning not all responses will incorporate the August CPI data, thus, these can be considered somewhat stale, with expectations for the Fed Funds and inflation dots having nudged higher since the data. Note this is also the first SEP release containing 2025 estimates.

    Median dot expectations:

    • FEDERAL FUNDS RATE: exp. at 3.9% in 2022 (prev. 3.4% in Jun), 4.1% in 2023 (prev. 3.8%), 3.6% in 2024 (prev. 3.4%), 2.9% in 2025, 2.5% in longer run (prev. 2.5%)
    • CHANGE IN REAL GDP: exp. at 0.5% in 2022 (prev. 1.7% in Jun), 1.4% in 2023 (prev. 1.7%), 1.7% in 2024 (prev. 1.9%), 1.8% in 2025, 1.8% in longer run (prev. 1.8%)
    • UNEMPLOYMENT RATE: exp. at 3.7% in 2022 (prev. 3.7% in Jun), 4.1% in 2023 (prev. 3.9%), 4.2% in 2024 (prev. 4.1%), 4.1% in 2025, 4% in longer run (prev. 4.0%)
    • PCE INFLATION: exp. at 5.2% in 2022 (prev. 5.2% in Jun), 2.6% in 2023 (prev. 2.6%), 2.2% in 2024 (prev. 2.2%), 2% in 2025, 2% in longer run (prev. 2.0%)
    • CORE PCE INFLATION: exp. at 4.5% in 2022 (prev. 4.3% in Jun), 2.8% in 2023 (prev. 2.7%), 2.3% in 2024 (prev. 2.3%), 2% in 2025

    BALANCE SHEET: Fed officials are also likely to be increasingly cognizant of the restrictive effects of quantitative tightening (QT), both from a monetary perspective and a smooth market functioning view, with liquidity conditions in the Treasury market sitting at uncomfortable levels from a historical standpoint. These concerns have brought uncertainty about whether the Fed will go ahead with previous stated plans to consider MBS sales. Note, the runoff (allowing existing holdings to mature without reinvesting) has now accelerated to an annual pace of USD 1.1tln, while desks see the balance sheet shrinking to USD 8.4tln by year-end and USD 6.6tln in December 2024, based on the current plans.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 21:05

  • Pennsylvania County Sued Over Illegal Ballot Drop Box Usage Captured On Camera
    Pennsylvania County Sued Over Illegal Ballot Drop Box Usage Captured On Camera

    Authored by Bill Pan via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    A conservative legal group is suing the board of elections in Pennsylvania’s Chester County, citing surveillance camera footage that captured the illegal use of ballot drop boxes.

    Individuals are captured delivering more than two ballots at the drop box at 601 Westtown Road, West Chester, Pennsylvania, in May 2022. (America First Legal)

    The lawsuit was filed Thursday by America First Legal (AFL) on behalf of registered voters in Chester County. The group, founded by longtime Donald Trump adviser Stephen Miller, said this is meant to ensure that the board adheres to Pennsylvania’s election law regarding ballot drop boxes prior to this November’s election.

    Under Pennsylvania’s election code, mailed and absentee ballots have to be returned either by mail or in person by the person to whom the ballot belongs, meaning one person cannot drop more than one ballot in a drop box.

    During the May primary election, the Chester County Board of Elections placed 13 drop boxes. An instruction attached to each box by the board explicitly said that “you must only return your own ballot,” and that “you are prohibited from delivering or returning anyone else’s ballot, even if that person is your spouse, parent, child, grandparent, other relative, neighbor, or friend.”

    However, only 11 of all 13 boxes were physically watched by a staff member and were only accessible at certain hours of the day, according to the complaint. The other two boxes, which were accessible 24 hours per day, remained unstaffed but monitored with surveillance cameras.

    The surveillance camera footage, obtained through a Right-to-Know request from the board, showed multiple instances of individuals delivering more than two ballots. Together, some 300 individuals had dropped “invalid and void ballots” at that location, according to the AFL.

    An individual is captured on camera delivering more than two ballots at the drop box at 601 Westtown Road, West Chester, Pennsylvania, in May 2022. (America First Legal)

    This means that at least 300 invalid and void ballots were deposited into just one drop box, which were then canvassed and counted,” the AFL said in the complaint (pdf), adding that although a review of the camera footage of the other drop box is still underway, it is fair to assume that a similar number of “void and invalid ballots” were deposited there.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 20:45

  • 'The Dollar Is Once Again The World's Problem' – Chinese State Media Urges 'De-Dollarization' Amid Fed's "Financial Looting"
    ‘The Dollar Is Once Again The World’s Problem’ – Chinese State Media Urges ‘De-Dollarization’ Amid Fed’s “Financial Looting”

    On the eve of The Fed’s big decision to hike rates 75bps or 100bps in an effort to shock the system and tamp down out of control inflation, no lesser entity than the CCP-backed Global Times penned an editorial attacking US monetary policy, entitled: “The strong dollar should not become a sharp blade to cut the world.”

    The editorial begins by noting that tomorrow’s rate-hike will likely further strengthen the US Dollar, which “for many countries in the world,” China says, “might be the beginning of another nightmare.”

    “A super strong US dollar and the fall of other currencies will, to a certain extent, ease the scorching inflation in the US economy, but the world will have to pay for it.

    And the dollar’s strength has pushed Asian FX markets down hard to their weakest since 2003…

    The Global Times then exclaims that since the end of World War II, the US has used dollar hegemony to carry out “financial looting” or “export crises” against other countries several times.

    “As a widely popular phrase in the West goes, the US enjoys the exorbitant privileges created by the dollar and the deficit without tears, and used the worthless paper note to plunder the resources and factories of other nations

    … while the political elites in Washington boast of the “myth of the American system” and take credit for “alleviating the crisis,” thousands of poor families around the world are being trampled by them.

    And as the yuan tumbles, and Beijing’s attempts (through strong yuan fixes at a minimum) to defy gravity…

    …the editorial points the finger directly:

    Today, the dollar is once again the world’s problem. In a sense, it’s hard to believe that the “prosperity” of the US is clean and moral…

    Washington keeps laying mines but never removes them, which will eventually explode the US itself. The incompetence of US financial policymakers has been exposed by the consecutive interest rate hikes that have contributed to the abnormal appreciation of the US dollar with the purpose of defusing the severe inflation. “

    Now the anxiety and insecurity brought by the US dollar to the world has heralded the beginning of the decline of its hegemony – regarding Washington’s insatiable exploitation, Europe, Asia, the Middle East and other regions have explored the path of “de-dollarization,” leading to the inevitable diversification of the international monetary system…

    “…The instability and fragility of international financial markets have once again become prominent. It is precisely at such times that the international community should be more determined to cooperate and build a reliable, systemic and long-term multilateral international financial system. This cannot wait.

    Remember, as we have noted previously, nothing lasts forever

    Read the full Editorial here…

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 20:25

  • US Ends Reports On Military Costs, Arms Transfers
    US Ends Reports On Military Costs, Arms Transfers

    Authored by Dave DeCamp via AntiWar.com,

    The State Department announced in August that it will no longer publish World Military Expenditures and Arms Transfers (WMEAT) reports, which have been released by the US government since the 1960s.

    The WMEATs detail US global military spending, arms transfers, and related data for each country in the world. The 2022 National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA) included an amendment that repealed a 1994 provision requiring the State Department to publish a WMEAT each year.

    US Marine Corp image

    “Section 5114(b)(4) of the National Defense Authorization Act for Fiscal Year 2022 repealed the 1994 statutory provision that required the Department of State to publish an edition of WMEAT every year. Consistent with this repeal, the Department of State will cease to produce and publish WMEAT,” the State Department said on its website.

    The State Department said that the report it published in 2021 was the “final edition” of the WMEAT. The 2021 WMEAT covered an 11-year period from 2009 through 2019 and found that the US was by far the world’s largest arms dealer.

    During that period, about “79 percent of world arms trade by value appears to have been supplied by the United States.”

    The discontinuation of the WMEAT reports, which reduces the US government’s transparency, comes as the US is shipping billions of dollars worth of arms into Ukraine with virtually no oversight.

    Since Russia invaded on February 24, the US has pledged $15.1 billion in weapons for Kyiv

    The latest $600 million unveiled last week is being pulled from the $40 billion Ukraine aid bill that President Biden signed back in May, but those funds are running out, and the administration has asked Congress for more.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 20:05

  • McDonald's CEO Warns That More Companies Will Leave Crime Ridden Chicago
    McDonald’s CEO Warns That More Companies Will Leave Crime Ridden Chicago

    McDonald’s CEO Chris Kempczinski says exploding crime has made his employees feel unsafe to go to work and has made it impossible to hire new talent for the company’s Chicago offices.  The Illinois city has seen over 494 homicides so far in 2022, which is at least 100 more deaths that it saw in the first 8 months of 2019.  Burglary is up at least 36% and theft overall is up 70% from a year ago.       

    Chicago Mayor Lori Lightfoot is likely a large part of the problem. A notorious proponent of social justice ideology, Lightfoot vowed to crack down on anti-covid lockdown protesters but refused to do the same with BLM looting and rioting.  Under her leadership Chicago has spiraled out of control.  Lightfoot recently lauded a minor drop in homicides this year while ignoring the fact that deaths skyrocketed in 2020 and 2021, making the recent small decline far less meaningful.

    Lightfoot called for defunding Chicago police by $80 million in 2020, only to then beg for federal law enforcement assistance in 2021.  Chicago continues to be known as one of the most violent cities in America. 

    The concerns expressed by McDonald’s leadership parallels similar worries expressed by companies in democrat run cities across the US in terms of economic viability and safety.  Numerous businesses have fled Los Angeles and San Francisco in the past two years, not just because of the draconian California lockdowns and mandates, but also because of rising crime and poverty. 

    As Kempczinski noted:

    “The truth is, it’s more difficult today for me to convince a promising McDonald’s executive to relocate to Chicago from one of our other offices than it was just a few years ago.”

    The ideological policies of the political left are proving to be completely incompatible with successful business practices.  Over-taxation along with actual support for criminals over law abiding citizens and law enforcement are fueling an unstable environment supported by thin pillars of government assistance and welfare.  One gets the sense that as bad as things are in blue cities, they could get a whole lot worse in the near future should a single “black swan” event take place.

    This is not to say that some cities in red states don’t have their share of crime.  Houston, Texas, for example, also has a problem with higher homicide rates the past couple of years, but keep in mind, Houston is also run by Democrats. 

    In other words, leftists in charge seem to be the common denominator when it comes to US cities facing high crime rates and economic decline.  New Orleans, Louisiana, recently named the murder capital of the US, is ALSO run by Democrats.  It’s an inescapable cause and effect relationship.

    Three booming businesses, Citadel, Caterpillar, and Boeing, have all moved their headquarters out of Chicago as crime soars. Kempczinski encouraged public officials to address the crime or risk more companies leaving. 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 19:45

  • Illegal Immigrants Voluntarily Sign Forms That Disclose Destination: Gov. Abbott’s Office
    Illegal Immigrants Voluntarily Sign Forms That Disclose Destination: Gov. Abbott’s Office

    Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Illegal immigrants who are being transported to other parts of the country from Texas voluntarily sign a waiver that discloses their destination, according to a spokesperson for Gov. Greg Abbott.

    The migrants on Texas’ buses willingly chose to go to Washington, D.C., New York City, or Chicago, having signed a voluntary consent waiver available in multiple languages upon boarding that they agreed on the destination,” spokesperson Renae Eze told media outlets recently.

    With the U.S. Capitol in the backdrop, a bus from Texas carrying illegal immigrants arrives in Washington on Aug. 2, 2022. (Stefani Reynolds/AFP via Getty Images)

    Meanwhile, the city of El Paso, Texas, reportedly has its own program for busing illegal immigrants. The Democrat-run city is located across the border from Ciudad Juárez, Mexico.

    “The state is not involved in El Paso’s busing,” Eze told Just the News on Sept. 17.

    The comments follow claims by Democratic and White House officials that Abbott, Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis, and Arizona Gov. Doug Ducey are misleading illegal immigrants and have suggested that the transfer program isn’t voluntary. When Abbott initiated the busing plan earlier this year, he repeatedly said the illegal aliens would go on a voluntary—not mandatory—basis.

    Only the federal government sets immigration policy and is responsible for deportations. Governors don’t have such powers.

    The busing program drew headlines last week when DeSantis flew about 50 illegal aliens to Martha’s Vineyard, a Massachusetts island that’s popular with wealthy Democratic elites, from Florida. On the same day, Abbott bused dozens of individuals picked up at the border to Vice President Kamala Harris’s official residence in Washington.

    In response, White House press secretary Karine Jean-Pierre told reporters on Sept. 16 that the White House is deferring to the Department of Justice (DOJ) on whether legal action is being considered against the Republican governors.

    Hours after sending the illegal immigrants to Martha’s Vineyard, Massachusetts Gov. Charlie Baker activated the National Guard and promptly sent them to a military base on Cape Cod. It isn’t clear what will happen to the aliens, who are reportedly of Venezuelan origin.

    During a press conference last week, DeSantis said he’s considering flying more illegal migrants to other parts of the country.

    “Obviously, there’s going to be buses like Texas is doing, [and] there may be some more flights,” he announced.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 19:25

  • Why One Trader Expects The Fed To Pause Hikes Amid Growing Evidence Of Slowing Demand
    Why One Trader Expects The Fed To Pause Hikes Amid Growing Evidence Of Slowing Demand

    Ahead of tomorrow’s Fed rate hike, which Jerome Powell now openly prays will push the US economy into a deep recession leaving millions without a job and Democrats furious at the Fed chair (after all they will need a scapegoat when it all goes L-shaped), stocks tumbled as Treasury yields hit multiyear highs, with traders bracing for aa potentially more hawkish Federal Reserve than is currently priced in.

    As Bloomberg’ Vincent Cignarella writes, some swaps traders – very few – are pricing for a 100 basis point rate hike, as some strategists also call for a full 1 point move. Still, the vast majority see 75 basis points as the likely case, especially after the WSJ’s Fed whisperer Nick Timiraos called for 75bps, with only two of the 96 analysts surveyed by Bloomberg currently predicting a full-point increase.

    And yet, as Cignarella writes this morning for the Bloomberg Markets live blog, the shrinking backlog at ports that contributed to supply-chain disruptions and a surge in consumer prices is rapidly slowing. As the Bloomberg trader notes, changes in container flows precede GDP changes, and the current trend is lower (not that one needs another confirmation of this, especially with the Atlanta Fed about to print negative for the 3rd quarter in a row).

    Port of Long Beach Executive Director Mario Cordero expects the pandemic-era surge in US consumer demand that snarled supply chains to start to cool, with evidence of a deceleration beginning to show in weaker inbound container arrivals.

    Many commodity prices are also falling without prodding from the fed as demand has been slowing. It’s not just gasoline that’s falling. Crude is lower by 25%, natural gas 22%, lumber 66%, copper down 27% and this morning the NAHB index of homebuilder confidence fell to 46 from 90 at the end of 2020. Better supply flows and slower demand sets up just the economic slowdown Powell is trying to create.

    At the same time, prices that are rising — food and rent — are out of the Fed’s control.

    Meanwhile, the only thing rate hikes will accomplish is a recession. They always do. What they will also likely bring is an eventual improvement in risk appetite and the beginning of another bull market. Of course, slower growth and declining demand will bring less inflation.

    All of that, Cignarella writes, “may lead the Fed to pause after Wednesday’s rate hike, opening the way for the start of a risk rally.”

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 19:05

  • Wisconsin's Use Of Private Vendor To Maintain Voter Roll On The Line After Complaint
    Wisconsin’s Use Of Private Vendor To Maintain Voter Roll On The Line After Complaint

    Authored by Steven Kovac via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    A citizen group filed a complaint with the Wisconsin Elections Commission (WEC) on Sept. 8, alleging that the commission broke federal law by contracting an out-of-state vendor to maintain the state’s voter rolls.

    Meagan Wolfe, head of the Wisconsin Elections Commission, speaks during a virtual press conference on Nov. 4, 2020. (Wisconsin Elections Commission via Reuters)

    In its complaint (pdf), the Wisconsin Voter Alliance is challenging the legality of a state law which permits the elections commission to contract with third parties to maintain the state’s centralized voter roll. The complaint seeks a declaration from the WEC finding that the state statute violates the 2002 federal Help America Vote Act.

    The complaint also asks the commission to declare that database sharing with third parties and the parties’ uses of the database are legally unauthorized under federal law.

    Such a declaration by WEC would force the end of the years-long contractual relationship between the commission and the Electronic Registration Information Center (ERIC).

    According to its website, ERIC is a “public charity nonprofit membership organization comprised of 33 states and the District of Columbia.”

    The organization’s mission is “to assist states in improving the accuracy of America’s voter rolls and increase access to voter registration for all eligible citizens.”

    Under the terms of their contract with ERIC, member states are required to send voter registration information to potentially eligible residents who aren’t registered to vote every two years.

    ERIC identifies the individuals by comparing voter data with motor vehicle licensing information, which the member states, by contract, must provide to it.

    A sign directs voters toward a polling place near the state capitol in Madison, Wis., on Nov. 6, 2018. (Nick Oxford/File Photo/Reuters)

    The complainants argue that federal law requires that only the elections commission and its officials are authorized to maintain and implement the statewide voter registration system database.

    They claim that the Help America Vote Act requires the elections commission to maintain its database without outside assistance from a third party and that the task can’t be delegated to any other entity.

    The complaint asserts that under the federal statute, the election officials of each state are mandated to create and maintain a centralized, interactive, and computerized statewide voter registration list. The law states that the voter list is to be “defined, maintained, and administered at the State level … [and] shall be coordinated with other agency databases within the State.”

    The federal law also states that “the appropriate State or local election official shall perform list maintenance with respect to the computerized list on a regular basis.”

    The statute requires states to “remove the names of ineligible voters from the computerized list in accordance with State law.”

    The language of the law is plain. It is the responsibility of state elections officials to clean up their own voter rolls,” Erick Kaardal, an attorney representing the alliance, told The Epoch Times.

    The complaint cites the U.S. Code to show that any election official in the state, including local election officials, “may obtain immediate electronic access to the information contained in the computerized list.”

    “The same federal law clearly mandates that the computerized list ‘shall be coordinated with other agency databases within the State,’” Kaardal said. “The operative phrase is ‘within the State.’”

    ERIC is headquartered in Washington. The Epoch Times contacted ERIC for comment.

    WEC officials didn’t respond to a request for comment by press time.

    Meagan Wolfe, the commission’s administrator, is the most recent past president of ERIC, according to its website.

    “The cleverness of ERIC’s founder, David Becker, has created a mirage in the minds of state election officials around the country that they cannot handle the complex job of cleaning up the voter rolls themselves,” Kaardal told The Epoch Times on Sept. 13. “So, they go to their legislatures and convince them to provide the small appropriation needed to contract with ERIC.”

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 18:45

  • Russia Opens Military Recruitment Center For Foreigners
    Russia Opens Military Recruitment Center For Foreigners

    From near the start of the Russian invasion of Ukraine, the Ukrainian side has touted its own “foreign legion” – which especially in the opening months attracted thousands of Westerners. Calling itself the “International Legion of Territorial Defense of Ukraine” – potential recruits can even go to an official website and click “join”. 

    President Volodymyr Zelensky a mere two days after the Feb.24 invasion of his country had called on “friends of Ukraine, freedom and democracy” to sign up for the territorial defense forces. According to one study tracking Ukraine forces during the conflict, “Just two weeks after Zelensky asked foreigners to serve in the Ukrainian ‘international legion,’ Ukraine announced that more than 20,000 foreign volunteers from over 52 different countries had arrived.”

    Russian military recruitment signs, via Reuters

    As the study noted further, “Many of the new arrivals were well trained with prior military experience. These included veterans who served in the US Army, US Marine Corps, and British Army.”

    Some pundits have said these mercenaries have remained deeply involved in the ongoing Ukrainian counteroffensive which began in earnest this month, regaining crucial territory especially in Kharkiv in the east. 

    Interestingly, at a moment international reports are pointing to high casualties as well as possible manpower shortages on the Russian side, the Russian government has opened a military recruitment center focused on foreign citizens. The mayor of Moscow announced the new initiative on Tuesday:

    “The Moscow government will deploy a full-fledged infrastructure in Sakharovo to assist the Russian Defense Ministry in the recruitment of foreign citizens into the military service,” Mayor Sergei Sobyanin said in a post on the Telegram messaging app.

    Local authorities “will do everything necessary to make the signing of the contracts as convenient as possible” the official statement said.

    This is likely related to a move in the State Duma being reported Tuesday to make preparations for a “national mobilization” – as the Russian military could be poised for a major escalation. This also involved federal measures making it easier for foreigners to sign a one-year contract with the Russian army, based on a program where they receive citizenship in return.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    However, the proposal would still have to go through the upper house of parliament and be signed into law by President Putin. All of this points some major changes in the way Russia is executing the invasion, and as Putin is set to give a major address Tuesday night alongside his defense minister.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 18:25

  • 33 GOP Senators Urge Garland To Give Hunter Biden Investigator Special Counsel Powers
    33 GOP Senators Urge Garland To Give Hunter Biden Investigator Special Counsel Powers

    Authored by Cathy He via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    More than 30 Republican senators have requested that Attorney General Merrick Garland give special counsel protections to the federal prosecutor investigating Hunter Biden, arguing that such a move would help assure the American people that the probe is free from political influence amid widespread allegations of bias at the Department of Justice (DOJ).

    Senate Judiciary Committee Ranking Member Sen. Chuck Grassley (R-Iowa) speaks in Washington on March 22, 2022. (Anna Moneymaker/Getty Images)

    The president’s son has been investigated by the office of Delaware U.S. Attorney David Weiss, a Trump-appointed prosecutor, since at least 2019.

    While prosecutors have not publicly disclosed what is being investigated, documents from the investigation and people who have testified to a grand jury say it includes looking into Hunter Biden’s financial dealings with entities in China and other foreign countries.

    “There is no way of knowing the entire scope of the investigation, but evidence seems to be mounting that Hunter Biden committed numerous federal crimes, including, but not limited to, tax fraud, money laundering, and foreign-lobbying violations,” the senators wrote in the Sept. 19 letter to Garland.

    The letter, led by Sens. John Cornyn (R-Texas), Chuck Grassley (R-Iowa), and Minority Leader Mitch McConnell (R-Ky.), alleges heightened politicization of the DOJ under Garland.

    Hunter Biden attends a Presidential Medal of Freedom ceremony honoring 17 recipients, in the East Room of the White House in Washington, on July 7, 2022. (Saul Loeb/AFP via Getty Images)

    It also references whistleblower information received by Grassley’s office detailing a “widespread effort within the FBI to downplay or discredit negative information about” Hunter Biden, including allegations that the FBI “shut down investigative activity and avenues of information relating to potentially criminal information on Hunter Biden before the 2020 presidential election.”

    The senators accused Garland of taking the “inexplicable step of chilling lawful whistleblower activity” by issuing an Aug. 30 memo reminding DOJ employees of a policy prohibiting communications with Congressional members without approval. The memo was issued on the heels of whistleblower approaches to members of Congress.

    When President Joe Biden took office, the administration allowed Weiss to remain on as prosecutor, even as all other Trump-appointed U.S. attorneys were asked to leave, in a move to avoid the appearance of political interference.

    But many Republican lawmakers, including the senators who signed on to the letter, believe this is not enough to ensure the integrity of the investigation

    “Given the politicization of the DOJ under your watch and the importance of avoiding any appearance of impropriety, the undersigned request that you provide U.S. Attorney Weiss the full protections and authorities of a special counsel,” the letter stated.

    “This is one important action that you can take that will go a long way to restoring faith in our governmental institutions.”

    The attorney general in an April hearing assured senators that “there will not be interference of any political or improper kind” in the investigation being run out of Deleware.

    Garland, at the time, also declined to comment on repeated questions about a potential special counsel being assigned to the investigation, saying, “The question is an internal DOJ matter,” Garland repeated.

    Read more here…

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 18:05

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 20th September 2022

  • Germany's (And Europe's) Self-Inflicted Upcoming Energy Crunch
    Germany’s (And Europe’s) Self-Inflicted Upcoming Energy Crunch

    Authored by Weimin Chen via The Mises Institute,

    At the end of September 2021, the Nord Stream 2 project was a reality after many years of uncertainty. At that time, there were only a few more regulatory hurdles remaining for Germany and Russia to seal the deal on the long-awaited and highly controversial natural gas pipeline. Achieving such a feat would have been a milestone in energy cooperation between the two countries. Sadly, the regional order has tilted hard and quick off that track, and Europe has plunged into a perilous future of uncertainty.

    In the first weeks of the Russian-initiated war in Ukraine, Germany, along with the rest of Europe, found itself backed into a corner regarding its energy sourcing as Western sanctions cut off routes and links in the established regional energy and financial infrastructures. There has been no perceptible success in breaking out of this bind. Instead, Germany has watched time tick by. Russia’s Gazprom recently cut gas flow for Nord Stream 1 to 20 percent of capacity.

    German nuclear power plants remain mostly idle, with three facilities providing 13 percent of the country’s electricity compared to France’s 69 percent. Coal power plants have now ramped up output, with the inevitable approach of the fall and winter seasons in the near term.

    Reality Sets In

    Germany, and indeed the rest of the world, has operated on the expectation that the general uptrend of development and growth experienced in Western countries would continue alongside the increasing global ties that have created a landscape of abundance and increased the overall standard of living. But now the largest economy in Europe finds itself facing a serious precipice as the danger of significant hardship in the near term looms.

    Public opinion reflected in a poll from mid-July shows that nearly one in two Germans are concerned that Germany is hurting itself more than it is impacting Russia’s political aims through tough sanctions. The layman’s gut feeling about this may well capture the reality that Germany’s sanctions on natural gas and energy in particular, as well as Western sanctions in general, have disproportionately self-harming effects. In a competitive enterprise as serious as war and national security, this would be nothing short of paramount negligence and self-sabotage.

    Pain in Regression

    Rising energy costs would inevitably hit the poorer and lower-income segment of the population and would certainly spell a difficult winter, indeed. The government has already started to encourage people to cut back and save energy in anticipation of energy shortages. In the face of the stark realities, some Germans are even turning to stockpiling wood, regressing from a modern energy infrastructure to seriously planning on engaging in the preindustrial practice of burning wood for warmth this winter. This is no trivial blow to the standard of living in one of the most developed countries in the world.

    Leaders of the major industries that power the German economy have warned of serious problems for output in the absence of the established but now vulnerable energy infrastructure. The head of technology and engineering company Bosch has said that production could be halted at their factories.

    Meanwhile, the CEO of Siemens explained that the steady flow of natural gas is existential to some industries such as glassmaking. The head of BASF has made similar comments regarding its manufacture of critical chemical products involved in the already squeezed areas of agriculture, pharmaceuticals, and biotechnologies around the world. This would in turn jeopardize the employment of all those who work in these industries, in a far-reaching ripple effect.

    Flailing Policy Directions

    Starting in October, Germany is set to implement a levy on all gas consumers to offset the difficulties energy providers in the country are facing as they pivot to alternative sources. According to German economy minister Robert Habeck, the levy would amount to between 1.5 and 5 euro cents per kilowatt hour, or about an additional €1,000 per year for a four-person household.

    In the German government, criticism and doubt of the ruling coalition’s hardline stance against Russia is mounting. Chancellor Olaf Scholz adheres to the Western consensus of being unequivocally tough on Russia, while his former political opponents Annalena Baerbock and Christian Lindner, now foreign minister and finance minister, respectively, carry out Germany’s political, military, and financial backing of Ukraine in this conflict.

    The realities of the harm that these anti-Russia policies have caused Germany have provided an opening to political opponents to take the contrary position, advocating an easing of Russia policy to ease the pressure that threatens to throttle the energy security of Germany and the rest of Europe. A pivot in Germany’s Russia policy would also represent a pivot away from Washington’s policy.

    It can be seen as an opportunity for Germany to assert its decision-making and leadership position at the political level in Europe, not to mention as a stakeholder in its own sovereignty. Perhaps in this way, Germany can choose to spare Europe the economic pain brought about by this largely US-driven hawkish stance toward the East.

    Even if Germany can find viable energy alternatives, reverse the closure of its nuclear power plants, or come to an agreement on gas delivery with Russia, the long-term East-West relationship has been damaged. The implications of this new geopolitical and regional order are severe, to say the least. A German crisis would be a crisis for all of Europe, one that would rock the entire European Union and the many economies that surround it.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 09/20/2022 – 02:00

  • Why The World Economic Forum's Plutocracy Should Be Dissolved
    Why The World Economic Forum’s Plutocracy Should Be Dissolved

    Authored by JB Shurk via The Gatestone Institute,

    previous essay highlighted the serious threats posed by the World Economic Forum’s “Great Reset” to individual liberty, human innovation, and general prosperity. It is important to expand discussion of these threats by examining the inherent dangers to free nations when so much wealth is concentrated in the hands of so few.

    No matter how noble its stated intentions, the “Great Reset” is at its heart a program for driving political power away from individual citizens and toward the controlling interests of a small international class of financial elites. This shift in society’s balance of power has fundamentally changed the relationship between Western citizens and their national governments.

    For citizens to reclaim power, they must not only embrace the basics of free markets once again but also rekindle a fondness for questioning the motivations of political authorities.

    Of all Lord Acton’s persuasive defenses of individual liberty as the highest end of human civilization, one observation remains most memorable: “Power tends to corrupt and absolute power corrupts absolutely.” As well-known as these words are, the universality of their meaning is often ignored.

    It is not just kings, generals, and popes who possess great power. Wherever a person, group, or institution is capable — through enticement, coercion, or brute force — of bending an individual’s free will, the structures and instruments of power exist. A local school board, after all, may well have more immediate and intimate influences over a person’s family than the United Nations Human Rights Council and its revolving door of despots who tend to promulgate international resolutions shielding their own crimes. A wealthy landowner who exerts hefty influence over agricultural or cattle markets influences the pocketbook fortunes of more modest farmers, too. The small number of multinational corporations that control most television and print news sources around the globe also control the sociological levers capable of manufacturing or shifting public opinion. Power in any form — political, economic, cultural, spiritual — is an abiding challenge to human liberty, and in this way, must always be guarded against as a potential foe.

    It is also true that those with power have little incentive to check what they possess and have every incentive to grow and strengthen the powers already in their grasp. Rare, indeed, is the Cincinnatus or Washington who has gained near total control over a nation state only to relinquish such tremendous authority voluntarily and return with humility to the life of an ordinary farmer. Examples of virtuous self-restraint are historic exceptions to power’s innate tendency to become all the more coveted once obtained. So, too, is it uncommon to find those in possession of raw power who ruthlessly or bombastically proclaim their dominance over others. Instead, people and institutions with power prefer to remain somewhat in the shadows, exercising authority in the name of ideas, causes, or populations beyond themselves.

    “The welfare of the people,” Albert Camus succinctly noted, “…has always been the alibi of tyrants.”

    The great mass murderers of the twentieth century attest to this truth. Lenin, Stalin, Hitler, Pol Pot and Mao killed tens of millions, but they did so, they assured the world, not for their own glory but for the benefit of “the people.” Castro and Guevara executed tens of thousands of political prisoners while absurdly claiming they did so in the name of “freedom.”

    “Most of the evil in this world,” T.S. Eliot is said to have coldly warned, “is done by people with good intentions.” So when people or institutions wrap themselves in the garments of “good intentions” and proclaim loudly to be working for “the people’s best interests,” that is precisely the time when individual liberty is most at risk.

    Today in the West we are confronted with an uncomfortable paradox. At the same time as national leaders defend vague notions of “democracy” against “authoritarian” threats beyond their borders, power and influence continue to rapidly amalgamate into the hands of a small few. It is no secret that money influences politics, no matter how profusely politicians may assert their civic independence from the lobbyists and benefactors filling their campaign war chests. With organizations such as the World Economic Forum openly working to direct the legislative programs and executive actions of nation states across the globe, however, wealthy patrons of elite economic societies have become increasingly vocal about their ambitions toward remaking the world according to their own “Great Reset” designsת while flexing their political muscles within the domestic affairs of discreet nation states for ordinary citizens to see.

    Klaus Schwab, the founder and executive chairman of the World Economic Forum, appeared with David Gergen in 2017 at Harvard’s John F. Kennedy School of Government and openly boasted of his influence over many national leaders:

    “I have to say when I mention names like Mrs. Merkel, even Vladimir Putin and so on, they have all been Young Global Leaders of the World Economic Forum, but what we are really proud of now is the young generation like Prime Minister Trudeau, the President of Argentina and so on. So we penetrate the cabinets. So yesterday I was at a reception for Prime Minister Trudeau, and I know that half of his cabinet or even more are Young Global Leaders of the World Economic Forum…. It is true in Argentina and it is true in France now….”

    When the chairman of an international economic body publicly brags about his leverage over the leaders of sovereign nation states, he can hardly be mistaken as defending the merits of “democracy.”

    In a somewhat farcical display of the World Economic Forum’s control over individual nations, it has become eerily commonplace these last two years to hear the leaders of the United Kingdom, France, Germany, Australia, New Zealand, Canada, and the United States all parroting the same “Build Back Better” slogan propagated by Klaus Schwab’s economic club. With wealth and political power bonded densely into such haut monde cabals, the insular prerogatives of the WEF have succeeded in dominating government policies throughout the West.

    Both in their immediate handling of the COVID-19 pandemic and their planned response to the harsh economic repercussions dovetailing from prolonged lockdowns, Western nation states have taken many of their cues directly from the World Economic Forum’s policy edicts. Whatever vestige of “democracy” still casts a shadow across North America, Europe, and the South Pacific, it has become unmistakable that plutocracy — rule by a wealthy elite — is fast assuming total control over the West’s future.

    Notably, today’s plutocrats have little interest in truly free markets. Unlike J.D. Rockefeller, Andrew Carnegie, J.P. Morgan, and other late-nineteenth-century industrialists and business magnates who made their fortunes in the heyday of economic growth before the massive expansion of the regulatory State, those with great wealth today often champion government intervention in markets. The World Economic Forum, for instance, demands governments take urgent action to combat or address climate changecybersecurity, online misinformationartificial intelligenceoverpopulation, the use of hydrocarbon energyfarm ownershipfood supplies, the elimination of private vehicle ownership, and the imposition of citizen-control protocols to defend against future pandemics. Regulation of people and markets is now of paramount importance to those with wealth and power.

    By their nature, regulations (which are indistinguishable from taxes in this effect) make the cost of doing business more expensive and benefit the deep-pocketed monopoly Goliaths at the expense of any upstart Davids threatening their market positions. When the uber-elite successfully influence politicians to enact laws that benefit their personal financial interests — a corrupt practice known as “regulatory capture” — they distort the normal dynamics of any free market. When governments mandate more expensive forms of “clean” energy across the market, for instance, wealthy corporations capable of enduring these added costs reap the ancillary benefits of gobbling up the market share abandoned by smaller competitors unable to survive. This is by design.

    By utilizing law and regulation as a sword and shield to prevent potential competitors from entering the market while expanding monopoly power, plutocrats use political patronage and fashionable policy goals disguising self-interest to maintain their own wealth and control. Climate change, public health, sustainable food supplies — the public policy issue is never anything more than an expedient stalking horse for the wealthiest in the West to use cynically in an effort to maintain economic control.

    This fusion between monied interests and government power has created a type of reverse fascism. Instead of some charismatic political leader in the mold of a Benito Mussolini demanding that titans of industry follow his commands for the benefit of the State and in the interests of the people, a new class of plutocrats now steer the direction of national policies and pay the politicians to make sure the people will comply.

    Notably, today’s plutocrats take a nearly identical position as traditional communists in asserting that the “economic pie” is only so big and can therefore only be divvied up among a growing population in smaller and smaller portions but never actually enlarged. When economic wealth is seen as finite, preventing others from acquiring personal prosperity is necessary for maintaining political power’s status quo. When market competition is permitted to grow wealth in perpetuity, however, not only does a growing share of the population increase its wealth, but also political power becomes spread out more diffusely.

    When the “rising tide” of free markets is allowed to “lift all boats,” neither the plutocrat nor communist politburo holds as much sway. For this reason, both communists and plutocrats share a similar goal — minimizing the prosperity of the majority of citizens, while maximizing the political power of a small minority of government officials. Under communism, this type of power arrangement takes the form of an oligarchy, or rule by a small few. Under the World Economic Forum’s brand of oligarchyת where the West’s wealthiest manipulate centrally-controlled governments, the result is demonstrably plutocratic.

    For plutocrats, actual free markets are a threat to their habitual control over political power. When real markets exist, endless human innovation regularly upends the market position of any one firm. Yesterday’s industry leader can go bankrupt fast if today’s upstart inventor designs a better or cheaper competing product. Creative destruction is at the heart of free market growth. When product innovation is understood as the single greatest variable for generating long-term economic success, it is easy to understand how difficult it is to stay ahead of the market for any length of time. Rare is the company that manages to innovate so effectively year after year that it survives for decades or longer.

    This is, of course, why so much capital is sunk into research and development in constant pursuit of the “next big thing.” It is also why corporations and private investors diversify their holdings so that they may still benefit financially, even when successful innovation occurs far from their domains. When corporate behemoths adeptly forestall their own impending financial deaths through political influence and regulatory capture, however, they cheat the markets at the larger public’s expense. When this alternative, yet corrupt, path to permanent wealth becomes the model for economic “success,” creative innovation takes a permanent back seat to raw political clout. “Absolute power,” in other words, still “corrupts absolutely.”

    For individual liberty to flourish, competing forces must always counterbalance concentrated power in any form. When economic monopoly is used to create plutocratic control over government policy, then it becomes imperative for society to unleash the full potential of market forces to destroy protracted power and wealth and encourage more widespread prosperity.

    The steps for achieving such a result are no different today than they were when Adam Smith first published The Wealth of Nations in 1776. Cheap and abundant energy sources reduce the entry costs of building a business. Minimal taxation that seeks neither to confiscate wealth nor to punish successful innovation produces an endless supply of creative talents and energies. Limited regulation keeps the costs of market transactions low. Respect for private property and fair and impartial application of commercial laws encourage capital investment. Refraining from taxing the fruits of an individual’s labor fosters an exponentially more productive labor force. Providing populations with the tools to pursue and obtain knowledge and skills at minimal expense promotes not only an educated workforce but also politically competent citizens.

    It seems no coincidence, then, that every one of these policy prescriptions is today either stymied or subverted. Political interventionism has precipitated a Western energy crisis. When campaigning for the U.S. presidency in 2008, Barack Obama insisted that he would raise taxes even if doing so ultimately decreased total public revenues because pursuing such a policy was only “fair.”

    Regulatory agencies and taxing authorities claim jurisdiction over every element of industry, production, and product distribution. Tens of thousands of laws, rules, and regulations make it nearly impossible for any entrepreneur to navigate markets without inadvertently committing infractions or becoming a future target of an ever-growing army of regulatory code enforcers. Citizens are taxed on their wages, incomes, purchases, property, investments, improvements, sales, etc., and should they still possess anything of worth upon their ultimate demise, some agent of the State is likely to take one final cut of their bequeathed estates. The same unit of labor is thus taxed repeatedly along the government’s conveyor belt of confiscation.

    Lastly, in an age of rampant political correctness and “woke” cancel culture, indoctrination and political dogma have supplanted basic education. Math, science, history, and philosophy have been watered-down to make room for ideological fluff often meant to divide students against each other. The combined and natural effect of all this government-sponsored malfeasance has been that intergenerational social mobility in the United States, once impressively robust, has absolutely plummeted.

    Who benefits when the most basic foundations for creating prosperity are denied to the majority of citizens? Well, those in power benefit because, by rigging the system in their favor and institutionalizing destructive habits, very few people who might challenge their dominion ever rise high enough to do so. The plutocracy wins. The insular and selfish cabal of wealthy elites who populate the World Economic Forum ultimately win. The vast majority of Western citizens, however, lose substantially… over and over again.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/19/2022 – 23:40

  • Biden Declares The COVID Pandemic "Is Over" Despite Continued Use In Policies & Programs
    Biden Declares The COVID Pandemic “Is Over” Despite Continued Use In Policies & Programs

    About a year and a half too late to the game, Joe Biden finally admitted in a Sunday broadcast interview with 60 Minutes that the covid pandemic is over, stating:

    “We still have a problem with COVID. We’re still doing a lotta work on it. It’s — but the pandemic is over. if you notice, no one’s wearing masks. Everybody seems to be in pretty good shape. And so I think it’s changing. And I think this is a perfect example of it.”   

    Apparently, in the ever teetering mind of Joe Biden the prevalence of masks was a measure of the prevalence of covid.  Of course, this all depends on where in the US or the world you have been living.  In red states, masks have been gone for around two years with the majority of people not wearing them. And despite the predictions (and fantasies) of many on the political left, conservatives were not dropping dead in the streets; far from it.  

    In fact, red states that ended shutdowns and mandates well ahead of blue states enjoyed far superior economic recovery including superior job and business recovery numbers, and virtually no difference in terms of death and infection rates occurred.  In fact, studies now show that there was little to no positive effect made by the covid lockdowns and the usefulness of mask mandates is also in question. 

    Furthermore, infection and fatality rates for covid began to drop long before the covid mRNA vaccines were introduced widely to the public.  The facts and the science show that covid stopped being a major threat not long after it spread to the US.  The official median IFR (Infection Fatality Rate) according to dozens of peer reviewed studies stands at mere 0.23%.  Meaning, over 99.7% of the population is not under threat from covid.    

    The lockdowns didn’t work, but they weren’t needed.  The mask mandates didn’t work, but they weren’t needed.  And, the rates started dropping dramatically for the original covid strains before even 5% of the US population was vaccinated.  All in all, every single government policy that interfered in the lives and freedoms of millions of people ended up being pointless.

     

    Biden’s recent declaration means nothing, because he is in no position to determine the current state of the pandemic.  The American people already did that, and we declared the thing over a long time ago.  

    Immediately after Biden’s remarks, Kentucky Rep. Thomas Massie insisted that the administration should now relinquish all the emergency powers it has grabbed by hyping the threat of the virus.

    “If ‘the pandemic is over’ as Biden says, then all of the President’s emergency powers predicated on a pandemic, all COVID vax mandates, the emergency powers of every governor, Emergency Use Authorizations, and the PREP act should all be voided tomorrow,” said Massie.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Additionally, as Jonathan Turley so coherently explains, the President’s sudden announcement that the pandemic “is over” may have taken some people by surprise, including Administration lawyers still using the pandemic as a basis for policies and programs.  This includes a major appellate case this week.

    The Administration relied on the pandemic to justify the massive loan forgiveness program at a cost of as much as $1 trillion. The move will be the subject of challenges and defended under the HEROES Act of 2003 as tied to a national emergency, ”when significant actions with potentially far-reaching consequences are often required.”

    The pandemic is also being used by states continued crackdowns on those who refuse to get vaccines. New York is moving to fire hundreds of teachers and school administrators.

    Private companies like T-Mobile are also moving this month to fire unvaccinated workers.

    The President also heralded the removal of masks recently despite the continues requirement for some schools and other locations under pandemic rules (including at my own George Washington University). While at the Detroit Auto Show,  Biden declared “If you notice, no one’s wearing a mask, everybody seems to be in pretty good shape.”

    Biden’s statement on the end of the pandemic is likely to be cited in a variety of briefs in cases challenging emergency powers and policies used by the Administration. It was just a year ago, in September 2021, that the President imposes such rules to “ensur[e] the health and safety of the Federal workforce and the efficiency of the civil service.” President Biden announced a similar requirement for federal civilian employees. Exec. Order No. 14,043, 86 Fed. Reg. 50,989 (Sept. 14, 2021).

    One such example could be the appeal now being considered by the United States Court of Appeals for the Fifth Circuit. The issue of the sweeping pandemic authority being claimed by the Biden Administration is now going before the full court in an en banc rehearing.

    U.S. District Judge Jeffrey Brown previously issued a nationwide injunction against the vaccination mandate in January. That was stayed and has resulted in a series of conflicted moves on appeal.

    Yet, the Justice Department is still citing the pandemic authority and insisting that “if an employee chooses not to receive a COVID-19 vaccine (and is ineligible for an exception), he simply may no longer be permitted to continue in federal employment, just as an employee would be subject to termination if she chose to stop performing her job or chose to violate workplace policies.”

    Here is one such recent brief: DOJ Fifth Circuit brief

    Now the President is declaring that the pandemic is over as the Justice Department is defending pandemic policies in various courts. Even if one were to argue that the policy should be reviewed as supported at the time, the continued viability of the policy can now be questioned in light of the President’s own statements. The President’s comments also highlight the fluidity of pandemic policies. While we often look to the CDC on such status statements, it is the President who ultimately decides federal policies on pandemic measures.

    If the pandemic “is over,” some may question the continued uncertain status of military personnel and federal employees on vaccine status as well as lingering mask mandates being used in some states and by certain businesses.

    What we must never forget, however, is how close we came to full-on medical authoritarianism under the supervision of the Biden Administration and men like Anthony Fauci.  Numerous agenda driven institutions also pushed hard for the erasure of our freedoms, declaring that we would “never go back to normal again” and that personal liberties had to be sacrificed under the new pandemic construct.   

    If Biden’s vaccine passport executive orders had been enforced instead of blocked, rest assured the US would be like China is today – Still dragging out the lockdowns and pretending covid is an ongoing threat.  Anyone refusing to vaccinate would have been denied employment and participation in the general economy, essentially starved into compliance or compelled to join black market systems and become criminals.  Millions of citizens stood against these orders and won the day, but now we have to reverse course and ensure such an attempt to dismantle our rights never happens again.  

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 09/19/2022 – 23:32

  • "Don't Touch Foreigners" – Chinese Officials Warn Public After First Monkeypox Case
    “Don’t Touch Foreigners” – Chinese Officials Warn Public After First Monkeypox Case

    China has just confirmed its first case on monkeypox, and has an ‘unusual’ public health warning for its citizens (who remain in and out of ZeroCOVID lockdowns anyway): Don’t touch foreigners!

    “To prevent possible monkeypox infection and as part of our healthy lifestyle, it is recommended that 1) you do not have direct skin-to-skin contact with foreigners,” Wu Zunyou, chief epidemiologist at the China Center for Disease Control and Prevention posted on his official Weibo page on Saturday.

    Wu proudly proclaimed that the country’s COVID restrictions and tight border controls had thus far prevented the spread of monkeypox, until a case “slipped through the net.”

    That case was detected in the southwest municipality of Chongqing. CNN reports that an “international arrival” was under mandatory Covid-19 quarantine when the infection was discovered, according to local authorities.

    Reuters reports that the infected person was a 29-year-old Chinese national who flew to Chongqing on Sept. 14 from Spain, the Center for Disease Control said later.

      While some were open to Wu’s advice, others found it inflammatory and discriminative.

      “It’s good to open the country’s door, but we can’t just let everything in,” one Weibo user wrote.

      Several drew parallels to the wave of xenophobia and violence Asians overseas faced at the start of the COVID-19 pandemic... and don’t call it “Wuhan Flu”!

      “This is a bit like when the pandemic began when some people overseas avoided any Chinese people they saw out of fear,” a Weibo user wrote.

      “I don’t believe these two things have any scientific basis, they are too broad and will exacerbate public panic.”

      Where is the uproar from global progressives proclaiming this warning as disgustingly bigoted, xenophobic, racist, and homophobic?

      Remember, it’s not racist when ‘they’ do it… and never, ever, criticize China!

      Chinese experts say it’s unlikely monkeypox will wreak such chaos, with state media Global Times reporting on Friday the disease “poses little threat,” citing a hospital director.

      However, they have also urged continued vigilance, with some experts highlighting the need for “strict surveillance” and countermeasures, according to Global Times.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 23:20

    • Russia Publicizes Beijing's Supportive Statement, While China's State Media Keeps Silent
      Russia Publicizes Beijing’s Supportive Statement, While China’s State Media Keeps Silent

      Authored by Jessica Mao via The Epoch Times,

      A top Chinese official has expressed support for Russia’s war in Ukraine during his visit to Moscow, apparently believing it was a closed-door meeting. But the Kremlin released the footage to make his remarks known to the entire world.

      Li Zhanshu, the third most important Chinese Communist Party (CCP) figure and a member of the Standing Committee of the Politburo, visited Russia from Sept. 7 to 10 before Chinese leader Xi Jinping met with Russian President Vladimir Putin in Uzbekistan on Sept. 15.

      Li met with Putin in Vladivostok and later with Vyacheslav Volodin, chairman of the State Duma, and Valentina Matviyenko, chairwoman of the Federation Council, in Moscow, along with leaders of the five political parties of the State Duma.

      His low-profile visit to Russia did not attract much attention until a video went viral on social media platforms such as Twitter, causing public outcry.

      “With the United States and NATO now at Russia’s doorstep, it has become an issue concerning Russia’s national security and the lives of its people,” Li claimed.

      “Under such circumstances, Russia takes some measures that it deems appropriate, and China fully understands the necessity of all the measures taken by Russia aimed at protecting its key interests. We are providing our assistance.”

      As Li is also a close ally of Xi, his statement is considered to represent the CCP leader’s stance. It is widely believed that this is Beijing’s strongest and most explicit statement supporting Moscow.

      Li’s remarks were first published in a text on the official website of the State Duma on Sept. 9. Shortly afterward, footage with the mark “Duma” in Russian was released.

      In contrast, Chinese state media kept mum on Li’s remarks supporting Russia’s war in Ukraine and merely reported that Li “thanked Russia for its firm support to China on the Taiwan issue.”

      Analysts believe that Moscow deliberately publicized Li’s remarks ahead of the Xi-Putin meeting in a bid to pressure the CCP to voice its support of Russia, thus putting Beijing in an embarrassing position.

      Chinese leader Xi Jinping (L) and Russian President Vladimir Putin pose for photos on the sidelines of the Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO) leaders’ summit in Samarkand, Uzbekistan, on Sept. 15, 2022. (Alexandr Demyanchuk/Sputnik/AFP via Getty Images)

      Seeing Through the China-Russia Alliance

      Yang Si, a Japan-based current affairs commentator, told The Epoch Times on Sept. 16 that Beijing and Moscow are exploiting one another.

      “There is no doubt that the CCP is supporting Russia, but it has never said so publicly,” Yang said.

      Li’s statement this time was not a public statement either; it was behind closed doors. I guess Li did not expect Russia to make it public. Russia probably thought written reports were not enough, so they directly released the original video, which is tantamount to forcing the CCP to openly state its support for Russia’s war in Ukraine. Russia and the CCP are two gang groups. They have no common beliefs, nor do they have any morality. In short, they just exploit each other.”

      Current affairs commentator Lu Tianming shared similar views.

      “The CCP has done a lot of things behind the scenes, but now they are all exposed. The Russian army invaded Ukraine, and the CCP’s support for this war will naturally make other nations believe that the CCP may take similar actions against Taiwan. They will be on high alert watching the CCP’s actions in the Taiwan Strait,” Lu said.

      She believes some countries on the sidelines will see the CCP clearly through Li’s remarks. “It will accelerate the pace of a global rejection and deterrence of the CCP,” she said.

      US and Europe Pass Bills to Support Taiwan

      China expert Chen Pokong said in a YouTube program on Sept. 16 that the exposure of Li’s statement would help the United States and the European Union pass bills to support Taiwan and fight against the CCP.

      On Sept. 15, the European Parliament overwhelmingly passed a resolution denouncing China for continued military action and provocations against Taiwan and calling for the EU to “assume a stronger role when it comes to the situation in the Taiwan Strait and the Indo-Pacific as a whole.”

      The resolution, jointly sponsored by five major parties in the European Parliament, contains 26 propositions. It commended the Taiwanese government and political leaders for their prudent and responsible response to the CCP’s provocative actions. It urged the EU to strengthen its political engagement with Taiwan. Furthermore, the European Parliament will continue to send representatives to Taiwan on official visits to deter the CCP’s ambition to attack Taiwan.

      The European Parliament also asked the EU’s European External Action Service (EEAS) to begin preparations for negotiations on a mutually beneficial supply chain resilience agreement with Taiwan as soon as possible to strengthen Taiwan’s “silicon shield” —referring to the chip industry—and to safeguard Taiwan’s security.

      The European Parliament also believes that the EU should seek joint investment cooperation with Taiwan’s New Southbound program to counter the CCP’s global gateways—the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI, also known as “One Belt, One Road”).

      In addition, the European Parliament suggests that the European Commission change the name of the European Economic and Trade Office (ETO) in Taiwan to reflect the broader relationship between the two sides.

      Before that, the Senate Foreign Relations Committee of the U.S. Congress passed the Taiwan Policy Act of 2022 on Sept. 14. The bill is considered the most comprehensive reorganization of U.S. policy toward Taiwan since the Taiwan Relations Act of 1979.

      It proposes $4.5 billion in military assistance to Taiwan over four years and an increase of $2 billion in the fifth year. The bill also includes a congressional proposal to rename the Taiwan Representative Office to the United States and designate Taiwan as a “major non-NATO ally.”

      The bill also proposes that the United States establish “a robust sanctions regime to deter further PRC [People’s Republic of China] aggression against Taiwan,” along with detailed sanctions plans.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 23:00

    • DHS Spends $700,000 In Taxpayer Money To Study "Extremism In Video Gaming"
      DHS Spends $700,000 In Taxpayer Money To Study “Extremism In Video Gaming”

      As many Americans are well aware, the narrative surrounding what constitutes “extremism” or “terrorism” is ever evolving.  The focus of the DHS used to be foreign threats including Islamic extremism.  If you are old enough to remember the early 2000s, many people were warning back then that the constitutional trespasses being developed in the name of fighting Al-Qaeda would one day be flipped around on the American people. 

      And here we are…

      Today, the DHS is far more interested in “domestic extremism,” and their definition is particularly focused on anyone that expresses conservative ideals and constitutional principles.  Almost no attention is paid to the political left, despite the fact that it was leftists that caused billions of dollars in property damage across the US during the BLM riots. 

      By extension, leftists have taken an obsessive interest in controlling entertainment media and using these platforms to spread their propaganda.  In 2014-2015 the gaming community dared to point out and criticize the politicization of their hobby as well as the ongoing attacks against their community by gaming journalists.  This led to the “Gamergate” controversy.  You’re not allowed to reveal the man behind the curtain when it comes to leftist agendas in popular entertainment, and when you do, the standard operating procedure is for the propagandists to go on the attack.

      And so they did, claiming rampant racism, sexism and widespread harassment perpetrated by gamers.  According to the media, the gaming world was a breeding ground for monsters, though they were rarely able to provide any proof to back up these claims.  

      Government agencies have become increasingly and openly biased against anyone outside of the leftist ideology in recent years, with social justice cultism and critical race theory narratives invading institutional language and training.  A perfect example would be the CIA, which happily produced and defended this bizarre recruitment ad: 

      Clearly, the goal of the current government is to go woke as fast as possible.  The DHS is no different, and it’s not surprising that they have decided to give around $700,000 of taxpayer funds to groups like Logically, a company committed to the issue of “bad” online behavior, Middlebury Institute’s Center on Terrorism, Extremism, and Counterterrorism (CTEC), and Take This, a nonprofit that specializes in mental health in video gaming.  These groups are tasked with identifying extremist influences in gaming and create solutions to stop it. 

      There is no legitimate threat presented by video gaming because there is no legitimate “extremism” to find.  Rather, what the DHS is pursuing are ways to demonize non-leftist groups and artificially link them to the concept of extremism.  Much like their now defunct Disinformation Governance Board, the mission is to paint opposing views as dangerous and thus subject to control and censorship.  The mission is also to uncover dangers and dragons that are not really there to justify government intrusions into free market arenas.  

      At bottom, this is about the political left taking over federal agencies and using them as weapons against movements and groups that have had the audacity to stand against them in the past.  One might think that the world of video games would be far below the interests of the DHS, but it’s important to remember that the video game industry is now bigger and more influential than the film industry.  It also has a community building dynamic, and when totalitarians see a mode of communication and organization that sits outside of their control, they will stop at nothing to chain it down or destroy it.   

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 22:40

    • DOJ Internal Misconduct Shrouded In Veil Of Secrecy
      DOJ Internal Misconduct Shrouded In Veil Of Secrecy

      Authored by Eric Felten via RealClear Wire,

      Department of Justice Inspector General Michael Horowitz was busy this week, releasing three separate reports on Monday alone. Each detailed misconduct by a different assistant United States attorney: One finds a federal lawyer trying to use his position to avoid a drunk driving charge; another finds a government attorney getting drunk and physically belligerent at a meeting with foreign officials; the third, and most disturbing, finds an assistant U.S. attorney exposing his genitals “in a public place,” and sexually assaulting a “civilian” on a date.

      Courtroom One Gavel Joe Gratz

      Who were these federal prosecutors? The summary reports don’t say. A spokesperson for the Office of the Inspector General told RealClearPolitics that it could not release their names. RCP has filed a Freedom of Information Act request asking for their identities.

      The Justice Department doesn’t hesitate to publicize the names of those it accuses of wrongdoing. At least when those accused do not work for Justice. Last Friday, for example, the DOJ office of Public Affairs issued a press release announcing that the department had filed a discrimination lawsuit against the owner and managers of a Milwaukee rental property. Though a court has yet to rule against those accused of harassing a gay, disabled tenant, the DOJ press release named them.

      Compare that with “Investigative Summary” number 22-104, in which the inspector general determined that an assistant United States attorney was driving under the influence when he (or she) was pulled over by police. The investigation found that the prosecutor had tried to pull rank on the local cops, “referring to the AUSA’s title in an attempt to influence local police officers.” When that didn’t work, the drunk federal lawyer shouted obscenities and kicked the door of the police car.

      These were violations of federal ethics regulations according to the IG, who found the assistant U.S. attorney’s actions also ran afoul of the standards of conduct required of federal employees, including that they “not engage in criminal, infamous, dishonest, immoral, or notoriously disgraceful conduct, or other conduct prejudicial to the Government.” The AUSA remains unnamed.

      Also anonymous is the federal prosecutor whose belligerent behavior is detailed in the OIG’s Investigative Summary number 22-105. The inspector general’s office states it “substantiated” an allegation that an AUSA behaved “unprofessionally” while detailed to a foreign country. The AUSA was accused of “inappropriate physical contact” with a foreign local working for the State Department: The IG found that the attorney, inebriated, grabbed the Foreign Service National by the chin and aggressively forced the State Department employee to pay attention to the AUSA. When the inspector general asked about this behavior, the IG was told about the many other official events at which the AUSA was intoxicated. On those occasions, the prosecutor was in the habit of telling foreign government officials what the lawyer thought of them, what the IG described as “offensive and demeaning remarks.”

      Investigative Summary number 22-103 describes behavior more serious. In that investigation, the Justice Department IG found that, on a date with a “civilian,” an AUSA’s “genitals were exposed in public.” According to the inspector general’s report on the incident, “the AUSA forced the civilian’s hand to touch the AUSA’s genitals.” This was not only a violation of federal regulations governing off-duty conduct, the OIG found it to be against state law. And yet, “Criminal prosecution of the AUSA was declined.”

      During the course of the investigation, the Office of the Inspector General interviewed the prosecutor and found that he “lacked candor in discussing this incident.” That’s the Inspector General’s way of saying he lied. Again, however, the DOJ inspector general declined to provide the name of the AUSA. As for the DOJ itself, “Criminal prosecution of the AUSA was declined.”

      Often when Justice chooses not to prosecute (or even identify) an employee of the department including those who work for the FBI, the Bureau of Prisons, or another element of the department it is because the employee has resigned or retired.

      Last September, DOJ Inspector General Michael Horowitz released a report criticizing the FBI’s practice of locking away the findings of internal investigations when an agent or official accused of misconduct packed his or her desk “prior to or during the adjudication process.” The names of those accused of misconduct are kept secret even when the allegations have been fully investigated and the FBI’s Office of Professional Responsibility “could make a substantiation decision based on the available evidence.” According to the inspector general, “this practice fails to hold accountable former FBI employees who separate while under investigation.”

      That policy may protect federal employees who abuse their office, but it doesn’t do any favors for the FBI agent falsely accused of misconduct. Failing to “fully document an adjudication,” Horowitz said last September, “fails to clear former employees whose misconduct allegations were unsubstantiated.

      The IG’s recommendation notwithstanding, the Justice Department continues to shroud wrongdoing by its own in a system of secrecy. It is a policy that does little to restore confidence in a department viewed by many Americans with suspicion.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 22:20

    • Queen Elizabeth's (Predicted) Funeral Ratings In Perspective
      Queen Elizabeth’s (Predicted) Funeral Ratings In Perspective

      Queen Elizabeth’s funeral today is forecast to pull in more than four billion viewers worldwide today, breaking the record for the “most watched broadcast of all time”, according to media reports. As Statista’s Anna Fleck notes, if industry experts’ predictions are accurate, then the funeral will nearly double the UK’s previous most watched royal broadcast – the funeral of Diana, Princess of Wales in 1997 with a viewership of 2.5 billion people.

      Infographic: Queen Elizabeth’s (Predicted) Funeral Ratings in Perspective | Statista

      You will find more infographics at Statista

      The UK royal family’s televised events have historically brought in huge audiences from the world over. Where William and Kate’s wedding saw 162 million people tune in worldwide in April 2011, Harry and Meghan’s saw an estimated 1.9 billion in 2018.

      Music events such as the Live 8 charity concert of 2005, and sporting events including FIFA World Cup finals also bring in peak figures, with the most watched broadcast event in history reportedly the Atlanta Olympics opening ceremony of 1996, where U.S. boxing legend Muhammad Ali lit the torch to kick off the games.

      The late queen’s funeral attracted some two million people to join the state funeral procession in person, including more than 70 heads of government. It was the UK’s biggest ever security operation, with over 10,000 police personnel on duty.

      While the exact cost of the funeral has not yet been reported, estimates for the entirety of the proceedings following the queen’s death have been placed anywhere between £8 million and £6 billion, expected to be part-funded by taxpayers and part by the royal family. This has raised debate in the UK over the use of public funds as the country faces a cost of living crisis.

      However, as Charlotte Allen wrote at The Epoch Times, in today’s Britain, and indeed in much of the West, churchgoing is in steep decline, and it’s common to regard the monarchy as a taxpayer-supported fossil with a dim future. Indeed, when Diana died in 1997, there was a surge of populist contempt for her former husband, then Prince Charles and heir to the throne, and for the royal family in general, believed to have mistreated the young princess. Revelations about Charles’s younger brother Prince Andrew’s alleged dalliances with an underage girl on Jeffrey Epstein’s island added fuel to the fire, and many predicted that the monarchy would not outlive Elizabeth.

      Yet when King Charles III formally ascended the throne at St. James’s Palace on Sept. 10, two days after his mother’s death, huge crowds gathered outside to sing “God Save the King” and give three cheers. There seemed to be an instinctive understanding that monarchy was an institution that transcended individual monarchs and that it was an institution worthy of honor.

      Even in our secular age, people yearn for faith and ritual and ceremonial meaning that derives from something outside the ordinariness of daily life. It’s not surprising that the ceremonies of Queen Elizabeth’s funeral resonate so deeply with billions of people.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 22:00

    • China Sanctions CEOs Of Raytheon, Boeing Over Sales To Taiwan
      China Sanctions CEOs Of Raytheon, Boeing Over Sales To Taiwan

      Authored by Cathy He via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      The Chinese regime said on Sept. 16 that it is sanctioning top executives of two U.S. arms firms in retaliation for recently selling arms to Taiwan.

      Military personnel stand next to Harpoon A-84, anti-ship missiles and AIM-120 and AIM-9 air-to-air missiles prepared for weapons loading drills in front of an F16V fighter jet at the Hualien Airbase in Taiwan, on Aug. 17, 2022. Taiwan is staging military exercises to show its ability to resist Chinese pressure to accept Beijing’s political control over the island. (AP Photo/Johnson Lai)

      The sanctions were imposed on Gregory J. Hayes, CEO of Raytheon Technologies Corporation, and Theodore Colbert, CEO of Boeing Defense, Space and Security, for the involvement of their companies in the deal, Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesperson Mao Ning said at a regular briefing on Friday.

      The move came after the State Department on Sept. 2 approved a potential $1.1 billion sale of military equipment to Taiwan. The package includes 60 anti-ship missiles and 100 air-to-air missiles, of which the principal contractors are Boeing Defense, a division of Boeing, and Raytheon, respectively.

      Ning did not provide details on what the sanctions entailed or how they would be enforced. Previous sanctions on Western individuals have barred them from entering China or doing business there. Such restrictions are unlikely to significantly affect Hayes or Colbert.

      The Chinese regime routinely reacts aggressively and punitively against U.S. measures in support of Taiwan, a self-ruled island that the regime considers to be its own and if necessary, to be taken by force. Taiwan, however, has never been ruled by the Chinese Communist Party and has been a separate entity for more than 70 years.

      In August, in response to House Speaker Nancy Pelosi’s (D-Calif.) trip to Taiwan—the highest-ranking U.S. official to visit Taipei in 25 years—the regime launched its largest-ever military drills around the island, launched cyberattacks on Taiwanese infrastructure, slapped import bans on Taiwan products, canceled military communications with the United States, and suspended cooperation with Washington in several areas including climate.

      The Chinese regime also slapped unspecified sanctions on Pelosi in retaliation for her visit.

      The United States is Taiwan’s largest arms supplier and is bound by law to provide Taiwan with the means to defend itself.

      The Chinese regime has previously sanctioned Raytheon, Boeing Defense, and unspecified individuals involved in arms sales to Taiwan. But Friday’s announcement marks the first time China has named individuals from those companies as targeted by sanctions.

      Earlier this week, a Senate committee approved a key bill that would significantly boost U.S. support for Taiwan. It includes $4.5 billion in additional security assistance over four years and support of Taipei’s participation in international organizations.

      While the move drew protest from Beijing, bipartisan lawmakers hailed the legislation, which they said was needed to solidify the United States’ relationship with Taiwan.

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 21:40

    • Americans Drowning In Long-Term Credit Card Debt: Survey
      Americans Drowning In Long-Term Credit Card Debt: Survey

      In June we reported that consumer credit – particular revolving credit – was through the roof, as tapped-out consumers relied on credit cards to make ends meet. This has only gotten worse.

      Illustration: Aïda Amer/Axios

      Acccording to an Aug. 30 report from the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, credit card balances increased by $46 billion from last year, becoming the second-biggest source of overall debt last quarter.

      While both student and car loans hit all time new highs at the end of the 1st quarter.

      And so it comes as no surprise from Bloomberg that more US consumers are saddled with credit card debt for longer periods of time. According to a survey by CreditCards.com released on Monday, 60% of credit card debtors have been holding this type of debt for at least a year, up 50% from a year ago, while those holding debt for over two years is up 40%, from 32%, according to the online credit card marketplace.

      And while total credit-card balances remain slightly lower than pre-pandemic levels, inflation and rising interest rates are taking a toll on the already-stretched finances of US households.

      About a quarter of respondents said day-to-day expenses are the primary reason why they carry a balance. Almost half cite an emergency or unexpected expense, including medical bills and home or car repair.

      The Federal Reserve is likely to raise interest rates for the fifth time this year next week. Credit-card rates are typically directly tied to the Fed Funds rate, and their increase along with a softening economy may lead to higher delinquencies. 

      Total consumer debt rose $23.8 billion in July to a record $4.64 trillion, according to data from the Federal Reserve. -Bloomberg

      The Fed’s figures include credit card and auto debt, as well as student loans, but does not factor in mortgage debt.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 21:20

    • Why So Many Cling To COVID Panic
      Why So Many Cling To COVID Panic

      Authored by Mark Oshinskie via The Brownstone Institute,

      When I was 10, I had a 12-year-old sister, Denise, and two brothers. Lenny was 14 and Danny was 5. We boys slept in the same room in a small, single-story house in a modest, riverside neighborhood known as Pleasureland. 

      The neighborhood’s name derived from a nearby park with two swimming pools and many picnic tables. On weekends, people from all over North Jersey and even New York City went there and to the adjacent, similar Muller’s Park, where I got my first job, at 15, as a garbageman. Both parks closed in 1985 after two were killed and nine more were wounded in an assault rifle shootout during a late Sunday afternoon, late summer Brooklyn/Jamaican gang picnic. I had swum and dived off the high board there at twilight on Friday, two days prior.

      In the week before our last Pleasureland Christmas, in 1967, my Mom expressed to me her concern that Danny no longer believed in Santa Claus. She thought that one of the neighborhood kids had told Danny that Santa wasn’t real. The prospect of having no more Santa-believing kids saddened her. She made me swear not to tell Danny what I knew. I kept my word.

      Our bedroom on the back side of the house had only one longish, narrow window near the top of the wall. A streetlight cast faint light into our otherwise darkened room. I slept in the bed next to Danny’s bed. At bedtime on that snowy Christmas Eve, just as we were trying to sleep, and at my mother’s prompting, our Dad ran from the far side of the backyard toward, and then past, our bedroom window, yelling “Ho, Ho, Ho!” As he passed beneath the window, my hidden father held aloft a Santa hat on a stick. The bouncing hat was all we could see from our beds. 

      Knowing the event was fake, I looked at Danny’s face to gauge his reaction. Having heard Santa’s voice, Danny sat up in the bed and looked up just as the hat passed the window. Upon seeing the hat, Danny was awestruck. I can still see his glowing, wide-eyed face in my mind’s eye. I don’t think I’ve ever seen anyone so amazed. 

      No matter what other kids might have told him or what he might have suspected on his own, at that magical moment, my parents’ theater convinced Danny for one more Christmas that Santa was real and that we had this hoary, superhuman visitor from the North Pole to thank for the presents under the tree. It was a worthwhile lie. 

      The government and media have spent the past 30 months disingenuously building Corona fear and implementing a range of talismanic measures like lockdowns, school closures, masks, tests and shots to convince us that they were magically—yet always “Scientifically!—” protecting us all from death. 

      Just as any thinking six-year-old figures out that Santa simply can’t put all of that toy freight into one sleigh, any thinking adult should have known that none of the hoary Corona crew: neither the elfin Fauci’s, Birx’s nor Biden’s rhetoric or theater made any sense, either in theory or in real-life outcomes; nor did similar alarmism or interventions by younger, hipper “liberal” governors, mayors and prime ministers. 

      But just like my parents’ efforts to preserve the Santa myth, governments won’t let go of the Corona theater—especially the shots—and the media desperately continues to portray as experts those who “masterminded” the mitigation. 

      All of the empirical data have corroborated what was known on Day 1 of the lockdowns—namely that this virus threatens almost no one but the very old and infirm, that none of these interventions works and that each of these have caused–and will continue to cause–widespread, terrible secondary and tertiary damage. 

      Instead of admitting this, governments and media persist in their campaign of terror, lies and bogus zero-Covid measures.

      Because to stop lying now would be to admit that it’s all been a delusion. And politically and morally, they can’t bring themselves to do that. 

      A five-year-old might not know a scam when they see it. But even a ten-year-old does. Or at least should. They’re counting on adults to be like five-year-olds. 

      It might work.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 21:00

    • DHS Intel Report Indicates Venezuela Emptying Prisons, Sending Violent Criminals To US Border
      DHS Intel Report Indicates Venezuela Emptying Prisons, Sending Violent Criminals To US Border

      Since President Biden assumed office nearly two years ago, his ‘open border’ policies have allowed 4.9 million illegal aliens, or about the entire population of Ireland, to cross into the US. 

      America is facing a historic crisis at its southern border. White House officials could care less and have welcomed illegals (though not welcomed in white liberal elite towns, such as Martha’s Vineyard). 

      US Border Czar, Vice President Kamala Harris, has yet to visit the border while Democrats downplay the invasion of illegals. 

      The endless flow of illegal aliens has concerned the Department of Homeland Security detailed in an intelligence report received by the Border Patrol (obtained by Breitbart), which specifies the Venezuelan government, under the leadership of Nicolas Maduro, is releasing violent criminals from jail and embedding them within migrant caravans headed to the US-Mexico border. 

      Here’s more from Breitbart’s story, citing the intelligence report:

      The intelligence report warns agents the freed prisoners have been seen within migrant caravans traveling from Tapachula, Mexico toward the U.S.-Mexico border as recently as July. The source, not authorized to speak to the media, told Breitbart Texas the move is reminiscent of a similar action taken by Cuban dictator Fidel Castro during the Mariel boat lift in the 1980s.

      The report does not state whether the released prison inmates were traveling as a cohesive group but does state it was commonly shared knowledge among migrants traveling to the United States within a caravan in July that many of the Venezuelan migrants in the group were convicts and included hardened criminals.

      The report does not specify that the release of the convicts — understanding they would head to the United States — could be a purposeful geopolitical move specifically intended to impact US national security. Another information gap cited in the report acknowledges the unknown role the Bolivarian National Intelligence Service (SEBIN), Venezuela’s equivalent to the CIA, may have played in the deliberate releases.

      The source says the task of identifying Venezuelans who have criminal records in their home country is nearly impossible. Of the thousands of Venezuelan migrants surrendering along the U.S.-Mexico border daily, most, according to the source, are being released into the United States. Without effective diplomatic relations with Venezuela, the source says access to criminal databases in that country simply does not exist.

      The source says it is unknown how many have already been released into the interior of the United States to pursue asylum.

      Most of these migrants come from Mexico, Guatemala, Honduras, El Salvador, and Venezuela, but growing numbers now come from all over the world. Many of these illegals cross the border with little skills and almost no personal wealth to better the US but act as a massive burden. 

      Congressman Troy Nehls (R-TX-22) appears to have confirmed the report in a tweet:

      What we are witnessing is the Third Worldization of the USA,” Pat Buchanan recently opined.  

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 20:40

    • Martha’s Vineyard Newspaper Lists 50 Job Ads Despite Claims Of No Work On Island
      Martha’s Vineyard Newspaper Lists 50 Job Ads Despite Claims Of No Work On Island

      Authored by Alice Giordano via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

      While some locals have claimed that the illegal immigrants who arrived on this wealthy island should go elsewhere since there wouldn’t be work for them with the summer rush gone, the local newspaper has listed 50 help wanted ads in a recent issue, and the local supermarket chain has been known to need help all year long.

      A sign outside Martha’s Vineyard Community Services on Sept. 18, 2022. (Alice Giordano for The Epoch Times)

      The classified section of the Vineyard Gazette listed more than 50 jobs in the same issue that ran a story about the illegal aliens, referring to them as “stranded migrants.” The job ads included positions for laborers, custodians, landscapers, bakers, cooks, dishwashers, technicians, library assistant, and several retail positions.

      The local YMCA also listed several job openings, including housekeepers, ice arena workers, and a front desk administrator. The spacious Y, located near where the illegal immigrants spent the night at St. Andrew’s Episcopal Church, shares a complex with Martha’s Vineyard Community Services (MVCS), which also ran a help wanted ad in the paper, including a job for administrative assistant, “bilingual preferred.”

      MVCS didn’t respond to a request for comment by press time. The outreach center and the island’s homeless shelter told the media that they didn’t have room for the illegal aliens.

      In the afternoon of Sept. 17, a Saturday, the large MVCS complex had several doors to its buildings wide open, but no staff could be found. One of the open buildings consisted of two floors with several empty rooms, including rooms with full kitchens and couches.

      A group of friends enjoying an outdoor lunch at the Martha’s Vineyard Airport told The Epoch Times that while the plume of summer jobs is over, there are still enough job opportunities on the island.

      The women, year-round residents who grew up on the island, pointed to Stop & Shop, a grocery store chain with three locations on the island. According to the women, the stores are always looking for help and they have worker dormitories, which they said are “now empty” with most of the summer help gone.

      “Martha’s Vineyard is a tale of two cities,” said one of the women, who spoke on condition of anonymity.

      But Charles Rus, music director at St. Andrew’s, the episcopal church in Edgartown where the illegal immigrants were housed, told The Epoch Times there weren’t any jobs for them on the island.

      There’s space, but there’s no job,” he said.

      Rus had offered to put some of the illegal immigrants up in his two-bedroom apartment.

      “If they had come four months earlier, every one of them would have had a $20 per hour job,” he said.

      In response to criticism that the illegal aliens were forced off the island, Rus said the Venezuelans had to leave the island for “practical reasons,” including the need to attend scheduled court hearings.

      According to a Sept. 16 story in the Vineyard Gazette, the Island Counseling Center provided each of the 50 illegal immigrants with individual legal counseling by an immigration attorney.

      The Baker Call

      The seemingly ample availability of jobs on Martha’s Vineyard isn’t the only point of contradiction to the narrative spun by some locals and picked up by establishment media outlets.

      Some locals questioned whether local officials were unaware of the two planes of illegal aliens chartered by Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis, and speculated about who had called on Republican Massachusetts Gov. Charlie Baker to remove the uninvited visitors.

      I don’t think Baker woke up in the morning, said, ‘Hey, I think I’ll take those 50 immigrants off the hands of Martha’s Vineyard,’” Richard Rooney, who lives and owns a real estate agency on the island, told The Epoch Times.

      Less than 24 hours after their arrival to Martha’s Vineyard, a self-proclaimed sanctuary community, Baker approved the transfer of the illegal immigrants, mostly Venezuelans, off the island to a military base in Bourne, which is located within minutes of the ferry terminal to Martha’s Vineyard. In Bourne, the group was given shelter, food, clothing, and other supplies. Baker committed 125 members of the Massachusetts National Guard as part of the transfer.

      Rooney, a Republican who has been active in local government on Martha’s Vineyard for about 30 years, also joined others who pointed to the notification requirements by Martha’s Vineyard Airport for unscheduled flights.

      Democrats have attacked DeSantis, a Republican, for sending the illegal aliens to Martha’s Vineyard in what they have characterized as an ambush.

      “We were given no notice,” Massachusetts state Rep. Dylan Fernandes, a Democrat representing Martha’s Vineyard, told a TV news outlet the day the illegal immigrants arrived on Martha’s Vineyard.

      Massachusets Public Safety and Security Secretary Terrence Reidy, appointed by Baker in 2021, also called their arrival on Martha’s Vineyard “unexpected” in a Sept. 16 press release announcing the Baker administration’s plans to take the illegal immigrants.

      The island airport’s flight notification requirements state that 24-hour notification before takeoff is required for any plane with more than nine passengers, and suggest that a passenger list must also be provided in advance. Video footage from Fox News shows the illegal aliens disembarking from a plane shortly after arriving on Martha’s Vineyard.

      Rooney wonders why someone was at the airport filming the debarkation, especially if the plane was “secretly” sent.

      On Sept. 18, a man answering the phone line for airport operations refused to provide general information about the airport’s notification requirements, initially telling The Epoch Times that there were no notification requirements. When The Epoch Times stated the 24-hour notice policy for flights with nine or more passengers, the man said he wasn’t permitted to speak to the press.

      Martha’s Vineyard Airport is funded with tax dollars and receives sizable state and federal subsidies.

      The airport received $1.2 million in federal COVID-19 aid in 2020. In 2019, Dukes County, the county-level government on Martha’s Vineyard, gave the airport $1.2 million for “improvements.”

      Read more here…

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 20:20

    • Less Than Half Of Manhattanites Are Back In The Office Despite 'Pandemic Being Over'
      Less Than Half Of Manhattanites Are Back In The Office Despite ‘Pandemic Being Over’

      “The pandemic is over,” President Biden declared in a CBS’ “60 Minutes” interview Sunday, in an attempt to optically please Americans just how great his administration is working to restore a sense of normalcy ahead of the midterm elections.

      But one segment of the economy has yet to return from the brink: commercial real estate. Even though the pandemic is over in Biden’s eyes and quite honestly could’ve been over a long time ago — remote and hybrid working has forever scarred commercial real estate that’s still in a big fat ugly bubble

      Manhattan has no sense of normalcy, where the Partnership for New York City surveyed 160 major firms only to find that 49% of office workers are back in their cubicles. This was a notable increase from 38% in April. However, due to hybrid work models, only 9% of workers are in the office five days a week.

      About 77% of employers maintain a hybrid office schedule to accommodate employee preferences. 

      Another metric, and perhaps the gold-standard measure of office-occupancy trends, is the card-swipe data provided by Kastle Systems. The NYC office occupancy rate is only 38% and has bounced between 30-40% for much of this year. 

      The slow return to the office where levels are barely over occupancy rates seen right before the start of the omicron wave last November comes as a slew of companies from Better.com to Ford to Peloton to Carvana to Zillow to Coinbase, among many others, have laid off workers because of the incoming Fed-induced economic downturn. A declining workforce will mean smaller corporate footprints. 

      Even though big Wall Street firms demanded their employees back in the office after Labor Day, there was no meaningful increase in Kastle card-swipe data trends across NYC. 

      Meanwhile, public transit in NYC is well below pre-pandemic levels as commuters shun riding the subways, perhaps because violent crime in the metro area is out-of-control. 

      Maybe there’s a more significant trend at play due to the mass exodus of people and companies post-Covid and remote work trends, signifying substantial challenges for the city’s economic recovery. 

      In October 2020, Mark Zandi, the chief economist for Moody’s Analytics, said NYC could be in a downturn until 2023. 

      The pandemic could be over, but NYC’s economy is in turmoil. 

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 20:00

    • Inflation Has Plenty More In Store For Equities
      Inflation Has Plenty More In Store For Equities

      By Michael Msika and Joe Easton, Bloomberg markets live analysts and reporters

      Inflation isn’t done rattling investors, leaving some sectors at risk of further downside as monetary tightening ramps up and recession risks mount. But not all sectors are necessarily losers.

      Soaring prices and risks of an economic downturn are making positioning difficult, while central-bank hawkishness has sent bond volatility higher, with the risk of that extending to stocks.

      “Equities have been hopeful of a decisive fall in inflation, but the new reality is that it may take time and some economic pain to materialize,” say Barclays strategists led by Emmanuel Cau. “The easy money era is over and market instability is to be expected.”

      While Cau says the direction of inflation will most likely be lower in coming months, it’s the high current level that matters for central banks, so more tightening seems inevitable. This favors value stocks over growth, even if recession risk complicates positioning, he says.

      “Inflation is secular, not transitory,” say Bank of America strategists led by Michael Hartnett, citing pay rises, low strategic oil supply, governments trying to control energy prices and nationalizing utilities, European fiscal packages and military spending, among other things.

      As a consequence, investors continue to favor stocks with pricing power, as well as energy shares. Commodities and banks are the current winners of rising prices and interest rates, while expensive growth sectors like tech are being hurt. Meanwhile firms whose products are most at risk of a cost squeeze such as retailers, leisure providers and homebuilders are viewed as being most susceptible to slowing economies.

      Retailers are the worst-performing industry group in Europe this year, and inflation has a lot to do with it. With budgets crimped by the cost of everything from food to energy to mortgages, consumers don’t have a lot left for shopping, while rising costs are eating into profitability too.

      It’s “a gloomy picture for retail stocks,” says Charles Hepworth, investment director at GAM Investments. “Disposable incomes of most consumers have been massively squeezed, and trade-down substitutions into cheaper brands is hardly the best fillip for any hope of a consumer-led recovery,” he writes.

      As a core part of the growth category, tech stocks have been at the forefront of this year’s global equity rout due to surging bond yields. And despite underperforming, the sector “remains very expensive,” says Barclays’ Cau. “With burgeoning signs of lower demand coming from semiconductors, demand destruction may be the next shoe to drop,” he says.

      Still, market positioning is so negative at the moment, that other bear-market rallies could be seen in the event of further easing of prices. “It’s the direction of inflation that matters for share prices,” says Liberum Capital strategist Joachim Klement. “Every decline in inflation reduces some of the cost pressures companies face.”

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 19:40

    • Migrant Arrests Top 2 Million For The First Time Ever After Kamala Declares 'Border Secure'
      Migrant Arrests Top 2 Million For The First Time Ever After Kamala Declares ‘Border Secure’

      Just one week after VP Kamala Harris declared that the southern US border is “secure,” the number of illegal migrants arrested topped 2 million in just 11 months – an all-time record.

      First, the woman who’s one heartbeat away from the Oval Office.

      The adults are back in charge?

      According to the latest figures from US Customs and Border Protection, 203,598 migrants were detained in August, putting the total number of illegals arrested at 2.3 million for the 2022 fiscal year which ends Sept. 30.

      And those are just the ones who were caught.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The historic migration wave this year has been driven by soaring numbers of border-crossers from outside Mexico and Central America, the two largest traditional sources of illegal entries. Migrants from Venezuela, Nicaragua and Cuba accounted for more than one-third of those taken into custody along the southern border last month, according to Customs and Border Protection, a 175 percent increase over August 2021. -WaPo

      “Failing communist regimes in Venezuela, Nicaragua, and Cuba are driving a new wave of migration across the Western Hemisphere, including the recent increase in encounters at the southwest U.S. border,” said CBP Commissioner Chris Magnus, in a politically charged statement. “Those fleeing repressive regimes pose significant challenges for processing and removal.”

      If only some type of barrier, or ‘wall’ could be erected to stop massive illegal inflows of migrants?

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 19:20

    • EU Threatens To Suspend €7.5BN In Hungary Funding Amid Charges Of 'Cozying Up' To Putin
      EU Threatens To Suspend €7.5BN In Hungary Funding Amid Charges Of ‘Cozying Up’ To Putin

      The EU’s patience with Viktor Orban’s Hungary is running extremely thin after years of wrangling and threats from Brussels of triggering the “rule of law” mechanism, despite recently announced efforts of Budapest to establish an anti-graft agency. 

      It seems Russia’s war in Ukraine is hastening a confrontational and fractured ending to the standoff, with the EU on Sunday threatening to freeze 7.5 billion euros which had been earmarked for Hungary, citing persisting corruption and fraud. 

      It’s been no secret that Orban has been a thorn in the side of European efforts to punish and isolate Putin’s Russia. While Hungary has demanded exemptions from EU energy sanctions on Russia, and has meanwhile enjoyed cheap gasoline and other energy at a moment prices in the rest of Europe have gone steadily up over the course of the war – and into what’s sure to be a tough winter – the belief among leading EU states is that joint bloc anti-Russia actions have been largely blunted. The timing of the fresh EU threats is not going unnoticed.

      File image: Reuters

      Bloomberg in a fresh report has put the dilemma as follows: “But while most member states have been engaged in a desperate scramble to secure alternative gas supplies ahead of the winter, Orban has deepened his country’s ties to the Kremlin, exploiting the exemptions he demanded from EU sanctions to secure increased imports of gas from Russia.”

      Poland has remained a powerful impediment thus far to Brussels triggering any significant rule of law penalties, despite Warsaw remaining at the forefront of denunciations of Russia’s invasion.

      “During years of frustration at the Hungarian government, Orban has been shielded from the EU’s main disciplinary machinery, known as the article 7 procedure, by the support of the nationalist government in Warsaw — because that mechanism too requires the endorsement of all the other members,” Bloomberg recounts. “The war in Ukraine has soured Orban’s relationship with the Polish government, which has been among the most ardent supporters of firm action against Putin, but for now the Poles are standing by Orban.”

      Orban has cast efforts to “punish” his country in terms of a war on traditional values. For now, Poland seems to agree… the vast divergence in rhetoric on the Russia-Ukraine conflict notwithstanding. 

      Prime Minister Mateusz Morawiecki said Sunday, “Poland will strongly oppose any action of European institutions that intend to unduly deprive any member states of funds, in this case Hungary.”

      Interestingly (given the timing of the EU’s threat to freeze funds), just days ago PM Orban reportedly told a closed-door meeting of officials from his ruling Fidesz party that he would fight efforts to extend EU sanctions on Russia:

      Hungarian Prime Minister Viktor Orban expects European Union leaders to start talks on extending sanctions on Russia in the autumn but Budapest would try to block the move, Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty reported, citing unidentified sources.

      Orban, a harsh critic of EU sanctions on Moscow over its invasion of neighbouring Ukraine, made the remarks at a closed meeting to party members in the western village of Kotcse last week, RFE/RL said on its Hungarian website on Friday.

      He also appeared to once again blame the West for the Ukraine conflict spiraling out of control, and continued his theme of anti-Russia sanctions ultimately blowing back on populations at home, or shooting the European economy in the foot.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Russian media too has been featuring recent quotes of Orban’s lambasting collective Western policy: “The Hungarian leader allegedly told his supporters that he believed Ukraine may end up losing between one third and one half of its territory due to the conflict with Russia, RFE/RL reported on Friday, citing participants of the meeting in the village of Kotcse.”

      Budapest has meanwhile lashed out at the European Parliament’s (EP) recent move to approve a resolution stating that Hungary is no longer a “full democracy.” That nonbinding EP vote from last week cited Hungary’s failures to uphold “respect for human dignity, freedom, democracy, equality, the rule of law, and respect for human rights, including the rights of persons belonging to minorities” – as the text reads, in repetition of prior EP statements.

      A Fidesz statement said in response: “It is unforgivable that, while people are suffering from the severe economic effects of wartime inflation and misguided sanctions, the European Parliament is attacking Hungary again.”

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 18:40

    • Kass: Who Feels Safe In Chicago?
      Kass: Who Feels Safe In Chicago?

      Authored by John Kass via JohnKassNews.com,

      Do you feel safe in Chicago?

      The great city by the lake was once famed for its toughness and unbreakable will. But now it curls up into the fetal position as uncontrolled violent crime and legitimate concerns over the Democrat Safe-T Act–which will do away with cash bail on Jan. 1–bleed the city dry.

      Democratic political leaders are on the defensive before the mid-term elections. Some like Gov. J.B. Pritzker have been reduced to babbling. Others like Mayor Lori Lightfoot go into hiding. More than a dozen city council members have resigned. They look to the chaos from the mayor’s office and begin turning away.

      The bleeding continued Thursday with news that seven children had been shot in the street gang wars in separate incidents, including a 3-year-old shot at home while sleeping. Oh, and anti-violence activists were listed among the wounded at yet another Chicago mass shooting.

      CWB Chicago reported that police warned about yet a third armed robbery crew working the city from the West Loop to Edgewater.

      But don’t fret, Lightfoot has made sure that no repeat criminals—including violent muggers, robbers, shooters or murderers–will have to risk being hurt in a police chase.

      And there had been no arrests in that infamous Sunday afternoon street mugging in the leafy Lakeview neighborhood, where a woman walking alone was attacked, pulled to the ground by thugs and robbed. The poor woman’s piercing screams were caught on a doorbell security camera. And those screams have cut deeply into Illinois politics and focused the people on the Democrat criminal justice centerpiece—the Safe-T Act signed and applauded by Gov. Pritzker.

      And to all this comes Chris Kempczinski, the CEO of McDonald’s Corp. who spoke at the Economic Club of Chicago luncheon and delivered a series of body to Mayor Lightfoot’s reelection campaign:

      The issue? Crime and her inability to handle it. Crime is up almost 40 percent in Chicago, though murder numbers have dropped slightly. Kempeczinski told his audience that violent crime makes it difficult to attract employees to Chicago.

      “Everywhere I go, I’m confronted by the same question. ‘What’s going on in Chicago?” Kempczinski said.

      “There is a general sense out there that our city is in crisis.”

      A spokesman for Chicago Mayor Lori Lightfoot had no immediate comment when contacted by the Wall Street Journal.

      No immediate comment Lori? What? Are you ill? That’s the Wall Street Journal calling, Madame Phallus Maximus. Business types read the Journal. For them to see Lightfoot in hiding invites negative judgement on her ability to handle the truth.

      But most still in Chicago have already made that judgement about her. We made it years ago, when she turned the city over twice to Black Lives Matter rioters and looters, and then endorsed the Soros prosecutor, Kim Foxx for re-election as Cook County State’s Attorney which was seen as an olive branch to BLM and other hard-left political actors.

      After Lightfoot endorsed Foxx and Foxx was re-elected–after the Jussie Smollett fiasco, after having gutted her office of hard minded prosecutors, I asked a longtime Democrat about it. He was a contemporary of the real original Mayor Daley, and I asked: By re-electing Foxx, what was the message the Cook County Democratic Party was sending?.

      “The message?” he said. “The message is get the (bleep) out.”

      Several large companies, including Citadel have left Chicago citing crime as a reason.

      Foxx is the protégé of Lightfoot’s rival, Cook County Board President Toni Preckwinkle, the chairman of the Cook County Democratic Party. Boss Toni is credited with shrinking the size of the Cook County Jail and protecting Foxx.

      Lightfoot had been going around town whispering that she regrets endorsing Foxx, but it was another example of her inability to lead. Yes, it was bad policy, since the mayor was still pretending she wanted a working relationship with her police rank-and-file that loathes Foxx.

      But it was also bad politics, the mark of an amateur who put her city’s safety at risk. The rookie mayor sent an unmistakable signal to her allies that she was willing to bend the knee to Boss Toni. The public picked up on it. And now she has few if any allies left.

      Pritzker is also on the defensive on crime. He pushed the controversial Safe-T Act that does away with cash bail at the behest of the Illinois Legislative Black Caucus and other leftists. Final debate in the Illinois House took place in the wee hours of the morning and legislators still hadn’t read the bill–I suppose not all have read it–though many knew police and prosecutors were adamantly opposed.

      The Safe-T Act was seen as Pritzker’s political gift from Illinois Democrats to the BLM rioters and other anti-law-enforcement political groups.

      A peace offering. His miscalculation? Of the 102 state’s attorneys in Illinois each representing a county, only two prosecutors support the Safe-T Act.

      One hundred Illinois county prosecutors consider Pritzker’s Safe-T Act to be dangerous to the public.

      And, before you allow partisan politics to get in the way of your analysis, remember that most victims of violent crime are black and Latino.

      The other day  Pritzker babbled on defensively as he often does in defending his Safe-T Act. He clumsily plays the race card to portray critics of the act as racists. The other day he tried a new cringeworthy tactic, this time trying to compare no cash bail for violent offenders with the plight of some poor woman jailed because she was in desperate need of diapers for her child.

      Pritzker said he and others are ““making sure that we’re also addressing the problem of a single mother who shoplifted diapers for her baby, who is put in jail and kept there for six months because she doesn’t have a couple of hundred dollars to pay for bail,” Pritzker said. “So that’s what the Safe-T Act is about. Are there changes, adjustments that need to be? Of course, and there have been adjustments made and there will continue to be. Laws are not immutable.”

      Diapers? Diapers, Gov. Commodius Maximus? Jean Valjean was said to have stolen a loaf of bread to feed his family. But the French didn’t have welfare or other government assistance. And welfare forms the bond between the Democrat Party and its minority partisans..

      Reporters just went along with him as they usually do, just like they go along with Lightfoot when she shrieks like the red queen of hearts from Alice-in-Wonderland.

      No one apparently bothered to ask Pritzker to produce the mother in his fantasy, the one who’d been kept in jail “for six months” for a $200 diaper “bill,” especially since Soros prosecutor Kim Foxx won’t prosecute shoplifting under a thousand dollars.

      And I don’t think anyone asked him to explain, in detail, about the changes that must be made to the no-bail provision he eagerly, and excitedly, signed into law.

      Pritzker and Lightfoot don’t really do much to address crime because the media already has their backs. They make pleasant urgent sounds about wanting to combat the rise in violent crime, but doing so would involve pushing for more arrests of violent criminals. And that would cost their politics since most violent offenders are black and brown, committing violence against black and brown, and it’s much easier to blame it all on “systemic racism.”

      So they make their urgent sounds, and they’re excused by rapidly fading left leaning corporate media, which has little if any credibility. Especially the newspapers. When media is in concert carrying your political water and defending your policies, the pressure is off.

      I know. I spent decades in the corporate media in Chicago that pretends it speaks truth to power, as long as the power isn’t of the left. Some are nice people who try to do a fair job,  but many are weak and afraid of others who may be more radical than they.

      It’s much easier for them to be political operatives masquerading as journalists. These are one-eyed jacks, and I’ve seen the other side of their face.

      But who wants to ask impolite questions about elected officials actually doing something to deal with violent crime? Who wants to demand they do something? Demanding that something get done is risky, like asking voters to listen to that woman scream from Lakeview. People might get upset. Their Twitter followers might call your editor or executive producer

      And many Democrats did become upset, demanding that some TV stations stop airing that TV spot known as “the scream” that vexes them so.

      In Chicago and the rest of Illinois, the political formula has worked for decades. As long as they’re backed by media,  And no one gets upset, except perhaps those victims of violent crime who are ignored, and those who are are concerned that they or their loved ones may become victims. They are dismissed and/or marginalized as racists.

      The political class hasn’t been compelled to care about these victims. And as long as the politicians are not held to account on the Safe-T Act and other broken policy nothing really changes.

      Have you ever heard this saying?  The beatings will continue until morale improves. No one seems to know who said this.

      But whoever it was, they understood Illinois and that city by the lake.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 18:20

    • Russia Transfers Old St. Petersburg Defense Missiles To Ukraine Front: Report
      Russia Transfers Old St. Petersburg Defense Missiles To Ukraine Front: Report

      Finland’s Yle broadcaster said in a lengthy investigative report issued Sunday that Russia’s military has taken the unprecedented step of moving old anti-aircraft missile systems to its captured regions of Ukraine amid an ongoing shortage of advanced weapons. 

      Finnish military expert Marko Eklund was cited in the report as saying at least four anti-aircraft missile installations which surround St. Petersburg had been “emptied of equipment” as of August and early September.

      S-300 file image: EPA/EFE

      The Yle report relies heavily on satellite imagery analysis which purports to show the transfers away from the Petersburg bases. 

      The Finnish expert explained “It is most likely that the equipment that has been removed is primarily from the old S-300 system.” Eklund further said that St. Petersburg air defense capabilities are still in tact given that all or most of the equipment moved included older, or less advanced technology:

      There has also been a significant transfer of equipment from a base southeast of St Petersburg—about 10 firing platforms as well as other vehicles.

      According to Eklund, in this case, new missile equipment may also have been removed, as the Russian armed forces said, that this regiment was using the newer S-400 anti-aircraft missile system, introduced about 15 years ago.

      This comes amid an avalanche of speculation in Western sources over the past months saying that after over a half-year of war in Ukraine, Russian defense ministry supplies – especially missiles – have been severely depleted. 

      Yle report: “The area of this 500th Anti-Aircraft Missile Regiment battery appears to be completely abandoned. Source: Google Earth Aug. 2021 and Planet Labs 2 Sept. 2022.” Before…

      After…

      Last month, Ukrainian intelligence claimed that Russia had no more than 45% of its missiles left, but this is unverified and interestingly Kiev gave the same estimate as early as May.

      There has also been much speculation that US and EU-led sanctions have had a great impact on disallowing Moscow from obtaining parts and necessary equipment needed to keep missile production on course.

      Via Yle

      In the new Finnish report, Eklund warned that older systems being sent to the front lines in Ukraine doesn’t bode well for civilians. “These old missiles are used for ground targets in such a way that the greatest damage seems to be done to civilians,” he said.

      Tyler Durden
      Mon, 09/19/2022 – 18:00

    Digest powered by RSS Digest